Sie sind auf Seite 1von 679

BZ5000 and BZSP Commands Manual

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004


Lucent Technologies - Proprietary This document contains proprietary information of Lucent Technologies and is not to be disclosed or used except in accordance with applicable agreements Copyright 2001 Lucent Technologies Unpublished and Not for Publication All Rights Reserved

Copyright 2001 by Lucent Technologies. All Rights Reserved.

This material is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries. It may not be reproduced, distributed, or altered in any fashion by any entity (either internal or external to Lucent Technologies), except in accordance with applicable agreements, contracts, or licensing, without the express written consent of the Customer Training and Information Products organization and the business management owner of the material.

Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this information product (IP) was complete and accurate at the time of printing. However, information is subject to change.

How to comment this document A feedback form is located right after this copyright page. Please send your comments and suggestions to: Lucent Technologies - Lucent Learning Rua Thomas Nielsen Jnior, 150 Parque Imperador - Campinas - SP - Brasil CEP: 13097-660 e-mail: rgabrielli@lucent.com

Fax: +55 19 3707-8321 - A/C: Rosngela Gabrielli

Trademarks Billdats is a registered trademark of Lucent Technologies. 5ESS is a registered trademark of Lucent Technologies. Acrobat Reader and Adobe are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Inc. Windows 95 and Windows 98 have their copyrights under domain of Microsoft Corporation. Unix is a registered trademark in the United States and in other countries, licensed exclusively by X/Open Company Limited. Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation. Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.

Quality Management System The Quality Management System (QMS) to access the Product Realization Center (PRC) of Lucent Technologies has been registered on ISO 9001 under Norwegian Scheme of Det Norke Veritas (DNV) since June 1993. ISO 9001 is an international standard of quality recognized by more than 90 countries worldwide. It is a quality model assured in project, development, production, installation and technical support.

Issue Notation The record of issue of this manual uses the notation XXX.XX. In this notation, the number on the left of the point, composed by three numeric digits, indicates the number of issues of the manual originated due to product changes, and the number on the right side of the point, composed by two numeric digits, indicates the number of minor changes (due to correction in the manual itself). Nevertheless, the issue originated due to changes of the product, that is, when the issue is generating an increment of the number on the left side of the point, its notation will be only XXX. When next, there are corrections of the manual itself, the issue will incorporate the portion on the right of the point, beginning at 01 (issue XXX.01), which will be incremented until there is a new change in the product. In this way, manuals in different languages with the same issue number on the left side of the point, will describe the product at the same status.

Lucent Technologies values your comments!


Lucent Technologies welcomes your comments on this information product. Your opinion is of great value and helps us to improve.

1.

Was the information product: Yes In the language of your choice? In the desired media (paper, CD-ROM, etc.)? Available when you needed it? Please provide any additional comments: No Not applicable

2.

Please rate the effectiveness of this information product: Excellent Ease of use Level of detail Readability and clarity Organization Completeness Technical accuracy Quality of translation Appearance More than satisfactory Satisfactory Less than satisfactory Unsatisfactory Not applicable

If your response to any of the above questions is Less than satisfactory or Unsatisfactory, please explain your rating.

3.

If you could change one thing about this information product, what would it be ?

4.

Please write any other comments about this information product:

Please complete the following if we may contact you for clarification or to address your concerns: Name: Company/organization Address: Email address: Job function: Date: Telephone number:

Please, send this form to Lucent Technologies - Lucent Learning Organization(see the address on previous page).

CONTENTS

Introduction

1-1

Overview.............................................................................................................................1-1 Commands Manual Purpose ...............................................................................................1-2 Commands Structure...........................................................................................................1-3 Merging Information...........................................................................................................1-6 Description of the Commands ............................................................................................1-8 Error Messages .................................................................................................................1-12 Internationalization ...........................................................................................................1-13
2 Off-line Commands 2-1

Overview.............................................................................................................................2-1 AT-AGENDA: Activate Agenda........................................................................................2-2 DS-AGENDA: Deactivate Agenda ....................................................................................2-3 IP-AGENDA: Query Agenda Schedule .............................................................................2-4 PR-AGENDA: Program Agenda ........................................................................................2-5 RP-AGENDA: Remove Agenda Schedule.........................................................................2-7 DSB-ALARM: Disable Exchange Alarms-Reception .......................................................2-8 ENA-ALARM: Enable Exchange Alarms-Reception ........................................................2-9 IT-CLACMD: Query Command Classification ...............................................................2-10

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

C O N T E N T S

iii

MD-CLACMD: Modify Command Classification ...........................................................2-11 EX-CMD: Run commands file .........................................................................................2-12 IT-COLLEC: Query Charging Counter Automatic Polling Log ......................................2-13 RV-COLLEC: Remove Charging Counter Automatic Polling Log .................................2-14 END-CON: Ends Connection with Exchange ..................................................................2-15 INI-CON: Make Connection to Exchange........................................................................2-16 END-CSR: End CSR Execution .......................................................................................2-17 IT-CSRCOM: Query CSR Communication Parameters...................................................2-18 MD-CSRCOM: Modify CSR Communication Parameters ..............................................2-19 IT-CSRHST: Query CSR Exchange Operation Log ........................................................2-22 RV-CSRHST: Remove CSR Exchange Operating Log ...................................................2-24 CR-EXC: Creates an Exchange in the Exchange Registry ...............................................2-25 IT-EXC: Query Exchange Registry ..................................................................................2-27 MD-EXC: Modify Exchange Registry .............................................................................2-28 SU-EXC: Delete Exchange from Registry .......................................................................2-30 IT-IDIOM: Query CSR Language ....................................................................................2-31 MD-IDIOM: Modify CSR Language ...............................................................................2-32 DSB-LOG: Disable CSR Command Log .........................................................................2-33 ENA-LOG: Enable CSR Command Log ..........................................................................2-34 IT-LOG: Query CSR Commands Log ..............................................................................2-35 PRT-LOG: Print CSR Commands Log.............................................................................2-36 RV-LOG: Remove CSR Command Log ..........................................................................2-37 IP-MACRO: Query Commands Macro Programming .....................................................2-38 PR-MACRO: Program Commands Macro .......................................................................2-39 RP-MACRO: Remove Command Macro Programming ..................................................2-40

C O N T E N T S iv

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-MESS: Query Exchange Message ...............................................................................2-41 CR-OPE: Create Operator ................................................................................................2-42 IT-OPE: Query Operator ..................................................................................................2-43 SU-OPE: Exclude Operator ..............................................................................................2-44 MD-OPEPAS: Change Operator Password......................................................................2-45 DSB-PAG: Disable Paging...............................................................................................2-46 ENA-PAG: Enable Paging................................................................................................2-47 DSB-PRT: Disable Printer................................................................................................2-48 ENA-PRT: Enable Printer ................................................................................................2-49 END-SESSIO: End Operating Session.............................................................................2-50 INI-SESSIO: Begin Operating Session ............................................................................2-51 AT-TDC: Activate Timeout..............................................................................................2-52 DS-TDC: Deactivate Timeout ..........................................................................................2-53 IT-TDC: Query Timeout...................................................................................................2-54 IT-URGALARM: Query Urgent Alarms .........................................................................2-55
3 On-line Commands 3-1

Overview.............................................................................................................................3-1 IT-ALARM: Query Current Alarms...................................................................................3-2 IP-ATN: Query Programmed Answering Terminal ...........................................................3-4 PR-ATN: Programming Answering Terminal....................................................................3-5 CR-AUTANS: Create Automatic Responder .....................................................................3-6 IT-AUTANS: Query Automatic Responder .......................................................................3-7 SU-AUTANS: Suppress Automatic Responder .................................................................3-8 CR-BIL: Create Biller.........................................................................................................3-9

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

C O N T E N T S v

IT-BIL: Query Biller.........................................................................................................3-10 MD-BIL: Modify Biller Parameters .................................................................................3-11 SU-BIL: Suppress Biller ...................................................................................................3-12 RE-BILCNF: Create Biller Configuration File.................................................................3-13 IT-BILHST: Query Charging Operating Log ...................................................................3-14 IT-BILOPP: Query Billing Operating Parameters............................................................3-16 MD-BILOPP: Modify Biller Operating Parameters .........................................................3-17 IT-BILSUP: Query Biller Supervision Result ..................................................................3-19 COP-BILSYS: Copy Billing Data ....................................................................................3-20 IT-BILSYS: Query Billing Data .......................................................................................3-21 REP-BILSYS: Store Call Billing Data .............................................................................3-25 RV-BILSYS: Remove Call Billing Data ..........................................................................3-26 CR-BOARD: Create Board...............................................................................................3-27 IT-BOARD: Query Board.................................................................................................3-30 SU-BOARD: Suppress Board...........................................................................................3-33 INI-BRISUP: Begin Supervision of BRI Interface...........................................................3-34 IT-BRISUP: Query BRI Interface Supervision Result .....................................................3-35 IT-CAL: Query Clock-Calendar .......................................................................................3-37 MD-CAL: Modify Clock-Calendar ..................................................................................3-38 AT-CALSUP: Activate Call Supervision .........................................................................3-39 DS-CALSUP: Deactivate Call Supervision......................................................................3-40 IP-CALSUP: Query Call Supervision Programming .......................................................3-41 IT-CALSUP: Query Call Supervision Log.......................................................................3-42 PR-CALSUP: Program Call Supervision .........................................................................3-45 RP-CALSUP: Remove Call Supervision Programming...................................................3-48

C O N T E N T S vi

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

RV-CALSUP: Remove Call Supervision Log..................................................................3-50 AT-CALTST: Activate Test Call Generation...................................................................3-51 DS-CALTST: Deactivate Test Call Generation ...............................................................3-52 IP-CALTST: Query Test Call Programming....................................................................3-53 PR-CALTST: Program Test Calls ....................................................................................3-54 RP-CALTST: Remove Test Call Programming ...............................................................3-58 IT-CHASSV: Query Supplementary Service Charging ...................................................3-62 MD-CHASSV: Modify Supplementary Service Charging...............................................3-64 IT-CHCL: Query Charging Class .....................................................................................3-66 MD-CHCL: Modify Billing Class ....................................................................................3-68 IT-CHM: Query Charging Modality.................................................................................3-71 MD-CHM: Modify Charging Modality............................................................................3-73 CR-CLA: Create Terminal Class......................................................................................3-75 IT-CLA: Query Terminal Class........................................................................................3-79 MD-CLA: Modify Terminal Class ...................................................................................3-80 SU-CLA: Suppress Terminal Class ..................................................................................3-83 CR-CLKSYNC: Create Synchronization Clock...............................................................3-84 IT-CLKSYNC: Query Synchronization Clock (1) ...........................................................3-85 IT-CLKSYNC: Query Synchronization Clock (2) ...........................................................3-86 SU-CLKSYNC: Suppress Synchronization Clock ...........................................................3-88 COP-CNF: Force Unit Reconfiguration ...........................................................................3-89 END-CNF: Conclude Exchange Configuration ...............................................................3-90 INI-CNF: Begin Configuring Exchange...........................................................................3-91 REP-CNF: Store Configuration Data ...............................................................................3-92 INI-COINBOX: Reset Payphone Coin Counting.............................................................3-94

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

C O N T E N T S vii

IT-COINBOX: Query Payphone Coin Counting..............................................................3-95 CR-CPCT: Create PABX Group ......................................................................................3-97 IT-CPCT: Query PABX Group ........................................................................................3-99 MD-CPCT: Modify PABX Group..................................................................................3-100 SU-CPCT: Suppress PABX Group.................................................................................3-102 IT-CSO: Query Carrier Selection Code ..........................................................................3-103 MD-CSO: Modify Carrier Selection Code .....................................................................3-104 CR-CSRATD: Create CSR Answering Number ............................................................3-105 IT-CSRATD: Query CSR Answering Number ..............................................................3-106 MD-CSRATD: Modify CSR Answering Number..........................................................3-107 SU-CSRATD: Suppress CSR Answering Number.........................................................3-108 CR-CSRCAL: Create CSR Calling Number ..................................................................3-109 IT-CSRCAL: Query CSR Calling Number ....................................................................3-110 MD-CSRCAL: Modify CSR Calling Number................................................................3-111 SU-CSRCAL: Suppress CSR Calling Number...............................................................3-112 IT-CSRFUNC: Query Information of the BZ-VIEW Hardware Key ............................3-113 MD-CSRFUNC: Modify Information of the BZ-VIEW Hardware Key........................3-114 IT-CTRY: Query Country...............................................................................................3-116 MD-CTRY: Modify Country..........................................................................................3-117 IT-CUG: Query Closed User Group ...............................................................................3-118 MD-CUG: Modify Closed User Group ..........................................................................3-119 CR-DTMF: Create DTMF Receiver ...............................................................................3-120 IT-DTMF: Query DTMF Receiver Status ......................................................................3-122 SU-DTMF: Suppress DTMF Receiver ...........................................................................3-124 MD-DTMFSTE: Modify DTMF Receiver Status ..........................................................3-126

C O N T E N T S viii

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-E1: Query Operational State of the Link ...................................................................3-128 MD-E1STE: Modify the Operational State of the Link .................................................3-130 IT-ENV: Query Environment .........................................................................................3-131 MD-ENV: Modify Environment ....................................................................................3-132 IT-EXCCOM: Query Exchange Serial Communication Ports .......................................3-134 MD-EXCCOM: Modify Exchange Serial Communication Ports ..................................3-135 IT-EXCHST: Query Exchange Operating Log ..............................................................3-139 RV-EXCHST: Clear Exchange Operating Log ..............................................................3-141 IT-EXCIP: Query Exchange IP address .........................................................................3-142 MD-EXCIP: Modify Exchange IP address.....................................................................3-143 MD-EXCLOC: Modify Exchange Site Code .................................................................3-144 IT-EXCOPP: Query Exchange Operating Parameters ...................................................3-145 MD-EXCOPP: Modify Exchange Operating Parameters...............................................3-147 MD-EXCPAS: Modify Exchange Access Password......................................................3-150 CR-EXCPRE: Create Exchange Prefix ..........................................................................3-151 IT-EXCPRE: Query Exchange Prefix ............................................................................3-152 MD-EXCPRE: Modify Exchange Prefix........................................................................3-153 SU-EXCPRE: Suppress Exchange Prefix.......................................................................3-154 IT-EXCTME: Query Exchange Timing .........................................................................3-155 MD-EXCTME: Modify Exchange Timing.....................................................................3-157 CR-EXTALARM: Create External Alarm Detection Point ...........................................3-174 IP-EXTALARM: Query External Alarm Message Programming .................................3-176 IT-EXTALARM: Query External Alarm Detection Point .............................................3-178 RP-EXTALARM: Remove External Alarm Message Programming.............................3-180 SU-EXTALARM: Suppress External Alarm Detection Point .......................................3-182

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

C O N T E N T S ix

AT-EXTEM: Activate External Alarm Output Point .....................................................3-183 DS-EXTEM: Deactivate External Alarm Output Point..................................................3-184 IT-EXTEM: Query External Alarm Output Point ..........................................................3-185 AT-FAISUP: Activate Fault Supervision .......................................................................3-186 DS-FAISUP: Deactivating Fault Supervision.................................................................3-187 IP-FAISUP: Query Fault Supervision Programming .....................................................3-188 PR-FAISUP: Program Fault Supervision .......................................................................3-190 MD-FUNC: Modify information on the Hardware Key of the exchange features.........3-193 IT-GRPTRK: Query the state of circuit group................................................................3-196 CR-GRT: Create Route Group........................................................................................3-198 IT-GRT: Query Route Group..........................................................................................3-200 MD-GRT: Modify Route Group .....................................................................................3-201 SU-GRT: Suppress Route Group....................................................................................3-203 IT-HARDKEY: Query information of Hardware Keys connected to switch.................3-204 CR-HOL: Create Holiday ...............................................................................................3-206 IT-HOL: Query Holidays................................................................................................3-207 SU-HOL: Suppress Holiday ...........................................................................................3-208 IT-INT: Query Engaged Subscriber or Trunk.................................................................3-209 AT-INTTST: Activate Subscriber Interface Test ...........................................................3-211 DS-INTTST: Deactivate Interface Test ..........................................................................3-215 IP-INTTST: Query Interface Test Programming............................................................3-216 IT-INTTST: Query Interface Test Result .......................................................................3-217 PR-INTTST: Program Line Test ....................................................................................3-221 RP-INTTST: Remove Interface Test Programming .......................................................3-222 CR-JMA: Create Announcement Machine Junction ......................................................3-223

C O N T E N T S x

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-JMA: Query Announcement Machine Junctions.......................................................3-225 SU-JMA: Suppress Announcement Machine Junction ..................................................3-227 AT-JMAREC: Activate Announcement Machine Message Recording .........................3-228 END-JMAREC: End Announcement Machine Message Recording .............................3-230 INI-JMAREC: Begin Announcement Machine Message Recording .............................3-231 MD-JMASTE: Modify Junction Operating Status .........................................................3-232 INI-LANSUP: Initiate Local Network Supervision .......................................................3-234 IT-LANSUP: Query Local Network Supervision ..........................................................3-235 AT-LINTST: Activate Subscriber Line Test ..................................................................3-237 DS-LINTST: Deactivate Subscriber Line Test...............................................................3-241 IP-LINTST: Query Line Test Programming .................................................................3-242 IT-LINTST: Query Line Test Result ..............................................................................3-243 PR-LINTST: Program Line Test ....................................................................................3-247 RP-LINTST: Remove Line Test Programming..............................................................3-248 CR-LNK: Create Link (1)...............................................................................................3-249 CR-LNK: Create Link (2)...............................................................................................3-251 IT-LNK: Query Link (1).................................................................................................3-252 IT-LNK: Query Link (2).................................................................................................3-253 SU-LNK: Suppress Link (1) ...........................................................................................3-254 SU-LNK: Suppress Link (2) ..........................................................................................3-255 MD-LNKSTE: Modify Link Status (1) ..........................................................................3-256 MD-LNKSTE: Modify Link Status (2) ..........................................................................3-257 AT-LNKTST: Activate Exchange Link Test..................................................................3-258 IT-LOGEXC: Query Exchange Command Log .............................................................3-260 RV-LOGEXC: Remove Exchange Command Log ........................................................3-262

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

C O N T E N T S xi

AT-LOOPSUP: Activate Subscriber Loop Supervision.................................................3-263 DS-LOOPSUP: Deactivate Subscriber Loop Supervision .............................................3-264 CR-LSS: Create Special Local Service...........................................................................3-265 IT-LSS: Query Special Local Service.............................................................................3-267 SU-LSS: Suppress Special Local Service.......................................................................3-268 IT-MBX: Query Voice Mail Type ..................................................................................3-269 MD-MBX: Modify Voice Mail Type .............................................................................3-270 IT-MCB: Query B Code Matrix .....................................................................................3-271 MD-MCB: Modify B Code Matrix.................................................................................3-273 IT-MCT: Query Malicious Call Trace ............................................................................3-275 REP-MCT: Malicious Call Trace Report........................................................................3-277 RV-MCT: Remove Malicious Call Trace.......................................................................3-278 DUMP-MEM: List Memory Dump ................................................................................3-280 IT-MEX: Query Business Hours Modality.....................................................................3-282 MD-MEX: Modify Business Hours Modality ................................................................3-283 CR-MFC: Create MFC Sender/Receiver ........................................................................3-284 IT-MFC: Query MFC Sender/Receiver Status ...............................................................3-286 SU-MFC: Suppress MFC Sender/Receiver ....................................................................3-288 MD-MFCSTE: Modify MFC Sender/Receiver Status ...................................................3-289 IT-MFT: Query MFC Sender/Receive Value .................................................................3-291 COP-MSGDSP: Copy Existing Messages from File......................................................3-292 RE-MSGDSP: Record Messages to File.........................................................................3-293 INI-MTP2SUP: Initiate MTP Level 2 Supervision ........................................................3-294 IT-MTP2SUP: Query MTP Level 2 Supervision Result ................................................3-295 IT-NDPRE: Query Number of Digits of the Exchange Prefix .......................................3-297

C O N T E N T S xii

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-NDPRE: Modify Number of Digits of the Exchange Prefix ..................................3-298 CR-OCE: Create Operator Position................................................................................3-299 IT-OCE: Query Operator Position..................................................................................3-300 SU-OCE: Suppress Operator Position ............................................................................3-301 IT-OPC: Query Originating Signaling Point Code.........................................................3-302 MD-OPC: Modify Originating Signaling Point Code ....................................................3-303 IT-OPPSYNC: Query Exchange Synchronization Parameters ......................................3-305 MD-OPPSYNC: Modify Exchange Synchronization Parameters..................................3-306 AT-ORP: Activate Originating Routing Plan.................................................................3-308 COP-ORP: Copy Originating Routing Plan ...................................................................3-309 END-ORP: Conclude Changing Originating Routing Plan............................................3-310 INI-ORP: Begin Changing Originating Routing Plan ....................................................3-311 IT-ORP: Query Originating Routing Plan ......................................................................3-312 MD-ORP: Modify Originating Routing Plan .................................................................3-314 IP-PEMALA: Query Alarm Settings to External Alarm Output Points.........................3-319 PR-PEMALA: Program Alarms to External Alarm Output Points ................................3-320 DS-PERSUP: Deactivate Performance Supervision.......................................................3-322 IP-PERSUP: Query Performance Supervision Programming ........................................3-323 IT-PERSUP: Query Performance Supervision Result....................................................3-324 PR-PERSUP: Program Performance Supervision ..........................................................3-333 REP-PERSUP: Performance Supervision Report...........................................................3-335 RP-PERSUP: Remove Performance Supervision Programming....................................3-336 CR-PLAN: Create Switching Plan .................................................................................3-337 IT-PLAN: Query Switching Plan ...................................................................................3-338 SU-PLAN: Suppress Switching Plan..............................................................................3-339

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

C O N T E N T S xiii

COP-PRG: Copy Control Program.................................................................................3-340 ET-PRG: Replace Control Program................................................................................3-341 INI-PRISUP: Initiate PRI Interface Supervision ............................................................3-342 IT-PRISUP: Query PRI Interface Supervision Result ....................................................3-343 CR-PS: Create Peripheral Stage......................................................................................3-345 IT-PS: Query Peripheral Stages ......................................................................................3-347 SU-PS: Suppress Peripheral Stage..................................................................................3-348 IT-RECAL: Query Call Rerouting Data .........................................................................3-349 MD-RECAL: Modify Call Rerouting Data ...................................................................3-350 CR-REGDN: Create Register Direct Number ................................................................3-352 IT-REGDN: Query Register Direct Number ..................................................................3-353 MD-REGDN: Modify Register Direct Number..............................................................3-354 SU-REGDN: Suppress Register Direct Number ............................................................3-355 IT-REGSUP: Query Processor Register .........................................................................3-356 EX-RESET: Reset Unit Processor ..................................................................................3-358 CR-ROBO: Create Line Tester Robot ............................................................................3-359 IT-ROBO: Query Line Tester Robot ..............................................................................3-360 SU-ROBO: Suppress Line Tester Robot ........................................................................3-361 CR-ROUT: Create Route ................................................................................................3-362 IT-ROUT: Query Route ..................................................................................................3-368 MD-ROUT: Modify Route .............................................................................................3-371 SU-ROUT: Suppress Route ............................................................................................3-375 EX-RSTCTF: Clean Charging Counters ........................................................................3-376 IT-RTOSUB: Query Subscriber Originating Restriction ...............................................3-377 MD-RTOSUB: Modify Subscriber Originating Restriction...........................................3-378

C O N T E N T S xiv

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-SCC: Query Subscriber Charging Counter................................................................3-379 REP-SCC: Store Subscriber Charging Counters ............................................................3-382 AT-SEQSCR: Activate the CLI Screening.....................................................................3-383 DS-SEQSCR: Deactivate the CLI Screening .................................................................3-384 IP-SEQSCR: Display the Programmed Sequences in the CLI Screening ......................3-385 IT-SEQSCR: Display the CLI Screening Attributes ......................................................3-386 MD-SEQSCR: Modify the CLI Screening Attributes ....................................................3-387 PR-SEQSCR: Program the CLI Screening Sequences ...................................................3-388 RP-SEQSCR: Remove the Programmed Sequences from the CLI Screening ...............3-389 IT-SLIDTR: Query Digital Trunk Slippage Rate ...........................................................3-390 IT-SNLISUP: Query ISUP Signaling .............................................................................3-393 MD-SNLISUP: Modify ISUP Signaling ........................................................................3-396 IT-SNLR2: Query R2 Signaling .....................................................................................3-399 MD-SNLR2: Modify R2 Signaling ................................................................................3-400 IT-SPEDIG: Interrogate Special Digits of the Virtual PBX...........................................3-403 MD-SPEDIG: Modify Special Digits of the Virtual PABX...........................................3-404 IP-SPS: Query Semi-Permanent Switching Programming.............................................3-406 PR-SPS: Program Semi-Permanent Switching...............................................................3-407 RP-SPS: Erase Semi-Permanent Switching Programming.............................................3-410 IT-SRV: Query Supplementary Services Access Code..................................................3-411 MD-SRV: Modify Supplementary Services Access Code .............................................3-413 CR-SS7LNK: Create Common Channel Signaling Link ...............................................3-415 IT-SS7LNK: Query Common Channel Signaling Link .................................................3-417 MD-SS7LNK: Modify Common Channel Signaling Link Status ..................................3-419 SU-SS7LNK: Suppress Common Channel Signaling Link............................................3-422

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

C O N T E N T S xv

IT-SS7ROUT: Query Common Channel Signaling System Route ................................3-423 MD-SS7ROUT: Modify Number 7 Signaling System Route.........................................3-424 CR-SS7SLS: Create Common Channel Signaling Link Set...........................................3-425 IT-SS7SLS: Query Common Channel Signaling Link Set.............................................3-426 MD-SS7SLS: Modify Common Channel Signaling Link Set ........................................3-429 SU-SS7SLS: Suppress Common Channel Signaling Link Set .......................................3-432 AT-SS7SUP: Activate Common Channel Signaling Supervision..................................3-433 DS-SS7SUP: Common Channel Signaling Supervision.................................................3-434 IT-SS7SUP: Query Channel Signaling Supervision Result............................................3-435 RV-SS7SUP: Remove Channel Signaling Supervision Log ..........................................3-437 IP-SSV: Query Supplementary Service Programming ...................................................3-438 PR-SSV: Program Supplementary Services ...................................................................3-441 RP-SSV: Remove Supplementary Service Programming ..............................................3-444 IT-SSVSUB: Query Supplementary Service Enabling Status........................................3-446 MD-SSVSUB: Modify Supplementary Service Enabling Status ...................................3-449 CR-SUB: Create Subscriber (1)......................................................................................3-452 CR-SUB: Create Subscriber (2)......................................................................................3-456 IT-SUB: Query Subscriber..............................................................................................3-459 MD-SUB: Modify Subscriber.........................................................................................3-464 SU-SUB: Suppress Subscriber........................................................................................3-467 INC-SUBCRD: Increment Subscriber Credits ...............................................................3-468 INI-SUBCRD: Initialize Subscriber Credit ....................................................................3-469 IT-SUBCRD: Query Subscriber Credit ..........................................................................3-470 MD-SUBSTE: Modify Subscriber Operating Status ......................................................3-472 INI-SYNCMCE: Initialize MCE Synchronism Parameter Supervision.........................3-474

C O N T E N T S xvi

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-SYNCMCE: Query MCE Synchronism Parameter Supervision...............................3-475 CR-SYNCREF: Create Synchronization Reference.......................................................3-477 IT-SYNCREF: Query Synchronization Reference.........................................................3-479 MD-SYNCREF: Modify Synchronization References...................................................3-480 SU-SYNCREF: Suppress Synchronization Reference ...................................................3-481 IT-SYNCSUP: Query Majority Vote Status...................................................................3-482 CR-TER: Create Terminal ..............................................................................................3-485 IT-TER: Query Terminal ................................................................................................3-487 MD-TER: Modify Terminal ...........................................................................................3-489 SU-TER: Suppress Terminal ..........................................................................................3-494 MD-TERSTE: Modify Terminal Status .........................................................................3-495 IT-TON: Query Exchange Control Tones ......................................................................3-496 MD-TON: Modify Exchange Control Tones..................................................................3-498 DS-TRASUP: Deactivate Traffic Supervision ...............................................................3-500 IP-TRASUP: Query Traffic Supervision Programming.................................................3-501 IT-TRASUP: Query Traffic Supervision Result ............................................................3-502 PR-TRASUP: Program Traffic Supervision...................................................................3-510 REP-TRASUP: Traffic Supervision Report ...................................................................3-512 RP-TRASUP: Remove Traffic Supervision Programming ............................................3-514 CR-TRK: Create Trunk ..................................................................................................3-515 IT-TRK: Query Trunk Data............................................................................................3-519 MD-TRK: Modify Trunk Data .......................................................................................3-524 SU-TRK: Suppress Trunk...............................................................................................3-526 IT-TRKCHC: Query Trunk Charging Counter ..............................................................3-528 IT-TRKINT: Query Operational State of the Link.........................................................3-531

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

C O N T E N T S xvii

MD-TRKINT: Modify the Operational State of the Link...............................................3-533 MD-TRKSTE: Modify Trunk Operating Status .............................................................3-536 CR-UNIT: Create Exchange Unit ...................................................................................3-538 DS-UNIT: Deactivate Exchange Unit.............................................................................3-540 IT-UNIT: Query Exchange Installed Units n..................................................................3-541 SU-UNIT: Suppress Unit................................................................................................3-545 CR-V5INT: Create V5 Interface.....................................................................................3-546 IT-V5INT: Query V5 Interface.......................................................................................3-547 MD-V5INT: Modify V5 Interface ..................................................................................3-548 SU-V5INT: Suppress V5 Interface .................................................................................3-550 CR-V5LNK: Create V5 Signaling Link .........................................................................3-551 IT-V5LNK: Query V5 Signaling Link ...........................................................................3-554 MD-V5LNK: Modify V5 Signaling Link.......................................................................3-556 SU-V5LNK: Suppress V5 Signaling Link......................................................................3-557 IT-VER: Query Version of CSR and Switching Unit Control Programs .......................3-558 CR-VIB: Create Virtual Extension .................................................................................3-560 IT-VIB: Query Virtual Extension ...................................................................................3-562 MD-VIB: Modify Virtual Extension ..............................................................................3-563 SU-VIB: Suppress Virtual Extension .............................................................................3-564 CR-VPG: Create Virtual PABX Group ..........................................................................3-565 IT-VPG: Query Virtual PABX Group ............................................................................3-567 MD-VPG: Modify Virtual PABX Group Data ...............................................................3-568 SU-VPG: Suppress Virtual PABX Group ......................................................................3-571 CR-WAN: Create configuration for external access to the billing unit..........................3-572 IT-WAN: Query configuration for external access to the billing unit............................3-574

C O N T E N T S xviii

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-WAN: Modify configuration for external access to the billing unit .......................3-575
4 Charging Counters Collection 4-1

Overview.............................................................................................................................4-1 Introduction.........................................................................................................................4-2 Opening the Collect window ..............................................................................................4-4 Menu Localidades (Localities) ...........................................................................................4-5 Menu Lists of collect ..........................................................................................................4-6 Menu Password...................................................................................................................4-7 Preparing the collection ......................................................................................................4-8 Using the Collect ................................................................................................................4-9

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

C O N T E N T S xix

Introduction

Overview
Purpose Concepts and tips for this manual use.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

1-1

Commands Manual Purpose

Introduction

Commands Manual Purpose


The Commands Manual describes all the BZ5000 and BZSP commands used in communications between operators and supervision equipment, defining the Commands Language structure and describing the function, input format and output format of each of this language commands. Lucent exchanges can be supervised either locally or remotely through the REMOTE SUPERVISION CENTER (CSR), which allows operating, supervising and maintaining a group of exchanges without the need of sending personnel to each exchange installation site.

1-2

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Commands Structure

Introduction

Commands Structure
Each command in the CSR Commands Language has a structure and a meaning. The set of rules-defining the commands structure makes up the Commands Language Syntax, which was designed according to ITU-T Recommendations Z.301 and Z.341 - Man Machine Language (MML). Command A command consists of a code, defining the action to be carried out, and a block of parameters specifying additional information required to carry out that action. Some commands require no parameters, consisting merely of the respective code. The command code is separated from the parameter block by a : (colon). The parameters of a block are internally separated by a , (comma). The command is terminated by a ; (semicolon).
CR-EXTALARM : PDT = xx-xx-xx, ASE = xx [, TME = xxxxx ] ; \___________/ \_______________________________________/ code parameters

To expedite inputting system commands, the : separator may be omitted. The end-of-command indicator ; may be omitted from keyboard-input commands but must be included in commands contained in a commands file.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

1-3

Commands Structure

Introduction

Command Code The command code consists of a verb and a name, in mnemonic form, separated by a - (dash), or, optionally, by a blank space. The verbs used in the Commands Language are listed below:
AT COP CR DSB DS EX END ENA INI Activate Copy Create Disable Deactivate Run End Enable Initiate IP IT MD PR RV REP RP SU ET Query programming Query Modify Program Delete Generate report Delete programming Suppress Change

Parameters The additional information required to carry out a command is specified by means of parameters. A parameter consists of two parts: its name, which identifies it, and its argument, containing the datum to be processed. The name and argument are separated by a = (equal). Some parameters do not include an argument, the so-called YES or NO parameters. When the parameter name is specified, a YES value is associated to its argument; and when omitted, NO will be associated. As parameters are defined by their names, they can be specified in any order in the command. Parameter Name The parameter name is a mnemonic identifying the type and structure of the information contained in its argument. Some parameter names are listed below:
SUB TER CLA subscriber directory number terminal number terminal class

Parameter Argument The parameter argument consists of the datum to be processed when running the command. The argument may consist of one or more information units, called single or compound arguments, respectively. Information units in a compound argument are separated by a - (dash).
SUB = 1123 TER = 2-10-5

single argument compound argument in the uni-brd-cir format, where: unit number terminal board number

uni brd

1-4

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Commands Structure

Introduction

cir

board circuit number

Information Units Each information unit is defined by its type and range of valid values. The type may be, for instance, a decimal number, a hexadecimal number or an identifier. Designation NAGD UNI CLA Type scheduling the Agenda exchange unit terminal class Value decimal number (1..10) decimal number (1..16) decimal number (1..128)

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

1-5

Merging Information

Introduction

Merging Information
To simplify inputting commands, the language allows some commands to use a parameter argument that actually consists of a list of arguments. The rules for merging arguments and examples of their application are given below. Merging Single Several single arguments may be grouped in a parameter, Arguments separated by &. For instance, specifying 5&10&13 argument corresponds to specifying each of the 5, 10 and 13 arguments. The & separator can optionally be replaced by a blank space. If the parameter arguments form a numeric sequence, they may be specified in a simpler manner, merely stating the first and last arguments of the sequence, separated by &&. For instance, specifying 5&&10 argument corresponds to specifying each of the 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10 arguments. Merging single arguments is exemplified below for the CR-CPCT (Create PABX Group) command. The command shown in (1) is equivalent to the commands sequence given in (2).
(1) (2) CR-CPCT CR-CPCT CR-CPCT CR-CPCT : : : : KEY KEY KEY KEY = = = = 1200, 1200, 1200, 1200, SUB SUB SUB SUB = = = = 1201 & 1207 & 1209; 1201; 1207; 1209;

Merging Compound Several compound arguments may by specified in a single Arguments parameter, separated by &-. For instance, specifying 1-5-3&1-7-2 argument corresponds to specifying each of the 1-5-3 and 1-7-2 arguments. The &- separator may optionally be replaced by a blank space. If just the last information unit of the compound arguments is different and if they consist of a numeric sequence, then the arguments may be merged by specifying the first argument completely and just the last information unit of the last argument, separated by &&-". For instance, specifying 1-72&&-7 argument corresponds to specifying each of the 1-7-2, 1-7-3, 1-7-4, 1-7-5, 1-7-6 and 1-7-7 arguments.

The same applies to each information unit in compound arguments. If any unit is a numeric sequence, the separator &&- may be used for each one. For instance, to specify argument 1&&-2-7-6&&-8 corresponds to specifying each

1-6

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Merging Information

Introduction

argument 1-7-6, 1-7-7, 1-7-8, 2-7-6, 2-7-7 and 2-7-8. Merged compound arguments are exemplified below for the MD-SUBSTE (Modify Subscriber Operating Status) command. The command entered via merged arguments, as shown in (1), corresponds to the commands sequence shown in (2).
(1) (2) MD-SUBSTE MD-SUBSTE MD-SUBSTE MD-SUBSTE MD-SUBSTE MD-SUBSTE MD-SUBSTE MD-SUBSTE : : : : : : : : TER TER TER TER TER TER TER TER = = = = = = = = 1-4-16 & 1&&-2-10-4&&-6, STE = BLK; 1-4-16, STE = BLK; 1-10-4, STE = BLK; 1-10-5, STE = BLK; 1-10-6, STE = BLK; 2-10-4, STE = BLK; 2-10-5, STE = BLK; 2-10-6, STE = BLK;

Blank Spaces and Blank spaces between command elements are ignored when Comments running a command. The use of comments is only allowed in commands files and is not acknowledged for commands input via the keyboard. A comment is any character placed between the end of command indicator ;, and the end of the line in the commands file. To insert a line of comments in a commands file, simply begin it with character ;.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

1-7

Description of the Commands

Introduction

Description of the Commands


Commands are listed alphabetically, ordered according to the mnemonic of the command code. A command description may consist of the following: Title Compatibility Input Format Parameter Output Format Remarks

The description of each parameter is included in the hypertext. Title The title consists of the command code and name, followed by a brief description of its function. Compatibility Compatibility indicates the functionality of the commands, considering the existing control programs. The following examples illustrate the compatibility tables. Example 1: Compatibility table of the command CR-LSS.
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

In this example, we observe that the command CR-LSS is valid for exchanges equipped with control program SOF 98119 A1 or higher, SOF 98158 A1 or higher, LPN109253856.001 or higher, LPN109253864.001 or higher or LPN109232249.001 or higher, LPN109256842.001 or higher, LPN109256826.001 or higher, LPN109256834.001 or higher.

1-8

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Description of the Commands

Introduction

Example 2: Compatibility table of the command MD-ENV.


SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

In this example, we observe that the command MD-ENV is valid for exchanges equipped with control program SOF 98119 A1 or higher, SOF 98158 A1 or higher, LPN109253856.001 or higher, LPN109253864.001 or higher LPN109256826.001 or higher, LPN109256834.001 or higher. We can also observe that this command is not valid for exchanges equipped with control program LPN109232249 or LPN109256842. Input Format The several command input formats are described with some special characters that indicate mandatory, optional or alternative command parameters. Optional parameters are given in brackets ([ and ]), and may or not be specified at command input. Alternative parameters are given in braces ({ and }) and separated by |. Only one of the alternative parameters in the list shown between braces must be specified at command input. This combination of brackets and braces is used to present the several command input formats in a compact manner. The following example illustrates the description of the commands Input Format. The description of the input formats of the IT-SUB (Query Subscriber) command is provided in (1). The six different input formats valid for this command are given in (2), according to the description provided in (1).
(1) (2) IT-SUB [ = xxx | IT-SUB : IT-SUB : IT-SUB : IT-SUB : IT-SUB : IT-SUB ; : { SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx | TER = xx-xx-xx | STE CLA = xxx | SNL = xxx } ]; SUB = 0001 ; TER = 2-12-6 ; STE = BLK ; CLA = 02 ; SNL = DEC ;

In the Input Format description, each parameter of the command is indicated by its name and argument. Single arguments are indicated by a sequence of "x, giving the maximum number of characters that may be used in the parameter argument. A list of arguments is indicated by &..&, as shown in the following example:
IT-SUB : TER = 1-3-14&..&8-16-1;

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

1-9

Description of the Commands

Introduction

Parameter The description of each command parameter consists of the following information: Parameter name; Parameter meaning; Set of arguments valid for the parameter; Control Program compatibility (only for new parameters).

The set of arguments valid for a numeric parameter is specified in a (li..ls) format, where li is the lower limit value and ls is the upper limit of the parameter. Some parameters present several limits options, depending on the Control Program version. The example below illustrate this fact:
CLA

Terminal class (1..n), where n can be:


n 32 128 SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249 LPN109256842 LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

In this example, we observe that the parameter CLA presents two options of upper limit (32 or 128). The upper limit n = 32 is available for exchanges equipped with control program SOF 98119 A1 or higher, LPN109253856.001 or higher, LPN109232249.001 or higher, LPN109256842.001 or higher or LPN109256826.001 or higher. The upper limit n = 128 is available for exchanges equipped with control program SOF 98158 A1 or higher, LPN109253864.001 or higher, LPN109256834.001 or higher.. When the parameter is not available for all versions of control program, a Compatibility item is inserted, according to the example below:

1-10

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Description of the Commands

Introduction

ENV
Operating Environment of the Exchange: CS Central Stage PS1 Peripheral Stage 1 PS2 Peripheral Stage 2 PS3 Peripheral Stage 3 PS4 Peripheral Stage 4 PS5 Peripheral Stage 5 PS6 Peripheral Stage 6 . . . . PSn Peripheral Stage n The number of Peripheral Stages, which can be programmed on the exchange, varies from 1 to n:
n 32 64 SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109256826 LPN109256834 LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249 LPN109256842 LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

In this example, we observe that the parameter ENV is valid for exchanges equipped with control program SOF 98119 A1 or higher, SOF 98158 A1 or higher, LPN109253856.001 or higher, LPN109253864.001 or higher LPN109256826.001 or higher, LPN109256834.001 or higher. We can also observe that this parameter is not valid for exchanges equipped with control program LPN109232249 or LPN109256842. Output Format The Output Format description is presented only for query-type commands, indicating the data displayed when the command is successfully run. In the case of the remaining commands, message OK is displayed for a successful command run. In the event of an error in command interpretation or execution, the respective error message will be displayed Remarks The remarks provide eventual additional information on the command, such as: Explanations on parameter compatibility; More details on parameter arguments; Reference to prerequisite or associated commands; Explanations on procedures for executing commands.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

1-11

Error Messages

Introduction

Error Messages
The error messages have been designed to be clear and selfevident, so that the operator will not have to consult other sources to understand their meaning.

1-12

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Internationalization

Introduction

Internationalization
The CSR software is available in three languages: Portuguese, English, Spanish and Russian. When installed, CSR software has Portuguese as its standard language. In order to change it into Spanish or English, the user should run the command MD-IDIOM.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

1-13

Off-line Commands

Overview
Purpose List the commands, which can be run without requiring CSR to be connected to a switch.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

2-1

AT-AGENDA: Activate Agenda

Off-line Commands

AT-AGENDA: Activate Agenda


This command is used to activate the Agenda.
Input Format
AT-AGENDA ;

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

It is recommended to enable logging the commands run via the Agenda, through the ENALOG command. An active Agenda icon will be displayed on the status bar. If the Agenda is not active, no scheduled activities will be carried out in the scheduled time.

2-2

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

DS-AGENDA: Deactivate Agenda

Off-line Commands

DS-AGENDA: Deactivate Agenda


This command is used to deactivate running the Agenda.
Input Format
DS-AGENDA ;

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

2-3

IP-AGENDA: Query Agenda Schedule

Off-line Commands

IP-AGENDA: Query Agenda Schedule


This command is used to display the Agenda scheduling.
Input Format
IP-AGENDA [: NAGD = xx ];

Parameter

NAGD
Agenda schedule number (1..100)

Output Format

If the NAGD parameter is specified, the date or periodicity, the time and the commands file associated with the selected schedule will be displayed in the following format:
NAGD = xx { DAT = xx-xx-xx | DAY = xxx&..&xxx } HOU = xx-xx CMD = xx..xx

If the NAGD parameter is not specified, the date or periodicity, the time and the commands file associated with all Agenda schedules are displayed in the following format:
NAGD = xx { . . . NAGD = xx { DAT = xx-xx-xx | DAY = xxx&..&xxx } HOU = xx-xx CMD = xx..xx . . . . . . DAT = xx-xx-xx | DAY = xxx&..&xxx } HOU = xx-xx CMD = xx..xx

The status of schedules already run is displayed on the right of HOU parameter. In schedules specifying the DAY parameter, the date of the last run of the commands file will be displayed, in brackets, on the right of the schedule status.
Remarks

1.

The statuses of Agenda schedules are scheduled and concluded.

2-4

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

PR-AGENDA: Program Agenda

Off-line Commands

PR-AGENDA: Program Agenda


This command is used to include a schedule in the Agenda, specifying its date or periodicity and time to execute a command or commands file.
Input Format
PR-AGENDA: NAGD = xxx, { CMD = "xx..xx" | FIL = "xx..xx" }, [ { DAT = xx-xx-xx | DAY = xxx&..&xxx }, ] HOU = xx[-xx] ;

Parameters

NAGD
Agenda schedule number (1..100)

CMD
Command (up to 255 alphanumeric characters, between quotation marks or apostrophes)

FIL
File name in the [drive:] [directory] filename format drive drive (A, B or C) containing the disk where the file is stored in (if omitted, the current drive will be accessed) directory name of the directory containing the file (up to 63 alphanumeric characters; if omitted, the current directory will be accessed) filename name of the file (up to 8 alphanumeric characters)

DAT
Date in the yy-mm-dd format: yy year (00..99) mm month (01..12) dd day (01..31)

DAY
Weekday: SUN Sunday MON Monday TUE Tuesday WED Wednesday THU Thursday FRI Friday SAT Saturday

HOU
Time in the ho[-mi] format: ho hour (00..23) mi minute (00..59) (optional)

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

2-5

PR-AGENDA: Program Agenda

Off-line Commands

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

If DAT and DAY parameters are not specified, the command will run every day of the week. The operator can interrupt the command RUN by pressing the <ESC> key or the <CANCEL> button. The command can only run when the Agenda has been activated via the AT-AGENDA command. Any CSR command can be scheduled in the Agenda via the CMD parameter, the operator being responsible for the result of its execution. There are two ways of executing a commands file-in the agenda. Directly, via the FIL parameter, which programs the file name, or indirectly using the CMD parameter and programming the EX-CMD (Run commands file) command.

2-6

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

RP-AGENDA: Remove Agenda Schedule

Off-line Commands

RP-AGENDA: Remove Agenda Schedule


This command is used to remove a schedule from the Agenda.
Input Format
RP-AGENDA [: NAGD = xx ] ;

Parameter

NAGD
Agenda schedule number (1..100)

Remarks

1.

If the NAGD parameter is not specified, all schedules will be erased from the Agenda.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

2-7

DSB-ALARM: Disable Exchange Alarms-Reception

Off-line Commands

DSB-ALARM: Disable Exchange Alarms-Reception


This command disables the CSR from receiving alarm notifications from an exchange. The alarm notification is generated by the exchange when an urgent or semi-urgent failure is detected.
Input Format
DSB-ALARM: LOC = xxxxxxxx ;

Parameter

LOC
Exchange installation site code (up to 8 alphanumeric characters in quotes)

2-8

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

ENA-ALARM: Enable Exchange Alarms-Reception

Off-line Commands

ENA-ALARM: Enable Exchange Alarms-Reception


This command enables the CSR for receiving alarm notifications from an exchange. An alarm notification is generated when an urgent or semi-urgent failure is detected.
Input Format
ENA-ALARM: LOC = xxxxxxxx ;

Parameter

LOC
Exchange installation site code (up to 8 alphanumeric characters in quotes)

Remarks

1.

The use of this command should be restricted to Remote Supervision Center qualified to receive alarms from the exchanges.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

2-9

IT-CLACMD: Query Command Classification

Off-line Commands

IT-CLACMD: Query Command Classification


This command is used to display the list of operating classes applicable to executing a command.
Input Format
IT-CLACMD [: CMD = xx-xxxxxxxx | OCL = xx ] ;

Parameters

CMD
Command code

OCL
Operating class (1..16)

Output Format

If the CMD parameter is specified, all operating classes that allow executing the selected command will be displayed in the following format:
CMD = xx-xxxxxxx OCL = xx&..&xx

If no parameter is specified, the list of operating classes for all commands will be displayed in the following format:
CMD = xx-xxxxxxx . . . CMD = xx-xxxxxxx OCL = xx&..&xx . . . OCL = xx&..&xx

If the OCL parameter is specified, all commands with the specified operating class will be displayed in the following format:
CMD = xx-xxxxxxx . . . CMD = xx-xxxxxxx OCL = xx&..&xx . . . OCL = xx&..&xx

2-10

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-CLACMD: Modify Command Classification

Off-line Commands

MD-CLACMD: Modify Command Classification


This command is used to alter the list of classes of operations allowed to execute a command.
Input Format
MD-CLACMD: CMD = xx-xxxxxx, OCL = xx&..&xx ;

Parameters

CMD
Command code

OCL
Operating class (1..16)

Remarks

1. 2.

All CSR commands can be carried out by Class 1 operators. Running the INI-SESSIO, END-SESSIO, INI-CON, END-CON, MD-CSRCOM, ITCSRCOM, END-CSR, EX-CMD, MD-OPEPAS, ENA-PRT, DSB-PRT, ENA-LOG, DSBLOG, IT-LOG, PRT-LOG, RV-LOG, IT-IDIOM, MD-IDIOM, DSB-PAG, ENA-PAG, PR-MACRO, IP-MACRO, RP-MACRO commands is permitted for all operating classes and its classification cannot be altered through the MD-CLACMD command.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

2-11

EX-CMD: Run commands file

Off-line Commands

EX-CMD: Run commands file


This command is used to activate the execution of a commands file.
Input Format
EX-CMD: FIL = xxx..xxx ;

Parameter

FIL
File name in the [drive:] [directory] filename format drive drive (A, B or C) containing the disk where the file is stored in (if omitted, the current drive will be accessed) directory name of the directory containing the file (up to 63 alphanumeric characters; if omitted, the current directory will be accessed) filename name of the file (up to 8 alphanumeric characters)

Remarks

1. 2.

The commands file should be treated on a word processor in non-document mode. A file command may consist of one or more lines, ending with the ; (semicolon) character. All characters from the ; to the end of the line will be considered as a comment. In order to include a line of comment in the commands file just begin it with the ; character. The file commands are run in sequence. For each command executed, the corresponding response is displayed. The execution of the commands file can be interrupted by the operator by pressing the cancel button or the <ESC> key. The commands file cannot include the EX-CMD command. A dialog box will appear whenever an error occurs in running commands, providing the user with the option to terminate or continue the execution of the commands file.

3. 4. 5. 6.

2-12

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-COLLEC: Query Charging Counter Automatic Polling Log

Off-line Commands

IT-COLLEC: Query Charging Counter Automatic Polling Log


This command is used for consulting data obtained through the automatic polling of subscriber charging counters.
Input Format
IT-COLLEC ;

Remarks

1.

The contents of the collect.log file, in the CSR setup directory, will be displayed

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

2-13

RV-COLLEC: Remove Charging Counter Automatic Polling Log

Off-line Commands

RV-COLLEC: Remove Charging Counter Automatic Polling Log


This command is used to erase the log containing automatically polled subscriber charging counters.
Input Format
RV-COLLEC ;

2-14

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

END-CON: Ends Connection with Exchange

Off-line Commands

END-CON: Ends Connection with Exchange


This command is used to break the connection between the CSR and the interconnected exchange.
Input Format
END-CON ;

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

2-15

INI-CON: Make Connection to Exchange

Off-line Commands

INI-CON: Make Connection to Exchange


This command is used to set up a connection between the CSR and an exchange.
Input Format
INI-CON [: [ LOC = xx..xx ] [, NATMP = xx [, INT = xxx ] ] ];

Parameters

LOC
Exchange installation site code (up to 8 alphanumeric characters in quotes)

NATMP
Number of attempts to connect to the exchange (1..50)

INT
Interval between connect attempts to the exchange in seconds (30..300)

Remarks

1.

The type of connection to be set up, i. e., a LOC, RPL, RDL or RFDL connection, depends on the way the CSR is programmed. The type of connection is obtained through the ITCSRCOM (Query CSR Communication Parameters) command. The LOC parameter is mandatory if the connection is RDL (Remote connection over Dialed Line) or RFDL (Remote Connection over Virtual Dialed Line). If the NATMP parameter is not specified, a single attempt to connect to the exchange will be made. Otherwise, i. e, if the NATMP parameter is specified, the result of each communication attempt will be displayed, until setting up the connection or reaching the limit of attempts. If the INT parameter is not specified, the interval between the connect attempts to the exchange will be 30 seconds.

2.

3.

2-16

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

END-CSR: End CSR Execution

Off-line Commands

END-CSR: End CSR Execution


This command is used to close down the execution of the CSR.
Input Format
END-CSR ;

Remarks

1. 2.

The END-CSR command will only be accepted if no operating session is taking place. The CSR can also be closed down via the Windows Close Program icon.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

2-17

IT-CSRCOM: Query CSR Communication Parameters

Off-line Commands

IT-CSRCOM: Query CSR Communication Parameters


This command is used to query the CSR communication parameters.
Input Format
IT-CSRCOM ;

Output Format

The communication parameters will be displayed in the following format:


TYP = xxx MTACK = x PORT = xxxx MWTA = xx SPD = xxxxx MNTO = xx STOP = x PARIT = xxxxx NFIL = xx..xx

Remarks

1.

The MTACK, MWTA and MNTO parameters define the communication timings applied to setting up CSR-to-exchange connections.

2-18

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-CSRCOM: Modify CSR Communication Parameters

Off-line Commands

MD-CSRCOM: Modify CSR Communication Parameters


This command is used to modify CSR communication parameters.
Input Format
MD-CSRCOM : { [ TYP = xxxx ] [, PORT = xxxx ] [, SPD = xxxxx ] [, STOP= x] [, PARIT =xxxx ] [, NFIL = "xxx..xxx" ] [, MTACK = xxx , MWTA = xxx, MNTO = xxx ] [, IP = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx};

Parameters

TYP
Type of CSR connection with the exchange: LOC local connection RDL remote connection through dialed line RFDL remote connection via fictitious dialed line RPL remote connection via private line TCP connection via TCP-IP The RFDL mnemonic doesnt work in the control program LPN109232249.

PORT
CSR computer serial communication port: COM1 COM1 serial port COM2 COM2 serial port COM3 COM3 serial port COM4 COM4 serial port

SPD
Maximum serial communication rate in bps (300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 e 115200)

STOP
Number of stop bits: 1 or 2

PARIT
Parity: EVE ODD NPA even parity odd parity no parity

NFIL
File name in the [drive:] [directory] filename format drive drive (A, B or C) containing the disk where the file is stored in (if omitted, the current drive will be accessed) directory name of the directory containing the file (up to 63 alphanumeric characters; if omitted, the current directory will be accessed) filename name of the file (up to 8 alphanumeric characters)

MTACK
Maximum timing for waiting message acknowledgement (1..250)

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

2-19

MD-CSRCOM: Modify CSR Communication Parameters

Off-line Commands

MWTA
Maximum timing before sending a new or acknowledgement message (1..250)

MNTO
Number of MWTA timings that defines the maximum time elapsed without input messages before breaking the connection

IP
Unit IP address, defined through the command MD-EXCIP (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx varies from 0 to 255).
SOF 98119 E1 SOF 98158 D1 LPN109253856 001 LPN109253864 001 LPN109232249 001 LPN109256842 001

Remarks

1.

The following table provides the configurations set up by command MD-CSRCOM:


Connection TYP PORT com1 Local LOC com2 com3 com4 19200 1 none RATE STOP PARITY

com1 Remote RDL com2 com3 com4 1200, 2400 ... 115200 1 none

2. 3. 4.

The CSR communication parameter defining the data word length cannot be configured via this parameter and has the following value: 8 data bits. The file specified in this command identifies the setup of the modem used by the CSR. The MODEM.MDM file is generic for several types of modem. All programming through this command can be done via the Communication Parameter window in the Options Menu.

2-20

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-CSRCOM: Modify CSR Communication Parameters

Off-line Commands

5.

The default values for connecting times are: Local: MTACK = 4 MWTA = 12 MNTO = 48 Remote: MTACK = 15 MWTA = 92 MNTO = 06

6. 7.

The MTACK, MTPO, MNTO parameters assume the default values in local connections. For TIP = TCP, IP is the only valid and mandatory parameter.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

2-21

IT-CSRHST: Query CSR Exchange Operation Log

Off-line Commands

IT-CSRHST: Query CSR Exchange Operation Log


This command is used to display the exchange operation log, stored at the CSR.
Input Format
IT-CSRHST [: [ LOC = xxxxxxxx [, ENV = xxxx ] ] {[, DAT = xx-xx-xx ] [, ASE = xx ]} ;

Parameters

LOC
Exchange installation site code (up to 8 alphanumeric characters in quotes)

ENV
Operating Environment of the Exchange: CS PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4 PS5 PS6 . . PS31 PS32 Central Stage Peripheral Stage 1 Peripheral Stage 2 Peripheral Stage 3 Peripheral Stage 4 Peripheral Stage 5 Peripheral Stage 6 . . Peripheral Stage 31 Peripheral Stage 32

The number of Peripheral Stages which can be programmed on the exchange varies from 1 to n:
n 32 64 SOF 98119 A1 SOF 98158 A1 LPN109253856 001 LPN109253864 001

Compatibility:
SOF 98119 A1 SOF 98158 A1 LPN109253856 001 LPN109253864 001 LPN109232249 LPN109256842 -

DAT
Date in the yy-mm-dd format: yy year (00..99) mm month (01..12) dd day (01..31)

ASE
Alarm severity: UR urgent SU semi-urgent NU non-urgent

2-22

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-CSRHST: Query CSR Exchange Operation Log

Off-line Commands

Output Format

Failures and events stored in the CSR exchange operation log are displayed in the following format:
DAT = xx-xx-xx xxx...xxx . . . DAT = xx-xx-xx xxx...xxx HOU = xx:xx:xx . . . HOU = xx:xx:xx [ ENV = xxxx ] . . [ ENV = xxxx ] UNI = xx OCCURRENCE UNI = xx OCCURRENCE

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

The LOC parameter can be omitted if the CSR is connected to the exchange. The ENV parameter should be used for type CS exchanges, i. e., with created EPs. The ENV parameter will be displayed if the site is a Central Stage, i. e., with created EPs. Accordingly, ENV is used to distinguish the environment that originated the alarm. The ENV parameter may be specified if displaying a given operating environment log is required; otherwise, the log for all environments in the exchange will be displayed. If the DAT parameter is specified, only those alarms and events detected from the selected date on will be displayed. The ASE parameter allows selecting which alarms should be displayed, according to their level of severity. The following arguments can be specified for the ASE parameter: UR SU NU only display urgent alarms display urgent and semi-urgent alarms display all alarms

7.

Alarms and events detected by the exchange are listed in the Exchange Operating Manual.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

2-23

RV-CSRHST: Remove CSR Exchange Operating Log

Off-line Commands

RV-CSRHST: Remove CSR Exchange Operating Log


This command is used to remove the exchange operation log, stored at the CSR.
Input Format
RV-CSRHST [: [ LOC = xxxxxxxx [, ENV = xxxx ] ] ] ;

Parameters

LOC
Exchange installation site code (up to 8 alphanumeric characters in quotes)

ENV
Operating Environment of the Exchange: CS Central Stage PS1 Peripheral Stage 1 PS2 Peripheral Stage 2 PS3 Peripheral Stage 3 PS4 Peripheral Stage 4 PS5 Peripheral Stage 5 PS6 Peripheral Stage 6 . . . . PS31 Peripheral Stage 31 PS32 Peripheral Stage 32 The number of Peripheral Stages which can be programmed on the exchange varies from 1 to n:
n 32 64 SOF 98119 A1 SOF 98158 A1 LPN109253856 001 LPN109253864 001 LPN109256826 001 LPN109256834 001

Compatibility:
SOF 98119 A1 SOF 98158 A1 LPN109253856 001 LPN109253864 001 LPN109232249 LPN109256842 LPN109256826 001 LPN109256834 001

Remarks

1. 2.

The ENV parameter can be specified if removing a given operating environment log is desired for CS type exchanges, i. e., with created EPs. If LOC parameter is omitted, the operation log of the exchange connected to the CSR will be removed.

2-24

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-EXC: Creates an Exchange in the Exchange Registry

Off-line Commands

CR-EXC: Creates an Exchange in the Exchange Registry


This command is used for inserting an exchange in the registry of exchanges supervised by the CSR.
Input Format
CR-EXC : LOC = "xxxxxxxx", PAS = "xxxxxxxx" [, NUM = "xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx" ] [, PATH = "xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx" ] ;

Parameters

LOC
Exchange installation site code (up to 8 alphanumeric characters in quotes)

PAS
Exchange access password (up to 8 alphanumeric characters in quotation marks)

NUM
Exchange access number (up to 15 alphanumeric characters in quotation marks)

PATH
Name of directory in which all exchange data files are to be written (up to 40 alphanumeric characters in quotation marks)

Remarks

1.

The CR-EXC command may be carried out with the CSR disconnected from a specific exchange. The registered password is checked when setting up communications with the exchange. The purpose of the password is to prevent unauthorized users from accessing the exchange. The NUM parameter should be specified at remotely connected CSRs to define the number to be sent to the modem so that it can automatically dial to the exchange. The site password is case-sensitive.

2. 3.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

2-25

CR-EXC: Creates an Exchange in the Exchange Registry

Off-line Commands

4.

The argument of the NUM parameter can contain the following alphanumeric characters: digits from 0 to 9, comma, exclamation mark and w, t, p. The five non-numeric characters are used to configure the modem-dialing mode and have the following meanings: (,) (!) (w) (t) (p) specifies that the modem should pause before dialing the next digit; specifies that the modem should simulate a flash, disconnecting from the line for half a second; specifies that the modem should wait for the second dial tone in connections set up through PABX equipment; specifies that dialing should be multifrequency ; specifies that dialing should be pulsed.

5. 6.

The t, T, p and P characters are only valid for the first position of the NUM parameter. If none are used, dialing will be pulsed. The CSR exchange registry can contain up to 100 exchanges.

2-26

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-EXC: Query Exchange Registry

Off-line Commands

IT-EXC: Query Exchange Registry


This command is used for consulting the registry of exchanges supervised by the CSR.
Input Format
IT-EXC [: LOC = xxxxxxxx ] ;

Parameter

LOC
Exchange installation site code (up to 8 alphanumeric characters in quotes)

Output Format

If the LOC parameter is specified, the selected site code, directory data and access number are displayed, in the following format:
LOC = xxxxxxxx xxx-xxxxx PATH = xxx..xxx [ NUM = xxx..xxx ]

If the LOC parameter is not specified, all registered exchanges' code, directory data and access number are displayed, in the following format:
LOC = xxxxxxxx . . . LOC = xxxxxxxx xxx-xxxxx . . . xxx-xxxxx PATH = xxx.xxx . . . PATH = xxx.xxx [ NUM = xxx..xxx ]

[ NUM = xxx..xxx ]

Remarks

1. 2.

The IT-EXC command can be carried out with no specific exchange connected to the CSR. On the right of the site code, an indication of whether or not the CSR is qualified to receive alarm calls from the exchange appears, in the following format: { ENA-ALARM | DSB-ALARM }

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

2-27

MD-EXC: Modify Exchange Registry

Off-line Commands

MD-EXC: Modify Exchange Registry


This command is used to alter an exchange password, access number and data directory in the registry of exchanges supervised by the CSR.
Input Format
MD-EXC : LOC = "xxxxxxxx" { [, PAS = "xxxxxxxx" ] [, NUM = "xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx" ] [, PATH = "xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx" ] } ;

Parameters

LOC
Exchange installation site code (up to 8 alphanumeric characters in quotes)

PAS
Exchange access password (up to 8 alphanumeric characters in quotation marks)

NUM
Exchange access number (up to 15 alphanumeric characters in quotation marks)

PATH
Name of directory in which all exchange data files are to be written (up to 40 alphanumeric characters in quotation marks)

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

The MD-EXC command can be carried out with no specific exchange connected to the CSR. The NUM parameter should be specified at remotely connected CSRs to define the number to be sent to the modem so that it can automatically dial to the exchange. The site password is case-sensitive.

2-28

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-EXC: Modify Exchange Registry

Off-line Commands

4.

The argument of the NUM parameter can contain the following alphanumeric characters: digits from 0 to 9, comma, exclamation mark and w, t, p. The five non-numeric characters are used to configure the modem-dialing mode and have the following meanings: (,) (!) (w) (t) (p) specifies that the modem should pause before dialing the next digit; specifies that the modem should simulate a flash , disconnecting from the line for half a second; specifies that the modem should wait for the second dial tone in connections set up through PABX equipment; specifies that dialing should be multifrequency ; specifies that dialing should be pulsed.

5.

Characters t, T, p and P are only valid in the first position of the NUM parameter. If none are used, dialing will be pulsed

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

2-29

SU-EXC: Delete Exchange from Registry

Off-line Commands

SU-EXC: Delete Exchange from Registry


This command is used to delete an exchange from the registry of exchanges supervised by the CSR.
Input Format
SU-EXC: LOC = xxxxxxxx ;

Parameter

LOC
Exchange installation site code (up to 8 alphanumeric characters in quotes)

Remarks

1.

The SU-EXC command can be carried out without a specific exchange connected to the CSR.

2-30

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-IDIOM: Query CSR Language

Off-line Commands

IT-IDIOM: Query CSR Language


This command is used to identify the language the CSR is using.
Input Format
IT-IDIOM ;

Output Format

IDIOM = xxx

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

2-31

MD-IDIOM: Modify CSR Language

Off-line Commands

MD-IDIOM: Modify CSR Language


This command is used to alter the language used by the CSR program.
Input Format
MD-IDIOM: IDIOM = xxx

Parameter

IDIOM
Language used by CSR, where: SPA Spanish POR Portuguese ENG English RUS Russian

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

By means of this command, error messages, alarm messages and the operator interface will be displayed in the programmed language. CSR language commands, parameters and constants will not be translated. The Portuguese language is initially configured.

2-32

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

DSB-LOG: Disable CSR Command Log

Off-line Commands

DSB-LOG: Disable CSR Command Log


This command is used to disable recording the commands run on the CSR in the file specified via ENA-LOG command.
Input Format
DSB-LOG [: PAS = xxxxx];

Parameter

PAS
Password that helps in the log file encrypting code creation.

Remark

1.

The PAS parameter will be required if used in ENA-LOG command.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

2-33

ENA-LOG: Enable CSR Command Log

Off-line Commands

ENA-LOG: Enable CSR Command Log


This command is used to enable logging commands run on the CSR. All commands and responses issued by the CSR will be recorded from the execution of the ENA-LOG command until the DSB-LOG command is entered, disabling the logging procedure.
Input Format
ENA-LOG [: FIL = xxx..xxx [, PAS = xx..xx ] ];

Parameters

FIL
File name in the [drive:] [directory] filename format drive drive (A, B or C) containing the disk where the file is stored in (if omitted, the current drive will be accessed) directory name of the directory containing the file (up to 63 alphanumeric characters; if omitted, the current directory will be accessed) filename name of the file (up to 8 alphanumeric characters)

PAS
Password that helps in the log file encrypting code creation.

Remarks

1.

If no file name is specified, a text file named Lucent.log will be created in the CSR installation directory. This file must be removed via RV-LOG command. Otherwise, every time the command is run again, the data will be appended to the file. Log files created without a password can be read and edited by means of a normal word processor. Encrypted files will be scrambled unless the IT-LOG command is run to display them.

2.

2-34

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-LOG: Query CSR Commands Log

Off-line Commands

IT-LOG: Query CSR Commands Log


This command allows consulting the log file containing the commands carried out by the CSR.
Input Format
IT-LOG [: FIL = xxx..xxx [, PAS = xxxxxxxx ] ];

Parameters

FIL
File name in the [drive:] [directory] filename format drive drive (A, B or C) containing the disk where the file is stored in (if omitted, the current drive will be accessed) directory name of the directory containing the file (up to 63 alphanumeric characters; if omitted, the current directory will be accessed) filename name of the file (up to 8 alphanumeric characters)

PAS
Password that helps in the log file encrypting code creation.

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

If no file name is specified, file Lucent.log will be displayed on the CSR screen. The file will not be printed if the password entered differs from that used to encrypt it. Files encrypted without a password obviously will not require one for being read.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

2-35

PRT-LOG: Print CSR Commands Log

Off-line Commands

PRT-LOG: Print CSR Commands Log


This command allows printing the log file of commands run by the CSR.
Input Format
PRT-LOG [: FIL = xx..xx [, PAS = xxxxxxxx] ];

Parameters

FIL
File name in the [drive:] [directory] filename format drive drive (A, B or C) containing the disk where the file is stored in (if omitted, the current drive will be accessed) directory name of the directory containing the file (up to 63 alphanumeric characters; if omitted, the current directory will be accessed) filename name of the file (up to 8 alphanumeric characters)

PAS
Password that helps in the log file encrypting code creation.

Remarks

1. 2.

The file will not be printed if the password entered differs from that used to encrypt it. The printer used by this command is identified in the "CSR Properties" dialog box, "Printer" folder, and may not be the printer on the PC parallel port (if networked printers are used).

2-36

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

RV-LOG: Remove CSR Command Log

Off-line Commands

RV-LOG: Remove CSR Command Log


This command allows removing the file containing the log of commands carried out by the CSR.
Input Format
RV-LOG [: FIL = xxx..xxx [, PAS = xxxxxxxx ] ];

Parameters

FIL
File name in the [drive:] [directory] filename format drive drive (A, B or C) containing the disk where the file is stored in (if omitted, the current drive will be accessed) directory name of the directory containing the file (up to 63 alphanumeric characters; if omitted, the current directory will be accessed) filename name of the file (up to 8 alphanumeric characters)

PAS
Password that helps in the log file encrypting code creation.

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

If no file name is specified in field filename, the Lucent.log file will be removed from the CSR directory. The file will not be printed if the password entered differs from that used to encrypt it. Files encrypted without a password obviously will not require one for being read.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

2-37

IP-MACRO: Query Commands Macro Programming

Off-line Commands

IP-MACRO: Query Commands Macro Programming


This command is used to display commands programmed in the macros.
Input Format
IP-MACRO [: MACRO = xx ] ;

Parameter

MACRO
Number of the macro (1..12)

Output Format

If the MACRO parameter is specified, the text and commands programmed for the selected macro will be displayed, in the following format:
MACRO= xx [ TXT = xxx...xxx ] [ CMD = xxx...xxx ] . . [ CMD = xxx...xxx ]

If the MACRO parameter is not specified, the text and commands of all programmed macros will be displayed, in the following format:
MACRO= xx [ TXT = xxx...xxx ] [ CMD = xxx...xxx ] . . [ CMD = xxx...xxx ] . . [ TXT = xxx...xxx ] [ CMD = xxx...xxx ] . . [ CMD = xxx...xxx ]

MACRO= xx

Remarks

1.

Only pre-programmed texts and commands will be displayed; there can be macros with no programmed texts or macros with no programmed commands.

2-38

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

PR-MACRO: Program Commands Macro

Off-line Commands

PR-MACRO: Program Commands Macro


This command is used to program macros with CSR commands.
Input Format
PR-MACRO: MACRO = xx { [, CMD = xx...xx ] [, TXT = xx...xx ] } ;

Parameters

MACRO
Number of the macro (1..12)

CMD
Command (up to 255 alphanumeric characters, between quotation marks or apostrophes)

TXT
Text (up to 100 alphanumeric characters between quotes or apostrophes)

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

As many commands as required can be programmed into each macro, provided they are programmed one at a time. The programmed text will be displayed on the status bar when the mouse cursor points to the macro icon. Commands programmed in each macro will be carried out by clicking on the required tool bar button or by pressing keys F1 to F12. Commands will be carried out in the same order as they were programmed. The TXT parameter can be modified by overwriting the previous one. If the command to be programmed includes the quote () character, the CMD parameter argument should be delimited by apostrophes () instead of quotes ().

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

2-39

RP-MACRO: Remove Command Macro Programming

Off-line Commands

RP-MACRO: Remove Command Macro Programming


This command is used to remove programmed CSR commands macros.
Input Format
RP-MACRO: MACRO = xx ;

Parameter

MACRO
Number of the macro (1..12)

Remarks

1.

This command removes the text and all commands programmed for the specified macro.

2-40

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-MESS: Query Exchange Message

Off-line Commands

IT-MESS: Query Exchange Message


This command is used for displaying messages sent by the exchange to the CSR Operator messages will only informed to the operator if the "MESSAGE" button is showing on the CSR commands window (below the command input field).
Input Format
IT-MESS ;

Output Format
LOC = xxxxxxxx . . . LOC = xxxxxxxx [ ENV = xxxx ] . . . [ ENV = xxxx ] MESS = xxx...xxx . . . MESS = xxx...xxx

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

The following types of message may be sent by the exchange to the CSR: Blocked subscriber acknowledgement; Blocked trunk acknowledgement. Unread messages will be lost when the CSR is switched off. The ENV parameter is displayed when the message-originating exchange is a Central Stage (CS) or a Peripheral Stage (PS).

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

2-41

CR-OPE: Create Operator

Off-line Commands

CR-OPE: Create Operator


This command is used to include and operator in the CSR operators registry.
Input Format
CR-OPE: OPE = xxxxxxxx, OCL = xx ;

Parameters

OPE
Operator ID (up to 8 alphanumeric characters in quotes)

OCL
Operating class (1..16)

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4.

The created operator is assigned his ID as his password To change an operator password, use the MD-OPEPAS command. The CSR operators registry is set up at the factory, with LUCENT operator, LUCENT password and operation class 1. The CSR operators registry can contain up to 32 operators

2-42

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-OPE: Query Operator

Off-line Commands

IT-OPE: Query Operator


This command is used to list all operators registered in the CSR.
Input Format
IT-OPE [: OPE = xxxxxxxx ] ;

Parameter

OPE
Operator ID (up to 8 alphanumeric characters in quotes)

Output Format

If the OPE parameter is specified, the selected operator operation class is displayed , in the format:
OPE = xxxxxxxx OCL = xx ... xx

If the OPE parameter ibis not specified, all registered operators and respective operation classes are displayed, in the following format:
OPE = xxxxxxxx . . . OPE = xxxxxxxx OCL = xx ... xx . . . OCL = xx ... xx

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

2-43

SU-OPE: Exclude Operator

Off-line Commands

SU-OPE: Exclude Operator


This command excludes an operator from the CSR operator registry.
Input Format
SU-OPE: OPE = xxxxxxxx ;

Parameter

OPE
Operator ID (up to 8 alphanumeric characters in quotes)

2-44

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-OPEPAS: Change Operator Password

Off-line Commands

MD-OPEPAS: Change Operator Password


This command is used to change an operator password.
Input Format
MD-OPEPAS: PAS = xxxxxxxx ;

Parameter

PAS
Operator ID (up to 8 alphanumeric characters in quotation marks)

Remarks

1.

The operator password is case-sensitive.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

2-45

DSB-PAG: Disable Paging

Off-line Commands

DSB-PAG: Disable Paging


This command is used to disable paging commands executed in the Windows CSR response window.
Input Format
DSB-PAG ;

Remarks

1.

If this command is not run, the CSR will be set for paging all command responses.

2-46

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

ENA-PAG: Enable Paging

Off-line Commands

ENA-PAG: Enable Paging


This command is used to enable paging commands executed in the Windows CSR response window
Input Format
ENA-PAG ;

Remarks

1.

The CSR is initially set for paging command responses.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

2-47

DSB-PRT: Disable Printer

Off-line Commands

DSB-PRT: Disable Printer


This command is used to disable printing commands run on the CSR, enabled by ENA-PRT command.
Input Format
DSB-PRT ;

2-48

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

ENA-PRT: Enable Printer

Off-line Commands

ENA-PRT: Enable Printer


This command is used to enable printing commands run on the CSR.
Input Format
ENA-PRT ;

Remarks

1. 2.

All commands and responses issued by the CSR will be printed from the execution of ENA-PRT command until the DSB-PRT command is entered, disabling the printing. This command only applies to dot printers.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

2-49

END-SESSIO: End Operating Session

Off-line Commands

END-SESSIO: End Operating Session


This command is used to end an operating session.
Input Format
END-SESSIO ;

2-50

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

INI-SESSIO: Begin Operating Session

Off-line Commands

INI-SESSIO: Begin Operating Session


This command is used to begin an operating session.
Input Format
INI-SESSIO: OPE = xxxxxxxx, PAS = xxxxxxxx ;

Parameters

OPE
Operator ID (up to 8 alphanumeric characters in quotes)

PAS
Operator ID (up to 8 alphanumeric characters in quotation marks)

Remarks

1.

If the PAS parameter is not specified, a window will open to allow the operator entering his password secretly.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

2-51

AT-TDC: Activate Timeout

Off-line Commands

AT-TDC: Activate Timeout


This command is used to activate a timeout factor, which interrupts communications when the programmed time has elapsed without any command from the CSR operator.
Input Format
AT-TDC: TDC = xxxx ;

Parameter

TDC
Time out in minutes (1..1440)

Remarks

1.

Timing out does not apply in cases of call supervision or active subscriber loop.

2-52

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

DS-TDC: Deactivate Timeout

Off-line Commands

DS-TDC: Deactivate Timeout


This command is used for deactivating timeout.
Input Format
DS-TDC ;

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

2-53

IT-TDC: Query Timeout

Off-line Commands

IT-TDC: Query Timeout


This command is used to query the active timeout.
Input Format
IT-TDC ;

Output Format
TDC = xxxx

2-54

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-URGALARM: Query Urgent Alarms

Off-line Commands

IT-URGALARM: Query Urgent Alarms


This command is used to display urgent and semi-urgent alarms sent to the CSR through alarm notifications.
Input Format
IT-URGALARM ;

Output Format

The alarms not yet notified to the CSR operator will be displayed in the following format:
LOC = xxxxxxxx [ ENV = xxxx ] DAT = xx-xx-xx . . . . . . . . . LOC = xxxxxxxx [ ENV = xxxx ] DAT = xx-xx-xx HOU = xx:xx:xx . . . HOU = xx:xx:xx UNI = xx SEMI URGENT

UNI = xx SEMI URGENT

Remarks

1.

If the exchange is programmed to set up an alarm call, an alarm will be sent to the CSR whenever an urgent or semi-urgent failure is detected. The reception of an alarm is signaled on the CSR screen (on the tool bar). Received alarms are written in the Operating History log of the exchange supervised by the CSR. The successful execution of the IT-URGALARM command alters the status of the CSR screen icon and displays the urgent and semi-urgent alarms sent by the exchanges supervised by the CSR, and not yet notified to the operator. The ENV parameter will be displayed if the exchange that has sent the alarm is a Central Stage, i. e., an exchange with deployed peripheral stages (PS).

2.

3.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

2-55

On-line Commands

Overview
Purpose List the commands valid when CSR is connected to a BZ5000 Switch or to a BZSP System.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-1

IT-ALARM: Query Current Alarms

On-line Commands

IT-ALARM: Query Current Alarms


This command is used to display alarms occurring in exchange units. The alarms detected in the exchange are listed in its Operating Manual.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249 LPN109256842 LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-ALARM [ : { [ UNI = xx ] [, ASE = xx ] }] ;

Parameters

UNI
unit number (1..n):
n 2 16 76 SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249 LPN109256842 LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ASE
Alarm severity: UR urgent SU semi-urgent NU non-urgent

Output Format

If the UNI parameter is specified, the selected unit current alarms will be displayed in the following format:
[ ENV = xxxx ] UNI = xx xxxxxxxxxx ... xxxxxxxxxx SEMI-URGENT . . . . . . xxxxxxxxxx ... xxxxxxxxxx URGENT

3-2

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-ALARM: Query Current Alarms

On-line Commands

If the UNI parameter is not specified, the alarms present in all active exchange units will be displayed in the following format:
[ ENV = xxxx ] xxxxxxxxxx ... . . . xxxxxxxxxx ... . . . [ ENV = xxxx ] xxxxxxxxxx ... . . . xxxxxxxxxx ... UNI = xx xxxxxxxxxx SEMI-URGENT . . . xxxxxxxxxx URGENT

UNI = xx xxxxxxxxxx SEMI-URGENT . . . xxxxxxxxxx URGENT

Remarks

1.

ASE: Parameter permits selecting the alarms to be displayed according to their severity. The following arguments may be specified for NUR: UR SU NU only display urgent alarms display urgent and semi-urgent alarms display all alarms

2.

ENV: Parameter will be displayed if the interconnected exchange is a Central or Peripheral Stage.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-3

IP-ATN: Query Programmed Answering Terminal

On-line Commands

IP-ATN: Query Programmed Answering Terminal


This command is used to query the programming of an exchange answering terminal.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249 LPN109256842 LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IP-ATN ;

Output Format

The programmed main answering terminal is displayed in the following format:


SUB = xxxx-xxxx

Remarks

1.

The output format of the SUB parameter can be changed through the Options menu, Output Format submenu, on the CSR program main window.

3-4

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

PR-ATN: Programming Answering Terminal

On-line Commands

PR-ATN: Programming Answering Terminal


This command is used to program an exchange answering terminal..
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249 LPN109256842 LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
PR-ATN : SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx ;

Parameter

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-5

CR-AUTANS: Create Automatic Responder

On-line Commands

CR-AUTANS: Create Automatic Responder


This command is used to create the directory number of the exchange automatic responder.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249 LPN109256842 LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
CR-AUTANS : SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx, CLA = xxx ;

Parameters

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

CLA
Terminal class (1..n), where n can be:
n 32 128 SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249 LPN109256842 LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1.

The 1600 Hz signal used by the automatic responder is generated on board MPS. If this board is not fitted, service access will be denied.

3-6

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-AUTANS: Query Automatic Responder

On-line Commands

IT-AUTANS: Query Automatic Responder


This command is used to query the exchange automatic responder directory number.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249 LPN109256842 LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-AUTANS ;

Output Format

The operating status and terminal class of the automatic responder directory number are displayed in the following format:
SUB = xxxx-xxxx CLA = xxx (xxxxxxxx) OCT = xx TCT = xx SVP = xxxxxx RTT = { NRESTR | TOREST | xx&..&xx } [ MAXCOIN = xxxxx ]

Remarks

1.

The output format of the SUB parameter can be changed through the Option Menu, Output Format submenu, on the CSR main window.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-7

SU-AUTANS: Suppress Automatic Responder

On-line Commands

SU-AUTANS: Suppress Automatic Responder


This command is used to suppress the exchange automatic responder directory number.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
SU-AUTANS ;

3-8

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-BIL: Create Biller

On-line Commands

CR-BIL: Create Biller


This command is used to create the exchange billers.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
CR-BIL : BIL = xx, UNI = xx;

Parameters

BIL
Biller number (1..2) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

UNI
Terminal unit number (1..n) Compatibility:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 2 16 68 F1 A1 E1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1.

The communication rate of the port connecting the biller should be 115200 bps. Check through command IT-EXCCOM.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-9

IT-BIL: Query Biller

On-line Commands

IT-BIL: Query Biller


This command is used to display the biller parameters.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-BIL ;

Output Format
BIL = x . . . . . . BIL = x PORT = xx-xxxx STE = xxx . . . . . . PORT = xx-xxxx STE = xxx

Remarks

1.

STE Parameter indicates the billing operating status: BLK SRV blocked. The biller does not record any ticket but can transfer information. in service

3-10

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-BIL: Modify Biller Parameters

On-line Commands

MD-BIL: Modify Biller Parameters


This command is used to modify biller configuration parameters.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-BIL : BIL = x , STE = xxx;

Parameters

BIL
Biller number (1..2) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

STE
Biller operating status: BLK blocked SRV in service

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-11

SU-BIL: Suppress Biller

On-line Commands

SU-BIL: Suppress Biller


This command is used to suppress biller.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
SU-BIL : BIL = xx [,INCOND] ;

Parameters

BIL
Biller number (1..2) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

INCOND
Biller parameter to suppress the single existent biller. Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 F1 E1 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

Block biller before suppressing it, using the command MD-BI If the INCOND parameter is specified, biller will be suppressed, regardless of the billing data having been saved or not. The INCOND parameter shall be used when there is only one biller created.

3-12

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

RE-BILCNF: Create Biller Configuration File

On-line Commands

RE-BILCNF: Create Biller Configuration File


This command is used for automatically generating Configuration File for each biller created on the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 G1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
RE-BILCNF : BIL = xx, DIR = "xxxxxxxxxx";

Parameters

BIL
Biller number (1..2) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

DIR
Path where the configuration file will be saved (each directory of the Path shall have at most 8 characters and the complete path 40 characters).

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

This command is used for exchanges with biller without ITC. A configuration file shall be generated for each billing unit. Before generating the configuration file, its necessary: a) Create the billing unit through the command CR-UNIT. b) Create the biller through the command CR-BIL. c) Configure the IP address of the exchange through the command MD-EXCIP. d) Connect the CSR to the exchange.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-13

IT-BILHST: Query Charging Operating Log

On-line Commands

IT-BILHST: Query Charging Operating Log


This command is used to display the result of the last transference of biller information to magnetic tape.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 F1 A1 E1 -

Input Format
IT BILHST : BIL = x ;

Parameter

BIL
Biller number (1..2) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Output Format
BIL = x LOC = xxxxxxx DAT = dd-mm-yy HOU = Ho:mi:ss FIL = MMDDHOMI.BIL TCHM = xxxxx TBLS = xxxxx DATP = dd-mm-yy HORP = Ho:mi:ss DURP = xxxxx DATU = dd-mm-yy HORU = Ho:mi:ss DURU = xxxxx RESP = xxxx..xxxx

3-14

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-BILHST: Query Charging Operating Log

On-line Commands

Remarks

1.

The parameters contained in the output format have the following meanings: FIL file name in format: MMDDHOMI.BIL MMDD HOMI month and day of writing the file hour and minute of writing the file.

TCHM total tickets stored in the specified file DATP date of recording the first ticket in format dd-mm-yy dd mm yy ho mi ss ho mi ss dd mm yy day month year hours minutes seconds hours minutes seconds day month year

HORP time of recording the first ticket in format ho:mi:ss

HORU time of recording the last ticket in format ho:mi:ss

DATU Date of recording the last ticket in format dd-mm-yy:

NBLK Number of blocks in the temporary area that should be converted into files on the hard disk and transferred to the target (1..65535) RESP Response from running the last COP-BILSYS command for transferring to magnetic tape

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-15

IT-BILOPP: Query Billing Operating Parameters

On-line Commands

IT-BILOPP: Query Billing Operating Parameters


The command is used to consult the values of billing operating parameters.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 C3 B3 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-BILOPP ;

Output Format
REGF = xxx PABUR = xx SZFIL = xxx PABSU = xx NAM = xx..xx PABNU = xx

Remarks

1.

PABxx parameters indicate the percentage of space taken up by the billing temporary file at which an alarm should be triggered: PABUR PABSU PABNU urgent alarm semi-urgent alarm non-urgent alarm

100 % corresponds to the maximum size allowed for a billing file, 65535 clusters of 2000 bytes ( 130 Mbytes); 2. REGF parameter indicates the format of billing records: FIX E147 3. 4. billing with 80 bytes billing with 147 bytes

NAM parameter indicates the name of the recorder; SZFIL parameter indicates the temporary billing file size.

3-16

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-BILOPP: Modify Biller Operating Parameters

On-line Commands

MD-BILOPP: Modify Biller Operating Parameters


This command is used to modify the values of biller operating parameters.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 C3 B3 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-BILOPP : [ REGF = xxx ] [NUMREG = xxx] [, NAM = "xx..xx" ] [, PABUR = xx ] , [PABSU = xx ] [, PABNU = xx ] ;

Parameters

REGF
Biller record format: FIX E147

NUMREG
Number of temporary file records.

NAM
Name of recorder.

PABUR
Parameter indicating the percentage of space used in the billing temporary, which should trigger an urgent alarm. 100 % corresponds to the maximum size allowed for a billing file, 65535 clusters of 2000 bytes ( 130 Mbytes). Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

PABSU
Parameter indicating the percentage of space used in the billing temporary, which should trigger a semi-urgent alarm. 100 % corresponds to the maximum size allowed for a billing file, 65535 clusters of 2000 bytes ( 130 Mbytes). Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-17

MD-BILOPP: Modify Biller Operating Parameters

On-line Commands

PABNU
Parameter indicating the percentage of space used in the billing temporary, which should trigger a non-urgent alarm. 100 % corresponds to the maximum size allowed for a billing file, 65535 clusters of 2000 bytes ( 130 Mbytes). Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

3-18

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-BILSUP: Query Biller Supervision Result

On-line Commands

IT-BILSUP: Query Biller Supervision Result


This command is used to display Billing Data files created through command COP-BILSYS.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-BILSUP : [ FIL="xxx..xxx" ] ;

Parameter

FIL
File name in the [drive:] [directory] filename format drive drive (A, B or C) containing the disk where the file is stored in (if omitted, the current drive will be accessed) directory name of the directory containing the file (up to 63 alphanumeric characters; if omitted, the current directory will be accessed) filename name of the file (up to 8 alphanumeric characters)

Output Format
BIL = x TEMP = XXX FIL = mmddhomi.blt TOTAL = XXX SZFIL = XXX LIVRE = XXX NUMREG = XX CSR = XXX DAT = XXX

Remarks

1.

The parameters displayed in the output format have the following meanings: BIL TEMP TOTAL LIVRE FIL SZFIL NUMREG CSR DAT Biller identification number being enquired for receiving the billing file. Temporary file size (bytes). size of biller hard disk (Bytes). space available on the biller hard disk (Bytes). Billing file (mmddhoni.blt), related to month, day, hour and minute of the billing file record Billing file size (bytes) Number of billing file call records Number of times that the billing file was transferred to the exchange directory (created through the command CR-EXC) Number of times that the billing file was transferred to the DAT tape.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-19

COP-BILSYS: Copy Billing Data

On-line Commands

COP-BILSYS: Copy Billing Data


This command is used to copy billing data to a magnetic tape, CSR or hard disk.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
COP-BILSYS : [ DST = xxxxx ] | FIL = "xxx..xxx" ] ;

Parameters

DST
Destination of billing data copying: TAPE magnetic tape HD Biller hard disk CSR CSR program

FIL
File name in the format: MMDDHOMI.BIL MMDD month and day of recording the file HOMI hour and minute of recording the file

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Regardless of the destination specified for copying, billing data will be copied to a biller hard disk file first and then transferred to their destination. If DST=HD is specified, the billing data will be read from the temporary file and written on the biller hard disks for later transfer to the CSR or tape. Parameter FIL cannot be specified jointly with DST = HD. Files opened by command COP-BILSYS are stored on the billing system hard disk until command RV-BILSYS is run. If DST parameter is specified as CSR, the file opened by command COP-BILSYS is copied to the directory specified in command CR-EXC. When DST parameter is specified as DAT, if FIL parameter is specified, only the specified file will be copied to DAT tape, otherwise all the files will be transferred. The billing data of the temporary area will not be transferred.

3-20

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-BILSYS: Query Billing Data

On-line Commands

IT-BILSYS: Query Billing Data


This command is used to query billing data from a magnetic tape, CSR or hard disk.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 006 006 005 004 003 003

Input Format
IT-BILSYS [:[ LOC=xx..xx [, ORIG|TERM] [, ENV=xxx ] ] [, IDAT = yy-mm-dd ] [, EDAT = yy-mm-dd ] [, CDPN =xx..xx ]];

Parameters

LOC
Exchange installation site code (up to 8 alphanumeric characters in quotes).

ORIG
Originating call.

TERM
Terminating call.

ENV
Operating Environment of the Exchange: CS PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4 PS5 PS6 . . PS31 PSn Central Stage Peripheral Stage 1 Peripheral Stage 2 Peripheral Stage 3 Peripheral Stage 4 Peripheral Stage 5 Peripheral Stage 6 . . Peripheral Stage 31 Peripheral Stage n

The number of Peripheral Stages which can be programmed on the exchange varies from 1 to n:
n LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 32 64 006 006 005 004 003 003

IDAT
Initial date

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-21

IT-BILSYS: Query Billing Data

On-line Commands

EDAT
End date

CDPN
Called party number

Output Format

For Brasil country:


DATE xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx TIME DURATION xx-xx-xx xxxxxx xx-xx-xx xxxxxx xx-xx-xx xxxxxx xx-xx-xx xxxxxx ORIG|TERM ORIG|TERM ORIG|TERM ORIG|TERM CGPN xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx CGCAT xx xx xx xx CDPN xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx CDCAT xx xx xx xx COUNT xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx

For Ukraine, Russia, Greece and Philippines countries:


DATE xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx TIME DURATION xx-xx-xx xxxxxx xx-xx-xx xxxxxx xx-xx-xx xxxxxx xx-xx-xx xxxxxx SSV xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx ORIG|TERM ORIG|TERM ORIG|TERM ORIG|TERM CIC xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx CGPN CGCAT CDPN xxxxxxxx xx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xx xxxxxxxx CHCL xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx

INROUT OUTROUT xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx

SSV_ACT xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx

END_CAUSE xxxxxxx xxxxxxx xxxxxxx xxxxxxx

Where: DATE
Date of start Format: DDMMYY

TIME
Time of start Format: HHMMSS

DURATION
Duration Format: HHMMSS

ORIG|TERM
Originating or Terminating Calls

CGPN
Calling party number, justified on the left

3-22

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-BILSYS: Query Billing Data

On-line Commands

CGCAT
Calling party category: 1 = Normal residential or Business with DDD 2 = Hotel with DDD 3 = Residential, business or hotel without DDD local traffic 4 = Business with priority and DDD 5 = Business special with DDD, free of billing 6 = Public telephone with DDD - Transit (National) 7 = Residential or business with DDD and special services 8 = Business subscriber with data termination for DDD 9 = Local public telephone without DDD local traffic 10 = NATHOTEL

CDPN
Called party number, justified on the left

CDCAT
Called party category: 1 = Normal residential or Business with DDD 2 = Hotel with DDD 3 = Residential, business or hotel without DDD local traffic 4 = Business with priority and DDD 5 = Business special with DDD, free of billing 6 = Public telephone with DDD - Transit (National) 7 = Residential or business with DDD and special services 8 = Business subscriber with data termination for DDD 9 = Local public telephone without DDD local traffic 10 = NATHOTEL

CHCL
Billing class Values can be: 0 = Not applicable 1 to 8 programmable in the switch through commands MD-CHCL and MD-CHM. Refer to Help Online.

INROUT
Incoming trunk identification

OUTROUT
Outgoing trunk identification

SSV
Supplementary service identification 00 = Special service not involved 01 = Temporary transfer 02 = Call forwarding in case of busy 03 = Call forwarding in case of no answer 04 = Abbreviated call 05 = Alarm clock06 = Direct line 07 = Subscriber absent 08 = Do not disturb 09 = Blocking of originating calls 10 = Blocking of terminating calls 11 = Call waiting 12 = Conference call 13 = Blocking of transferred and terminating calls in the switch 14 = Password programming by user

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-23

IT-BILSYS: Query Billing Data

On-line Commands

SSV_ACT
Supplementary service action identifier 0 = Supplementary service not used by subscriber 1 = Supplementary service activated by subscriber 2 = Supplementary service deactivated by subscriber 3 = Supplementary service polled by subscriber 4 = Supplementary service used by subscriber

CIC
Trunk circuit code number identification in a SS#7 common channel route.

COUNT
This field contains information about the value of the originating subscriber billing counter per call

END_CAUSE
Cause of call ending 1 = Originating subscriber disconnects 2 = Terminating subscriber disconnects 3 = Call abnormally disconnected indicating network failure 4 = System disconnected switch action or operator manual operation ends the call.

3-24

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

REP-BILSYS: Store Call Billing Data

On-line Commands

REP-BILSYS: Store Call Billing Data


This command is used to write billing data stored by the exchange on a hard disk.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
REP-BILSYS ;

Output Format

The format of the call retail record file is described in the Exchange Operating Manual.
Remarks

1.

Call detail records are written in file MMDDHOMI.BIL, where: MMDD = month and day of writing the file; HOMI = hour and minute of writing the file.

2.

The call detail record is stored on the exchange directory as indicated by parameter PATH in the CR-EXC command.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-25

RV-BILSYS: Remove Call Billing Data

On-line Commands

RV-BILSYS: Remove Call Billing Data


This command is used to remove billing files from the biller hard disks.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
RV-BILSYS: FIL= "xxx..xxx" ;

Parameter

FIL
File name in the format: MMDDHOMI.BIL MMDD month and day of recording the file HOMI hour and minute of recording the file

Remarks

1.

File MMDDHHMI.BIL is opened when running command COP-BILSYS.

3-26

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-BOARD: Create Board

On-line Commands

CR-BOARD: Create Board


This command is used to configure a board position in a exchange unit.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
CR-BOARD : BOARD = xx-xx, TYP = xxxxxx [, LNK = xx [, ENL2 = xx]] ;

Parameters

BOARD
Board number in format uni-pos: uni terminal unit number (1..n)
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 2 16 76 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

pos
5 23 A1

unit position number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

position 23 refer to MMC pack position for BZ5000 and SWU for BZ5000 with redundancy.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-27

CR-BOARD: Create Board

On-line Commands

TYP
Type of board. For BZ5000 Switch: MTA32 MAB MAP MAPB JEM JLE JLT JMS JTS JTSB MCI MTL MTLB MPSB MPSC MMCI MMCII MMCIR MMCIIR MMC8 MMC12 LNK 32-subscriber terminal module basic access module (ISDN) primary access module (ISDN) B issue primary access module (ISDN) two-way trunk, E&M, 6-wire 2-wire input trunk 2-wire output trunk two-way trunk, E&M, 7-wire digital signaling trunk (SS7) B issue digital signaling trunk (SS7) intermodular switching module line test module B issue signal line test module B issue signal processor module C issue signal processor module switching matrix module (intra-modular 12x4) switching matrix module (inter-modular) switching matrix module (intra-modular and Clock) switching matrix module (inter-modular and Clock) switching matrix module (intra-modular 16x8) switching matrix module (intra-modular 12x12) link number (1..16)

For BZSP System: MXTS switching, trunking and signaling module

LNK
Link number (1..16) Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 F1 E1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ENL2
High Link number for MPS-C Board (7..14) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 F1 E1 001 001 001 001

High Link number for MAP-B and JTS-B Boards (7..14) Compatibility:
LPN109253864 LPN109232249 LPN109256826 LPN109256834LPN109256826LPN109256834 001 001 -

3-28

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-BOARD: Create Board

On-line Commands

Remarks

1.

The MTL board will only require an assigned link if an announcement machine circuit is used. The remaining boards should be configured as defined in the Exchange Operating Manual. The LNK Parameter should not be specified for MMC, MCE and MCI boards. The MTA, MAB, MAP, JDT, JEM, JMS, JLE, JDL, JTS, JLT, MMC, MAD, MPSB, MTL boards can only be created on the terminal units, whose unit number is between 1 and 64. A MCC board shall only be created on the switching units, whose unit number is between 65 and 76. The MCC board shall be installed on the position 01 of the switching BBB. The MCE board shall only be created from position 02 of the switching BBB and on the positions 21 and 22 of the terminal units. SS7 Signaling links are available on the JDL board. Trunk boards may be created in positions 1 to 13 when PABX trunk lines are connected as exchange subscribers. The MMC8 and MMC12 boards shall only be created on the exchanges with SOF 98119B1 Program Control version or higher. The MPSC board type is only valid for exchanges with SOF 98119D1 or SOF 98158C1 Control Program version or higher. From the versions of the Control Program: SOF 98119D1 and SOF 98158C1, the MPS and MTL boards shall be created from the position 19. From the versions of the Control Program: SOF 98119F1, SOF 98158E1, the MPSC board can be created with two links (the ENL2 parameter can only be created if the board is MPS-C). If ENL2 is specified, compulsorily, LNK corresponds to low link and ENL2 to high link. The LNK and ENL2 parameters are not valid for exchanges with LPN109232249 and LPN109256842 Control Program. The MXTS mnemonic of the TYP parameter is only valid for exchanges with LPN109232249 and LPN109256842 Control Program. The other mnemonics are not valid for these Control Programs.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

13. 14. 15.

16. The ENL2 parameter is only valid for JTSB and MAPB boards working in exchanges with controller software version LPN109253826 and LPN109256834.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-29

IT-BOARD: Query Board

On-line Commands

IT-BOARD: Query Board


This command is used to query the configuration of board positions in BZ5000 units.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-BOARD [ : { UNI = xx | BOARD = xx-xx } ] ;

Parameters

UNI
unit number (1..n):
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 2 16 76 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

BOARD
Board number in format uni-pos: uni terminal unit number (1..n)
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 2 16 76 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

pos
5 23 A1

unit position number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

position 23 refer to MMC pack position for BZ5000 and SWU for BZ5000 with redundancy.

Output Format

If parameter UNI is specified, all boards created in the selected unit will be displayed in the following format:
BOARD = xx-xx . . . [MOD = xxxxxxxxxx ] . . . TYP = xxxxxx [ LNK = xx ] . . . . . .

3-30

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-BOARD: Query Board

On-line Commands

BOARD = xx-xx

[MOD = xxxxxxxxxx ]

TYP = xxxxxx

[ LNK = xx ]

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-31

IT-BOARD: Query Board

On-line Commands

If the BOARD parameter is specified, all data of the selected board will be displayed in the following format:
BOARD = xx-xx [MOD = xxxxxxxxxx ] TYP = xxxxxx [ LNK = xx ](Not installed)

If no parameter is specified, all boards created in the exchange will be displayed in the following format:
BOARD = xx-xx . . . BOARD = xx-xx TYP = xxxxxx . . . TYP = xxxxxx [ LNK = xx ] . . . [ LNK = xx ]

Remarks

1. 2.

The MOD, LNK and ENL2 parameters are not valid for exchanges with LPN109232249 and LPN109256842 Control Program. On exchanges with LPN109232249 and LPN109256842 Control Program, TYP parameter has a single value: TYP=MXTS.

3-32

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

SU-BOARD: Suppress Board

On-line Commands

SU-BOARD: Suppress Board


This command is used to suppress the configuration of a board position in a BZ5000 exchange unit.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
SU-BOARD : BOARD = xx-xx ;

Parameter

BOARD
Board number in format uni-pos: uni terminal unit number (1..n)
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 2 16 76 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

pos
5 23 A1

unit position number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

position 23 refer to MMC pack position for BZ5000 and SWU for BZ5000 with redundancy.

Remarks

1.

The indicated board can only be suppressed if there is no created assembly.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-33

INI-BRISUP: Begin Supervision of BRI Interface

On-line Commands

INI-BRISUP: Begin Supervision of BRI Interface


This command is used to start supervision of the ISDN terminal BRI interface.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 B1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
INI-BRISUP [ : TER = xx-xx-xx ];

Parameter

TER
Terminal number in format uni-brd-cir: uni terminal unit number (1..n)
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 16 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

brd cir

terminal board number (1..21) MAB board circuit number (1...16)

Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1. 2.

No list of terminals may be defined for starting BRI interface supervision. Supervising more than a single BRI interface at the same time is not viable.

3-34

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-BRISUP: Query BRI Interface Supervision Result

On-line Commands

IT-BRISUP: Query BRI Interface Supervision Result


This command is used to query the supervision result of the ISDN terminal BRI interface.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 B1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-BRISUP [ : TER = xx-xx-xx [, TEI = xxx ]] [ LVL = xx&..&xx ];

Parameters

TER
Terminal number in format uni-brd-cir: uni terminal unit number (1..n)
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 16 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 -001

brd cir

terminal board number (1..21) MAB board circuit number (1...16)

Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

TEI
Level 2 addressing

LVL
Level (L1..L4)

Output Format

If parameter TER was not specified, all terminals with BRI interfaces and respective supervision results will be displayed.
TER = xx-xx-xx OPSL1 = xx OPSL2 = xxx OPSB1 = xxx OPSB1 = xxx NEBE = xxx FEBE = xxx RPF = ITV|ATV|Short DUR = xxxxx TEI=xx..xx..xx ...xx
. . .

TER = xx-xx-xx OPSL1 = xx OPSL2 = xxx OPSB1 = xxx NEBE = xxx FEBE = xxx RPF = ITV|ATV|Short

OPSB1 = xxx

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-35

IT-BRISUP: Query BRI Interface Supervision Result

On-line Commands

DUR = xxxxx

TEI=xx..xx..xx ...xx

Remarks

1.

The parameters listed in the command response are: OPSL1 ITV ATV OPSL2 NCON CON OPSB1 NCON CON NCON CON NEBE FEBE DUR TEI interface level 1 operating status: Inactive Active Not connected Connected Not connected Connected interface level 2 operating status:

interface first B channel operating status

OPSB2 interface second B channel operating status: Not connected Connected Number of blocks with error received at the interface Number of blocks transmitted with error by the interface Duration of supervision terminal level 2 addressing

2. 3. 4.

The exchange automatically assigns the value to terminal level 2 addressing (TEI) on beginning the exchange of level 2 messages. The specified terminal (TER) should be the same previously defined by command INIBRISUP. When the IT-BRISUP command is executed in a BZ5000 switch or in a BZSP system working as AN, the parameter TEI is not present in the command response

3-36

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-CAL: Query Clock-Calendar

On-line Commands

IT-CAL: Query Clock-Calendar


This command is used to consult the date and time of the exchange clock-calendar
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-CAL [ : UNI = xx ] ;

Parameter

UNI
unit number (1..n):
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 2 16 76 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Output Format

If the UNI parameter is not specified, the date and time of the exchange master unit calendar will be displayed in the following format:
DAT = xx-xx-xx HOU = xx:xx:xx DAY = xxx

If the UNI parameter is specified, the selected unit calendar date and time will be displayed.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-37

MD-CAL: Modify Clock-Calendar

On-line Commands

MD-CAL: Modify Clock-Calendar


This command is used to change the date and time of the exchange clock-calendar..
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-CAL [ : DAT = xx-xx-xx, HOU = xx [-xx [-xx] ], DAY = xxx ] ;

Parameters

DAT
Date in the yy-mm-dd format: yy year (00..99) mm month (01..12) dd day (01..31)

HOU
Supervision starting time in format ho[-mi[-se]]: ho hour (00..23) mi minute (00..59) (optional) se second (00.59) (optional)

DAY
Weekday: SUN Sunday MON Monday TUE Tuesday WED Wednesday THU Thursday FRI Friday SAT Saturday

Remarks

1. 2.

Omitting minutes and seconds corresponds to specifying 00. If no parameter is specified, the exchange clock-calendar will be set to the CSR clockcalendar.

3-38

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

AT-CALSUP: Activate Call Supervision

On-line Commands

AT-CALSUP: Activate Call Supervision


This command is used to activate call supervision. Subscribers and incoming trunks programmed for supervising calls in the current operating session are submitted to supervision.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
AT-CALSUP [ : [ NCAL = xx ] [, RECD ] ] ;

Parameters

NCAL
Number of originated and terminated call simultaneously supervised (1..8)

RECD
Write supervised call data to file

Remarks

1.

When call supervision is activated, information on subscriber originated calls and incoming calls (tandem or terminating in the exchange) routed through trunks programmed for supervision are displayed. The information displayed in the call supervision window is described in the Exchange Operation Manual. The Call Supervision Log is written in an ASCII file named CALSUP.DAT, localized in the connected exchange directory, indicated by parameter PATH of command CR-EXC. On the left corner of the toolbar, the call supervision window includes button console, for alternating to the console window. When the call supervision window is displayed, the exchange load is shown in the toolbar center. A Windows facility allows alternating active windows via keys <ALT>+<TAB>.

2. 3. 4. 5.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-39

DS-CALSUP: Deactivate Call Supervision

On-line Commands

DS-CALSUP: Deactivate Call Supervision


This command is used to deactivate call supervision.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
DS-CALSUP ;

Remarks

1.

The call supervision window can also be deactivated from the system menu.

3-40

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IP-CALSUP: Query Call Supervision Programming

On-line Commands

IP-CALSUP: Query Call Supervision Programming


This command is used to display subscribers and incoming trunks programmed for call supervision.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IP-CALSUP ;

Output Format

Subscribers and trunks programmed for call supervision are displayed in the following format:
UNI = xx SUB = xxxx-xxxx&..&xxxx-xxxx TRK = xx-xx-xx&..&xx-xx-xx . . . UNI = xx SUB = xxxx-xxxx&..&xxxx-xxxx TRK = xx-xx-xx&..&xx-xx-xx

Remarks

1.

The output format of parameter SUB can de modified through Options Menu, "Output Format" submenu, on the CSR application main window.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-41

IT-CALSUP: Query Call Supervision Log

On-line Commands

IT-CALSUP: Query Call Supervision Log


This command is used to display information recorded in the Call Supervision Log.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-CALSUP [ : LOC = "xxxxxxxx" [, ENV = xxxx ] ] ;

Parameters

LOC
Exchange installation site code (up to 8 alphanumeric characters in quotes)

ENV
Operating Environment of the Exchange: CS PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4 PS5 PS6 . . PS31 PS32 Central Stage Peripheral Stage 1 Peripheral Stage 2 Peripheral Stage 3 Peripheral Stage 4 Peripheral Stage 5 Peripheral Stage 6 . . Peripheral Stage 31 Peripheral Stage 32

The number of Peripheral Stages which can be programmed on the exchange varies from 1 to n:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 32 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

3-42

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-CALSUP: Query Call Supervision Log

On-line Commands

Output Format

If parameter LOC was specified, the Call Supervision Log displayed will be contained in the required site directory; if not, the connected exchange log will be displayed. Indeterminate calls will display as follows:
DAT = xx-xx-xx HOU = xx:xx:xx SSO = Undetermined call PLAN = x SEQ = xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx SUB = xxxx-xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx(xx-xx) CLA = xx DUR = xxxx

[ DTMF = xx-xx-xx(xx-xx)]

Intra-exchange which calls will display as follows:


DAT = xx-xx-xx HOU = xx:xx:xx TYP = Intra-exchange call PLAN = x SEQ = xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx SUB = xxxx-xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx(xx-xx) TER = xx-xx-xx(xx-xx) DUR = xxxx SCC = xxxxxx

CLA = xx [DTMF =xx-xx-xx(xx-xx) ] CLA = xx [ Atd ]

Outgoing calls are displayed in the following format:


DAT = xx-xx-xx HOU = xx:xx:xx TYP = Outgoing call PLAN = x SEQ = xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx SUB = xxxx-xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx(xx-xx) CLA = xx [DTMF = xx-xx-xx(xx-xx) ] ROUT = xxxxx TRK = xx-xx-xx(xx-xx) MFC = xx-xx-xx(xx-xx) TrocaMFS = xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx DUR = xxxx SCC = xxxxxx [ Atd ]

Incoming calls are displayed in the following format:


DAT = xx-xx-xx HOU = xx:xx:xx TYP = Incoming call PLAN = x ROUT = xxxxx TRK = xx-xx-xx(xx-xx) MFC = xx-xx-xx(xx-xx) TER = xx-xx-xx(xx-xx) CLA = xx TrocaMFE= xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx DUR = xxxx [ Atd ]

Tandem calls are displayed in the following format:


DAT = xx-xx-xx HOU = xx:xx:xx TYP = Tool call PLAN = x SEQ = xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ROUT = xxxxx TRK = xx-xx-xx(xx-xx) ROUT = xxxxx TRK = xx-xx-xx(xx-xx) TrocaMFS =xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx TrocaMFE =xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx DUR = xxxx

MFC = xx-xx-xx(xx-xx)

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-43

IT-CALSUP: Query Call Supervision Log

On-line Commands

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

Call starting dates and times are displayed in parameters DAT and HOU. Originated call dialed digits times are displayed in parameter SEQ. In intra-exchange calls, the calling party directory number, terminal number and terminal class are displayed in parameters SUB, TER and CLA on the fourth line, while the called party terminal number and terminal class are displayed in parameters TER and CLA on the fifth line. In calls originating from telephone sets with multifrequency dial signaling, the number of the DTMF receiver used to analyze dialing is displayed in parameter DTMF. In tandem calls, the number of the route and incoming trunk are displayed in parameters ROUT and TRK on the fourth line, while the number of the route and outgoing trunk are displayed in parameters ROUT and TRK on the fifth line. MF signaling exchange in outgoing, incoming, and tandem calls is displayed in parameter TROCA MF. Sent signals are displayed on the upper line and received signals on the bottom line. The call duration is displayed in parameter DUR (in seconds). The number of pulses added to the subscriber charging counter is displayed in parameter SCC. Call answering is indicated by the presence of parameter Atd. Parameter ENV should be used for CS type exchanges, i.e., with created EPs, specified when displaying the call supervision log of existing EPs operating environments is required. It may be omitted if the required subscriber is already connected.

4. 5.

6.

7. 8. 9. 10.

3-44

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

PR-CALSUP: Program Call Supervision

On-line Commands

PR-CALSUP: Program Call Supervision


This command is used to program call supervision, specifying the subscribers to be overseen for originated calls and the trunks to be supervised for incoming calls.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
PR-CALSUP : { [ SUB = [xxxx]-xxxx&..&xxxx ] [, TRK = xx-xx-xx&..&xx-xx-xx ] } ;

Parameters

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

TRK
Trunk number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
x 2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249 LPN109256842 LPN109256826 LPN109256834

brd
13..20 01..20 01..19 01..05 A1 B1 D1 -

trunk board number


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249 LPN109256842 LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir
n 31 512 A1 -

board circuit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249 LPN109256842 LPN109256826 LPN109256834

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-45

PR-CALSUP: Program Call Supervision

On-line Commands

3-46

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

PR-CALSUP: Program Call Supervision

On-line Commands

Remarks

1. 2.

Programming call supervision only applies to the current operating session. With the CSR operating in local connection mode, up to 8 subscribers and 8 incoming trunks can be programmed for simultaneous supervision. From the SOF98119E4 and SOF98158D4, up to 30 incoming trunks may be programmed, simultaneously. With the CSR operating in remote connection mode, up to 2 subscribers and 2 incoming trunks can be programmed for simultaneous supervision. To include subscriber or incoming trunks in call supervision, simply specify the entities to be included. The supervision of alarm calls from the exchange to the CSR can also be programmed by specifying the directory number reserved for answering CSR calls in parameter SUB.

3. 4. 5.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-47

RP-CALSUP: Remove Call Supervision Programming

On-line Commands

RP-CALSUP: Remove Call Supervision Programming


This is used to remove subscribers or incoming trunks from call supervision programming.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249 LPN109256842 LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
RP-CALSUP [ : { [ SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx&..&xxxx ] [, TRK = xx-xx-xx&..&xx-xx-xx ] } ] ;

Parameters

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

TRK
Trunk number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni terminal unit number (1..n)
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 2 16 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

brd
13..20 01..20 01..19 01..05 A1 B1 D1 -

trunk board number


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir
31 512 A1 -

board circuit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

Remarks
Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page 109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

3-48

RP-CALSUP: Remove Call Supervision Programming

On-line Commands

1.

If no parameter was specified, all subscribers and incoming trunks will be removed from programmed call supervision.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-49

RV-CALSUP: Remove Call Supervision Log

On-line Commands

RV-CALSUP: Remove Call Supervision Log


This command is used to remove the Call Supervision Log.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
RV-CALSUP [ : LOC = "xxxxxxxx" [, ENV = xxxx ] ] ;

Parameters

LOC
Exchange installation site code (up to 8 alphanumeric characters in quotes)

ENV
Operating Environment of the Exchange: CS Central Stage PS1 Peripheral Stage 1 PS2 Peripheral Stage 2 PS3 Peripheral Stage 3 PS4 Peripheral Stage 4 PS5 Peripheral Stage 5 . . . . PS31 Peripheral Stage 31 PS32 Peripheral Stage 32 The number of Peripheral Stages, which can be programmed on the exchange, varies from 1 to n:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109256826LPN109256834 32 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1.

Parameter ENV should be applied to CS type exchanges, i.e., those with created EPs, being specified when removing the call supervision log for existing PS environments is required. It can be omitted if the connected environment is required.

3-50

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

AT-CALTST: Activate Test Call Generation

On-line Commands

AT-CALTST: Activate Test Call Generation


This command is used for automatically generating test calls.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
AT-CALTST : SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx, SEQ= "xx..xx" [, NCAL = xxx [, INT = xxx ] ] [, DUR = xxx ] ;

Parameters

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

SEQ
Digits sequence to be dialed from the specified terminal on the test calls (up to 30 digits). # and * characters are acceptable.

NCAL
Number of originated calls to be dialed in the test (1..100)

INT
Interval between calls in seconds (1..300)

DUR
Duration of test calls in seconds (1..300)

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

If parameter NCAL was not specified, a single test call will be made. If parameter DUR was not specified, the test call duration will be 10 seconds. If parameter INT was not specified, the interval between calls will be 15 seconds.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-51

DS-CALTST: Deactivate Test Call Generation

On-line Commands

DS-CALTST: Deactivate Test Call Generation


This command is used to deactivate automatic test call generation.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
DS-CALTST : SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx ;

Parameter

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

3-52

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IP-CALTST: Query Test Call Programming

On-line Commands

IP-CALTST: Query Test Call Programming


This command is used to list test-programmed subscribers, trunks, MFC senders/receivers and DTMF receivers.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IP-CALTST ;

Output Format
SUB = xxxx-xxxx TRK = xx-xx-xx&..&xx-xx-xx MFC = xx-xx-xx&..&xx-xx-xx [ DTMF = xx-xx-xx&..&xx-xx-xx ]

Remarks

1.

The output format of the SUB parameter can be changed through the Options menu, Output Format submenu, on the CSR main window.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-53

PR-CALTST: Program Test Calls

On-line Commands

PR-CALTST: Program Test Calls


This command is used to program subscribers, trunks, MFC senders/receivers and DTMF receivers for testing purposes.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
PR-CALTST : { [ SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx&..&xxxx ] [, TRK = xx-xx-xx&..&xx-xx-xx ] [, MFC = xx-xx-xx&..&xx-xx-xx ] [, DTMF = xx-xx-xx&..&xx-xx-xx ] } ;

Parameters

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

TRK
Trunk number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd
13..20 01..20 01..19 01..05 A1 B1 D1 -

trunk board number


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir
31 A1

board circuit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

3-54

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

PR-CALTST: Program Test Calls

On-line Commands

512

001

001

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-55

PR-CALTST: Program Test Calls

On-line Commands

MFC
MFC sender/receiver ID in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd
21..22 20..22 20..21 01..05 A1 B1 D1 -

MFC sender/receiver board number


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir

board circuit number (1..n). (Considering those n MFC sender/receiver, n-x can be configured as DTMF detectors)
A1 E1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

n (x) SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 12 (2) 24 (4) 60 A1 F1 -

DTMF
DTMF receiver number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd
n 01..05 21..22 20..22 20..21 A1 B1 D1

DTMF receiver board number (20..21)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir
20 40 60 A1 F1 -

board circuit number (1..19)


A1 E1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

Remarks

3-56

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

PR-CALTST: Program Test Calls

On-line Commands

1. 2. 3.

At least one parameter must be specified. At most 8 subscribers, 8 trunks, 8 MFC senders/receivers and 8 DTMF receivers can be programmed for simultaneous testing. Test calls are forwarded according to Secondary Outgoing Traffic Routing Plan data.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-57

RP-CALTST: Remove Test Call Programming

On-line Commands

RP-CALTST: Remove Test Call Programming


This command is used to remove subscribers, trunks, MFC senders/receivers, and DTMF receivers from the test call programming.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
RP-CALTST [ : [ SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx&..&xxxx ] [, TRK = xx-xx-xx&..&xx-xx-xx ] [, MFC = xx-xx-xx&..&xx-xx-xx ] [, DTMF = xx-xx-xx&..&xx-xx-xx ] ] ;

Parameters

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

TRK
Trunk number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd
13..20 01..20 01..19 01..05 A1 B1 D1 -

trunk board number


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir
31 A1

board circuit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

3-58

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

RP-CALTST: Remove Test Call Programming

On-line Commands

512

001

001

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-59

RP-CALTST: Remove Test Call Programming

On-line Commands

MFC
MFC sender/receiver ID in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd
21..22 20..22 20..21 01..05 A1 B1 D1 -

MFC sender/receiver board number


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir

board circuit number (1..n). (Considering those n MFC sender/receiver, n-x can be configured as DTMF detectors)
A1 E1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

n (x) SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 12 (2) 24 (4) 60 A1 F1 -

DTMF
DTMF receiver number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni terminal unit number (1..n)
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 2 16 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

brd
n 01..05 21..22 20..22 20..21 A1 B1 D1

DTMF receiver board number (20..21)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir
20 40 60 A1 F1 -

board circuit number (1..19)


A1 E1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

Remarks

1.

If no parameter was specified, all subscribers, trunks, MFC senders/receivers, and DTMF
Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page 109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

3-60

RP-CALTST: Remove Test Call Programming

On-line Commands

receivers will be removed from the test call programming.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-61

IT-CHASSV: Query Supplementary Service Charging

On-line Commands

IT-CHASSV: Query Supplementary Service Charging


This command is used to display the charging applied to each supplementary service action.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-CHASSV [ : SSV = xxxxxx ] ;

Parameter

SSV
Supplementary services: CAID calling line identification presentation BLCALL originating call barring CALINQ call consult CAWAIT call waiting REGCAL recorded call CLIP originated number id (isdn) CLIRC connected number id display restriction on a call basis CLIRP permanent restriction of connected number id display CLIRO calling line identification restriction overwrite COLP connected number id display COLRC connected number id display restriction on a call basis COLRP permanent restriction of connected number id display CUG closed user group INQTRF call transfer ITCONF three party service ALARCLK alarm call service ABDIAL abbreviated dialing DIRLIN hotline EXELIN timed hotline MSN multiple user number DNDIS do not disturb PRIORI priority CDR call detail record SBA sub addressing TCXPOCP diversion to voice mail on busy TCXPNR diversion to voice mail on no reply TPO terminal portability REVB reversed charging TRFNA call diversion on no reply TRFBSY call diversion on busy TMPTRF call diversion immediate UUS user-to-user signaling ABSENT absent subscriber REMPRG remote programming MCTP malicious call trace in permanent mode

3-62

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-CHASSV: Query Supplementary Service Charging

On-line Commands

MCTD malicious call trace on demand


. The Supplementary Services CLIRP, COLP, COLRP, CUG, MSN, CLIRC, CLIRO, COLRC, SBA, TPO and UUS are valid only for Control Program SOF 98119 A1, SGP 98092 A1 and LPN109253856.001 or higher. . The Supplementary Services TCXPOCP and TCXPNR are valid only for Control Program SOF 98119F1, SGP 98092F1, SOF 98158E1, SOF 00092C1, LPN109253856.001, LPN109253864.001, LPN109232249.001 or higher. . ABSENT is valid for exchanges with LPN109253856.003, LPN109253864.003, LPN109232249.002 or higher. . REMPRG is valid for exchanges with LPN109253856.004 or higher. The Supplementary Services MCTP e MCTD are valid only for Control Program LPN 109253856.004 or higher. These services are available only for POTS subscribers and for Argentina Country.

Output Format

If parameter SSV was specified, charging corresponding to each selected supplementary service action will be displayed in the following format:
SSV = xxxxxx ACTI ACTI ACTI ACTI = = = = xxx xxx xxx xxx CHCL CHCL CHCL CHCL = = = = xx xx xx xx

If parameter SSV was not specified, charging corresponding to each action of all tolled supplementary service will be displayed in the following format:
SSV = xxxxxx ACTI ACTI ACTI ACTI = = = = xxx xxx xxx xxx . . . xxx xxx xxx xxx CHCL CHCL CHCL CHCL = = = = xx xx xx xx [BILSYS] [BILSYS] [BILSYS] [BILSYS]

SSV = xxxxxx ACTI ACTI ACTI ACTI

= = = =

CHCL CHCL CHCL CHCL

= = = =

xx xx xx xx

[BILSYS] [BILSYS] [BILSYS] [BILSYS]

Remarks

1.

Supplementary services COLP, CLIRP, CLIRC, COLRP, COLRC, SBA, TPO, MSN, and UUS are ISDN-terminal specific.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-63

MD-CHASSV: Modify Supplementary Service Charging

On-line Commands

MD-CHASSV: Modify Supplementary Service Charging


This command is used to modify the charging of each supplementary service action.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-CHASSV : SSV = xxxxxx, ACTI = xxx, CHCL = xx [, CHP = x ] [, CHE = x ] [, BILSYS ] ;

Parameters

SSV
Supplementary services: CAID calling line identification presentation BLCALL originating call barring CALINQ call consult CAWAIT call waiting REGCAL recorded call CLIP originated number id (isdn) CLIRC connected number id display restriction on a call basis CLIRP permanent restriction of connected number id display CLIRO calling line identification restriction overwrite COLP connected number id display COLRC connected number id display restriction on a call basis COLRP permanent restriction of connected number id display CUG closed user group INQTRF call transfer ITCONF three party service ALARCLK alarm call service ABDIAL abbreviated dialing DIRLIN hotline EXELIN timed hotline MSN multiple user number DNDIS do not disturb PRIORI priority CDR call detail record SBA sub addressing TCXPOCP diversion to voice mail on busy TCXPNR diversion to voice mail on no reply TPO terminal portability REVB reversed charging TRFNA call diversion on no reply TRFBSY call diversion on busy TMPTRF call diversion immediate UUS user-to-user signaling ABSENT absent subscriber REMPRG remote programming MCTP malicious call trace in permanent mode

3-64

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-CHASSV: Modify Supplementary Service Charging

On-line Commands

MCTD malicious call trace on demand


. The Supplementary Services CLIRP, COLP, COLRP, CUG, MSN, CLIRC, CLIRO, COLRC, SBA, TPO and UUS are valid only for Control Program SOF 98119 A1, SGP 98092 A1 and LPN109253856.001 or higher. . The Supplementary Services TCXPOCP and TCXPNR are valid only for Control Program SOF 98119F1, SGP 98092F1, SOF 98158E1, SOF 00092C1, LPN109253856.001, LPN109253864.001, LPN109232249.001 or higher. . ABSENT is valid for exchanges with LPN109253856.003, LPN109253864.003, LPN109232249.002 or higher. . REMPRG is valid for exchanges with LPN109253856.004 or higher. The Supplementary Services MCTP e MCTD are valid only for Control Program LPN 109253856.004 or higher. These services are available only for POTS subscribers and for Argentina Country.

ACTI
Action to be charged: PRG programming KAN cancellation VER verification EFU use accomplish

CHCL
Charging class (1..32)

CHP
Charging Plan (1..8)

CHE
Charging Environment(1..8) .

BILSYS
Specifies the supplementary service action to be charged

Remarks

1.

Supplementary services CLIRC, CLIRP, COLP, COLRC, COLRP, TPO, UUS, CUG and SBA are ISDN-terminal specific.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-65

IT-CHCL: Query Charging Class

On-line Commands

IT-CHCL: Query Charging Class


This command is used to display the charging classes programmed in the exchange. Each charging class consists of a set of charging methods, defined for each modality.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-CHCL [ : CHCL = xx [, CHP = x ] ];

Parameters

CHCL
Charging class (1..32)

CHP
Charging Plan (1..8)

Output Format

If the CHCL parameter is specified, all charging plans and charging methods defined for the selected class will be displayed in the following format:
CHP = x CHCL = xx CHM = xx . . . CHM = xx CHM = xx . . . CHM = xx MET = xxx [ . . . MET = xxx [ MET = xxx [ . . . MET = xxx [ CAD = xxxx ] . . . CAD = xxxx ] CAD = xxxx ] . . . CAD = xxxx ] [ NPUL = xx . . . [ NPUL = xx [ NPUL = xx . . . [ NPUL = xx ]

CHP = x

CHCL = xx

] ]

3-66

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-CHCL: Query Charging Class

On-line Commands

If the CHCL parameter is not specified, all charging classes programmed in the exchange will be displayed in the following format:
CHP = x CHCL = xx CHM = xx . . . CHM = xx CHM = xx . . . CHM = xx MET = xxx [ CAD = xxxx ] . . . . . . MET = xxx [ CAD = xxxx ] MET = xxx [ CAD = xxxx ] . . . . . . MET = xxx [ CAD = xxxx ] [ NPUL = xx ] . . . [ NPUL = xx ] [ NPUL = xx ] . . . [ NPUL = xx ]

CHCL = xx

. . . CHCL = xx CHM = xx . . . CHM = xx CHM = xx . . . CHM = xx MET = xxx [ CAD = xxxx ] . . . . . . MET = xxx [ CAD = xxxx ] MET = xxx [ CAD = xxxx ] . . . . . . MET = xxx [ CAD = xxxx ] [ NPUL = xx ] . . . [ NPUL = xx ] [ NPUL = xx ] . . . [ NPUL = xx ]

CHP = x

CHCL = xx

. . . CHCL = xx

CHM = xx . . . CHM = xx

MET = xxx [ CAD = xxxx ] . . . . . . MET = xxx [ CAD = xxxx ]

[ NPUL = xx ] . . . [ NPUL = xx ]

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-67

MD-CHCL: Modify Billing Class

On-line Commands

MD-CHCL: Modify Billing Class


This command is used to modify the charging method defined for a call accounting modality as to a given charging class.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-CHCL : CHCL = xx, CHM = xx, MET = xxx [, CAD = xxxx ] [, NPUL = xx ] [, CHP = x] ;

Parameters

CHCL
Charging class (1..32)

CHM
Charging modality (1..32) Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

MET
Billing method NCH PPC PKA IKA MKA SYNC not charged pulses per call Pure Karlson Enhanced Karlson Modified Karlson synchronized

CAD
Charging cycle (4..30000), given in number of intervals of 100 ms
n 100 ms 300 ms SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

NPUL
Number of charging pulses generated on answering the call (1..255) Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

3-68

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-CHCL: Modify Billing Class

On-line Commands

CHP
Charging Plan (1..8)

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-69

MD-CHCL: Modify Billing Class

On-line Commands

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

The charging cycle should only be specified when the charging method is Pure Karlson (PKA), Enhanced Karlson (IKA), Modified Karlson (MKA) or synchronized (SYNC). To delete the programming of the method defined for a modality of a charging class specify MET = WMET. The NPUL parameter applies to the synchronized (SYNC) and pulses per call (PPC). If the NPUL parameter is not specified, a charging pulse will be generated on answering the call.. The length of the interval of each cycle is 255 If no charging plan is specified, the class alterations will apply to the first charging plan (CHP=1). The interval period (n) of each cadence varies according to the Control Program:
n 100 ms SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

4. 5. 6.

3-70

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-CHM: Query Charging Modality

On-line Commands

IT-CHM: Query Charging Modality


This command is used to query charging modalities programmed for weekdays and holidays.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-CHM [ : DAY = xxx ] [, CHP = x ] [, CHE = x ] ] ;

Parameters

DAY
Weekday or holiday, where: SUN Sunday MON Monday TUE Tuesday WED Wednesday THU Thursday FRI Friday SAT Saturday HOL Holiday

CHP
Charging Plan (1..8)

CHE
Charging Environment(1..8) .

Output Format

If no parameter is specified, the charging plans, charging types and charging modalities programmed for each hour of every programmed day will be displayed in the following format:
CHP = x CHE = x DAY = xxx DAY = xxx DAY = xxx . . CHP = x CHE = x DAY = xxx DAY = xxx HOU = xx:xx [&& xx:xx] HOU = xx:xx [&& xx:xx] . . . HOU = xx:xx [&& xx:xx] CHM = xx CHM = xx HOU = xx:xx [&& xx:xx] HOU = xx:xx [&& xx:xx] . . HOU = xx:xx [&& xx:xx] CHM = xx CHM = xx CHM = xx

DAY = xxx 109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CHM = xx

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-71

IT-CHM: Query Charging Modality

On-line Commands

If the DAY parameter is specified, the charging modalities programmed for each hour of the selected day of the first charging plan (CHP=1) and first charging environment (CHE=1) will be displayed in the following format:
CHP = 1 CHE = 1 DAY = xxx DAY = xxx HOU = xx:xx [&& xx:xx] HOU = xx:xx [&& xx:xx] . . . . . . HOU = xx:xx [&& xx:xx] CHM = xx CHM = xx

CHM = xx

If CHP parameter is specified, all charging types and charging modalities programmed for all periods of every day of the week and holiday of the selected charging plan will be displayed in the following format:
CHP = x CHE = x DAY = xxx HOU = xx:xx [&& xx:xx] CHM = xx DAY = xxx HOU = xx:xx [&& xx:xx] CHM = xx . . . DAY = xxx HOU = xx:xx [&& xx:xx] CHM = xx

If the CHE parameter is specified, the charging plans and charging modalities for all periods of every day of the week and holiday of the selected charging environment will be displayed in the following format:
CHP = x CHE = x DAY = xxx DAY = xxx HOU = xx:xx [&& xx:xx] HOU = xx:xx [&& xx:xx] . . . HOU = xx:xx [&& xx:xx] CHM = xx CHM = xx

DAY = xxx . . . CHE = x

CHM = xx

CHP = x

DAY = xxx DAY = xxx

DAY = xxx

HOU = xx:xx [&& xx:xx] HOU = xx:xx [&& xx:xx] . . . HOU = xx:xx [&& xx:xx]

CHM = xx CHM = xx

CHM = xx

3-72

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-CHM: Modify Charging Modality

On-line Commands

MD-CHM: Modify Charging Modality


This command is used to change charging modalities programmed for a weekday or holiday.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-CHM : DAY = xxx, HOU = xx[-xx]&..&xx[-xx], CHM = xx [, CHP = x ] [, CHE = x ];

Parameters

DAY
Weekday or holiday, where: SUN Sunday MON Monday TUE Tuesday WED Wednesday THU Thursday FRI Friday SAT Saturday HOL Holiday

HOU
Time in the hh-mi format: hh hour (00..23) mi minute (00 or 30)

CHM
Charging modality (1..32) Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

CHP
Charging Plan (1..8)

CHE
Charging Environment(1..8)

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-73

MD-CHM: Modify Charging Modality

On-line Commands

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

The initial value of weekday and holiday charging modalities is 1. Parameter HOU should be defined with the minute field filled in (00 or 30). No values either than 00 or 30 minutes will be accepted. If parameter CHP is not specified, the changes to the charging modality will be applied to the first charging plan (CHP =1).

3-74

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-CLA: Create Terminal Class

On-line Commands

CR-CLA: Create Terminal Class


This command is used to create a terminal class.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
CR-CLA : CLA= xxx, NAM = "xxxxxxxx", OCT = xx, TCT = xx, RTT= { NRESTR | TOREST | xx&...&xx }, SVP = xxxxxxx [, ROU1 = xxxxx [, ROU2 = xxxxx ] ] [, RTO = xx&...&xx] [, TLIB = xxx] [, MAXCOIN = xxxxx ] , DTE = xx ;

Parameters

CLA
Terminal class (1..n), where n can be:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 32 128 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

NAM
Designation of terminal class (up to 8 alphanumeric characters, in apostrophes)

OCT
Originating category (1..15), i. e., signal to be sent in exchanging MFC signaling in outgoing calls, when the calling terminal category is requested

TCT
Terminating category (1..15), i. e., end of selection signal to be sent in exchanging MFC signaling in incoming calls for the terminal

RTT
Termination restriction: NRESTR unrestricted TOREST fully restricted or list of values (1..14 & CDC & LINTST), where (1..14) indicate the originating category of terminals that cannot call terminals of that class, CDC indicates block for incoming CDC calls and LINTST indicates restricted for line testing.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-75

CR-CLA: Create Terminal Class

On-line Commands

SVP
Service parameter: PAYPSP DINVPOL ROUSSS FREQ INVPOL PRPAID1 SERA NORSRV Switching semi-public telephone Generating double polarity reversal Forwarded according to the requested support service 12 or 16 kHz pulse generation for charging in TP Polarity reversal generation Permits the subscriber terminal to use the pre-paid service Class destined to the subscriber terminal used for the external equipment of line test: SERA. Normal service

SERA service parameter is only valid for exchanges with SOF 98119C3, SOF 98158B3 or LPN109232249.001 Control Program versions or higher. PRPAID1 parameter is only valid for exchanges with SOF 98119D1, SOF 98158C1 or LPN109232249.001 Control Program versions or higher.

ROU1
Identification of the route of first choice: B1..Bn for two-way routes; S1..Sn for outgoing routes.
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 32 1024 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ROU2
Identification of the route of second choice: B1..Bn for two-way routes; S1..Sn for outgoing routes.
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 32 1024 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

RTO
List of originating restrictions values {TOREST | NRESTR | INTRA, LOC, REG, DDD, IDD, CDC, LSS, ISS, SPE1, SPE2, SPE3, SPE4, SPE5, SPE6, SPE7, SPE8} Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

TLIB
Type of disconnection NRL normal IMME immediate

MAXCOIN
Maximum number of coins in public telephone coin box (1..10000)

3-76

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-CLA: Create Terminal Class

On-line Commands

DTE
Billing and routing discriminator (1..6). Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 001 001 -

Remarks

1.

The immediate type of disconnection affects terminated calls handling: Internal calls - The connection is broken when the called party disconnects and the busy tone is sent to the caller. No timing is applied to called party re-answering. Calls are normally disconnected when the calling party hangs up. Incoming calls - When the called party hangs up the connection is broken, the "reverse disconnects and busy tone" signal will be sent immediately. Calls are normally disconnected by the calling party hanging up.

2.

The exchange operating procedure that corresponds to each service parameter is described below: INVPOL - generating polarity reversal In calls from terminals with this service parameter, the exchange applies a single ramped polarity reversal at the called party answering and hanging up. DINVPOL - generating double polarity reversal In calls from terminals with this service parameter, the exchange applies two-ramped polarity reversals separated by a 900 ms interval at the times established by the billing associated to the exchange. This service parameter should be specified for public telephones using double polarity reversal for controlling coin collection. FREQ - 12 kHz pulse generation In calls from terminals with this service parameter, the exchange generate a 12 kHz pulse with a 150 ms length at the times established by the billing associated to the exchange. This service parameter should be specified for public telephones using 12 kHz tone for controlling coin collection. PAYPSP - Switching semi-public telephone This parameter should be specified for semi-public telephones. In calls from terminals with this service parameter, the exchange will detect whether the set switch is in the normal position or in the public telephone position, selecting, in the normal position, the class data specified for parameter PAYPSP and, in the public telephone position, the class data of the next number. NORSRV - normal service This parameter indicates normal service and should be specified for common subscriber terminal.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-77

CR-CLA: Create Terminal Class

On-line Commands

ROUSSS - forwarding according to the requested support service. This parameter indicates that the exchange, before forwarding calls, should check which support service was requested by the subscriber, which could be voice, audio or unrestricted 64 kbit/s. If the support service requested by the subscriber is VOICE, the call will be forwarded according to the parameters defined by the subscriber current class.. If the support service requested by the subscriber is AUDIO, the call will be forwarded according to the parameters defined by the next class after subscriber current class. If the support service requested by the subscriber is NRESTR, the call will be forwarded according to the parameters defined by the next class after subscriber current class. PRPAID1 - Permits the subscriber terminal to use the pre-paid service SERA - Class to subscriber terminals that will be used by the external line test equipment. This parameter should be used with RTT = TOREST and the terminal should be fully blocked.. 3. The service parameters PRPAID1 e SERA are valid only to exchanges running the controller program equals to or greater than SOF 98119C3, SOF 98158B3, LPN109253856.001 or LPN109253864.001.

3-78

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-CLA: Query Terminal Class

On-line Commands

IT-CLA: Query Terminal Class


This command is used to display the terminal classes programmed in the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-CLA [ : CLA = xxx ] ;

Parameter

CLA
Terminal class (1..n), where n can be:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 32 128 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Output Format

If parameter CLA is specified, the selected terminal class parameters are displayed in the following format:
CLA = xxx NAM = xxxxxxxx OCT = xx TCT = xx SVP = xxxxxxx RTT = { NRESTR | TOREST | xx&...&xx } TLIB = xxx RTO = { NRESTR | TOREST | xx&...&xx} [ MAXCOIN = xxxx ]

If CLA parameter is not specified the parameters of all programmed terminal classes are displayed in the following format:
CLA = xxx NAM = xxxxxxxx OCT = xx TCT = xx SVP = xxxxxxx RTT = { NRESTR | TOREST | xx&...&xx } TLIB = xxx RTO = { NRESTR | TOREST | xx&...&xx} [ MAXCOIN = xxxx ] NAM = xxxxxxxx OCT = xx TCT = xx SVP = xxxxxxx RTT = { NRESTR | TOREST | xx&...&xx } TLIB = xxx RTO = { NRESTR | TOREST | xx&...&xx} [ MAXCOIN = xxxx ]

. . CLA = xxx

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-79

MD-CLA: Modify Terminal Class

On-line Commands

MD-CLA: Modify Terminal Class


This command is used to change the parameters of a terminal class.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-CLA : CLA = xxx { [, NAM = "xxxxxxxx" ] [, OCT = xx ] [, TCT = xx ] [, RTT = { NRESTR | TOREST | xx&...&xx } ] [, SVP = xxxxxxx ] [,RTO = xx&..&xx ] [, TLIB = xxxx ] [, ROU1 = xxxxx [, ROU2 = xxxxx ] ] [, MAXCOIN = xxxxx ]} ;

Parameters

CLA
Terminal class (1..n), where n can be:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 32 128 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

NAM
Designation of terminal class (up to 8 alphanumeric characters, in apostrophes)

OCT
Originating category (1..15), i. e., signal to be sent in exchanging MFC signaling in outgoing calls, when the calling terminal category is requested

TCT
Terminating category (1..15), i. e., end of selection signal to be sent in exchanging MFC signaling in incoming calls for the terminal

RTT
Termination restriction: NRESTR unrestricted TOREST fully restricted or list of values (1..14 & CDC & LINTST), where (1..14) indicate the originating category of terminals that cannot call terminals of that class, CDC indicates block for incoming CDC calls and LINTST indicates restricted for line testing.

3-80

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-CLA: Modify Terminal Class

On-line Commands

SVP
Service parameter: PAYPSP DINVPOL ROUSSS FREQ INVPOL PRPAID1 SERA NORSRV Switching semi-public telephone Generating double polarity reversal Forwarded according to the requested support service 12 or 16 kHz pulse generation for charging in TP Polarity reversal generation Permits the subscriber terminal to use the pre-paid service Class destined to the subscriber terminal used for the external equipment of line test: SERA. Normal service

SERA service parameter is only valid for exchanges with SOF 98119C3, SOF 98158B3 or LPN109232249.001 Control Program versions or higher. PRPAID1 parameter is only valid for exchanges with SOF 98119D1, SOF 98158C1 or LPN109232249.001 Control Program versions or higher.

RTO
List of originating restrictions values {TOREST | NRESTR | INTRA, LOC, REG, DDD, IDD, CDC, LSS, ISS, SPE1, SPE2, SPE3, SPE4, SPE5, SPE6, SPE7, SPE8} Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

TLIB
Type of disconnection NRL normal IMME immediate

ROU1
Identification of the route of first choice: B1..Bn for two-way routes; S1..Sn for outgoing routes.
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 32 1024 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ROU2
Identification of the route of second choice: B1..Bn for two-way routes; S1..Sn for outgoing routes.
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 32 1024 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

MAXCOIN
Maximum number of coins in public telephone coin box (1..10000)

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-81

MD-CLA: Modify Terminal Class

On-line Commands

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

At least one of the optional parameters should be specified. Only specified parameters are altered. To delete the supervision programming of the number of coins collected by public telephones, specify MAXCOIN = 0. Refer to the remarks on command CR-CLA (Create Terminal Class).

3-82

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

SU-CLA: Suppress Terminal Class

On-line Commands

SU-CLA: Suppress Terminal Class


This command is used to suppress a terminal class.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
SU-CLA : CLA = xxx ;

Parameter

CLA
Terminal class (1..n), where n can be:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 32 128 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1.

A terminal class can only be suppressed when there are subscribers with this class of terminal.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-83

CR-CLKSYNC: Create Synchronization Clock

On-line Commands

CR-CLKSYNC: Create Synchronization Clock


This command is used to create a synchronization clock in an exchange unit.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
CR-CLKSYNC : CLK = x, UNI = xx ;

Parameters

CLK
Synchronization clock (1..3)

UNI
Unit number:
UNI Plans SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 5 65..68 2 4 4 A1 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

Up to three synchronization clocks can be configured in the exchange. Only switching units configured with MMCIR, MMCIIR or MCC boards can be assigned parameter UNI. This command is not valid for exchanges with LPN109232249 or LPN109256842 Control Program.

3-84

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-CLKSYNC: Query Synchronization Clock (1)

On-line Commands

IT-CLKSYNC: Query Synchronization Clock (1)


This command is used to query the exchange synchronization clock(s).
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-CLKSYNC [ : CLK = x ] ;

Parameter

CLK
Synchronization clock (1..3)

Output Format

If parameter CLK was specified, the data relative to the synchronization clock are displayed in the following format:
CLK = x UNI = xx VOLTAGE = xx VA = xxxxx VB = xxxxx MASTER = x VC = xxxxx [ REF = x ] VD = xxxxx [ SYNC ] VE = xxxxx

If parameter CLK was not specified, the data relative to the synchronization clocks are displayed as follows:
CLK = x . . . CLK = x UNI = xx VOLTAGE = xx VA = xxxxx VB = xxxxx . . . . . . UNI = xx VOLTAGE = xx VA = xxxxx VB = xxxxx MASTER = x [ REF = x ] [ SYNC ] VC = xxxxx VD = xxxxx VE = xxxxx . . . . . . . . . MASTER = x [ REF = x ] [ SYNC ] VC = xxxxx VD = xxxxx VE = xxxxx

Remarks 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. VOLTAGE is the voltage value applied to the clock D/A. Mnemonic MASTER indicates the clock considered master by the current clock. Mnemonic SYNC indicates if the clock is synchronized to the master clock. The VOLTAGE, MASTER and SYNC data are irrelevant for a failed clock. Mnemonic REF indicates which external reference is in use by the exchange. If there are no external references, the exchange will operate in self-synchronization mode.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-85

IT-CLKSYNC: Query Synchronization Clock (2)

On-line Commands

IT-CLKSYNC: Query Synchronization Clock (2)

This command is used to query the exchange synchronization clock(s).


Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 001 001 -

Input Format
IT-CLKSYNC [ : UNI = x ] ;

Parameter

UNI
unit number of the exchange (1..2) Compatibility:
LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249 LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 001 001 -

Output Format

If the UNI parameter is specified, data regarding the synchronism clock is displayed, on the following format:
UNI = xx CLK = PRI CLK = SEC VOLTAGE = xx MASTER = x [ REF = x ] [ SYNC ] VA = xxxxx VB = xxxxx VC = xxxxx VD = xxxxx VE = xxxxx VOLTAGE = xx MASTER = x [ REF = x ] [ SYNC ] VA = xxxxx VB = xxxxx VC = xxxxx VD = xxxxx VE = xxxxx

If the UNI parameter is not specified, data regarding the synchronism clock of each unit is displayed , on the following format:
UNI = 01 CLK = PRI CLK = SEC UNI = 02 CLK = PRI CLK = SEC VOLTAGE = xx MASTER = x [ REF = x ] [ SYNC ] VA = xxxxx VB = xxxxx VC = xxxxx VD = xxxxx VE = xxxxx VOLTAGE = xx MASTER = x [ REF = x ] [ SYNC ] VA = xxxxx VB = xxxxx VC = xxxxx VD = xxxxx VE = xxxxx VOLTAGE = xx MASTER = x [ REF = x ] [ SYNC ] VA = xxxxx VB = xxxxx VC = xxxxx VD = xxxxx VE = xxxxx VOLTAGE = xx MASTER = x [ REF = x ] [ SYNC ] VA = xxxxx VB = xxxxx VC = xxxxx VD = xxxxx VE = xxxxx

3-86

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-CLKSYNC: Query Synchronization Clock (2)

On-line Commands

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

TENSAO is the voltage value applied to the clock D/A. Mnemonic MESTRE indicates the clock considered master by the current clock. Mnemonic SYNC indicates if the clock is synchronized to the master clock. The TENSAO, MESTRE and SYNC data are irrelevant for a failed clock. Mnemonic REF indicates which external reference is in use by the exchange. On exchanges with LPN109232249 and LPN109256842 Control Program, references of the first units are 1 to 5, and of the second units are 6 to 10 and so on and so forth. If there are no external references, the exchange will operate in self-synchronization mode. Mnemonic REF, for exchanges with LPN109232249 and LPN109256842 Control Program, can have the values PRI and SEC, indicating the main master (relating to the fist board of each unit) or secondary master (relating to the second board of each unit), respectively.

6.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-87

SU-CLKSYNC: Suppress Synchronization Clock

On-line Commands

SU-CLKSYNC: Suppress Synchronization Clock


This command is used to suppress a synchronization clock in the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
SU-CLKSYNC : CLK = x ;

Parameter

CLK
Synchronization clock (1..3)

Remarks

1.

This command is not valid for exchanges with LPN109232249 e LPN109256842 Control Program.

3-88

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

COP-CNF: Force Unit Reconfiguration

On-line Commands

COP-CNF: Force Unit Reconfiguration


This command is used to force the unit to accept configuration from the master unit.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
COP-CNF : UNI = xx ;

Parameter

UNI
unit number (1..n):
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 2 16 76 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-89

END-CNF: Conclude Exchange Configuration

On-line Commands

END-CNF: Conclude Exchange Configuration


This command is used to end configuring the exchange. The command can only be carried out via local connection linked to the exchange Maintenance Unit (unit 1). Executing this command results in interrupting the communication between the exchange and the CSR.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
END-CNF ;

Remarks

1.

The exchange will not be considered as configured if the site code and password and types of exchange units are not programmed. In this case, command END-CNF will not be accepted and the exchange remains in its "configuration mode".

3-90

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

INI-CNF: Begin Configuring Exchange

On-line Commands

INI-CNF: Begin Configuring Exchange


This command is used to set the exchange to its configuration mode. The command can only be carried out via local connection linked to the exchange Maintenance Unit (unit 1 or 65).
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
INI-CNF ;

Remarks

1.

Running this command results in initializing all exchange configuration tables and the interruption of the exchange-CSR communication. Communication with the will be restored via command INI-CON in "configuration mode". The contents of billing counters will not be affected.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-91

REP-CNF: Store Configuration Data

On-line Commands

REP-CNF: Store Configuration Data


This command is used to generate the exchange Command Configuration File.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
REP-CNF [ : REP = xxxx ] ;

Parameter

REP
Configuration report code: UNIT SYNC PDT EMP SUB CLA CPCT ROUT AUX ORP CHG OPP TOE MEX SNL Exchange units Synchronism External Alarm Detection Points External Alarm Output Points Numbering Plan Terminal Classes PABX Groups Routing Plan Auxiliary Equipment Originated Routing Plan Charging Plan Exchange Operating Parameters Exchange Operating Timing Work Shift Modality Signaling

Remarks

1.

Initially, configuration files are generated with the image of exchange configuration. Those files are stored in the exchange directory specified by PATH parameter of the CR-EXC command (Create Exchange in Exchange Registry). If the REP parameter is not specified, all exchange configuration data will be stored. The automatically Command Configuration File generation is executed based on the configuration files. The Command Configuration File is also stored in the exchange directory. The configuration command file name will be SwitchNameYYMMDDhhmm.cmd,where: SwitchName = Name of the switch which will be provided by the LOC parameter from CR-EXC command.

2. 3.

4.

3-92

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

REP-CNF: Store Configuration Data

On-line Commands

YYMMDD = Year, Month and Day of file recording; hhmm = Hour and Minute of file recording; 5. Not occurring errors during Command Configuration File generation, it is kept and the others (configuration files) are deleted. In case that some error occurs, the configuration files are kept so that they can be sent to the Lucent Technologies.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-93

INI-COINBOX: Reset Payphone Coin Counting

On-line Commands

INI-COINBOX: Reset Payphone Coin Counting


This command is used to reset the coin counter of a payphone.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
INI-COINBOX : { SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx | TER = xx-xx-xx } ;

Parameters

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

TER
Terminal number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
16 64 A1 -

number of the terminal unit (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd cir

terminal board number (1..21) board circuit number (1..32)

Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

3-94

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-COINBOX: Query Payphone Coin Counting

On-line Commands

IT-COINBOX: Query Payphone Coin Counting


This command is used to display the coin counters of payphone coin boxes.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-COINBOX : { SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx | TER = xx-xx-xx | COINP = xxx } ;

Parameters

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

TER
Terminal number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
16 64 A1 -

number of the terminal unit (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

brd cir

terminal board number (1..21) board circuit number (1..32)

Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

COINP
Percentage of collected coins (0..100)

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-95

IT-COINBOX: Query Payphone Coin Counting

On-line Commands

Output Format

If parameters SUB or TER were specified, the number and percentage of coins collected in a payphone coin box will be displayed in the following format:
SUB = xxxx-xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx NFICH = xxxx COINP = xxx%

If parameter COINP was specified, payphones with a percentage of coins collected equal or higher than the chosen value are displayed in the following format:
SUB = xxxx-xxxx . . SUB = xxxx-xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx . . TER = xx-xx-xx NFICH = xxxx . . NFICH = xxxx COINP = xxx% COINP = xxx%

Remarks

1.

The output format of parameter SUB can de modified through Options Menu, "Output Format" submenu, on the CSR application main window.

3-96

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-CPCT: Create PABX Group

On-line Commands

CR-CPCT: Create PABX Group


This command is used to include subscribers in a PABX group.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
CR-CPCT : KEY = [xxxx-]xxxx, SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx&..&xxxx ;

Parameters

KEY
PABX group key subscriber directory number in the pre-sub format: pre exchange prefix ( 3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
256

A PABX group is created when the first subscriber is included in the group. To include subscribers in an existing PABX group, just specify the subscribers to be included. A subscriber can only be included in a PABX group when in the fully blocked (BLK) operating status. Every subscriber in the PABX group is created with two-way traffic and active numbering. A PABX group is created with type of charging per subscriber. A limit of n PABX groups can be defined, where n can be:
A1 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-97

CR-CPCT: Create PABX Group

On-line Commands

7.
128

Each PABX group can be created with a limit of n subscribers, where n can be:
A1 001 001 001 -

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

8. 9.

A PABX group is created with uniform sequential hunting. When the PABX group is programmed for uniform sequential hunting, the hunt for an idle subscriber in the group will be carried out in order of the numbering sequence of subscribers, with no preference being assigned.

3-98

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-CPCT: Query PABX Group

On-line Commands

IT-CPCT: Query PABX Group


This command is used to display PABX groups created in the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-CPCT [ : KEY = [xxxx-]xxxx ] ;

Parameter

KEY
PABX group key subscriber directory number in the pre-sub format: pre exchange prefix ( 3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

Output Format

If KEY parameter is specified, the PABX group billing type and subscribers with traffic direction will be displayed in the following format:
KEY = xxxx-xxxx CHT = xxxxxx TSG = xxx SUB = xxxx-xxxx (DIR-NUM) . . SUB = xxxx-xxxx (DIR-NUM) xxxx-xxxx (DIR-NUM) . . . . xxxx-xxxx (DIR-NUM) xxxx-xxxx (DIR-NUM) xxxx-xxxx (DIR-NUM)

If the KEY parameter is not specified, all PABX groups created in the exchange will be displayed in the following format:
KEY = xxxx-xxxx CHT = xxxxxx TSG = xxx SUB = xxxx-xxxx (DIR-NUM) . . SUB = xxxx-xxxx (DIR-NUM) xxxx-xxxx (DIR-NUM) . . . . xxxx-xxxx (DIR-NUM) xxxx-xxxx (DIR-NUM) xxxx-xxxx (DIR-NUM)

Remarks

1.

The DIR Characters in parenthesis above correspond to the direction of traffic and can be: OUT (OUT), IN (IN) or BID (2W). Characters NUM indicate whether the numbering of this subscriber is active (numbered terminal) or inactive (unnumbered terminal) and can be ATV or ITV. The output format of the SUB parameter can be changed through the Options menu, Output Format submenu, on the CSR program main window.
Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

2.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

3-99

MD-CPCT: Modify PABX Group

On-line Commands

MD-CPCT: Modify PABX Group


This command is used to modify the parameters of a PABX group.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-CPCT : KEY = [xxxx-]xxxx, { [ CHT = xxxxxx ] [, TSG = xxx ] | SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx ,[ DIR = xxx] [,NUM = xxx]} ;

Parameters

KEY
PABX group key subscriber directory number in the pre-sub format: pre exchange prefix ( 3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

CHT
Charging type identification: CHASUB charging by subscriber CHAKEY charging by key number

TSG
Group Hunting Type SPR preferential sequential SEU uniform sequential AGR general access KAN key number access not numbered CAP generic hunting for extension Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

DIR
Traffic direction : OUT outgoing traffic

3-100

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-CPCT: Modify PABX Group

On-line Commands

IN BID

incoming traffic two-way traffic

NUM
Numbering ATV active (numbered terminal) ITV inactive (unnumbered terminal) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1.

Hunting extensions in a PABX group can be carried out in five manners: Uniform Hunting: When a call is routed to the pilot number, a hunting algorithm starts looking for the next free extension subsequent to the terminal most recently used to receive a call in the group. When a call is routed to a subscriber number in the group that is not the pilot number, only the corresponding terminal number is called. Preferential Hunting: When a call is routed to the pilot number, hunting always starts from the pilot terminal. When a call is routed to the subscriber number in the group that is not the pilot number, only the corresponding terminal number is called. General Access: When a call is routed to the pilot number or to a subscriber number in the group, a uniform terminal sequence-hunting algorithm is run; there is no possible access to a specific subscriber (Direct Inward Dialing - DID). Unnumbered Access Key: When a call is routed to the pilot number, a uniform sequencehunting algorithm is applied only to unnumbered terminals created in the group. Generic Extension Call Pick Up: When a call is forwarded to any Virtual Extension Group Member (DEBS), this call can be picked up and answered from any other Virtual PBX Extension Group Member in the group.

2. 3. 4.

CHT parameters and TSG relate to the PABX group. DIR parameter sets the traffic direction for each PABX Group Subscriber. NUM parameter establishes whether the subscriber directory number should be considered. If the ITV argument is provided, this subscriber will be handled as an unnumbered subscriber. It should be used jointly with the KAN (Unnumbered Access KEY) type of hunting.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-101

SU-CPCT: Suppress PABX Group

On-line Commands

SU-CPCT: Suppress PABX Group


This command is used to suppress PABX Group Subscribers.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
SU-CPCT : KEY = [xxxx-]xxxx, SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx&..&xxxx ;

Parameters

KEY
PABX group key subscriber directory number in the pre-sub format: pre exchange prefix ( 3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

Remarks

1. 2.

A PABX Group is suppressed when its last subscriber is suppressed. PABX Group subscriber can only be suppressed when in the fully blocked (BLK) operating status.

3-102

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-CSO: Query Carrier Selection Code

On-line Commands

IT-CSO: Query Carrier Selection Code


This command is used to query the carrier selection code.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-CSO ;

Output Format
CSO = xxxxx

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-103

MD-CSO: Modify Carrier Selection Code

On-line Commands

MD-CSO: Modify Carrier Selection Code


This command is used to modify the carrier selection code.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format

MD-CSO [ : CSO = xxxxx ] ;

Parameter

CSO
Carrier selection code (0..65534) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001

3-104

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-CSRATD: Create CSR Answering Number

On-line Commands

CR-CSRATD: Create CSR Answering Number


This command is used to program the exchange for answering CSR calls. Programming consists of specifying the directory number and class of the fictitious terminal that will answer calls sent from the CSR to the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
CR-CSRATD : SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx CLA = xxx ;

Parameters

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

CLA
Terminal class (1..n), where n can be:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 32 128 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-105

IT-CSRATD: Query CSR Answering Number

On-line Commands

IT-CSRATD: Query CSR Answering Number


This command is used to display the directory number and class of the fictitious terminal assigned to for answering calls from the CSR to the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-CSRATD ;

Output Format

The directory number and class of the fictitious terminal for answering CSR calls are displayed in the following format:
SUB = xxxx-xxxx CLA = xxx

Remarks

1.

The output format of the SUB parameter can be changed through the Options menu, Output Format submenu, on the CSR program main window.

3-106

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-CSRATD: Modify CSR Answering Number

On-line Commands

MD-CSRATD: Modify CSR Answering Number


This command is used to modify the directory number and class of the fictitious terminal assigned to answering calls from the CSR to the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-CSRATD : SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx CLA = xxx ;

Parameters

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

CLA
Terminal class (1..n), where n can be:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 32 128 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1.

SUB and CLA parameters must be specified even if only one of them is to be altered.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-107

SU-CSRATD: Suppress CSR Answering Number

On-line Commands

SU-CSRATD: Suppress CSR Answering Number


This command is used to delete the exchange programming for answering CSR calls.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
SU-CSRATD ;

Remarks

1.

This command should not be run for a CSR over a remote dialed line connection by (RDL), due to a possible break in communications before managing to program a new CSR-answering numbering.

3-108

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-CSRCAL: Create CSR Calling Number

On-line Commands

CR-CSRCAL: Create CSR Calling Number


This command is used to program the exchange for placing alarm calls to the CSR. Programming consists of specifying the business hours modality and the sequence of digits to be dialed for making alarm calls to the CSR. The call could be made by tone or pulse dialing.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
CR-CSRCAL : [ MEX = x, ] SEQ = xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ;

Parameters

MEX
Business hours modality (1..2)

SEQ
Sequence of digits to be dialed by the exchange to make an alarm call to the CSR (up to 20 digits), being that if initiated for T (Txxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx) the call will be made with tone dialing. If initiated for P (Pxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx) the call will be made with pulse dialing. In case that it does not have indication of type of dialing (T or P), the call will be made by tone.

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

No business hours modality will be required for configuring an exchange for a single CSR; in this case, the value of MEX is always 1. Refer to command MD-MEX (Modify Business Hours). SEQ parameter can have the following alphanumeric characters: digits 0 to 9 and the characters T, t, P or p. The non-numeric characters are used to configure the modem dialing, with the following meaning: (t) tone dialing (DTMF); (p) pulse dialing. Only one non-numeric character shall be programmed on the first position of the sequence. In case of none non-numeric character is specified, the default value is tone.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-109

IT-CSRCAL: Query CSR Calling Number

On-line Commands

IT-CSRCAL: Query CSR Calling Number


This command is used to display the business hours modality and the sequence of digits to be dialed by the exchange when making alarm calls to the CSR.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-CSRCAL [ : MEX = x ] ;

Parameter

MEX
Business hours modality (1..2)

Output Format

If the MEX parameter is specified, the sequence of digits programmed for exchange alarms calls to the CSR in the programmed business hours modality will be displayed in the following format:
MEX = x SEQ = xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

If the MEX parameter is not specified, the sequences of digits programmed for making exchange alarms calls to the CSR during all programmed business hours modalities will be displayed in the following format:
MEX = x . . . MEX = x SEQ = xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx . . . SEQ = xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Remarks

1.

The business hours modality permits varying the CSR number to be dialed according to the day of the week and the time of the day.

3-110

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-CSRCAL: Modify CSR Calling Number

On-line Commands

MD-CSRCAL: Modify CSR Calling Number


This command is used to change the sequence of digits to be dialed for making alarm calls to the CSR.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-CSRCAL : MEX = x, SEQ = xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ;

Parameters

MEX
Business hours modality (1..2)

SEQ
Sequence of digits to be dialed by the exchange to make an alarm call to the CSR (up to 20 digits), being that if initiated for T (Txxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx) the call will be made with tone dialing. If initiated for P (Pxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx) the call will be made with pulse dialing. In case that it does not have indication of type of dialing (T or P), the call will be made by tone.

Remark

1.

SEQ parameter can have the following alphanumeric characters: digits 0 to 9 and the characters T, t, P or p. The non-numeric characters are used to configure the modem dialing, with the following meaning: (t) tone dialing (DTMF); (p) pulse dialing. Only one non-numeric character shall be programmed on the first position of the sequence. In case of none non-numeric character is specified, the default value is tone.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-111

SU-CSRCAL: Suppress CSR Calling Number

On-line Commands

SU-CSRCAL: Suppress CSR Calling Number


This command is used to delete the programming made in the exchange for placing alarm calls to the CSR.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
SU-CSRCAL [ : MEX = x ] ;

Parameter

MEX
Business hours modality (1..2)

Remarks

1.

If parameter MEX is not specified, the entire exchange programming for making alarm calls to the CSR will be erased.

3-112

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-CSRFUNC: Query Information of the BZ-VIEW Hardware Key

On-line Commands

IT-CSRFUNC: Query Information of the BZ-VIEW Hardware Key


This command displays a string with the information of the facilities currently registered on the BZ-VIEW hardware key.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 003 002 001 -

Input Format
IT-CSRFUNC;

Output Format
S = xxxxxxx

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4.

This command is valid only for CSR Client or Telnet interface; The S string contains the information recorded on the BZ-VIEW Hardware Key; The S string shall be informed to Lucent Help Desk when the functionality upgrade is necessary. This command is valid for exchanges with LPN109253856.003, LPN109232249.002 or higher.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-113

MD-CSRFUNC: Modify Information of the BZ-VIEW Hardware Key

On-line Commands

MD-CSRFUNC: Modify Information of the BZ-VIEW Hardware Key


This command modifies the features (number of registered exchanges and/or number of clients) recorded on the hardware key of the BZ-VIEW software.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 003 002 001 -

Input Format
MD-CSRFUNC: SEN = xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx , NCEN=xxx, NCLI=xx

Parameters

SEN
Password for enabling the new values of the features (number of registered exchanges and/or number of clients). Password containing 7 groups of 4 digits, split with space. This password shall be provided by Lucent Technologies Help Desk .

NCEN
New number of registered exchanges Possible configurations for HK-BZVW:
Number of Clients 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 16 16 16 16 16 Number of registered Exchange 5 20 40 60 80 100 150 5 20 40 60 80 100 150 5 20 40 60 80 100 150 5 20 40 60 80 Key Code BZ-VIEW BZVW5-1 BZVW20-1 BZVW40-1 BZVW60-1 BZVW80-1 BZVW100-1 BZVW150-1 BZVW5-5 BZVW20-5 BZVW40-5 BZVW60-5 BZVW80-5 BZVW100-5 BZVW150-5 BZVW5-10 BZVW20-10 BZVW40-10 BZVW60-10 BZVW80-10 BZVW100-10 BZVW150-10 BZVW5-16 BZVW20-16 BZVW40-16 BZVW60-16 BZVW80-16

3-114

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-CSRFUNC: Modify Information of the BZ-VIEW Hardware Key

On-line Commands

16 16

100 150

BZVW100-16 BZVW150-16

NCLI
New number of CSR Client interfaces
Number of Clients 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 Number of registered Exchanges 5 20 40 60 80 100 150 5 20 40 60 80 100 150 5 20 40 60 80 100 150 5 20 40 60 80 100 150 Key Code BZ-VIEW BZVW5-1 BZVW20-1 BZVW40-1 BZVW60-1 BZVW80-1 BZVW100-1 BZVW150-1 BZVW5-5 BZVW20-5 BZVW40-5 BZVW60-5 BZVW80-5 BZVW100-5 BZVW150-5 BZVW5-10 BZVW20-10 BZVW40-10 BZVW60-10 BZVW80-10 BZVW100-10 BZVW150-10 BZVW5-16 BZVW20-16 BZVW40-16 BZVW60-16 BZVW80-16 BZVW100-16 BZVW150-16

Remark

1. 2.

This command shall be executed with the Hardware Key connected on the parallel port of the computer where the CSR Server software is performed; This command is valid for exchanges with LPN109253856.003, LPN109232249.002 or higher.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-115

IT-CTRY: Query Country

On-line Commands

IT-CTRY: Query Country


This command is used to inform the country where the switch is configured to operate.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format

IT-CTRY
Output Format
CTRY = xxx

3-116

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-CTRY: Modify Country

On-line Commands

MD-CTRY: Modify Country


This command is used to define the country where the switch is operating.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format

MD-CTRY : CTRY = xxx;


Parameter

CTRY
Country where the switch is operating, where: BRA USA ARG BOL PER GUB VEN CHI IND UA PHI GUA GRE INA BIZ RUS Brazil United States of America Argentine Bolivia Peru Guinea Bissau Venezuela China India Ukraine (Control program SOF 98119F1, SOF 98158E1, LPN109253856.001, LPN109253864.001, LPN109232249.001 or higher) Philippines (Control program SOF 98119F4, SOF 98158E4, LPN109253856.001, LPN109253864.001, LPN109232249.001 or higher) Guatemala (Control program LPN 109253856.003 or higher) Greece (Control program LPN 109253856.004 or higher) Indonesia (Control program LPN109253856.004, LPN109253864.004, LPN109232249.003 or higher) Belize (Control program LPN109253856.006, LPN109253864.006, LPN109232249.005 or higher) Russia (Control program LPN109253856.010 or higher)

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-117

IT-CUG: Query Closed User Group

On-line Commands

IT-CUG: Query Closed User Group


This command is used to query the current parameters of the Closed User Group (CUG).
Compatibilidade
LPN109253856 008 LPN109253864 008 LPN109232249 006 LPN109256842 005 LPN109256826 005 LPN109256834 005

Input Format
IT-CUG [ : SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx ];

Parameters

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

Output Format

If the SUB parameter is specified and if the correspondent subscriber is programmed with the CUG supplementary service, the parameters of the selected subscriber will be displayed, as shown below:
SUB = xxxx-xxxx CUG = xx ITC = xxxx CCO = xxx CCT = xxx PREF

If the SUB parameter is not specified, the parameters of all the subscribers programmed with the supplementary service CUG will be displayed, as shown below:
SUB = xxxx-xxxx CUG = xx ITC = . . . SUB = xxxx-xxxx CUG = xx ITC = xxxx . . . xxxx CCO = xxx . . . CCO = xxx CCT = xxx . . . CCT = xxx [PREF]

[PREF]

If there is no subscriber programmed with the supplementary service CUG, the following message will be displayed: There are no subscriber in exchange with CUG programmed

3-118

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-CUG: Modify Closed User Group

On-line Commands

MD-CUG: Modify Closed User Group


This command is used to modify the Closed User Group (CUG) parameters.
Compatibility
LPN109253856 008 LPN109253864 008 LPN109232249 006 LPN109256842 005 LPN109256826 005 LPN109256834 005

Input Format
MD-CUG : SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx, CUG = xx, ITC = xxx x | NITC [, CCT = xxx ] [, CCO = xxx ] [, PREF ] ;

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

CUG
CUG identifier (1..4).

CCT
Restriction control for terminating calls. RTT NRT SRT fully restricted unrestricted semi-restricted

CCO
Restriction control for originating calls. RTT NRT SRT fully restricted unrestricted semi-restricted

ITC
Interlock Code. CUG identifier in the ISDN network (4 digits or NITC to cancel the CUG programming)

PREF
Program the CUG as preferential.

Remarks

1.

Only one CUG can be programmed as preferential (using the parameter PREF).

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-119

CR-DTMF: Create DTMF Receiver

On-line Commands

CR-DTMF: Create DTMF Receiver


This command is used to create DTMF receivers
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
CR-DTMF : DTMF = xx-xx-xx &..& xx-xx-xx ;

Parameter

DTMF
DTMF receiver number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd
n 01..05 21..22 20..22 20..21 A1 B1 D1

DTMF receiver board number (20..21)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir
20 40 60 A1 F1 -

board circuit number (1..19)


A1 E1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

Remarks

1.

A DTMF receiver is created in the blocked operating status (BLK) and should be unblocked by the MD-DTMFSTE command.

3-120

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-DTMF: Create DTMF Receiver

On-line Commands

2.

For BZ5000 exchanges: - At most 2 MFC senders/receivers will be used for programming 20 DTMF detecting circuits; - Only when using MPSC pack with two links: a) the number of circuits can reach to 40; b) At most 4 MFC senders/receivers will be used for programming 40 DTMF detecting circuits;

3.

In exchanges with LPN109232249 and LPN109256842 Control Program, at most 60 DTMF circuits can be programmed.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-121

IT-DTMF: Query DTMF Receiver Status

On-line Commands

IT-DTMF: Query DTMF Receiver Status


This command is used to display the operating status of DTMF receivers.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-DTMF [ : { DTMF = xx-xx-xx | STE = xxx } ] ;

Parameters

DTMF
DTMF receiver number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd
n 01..05 21..22 20..22 20..21 A1 B1 D1

DTMF receiver board number (20..21)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir
20 40 60 A1 F1 -

board circuit number (1..19)


A1 E1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

STE
DTMF receiver operating status BLK operator blocking SRV in service NBD no board

3-122

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-DTMF: Query DTMF Receiver Status

On-line Commands

Output Format

If the DTMF parameter is specified, the selected DTMF receiver operating status will be displayed in the following format:
DTMF = xx-xx-xx STE = xxx

If the STE parameter is specified, the DTMF receivers with the selected operating status are displayed in the following format:
STE = xxx DTMF = xx-xx-xx . . xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx . . xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx . . xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx

If no parameter is specified, the operating status of all the exchange DTMF receivers will be displayed in the following format:
DTMF = xx-xx-xx . . . DTMF = xx-xx-xx STE = xxx . . . STE = xxx

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

A DTMF receiver will be in the BLK (operator blocking) operating status when blocked by the MD-DTMFEST command. A DTMF receiver will be in the NBD (no board) operating status when corresponding board is not fitted. For BZ5000 exchanges: - At most 2 MFC senders/receivers will be used for programming 20 DTMF detecting circuits; - Only when using MPSC pack with two links: a) the number of circuits can reach to 40; b) At most 4 MFC senders/receivers will be used for programming 40 DTMF detecting circuits;

4.

In exchanges with the LPN109232249 and LPN109256842 Control Program, at most 60 DTMF circuits can be programmed.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-123

SU-DTMF: Suppress DTMF Receiver

On-line Commands

SU-DTMF: Suppress DTMF Receiver


This command is used to suppress DTMF receivers.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
SU-DTMF : DTMF = xx-xx-xx&..&xx-xx-xx ;

Parameter

DTMF
DTMF receiver number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd
n 01..05 21..22 20..22 20..21 A1 B1 D1

DTMF receiver board number (20..21)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir
20 40 60 A1 F1 -

board circuit number (1..19)


A1 E1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

Remarks

1.

A DTMF receiver can only be suppressed in BLK (fully blocked) operating status.

3-124

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

SU-DTMF: Suppress DTMF Receiver

On-line Commands

2.

For BZ5000 exchanges: - At most 2 MFC senders/receivers will be used for programming 20 DTMF detecting circuits; - Only when using MPSC pack with two links: a) the number of circuits can reach to 40; b) At most 4 MFC senders/receivers will be used for programming 40 DTMF detecting circuits;

3.

In exchanges with LPN109232249 and LPN109256842 Control Program, at most 60 DTMF circuits can be programmed.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-125

MD-DTMFSTE: Modify DTMF Receiver Status

On-line Commands

MD-DTMFSTE: Modify DTMF Receiver Status


This command is used to block or unblock a DTMF receiver.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-DTMFSTE : DTMF = xx-xx-xx&..&xx-xx-xx, STE = xxx ;

Parameters

DTMF
DTMF receiver number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd
n 01..05 21..22 20..22 20..21 A1 B1 D1

DTMF receiver board number (20..21)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir
20 40 60 A1 F1 -

board circuit number (1..19)


A1 E1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

STE
DTMF receiver operational status: BLK operator blocking SRV in service

3-126

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-DTMFSTE: Modify DTMF Receiver Status

On-line Commands

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

DTMF receiver operator blocking (BLK) only applies to DTMF receivers with SRV (in service) and NBD (no board) operating status. Unblocking a DTMF receiver or setting it as SRV (in service) operating status only applies to DTMF receivers with BLK (operator blocking) operating status. For BZ5000 exchanges, at most 40 DTMF circuits can be programmed when using MPSC pack with two links.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-127

IT-E1: Query Operational State of the Link

On-line Commands

IT-E1: Query Operational State of the Link


This command is used to display the operational state of the digital trunks links of the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 F1 A1 E1 -

Input Format
IT-E1 : [ E1 = xx-xx ] [, STE = xxx ] ;

Parameters

E1
Link in the uni-brd format, where: uni
16 64 A1 -

terminals unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd
n 17..20 01..20 20..21 A1 B1 D1

board number of the trunk (1..19):


A1 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

STE
Link operating status: BLK operator blocking SRV in service

Output Format

If E1 parameter is specified, the operational state of the selected link will be displayed in the follow format:
E1 = xx-xx STE = xxx

If STE parameter is specified, all the links of the exchanges digital trunks will be displayed, which are in the selected state, in the follow format:
STE = xxx E1= xx-xx xx-xx xx-xx xx-xx xx-xx

3-128

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-E1: Query Operational State of the Link

On-line Commands

If no parameter is specified, all the links of the exchanges digital trunks will be displayed, with its respective operational states, in the follow format:
E1 = xx-xx . . . E1 = xx-xx STE = xx . . . STE = xx . . .

Remarks

1. 2.

This command can be used only when the exchange is configured with V5 interface, LE side. This command was replaced to IT-TRKINT command from the SOF 98119F1, SOF 98158E1, Control Program versions.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-129

MD-E1STE: Modify the Operational State of the Link

On-line Commands

MD-E1STE: Modify the Operational State of the Link


This command is used to modify the service state of the digital trunks link of the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 F1 A1 E1 -

Input Format
MD-E1STE : E1 = xx-xx&..&xx-xx , STE = xxx ;

Parameters

E1
Link in the uni-brd format, where: uni terminals unit number (1..n)
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 16 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

brd
n 17..20 01..20 20..21 A1 B1 D1

board number of the trunk (1..19):


A1 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

STE
Link operating status: BLK operator blocking SRV in service

Remarks

1. 2.

This command can be used only when the exchange is configured with V5 interface, LE side. This command was replaced to MD-TRKINT command from the SOF98119F1, SOF98158E1, LPN109253856.001, LPN109253864.001 Control Program versions.

3-130

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-ENV: Query Environment

On-line Commands

IT-ENV: Query Environment


This command is used for displaying the operating environment connecting the CSR to the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-ENV ;

Output Format

The environment currently connected to the CSR is displayed.


ENV = xxxxx

Remarks

1. 2.

The environment connecting the CSR to the exchange is characterized by the icon displayed before the command editing field. This command only applies to exchanges with created PS.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-131

MD-ENV: Modify Environment

On-line Commands

MD-ENV: Modify Environment


This command is used to change the operating environment, which connects the CSR to the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-ENV : ENV = xxxx ;

Parameter

ENV
Operating Environment of the Exchange: CS PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4 PS5 PS6 . PS31 PS32 Central Stage Peripheral Stage 1 Peripheral Stage 2 Peripheral Stage 3 Peripheral Stage 4 Peripheral Stage 5 Peripheral Stage 6 . Peripheral Stage 31 Peripheral Stage 32

The number of Peripheral Stages, which can be programmed on the exchange, varies from 1 to n:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109256826LPN109256834 32 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1.

Altering the operating environment is only feasible via the environment change icon, on the left of the command editing field. Click on this icon and proceed to change the operating environment. Shortcut combinations of keys, ALT+0, ALT+1, ALT+2,..., ALT+8, can be used to change environments CS, PS 1, PS 2,... PS 8, respectively. Note that shortcuts only apply to the first to eighth PS, not covering the rest.
Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page 109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

2.

3-132

MD-ENV: Modify Environment

On-line Commands

3.

This command and its shortcuts only apply to exchanges that include at least one created PS.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-133

IT-EXCCOM: Query Exchange Serial Communication Ports

On-line Commands

IT-EXCCOM: Query Exchange Serial Communication Ports


This command is used to query serial communication ports configured in the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-EXCCOM [ : UNI = xx ] ;

Parameter

UNI
terminal unit number (1..n):
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 2 16 78 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Output Format

If parameter UNI is specified, all programmed serial communication ports programmed in the selected unit are displayed in the following format:
UNI = xxx PORT = xx-xxxx TYP = xxx MTACK = x SPD = xxxxx MWTA = xx WORD = x MNTO = xx STOP = x PARIT = xxx

If parameter UNI is not specified all programmed serial communication ports programmed in the units created in the exchange are displayed in the following format:
PORT = xx-xxxx . . . PORT = xx-xxxx TYP = xxx MTACK = x SPD = xxxxx MWTA = xx WORD = x MNTO = xx STOP = x PARIT = xxx

TYP = xxx MTACK = x

SPD = xxxxx MWTA = xx

WORD = x MNTO = xx

STOP = x

PARIT = xxx

Remarks

1.

Only the first serial communication port of the maintenance unit, i. e., COM1 of unit 1, has a manufacturer configuration: type of local connection, 19200 bps maximum rate, 8 data bits, no parity and 1 stop bit.

3-134

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-EXCCOM: Modify Exchange Serial Communication Ports

On-line Commands

MD-EXCCOM: Modify Exchange Serial Communication Ports


This command is used to modify the exchange configuration of serial communication ports and connection timing.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-EXCCOM : PORT = xx-xxxx, TYP = xxxx [, SPD= xxxxx ][, WORD = x, STOP = x, PARIT = xxxxxx ] [, CMD = "xxx...xxx"] [, LNK = xx ] [, MTACK = xxx ] [, MWTA = xxx ] [, MNTO = xxx ]; [,BOARD = xx-xx];

Parameters

PORT
Serial Communication Port of a exchange unit, on the uni-port format: uni unit number (1..n):

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 2 16 76 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

COM1 COM2 COM3

COM1 Serial Communication Port COM2 Serial Communication Port COM3 Serial Communication Port

TYP
Type of exchange serial communication port connection: LOC local connection RDL remote connection over dialed line RFDL remote connection over virtual dialed line RPL remote connection private line NTYP eliminates the programming of a serial communication port

SPD
Maximum serial communication rate in bps (300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 e 115200)

WORD
Data word bits: 7 or 8

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-135

MD-EXCCOM: Modify Exchange Serial Communication Ports

On-line Commands

STOP
Number of stop bits: 1 or 2

PARIT
Parity: EVE ODD NPA even parity odd parity no parity

CMD
List of Hayes commands for configuring the exchange modem.

LNK
Number of V5 signaling links

MTACK
Maximum timing for waiting message acknowledgement (1..250)

MWTA
Maximum timing before sending a new or acknowledgement message (1..250)

MNTO
Number of MWTA timings that defines the maximum time elapsed without input messages before breaking the connection

BOARD
Board number on the uni-pos format: uni
16 76 A1 -

Unit number (1..n), where n is:


A1 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

pos

Unit position number (1..23)

Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 E6 E6 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1.

Only the first serial communication port of the maintenance unit, i. e., COM1 of unit 1, is factory set to: type of connection: local, 19200 bps maximum rate, 8 data bits, no parity and 1 stop bit In the case of remote connections, the rate specified in this command sets the used modem maximum serial communication rate and not the inter-modem communication rate. Accordingly, we recommend setting the used modem rate at the maximum value possible.

2.

3-136

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-EXCCOM: Modify Exchange Serial Communication Ports

On-line Commands

3.

On the BZ5000 exchanges, if the unit to be configured is fitted with a MPSB board, it can be programmed for remote connecting via dialed line (associated to a physical terminal) or remote connecting via virtual dialed line (associated to a virtual dialed line). To erase an exchange serial communication port programming, specify TYP = NTYP. In this case, do not specify the communication rate. Any changes to the modem initialization setup by parameter CMD should be made by an operator specialized in modems. Timing parameters should not be separately programmed, i. e., if one timing is programmed, the rest must be programmed in the same command. If the CMD parameter is not specified, the modem will use the following initializations, according to the type of connection: remote connection via private line: ATV0E0H0M0X4B0&C1S0 = 2S7 = 252A remote connection via dialed line: ATV0E0H0M1X4B0&C1S0 = 2S7 = 60

4. 5. 6. 7.

8.

If the communication port is programmed for connecting to an PS or CS, the initialization Hayes command will be: ATV0E0H0M0 X0 B0 &C1 S0 = 2S7 = 252D. Parameters MTAC, MWTA and MNTO are used to counterbalance the connection effects with a double satellite hop. If MTAC, MWTA and MNTO parameters were defined, the following defaults will be assigned to these parameters:
Type of Connection Parameter MTACK MWTA MNTO Local or Remote Connection above 9600 Bps 4 12 48 Remote Connection below 9600 bps 15 92 6

9.

10. 11.

The measuring units of parameters MTACK and MWTA is 50 ms. The following communication words are valid:
WORD 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 STOP BITS 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 PARITY EVEN ODD EVEN ODD EVEN NONE EVEN ODD EVEN

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-137

MD-EXCCOM: Modify Exchange Serial Communication Ports

On-line Commands

12.

The BOARD parameter is only valid when the TYP parameter is equal to RFDL. On the BZ5000 exchanges, if none value is specified on the BOARD parameter, the MPS pack installed on the lower position of the BBB takes on the remote connection through the fictitious dialed line. The RFDL mnemonic of the TYP parameter is not valid for exchanges with LPN109232249 and LPN109256842 Control Program.

13.

3-138

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-EXCHST: Query Exchange Operating Log

On-line Commands

IT-EXCHST: Query Exchange Operating Log


This command is used to display alarms and events recorded in the exchange Operating Log.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-EXCHST [ : { [ DAT = xx-xx-xx ] [, ASE = xx ] } ] ;

Parameters

DAT
Date in the yy-mm-dd format: yy year (00..99) mm month (01..12) dd day (01..31)

ASE
Alarm severity: UR urgent SU semi-urgent NU non-urgent

Output Format

Alarms and events recorded in the exchange are displayed in the following format:
DAT = xx-xx-xx HOU = xx:xx:xx xxx...xxx . . . . . . . . . xx-xx-xx HOU = xx:xx:xx xxx...xxx [ ENV = xxxx ] . . . [ ENV = xxxx ] UNI = xx OCCURRENCE

DAT =

UNI = xx

URGENT

Remarks

1. 2.

If the DAT parameter is specified, only alarms and events detected from the selected date onwards will be displayed. The ASE parameter enables selecting the alarms to be displayed, according to their severity. The following arguments may be specified for the ASE parameter: UR SU only displays urgent alarms displays urgent and semi-urgent alarms

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-139

IT-EXCHST: Query Exchange Operating Log

On-line Commands

NU 3. 4. 5.

displays all alarms

Alarms and events detected by the exchange are listed in the Operating Manual of the exchange. The exchange Operating Log storage capacity is of up to 200 alarm and event records per exchange unit. Parameter ENV will be displayed when the connected exchange is a Central Stage or Peripheral Stage (PS)

3-140

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

RV-EXCHST: Clear Exchange Operating Log

On-line Commands

RV-EXCHST: Clear Exchange Operating Log


This command is used to clear recorded events and alarms from the exchange Operating Log.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
RV-EXCHST ;

Remarks

1.

The removal of alarms and events from the exchange Operating Log results in the "Initializing Operating Log" event.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-141

IT-EXCIP: Query Exchange IP address

On-line Commands

IT-EXCIP: Query Exchange IP address


This command is used to query the IP address and the mask assigned to the master unit of a exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 C1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-EXCIP

Output Format
BASEIP = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx MASK = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

3-142

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-EXCIP: Modify Exchange IP address

On-line Commands

MD-EXCIP: Modify Exchange IP address


This command is used to modify the initial address of the IP address interval of the exchange units.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 C1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-EXCIP: {[BASEIP = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx] | [,MASK = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx]};

Parameters

BASEIP
Exchange basic IP address, related to the first unit (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx varies from 0 to 255).
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 C1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

MASK
IP address Mask (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx varies from 0 to 255).
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 C1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-143

MD-EXCLOC: Modify Exchange Site Code

On-line Commands

MD-EXCLOC: Modify Exchange Site Code


This command is used to modify the site code stored in the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-EXCLOC : LOC = xxxxxxxx ;

Parameter

LOC
Exchange installation site code (up to 8 alphanumeric characters in quotes)

3-144

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-EXCOPP: Query Exchange Operating Parameters

On-line Commands

IT-EXCOPP: Query Exchange Operating Parameters


This command is used to display the exchange operating parameters.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-EXCOPP ;

Output Format

Exchange operating parameters are displayed in the following format:


OPP = xxxxxx&..&xxxxxx [NTOQUE = xxx ]

Remarks

1.

The following operating parameters cane be defined for the BZ5000 exchange: if the exchange should be prepared to operate with TRCALL equipment, i. e., no answering and re-answering in calls made to numbers 107, 100, 16S2, 0AB16S2 from terminal with OCT = 7 (TPDDD) originating categories; exchange programmed to operate with automatic announcement without disconnection. exchange programmed to handle CDC call blocking by receiving signal II-8. exchange programmed to not play synthesized music when keeping a subscriber or trunk on-hold during a consultation. exchange programmed to send accepted operation tone instead of dial tone during redialing in query calls. exchange programmed to break outgoing calls routed through JLT trunks after getting busy tone on the trunk. Busy tone is considered as present when active at the trunk during a number of cycles equal to the value specified in parameter NTOQUE. exchange in Emergency Mode. In this operating mode, only those subscribers programmed for the supplementary service PRIORIDADE can place calls.

TRCALL

ANSWDD BLKDCD WMUSIC INQAOT NBUSYT

EXCEMM

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-145

IT-EXCOPP: Query Exchange Operating Parameters

On-line Commands

UNBCAL EXTMUS TOMAFC SEGTOM CONV1/CON V2

exchange programmed for billing incomplete calls. exchange programmed for playing external music when keeping a subscriber or trunk on-hold during query calls. exchange programmed for sending false call warning tone. exchange configured to generate a second dial tone. Protocol Converter, considering that:
When POP = CONV1, the converter must receive the Call ID (CID) on the IAM Called Party Number parameter.

When POP=CONV2, the converter must NOT receive the Call ID (CID) on the IAM Called Party Number parameter. KHZ16
Exchange programmed to send frequency of 16kHz (instead of 12kHz) for charging in TP. Exchange programmed to send messages when the subscriber credits are finishing HOP COUNTER parameter (ISUP) Indicates that exchange is programmed to generate DTMF tones using signal level defined in GLVL parameter.

PRPAID

HC DTMFLVL

The operation parameter TOMAFC is valid for exchanges equipped with Control Program version equal or higher to SOF 98119C3, SOF 98158B3, LPN109253856.001, LPN109253864.001, LPN109232249.001 or LPN109256842.001. INQAOT is valid for exchanges with LPN109232249.001 or higher. UNBCAL and EXCEMM are valid for exchanges with SOF 97049B1, SOF 97098A1, LPN109232249.001 or higher. PRPAID and KHZ16 are valid for exchanges with SOF 97098D1, SGP 98092D1, SOF 98158C1, SOF 98119D1, LPN109253856.001, LPN109253864.001, LPN109232249.001 or higher. SEGTOM is valid for exchanges with SOF 98119F1, SOF 98158E1, SOF 98119F1, SOF 98158E1, SOF 00092C1, LPN109253856.001, LPN109253864.001, LPN109232249.001 or higher CONV1 and CONV2 are valid for exchanges with SOF 98119F3, SOF 98158E3, LPN109253856.001, LPN109253864.001, LPN109232249.001 or higher. HC is valid for exchanges with LPN 109253856.003 or higher. DTMFLVL is valid for exchanges with LPN 109253856.004 or higher.
Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page 109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

3 4 5

7 8 9

3-146

MD-EXCOPP: Modify Exchange Operating Parameters

On-line Commands

MD-EXCOPP: Modify Exchange Operating Parameters


This command is used to change exchange operating parameters.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-EXCOPP : OPP = xxxxxx&..&xxxxxx [, NTOQUE = xx ] [, CRDLM = xx ] [, HCIV = xx ] [, GLVL = x ] [, TOL = xx ];

Parameter

OPP
Exchange operation parameters: UNBCAL Exchange programmed for billing incomplete calls. BLKDCD Exchange programmed to handle CDC call blocking by receiving signal II-8; EXCEMM Exchange in Emergency Mode. In this operating mode, only those subscribers programmed for the supplementary service PRIORIDADE can make calls. INQAOT Exchange programmed to send accepted operation tone instead of dial tone when the flash key is pressed during consultation calls; KHZ16 Exchange programmed to send frequency of 16kHz (instead of 12kHz) for charging in TP. EXTMUS Exchange programmed for playing external music when keeping a subscriber or trunk onhold during consultation calls. WMUSIC Exchange programmed to not play synthesized music when keeping calls on-hold; NBUSYT Indicate that the exchange should break output calls routed through JLT trunks after reaching the number of busy tone cycles specified in parameter NTOQUE. PRPAID Exchange programmed to send messages when the subscriber credits are finishing. ANSWDD Exchange programmed to operate with automatic announcement without final disconnection; TRCALL Exchange programmed to operate with TRCALL equipment, i. e., no answering and reanswering in calls made to number 107 from terminal with OCT = 7 (TPDDD) originating category; TOMAFC Exchange programmed for sending false call warning tone. SEGTOM Exchange programmed for generating a second dial tone. CONV1/CONV2 Protocol converter, considering that: When POP = CONV1, the converter must receive the Call ID (CID) on the IAM Called Party Number parameter. When POP = CONV2, the converter must NOT receive the Call ID (CID) on the IAM Called Party Number parameter. HC HOP COUNTER parameter (ISUP) DTMFLVL Indicates that exchange is programmed to generate DTMF tones using signal level defined in GLVL parameter. DTMFTOL Indicates that exchange is programmed to generate DTMF tones considering the tolerance specified in TOL parameter. SHORTMFC Indicates that the exchange is programmed to recognize MF signals with duration less than 60ms.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-147

MD-EXCOPP: Modify Exchange Operating Parameters

On-line Commands

INQAOT is valid for exchanges with LPN109232249.001 or higher. UNBCAL and EXCEMM are valid for exchanges with LPN109232249.001 or higher. TOMACF is valid for exchanges with SOF 98119C3, SOF 98158B3, LPN109232249.001 or higher. PRPAID and KHZ16 are valid for exchanges with SOF 97098D1, SOF 98092D1, SOF 98119D1, SOF 98158C1, LPN 109253856.001, LPN109253864.001, LPN109232249.001 or higher. SEGTOM is valid for exchanges with SOF 98119F1, SOF 98158E1, LPN109232249.001 or higher CONV is valid for exchanges with SOF 98119F3, SOF 98158E3, LPN109232249.001 or higher. HC is valid for exchanges with LPN 109253856.003 or higher. DTMFLVL is valid for exchanges with LPN 109253856.004 or higher. DTMFTOL is valid for exchanges with LPN 109253856.006, LPN109256826.003 or higher. SHORTMFC is valid for exchanges with LPN 109253856.007.001, LPN 109256826.004.001 or higher.

NTOQUE
Specifies the number of cycles of busy tone that defines the disconnection of the calls originated by trunks JLT. Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

CRDLM
Number of credits that makes the exchange warn the subscriber that his(her) credits are finishing (0..99) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 001 001 001

HCIV
HOP COUNTER parameter initial value- ISUP (1..31). The exchange default value of HCIV is 31.

GLVL
GLVL 2 or 5 where: .2 for -2 dBm .5 for -5 dBm (default) Indicates the signal level for DTMF tones generation by exchange. Valid for exchanges with LPN109253856.004 or higher.

TOL
Tolerance of DTMF signal reception. Value: 1.8 (%) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249 LPN109256842 LPN109256826 LPN109256834 006 003 -

Remarks

1. 2.

To erase programmed exchange operating parameter, specify OPP = NOPP. The BLKDCD Operating parameter modifies the CDC calls handling. For outgoing calls, the exchange will forward category 8 and the subscriber will be programmed for CDC call restriction. Busy tone is considered present after being active at the trunk for a number of cycles as specified in NTOQUE parameter.

3.

3-148

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-EXCOPP: Modify Exchange Operating Parameters

On-line Commands

4. 5. 6.

When the NBUSYT parameter is specified, the NTOQUE parameter is mandatory. When the PRPAID parameter is specified, the CRDLM parameter specification is mandatory. In order to make a long distance call in Ukraine, the set of commands required are: MD-CTRY CTRY = UA MD-SPEDIG CHEX = 8; MD-EXCOPP OPP = SEGTOM;

7. 8. 9. 10.

When the DTMFLVL parameter is specified, the GLVL parameter specification is mandatory. The DTMFTOL parameter shall be used only in configuration mode. When the DTMFTOL parameter is specified, the TOL parameter specification is mandatory. When the SHORTMFC parameter is specified, the specification of the FRNM parameter becomes mandatory for the routs that must recognize MF signals with duration of less than 60ms. The FRNM parameter, that represents the factor of noise rejection for the exchange of MF signaling, must be defined with values between 4 and 7.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-149

MD-EXCPAS: Modify Exchange Access Password

On-line Commands

MD-EXCPAS: Modify Exchange Access Password


This command is used to change the access password stored in the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-EXCPAS : PAS = xxxxxxxx ;

Parameter

PAS
Exchange access password (up to 8 alphanumeric characters in quotation marks)

Remarks

1. 2.

The access password stored in the exchange is matched to the access password recorded in the CSR when setting up communication with the exchange. The MD-EXCPAS Command merely changes the access password stored in the exchange. The password recorded in each exchange supervising CSR should be changed next, for setting up communications between the supervision equipment and the exchange.

3-150

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-EXCPRE: Create Exchange Prefix

On-line Commands

CR-EXCPRE: Create Exchange Prefix


This command is used to create the exchange prefix.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
CR-EXCPRE : PRE = xxxx-xxxx [, EXCPRE = x ] ;

Parameters

PRE
National code used for the exchange prefix in the cod-pre format: cod exchange national code (3 or 4 digits, optionally preceded by digit 0) pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits)

EXCPRE
Index of the prefix in the exchange table of prefixes (1..6). This table correlates this index with the exchange prefix number that should be used to complete the called subscriber number. This parameter can assume values from 1 to n, where n changes according to software version as the table below:
n SOF98119 SOF98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 2 50 A1 E1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

Remarks

1. 2.

Up to six prefixes may be programmed per exchange. If parameter EXCPRE is not specified, the default is EXCPRE=1.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-151

IT-EXCPRE: Query Exchange Prefix

On-line Commands

IT-EXCPRE: Query Exchange Prefix


This command is used to display all prefixes created in the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-EXCPRE ;

Output Format

The national code and all prefixes created in the exchange are displayed as follows:
EXCPRE EXCPRE EXCPRE EXCPRE EXCPRE EXCPRE = = = = = = 1 2 3 4 5 6 PRE PRE PRE PRE PRE PRE = = = = = = xxxx-xxxx xxxx-xxxx xxxx-xxxx xxxx-xxxx xxxx-xxxx xxxx-xxxx

3-152

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-EXCPRE: Modify Exchange Prefix

On-line Commands

MD-EXCPRE: Modify Exchange Prefix


This command is used to change the exchange prefix.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-EXCPRE : PRE = xxxx-xxxx [, EXCPRE = x ] ;

Parameters

PRE
National code used for the exchange prefix in the cod-pre format: cod exchange national code (3 or 4 digits, optionally preceded by digit 0) pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits)

EXCPRE
Index of the prefix in the exchange table of prefixes (1..6). This table correlates this index with the exchange prefix number that should be used to complete the called subscriber number. This parameter can assume values from 1 to n, where n changes according to software version as the table below:
n SOF98119 SOF98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 2 50 A1 E1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

Remarks

1.

If the EXCPRE parameter is not specified, the default will be EXCPRE=1.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-153

SU-EXCPRE: Suppress Exchange Prefix

On-line Commands

SU-EXCPRE: Suppress Exchange Prefix


This command is used to suppress a prefix created in the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
SU-EXCPRE [ : EXCPRE = x ] ;

Parameter

EXCPRE
Index of the prefix in the exchange table of prefixes (1..6). This table correlates this index with the exchange prefix number that should be used to complete the called subscriber number. This parameter can assume values from 1 to n, where n changes according to software version as the table below:
n SOF98119 SOF98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 2 50 A1 E1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

Remarks

1.

If parameter EXCPRE is not specified all created prefixes will be suppressed.

3-154

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-EXCTME: Query Exchange Timing

On-line Commands

IT-EXCTME: Query Exchange Timing


This command is used to query the timing values used in the exchange operation, which can be programmed via Man-Machine Communication (MMC).
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-EXCTME ;

Output Format

The timing values used in the exchange operation, which can be programmed by the MMC, are displayed in the following format:
TEBL = x TTNA = xx WRAS = xx CACK = xxx TEMFE = xx ISUP1 = xxxxx ISUP6 = xxxxx ISUP11 = xxxxx ISUP16 = xxxxx ISUP21 = xxxxx ISUP26 = xxxxx ISUP31 = xxxxx ISUP36 = xxxxx TSP2 = x TSP7 = x TSP12 = x TSP17 = x TFCALL = xxxx TIAC = xx TWDTS = xxxx TSERA = xx WDCN = xx INTP = xx DTCT = xxx DTBT = xxx DTIT = xxx TRATD = xxx WDHL = xxx TELD = xx MDMF = xx WNMF = xx TEMFS = xx TEDL = xx TFSH = xxxx TATD = xxx ISUP2 = xxxxx ISUP3 = xxxxx ISUP4 = xxxxx ISUP5 = xxxxx ISUP7 = xxxxx ISUP8 = xxxxx ISUP9 = xxxxx ISUP10 = xxxxx ISUP12 = xxxxx ISUP13 = xxxxx ISUP14 = xxxxx ISUP15 = xxxxx ISUP17 = xxxxx ISUP18 = xxxxx ISUP19 = xxxxx ISUP20 = xxxxx ISUP22 = xxxxx ISUP23 = xxxxx ISUP24 = xxxxx ISUP25 = xxxxx ISUP27 = xxxxx ISUP28 = xxxxx ISUP29 = xxxxx ISUP30 = xxxxx ISUP32 = xxxxx ISUP33 = xxxxx ISUP34 = xxxxx ISUP35 = xxxxx ISUP37 = xxxxx ISUP38 = xxxxx ISUP39 = xxxxx TSP1 = x TSP3 = xx TSP4 = xxx TSP5 = xx TSP6 = x TSP8 = x TSP9 = x TSP10 = x TSP11 = x TSP13 = x TSP14 = x TSP15 = x TSP16 = x TSP18 = x TSP19 = x TSP20 = xx TANI = xxxx TOFFHK = xxxx TONHK = xxxx

Remarks:

1. 2. 3.

The parameters TSCH, LDCT, TCLD only can be visualized when each value is different from zero. The STEATD, TP5S and TA5S parameters are valid for SOF 98119F1, SOF 98158E1 Control Program versions or higher. The V5TMP1 to V5TMP10 timers are valid for SOF 98119F4 and SOF 98158E4 Control Program versions or higher. The V5TMP2, V5TMP4, V5TMP5, V5TMP6 and V5TMP7 timers are reserve.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-155

IT-EXCTME: Query Exchange Timing

On-line Commands

4. 5.

The TEBL, TSCH and TSERA parameters are not valid for exchanges with the LPN109232249 and LPN109256842 Control Programs. When TSP20 = 0, BZ sends the answer signal immediately the address signaling is completed. But, some other switching do not understand this signal as an answer signal and abort the call. The default value of the V5TMP4 parameter is 1500ms. In case of Indonesia (CTRY = INA ) the V5TMP4 parameter should be set to 500ms. The TFCALL, TOFFHK and TONHK parameters are valid for exchanges with the Control Programs LPN109253856.006, LPN109253864.006, LPN109232249.005, LPN109256842.004, LPN109256826.003, LPN109256834.003 or higher.

6. 7.

3-156

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-EXCTME: Modify Exchange Timing

On-line Commands

MD-EXCTME: Modify Exchange Timing


This command is used to change the value of timing factors used in operating the exchange, which can be programmed by the Man-Machine Communication (MMC).
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format

MD-EXCTME : { [ TEBL = xxx ] [, TSCH = xx ] [, TIAC = xx ] [, LDCT = xx ] [, TCLD = xxxx ] [, TWDTS = xxxxx ] [, STEATD = xxx] [, WDCN = xx ] [, INTP = xx ] [, WRAS = xxx ] [, DTCT = xxx ] [, DTBT = xxx ] [, DTIT = xxx ] [, CACK = xxx ] [, TELD = xx ] [, TTNA = xx ] [, MDMF = xx ] [, WNMF = xx ] [, TEDL = xx ] [, TFSH = xx ] [, TATD = xxx ] [, TRATD = xxx ] [, WDHL = xxx ] [, TEMFE = xxx ] [, TDTOA = xxx] [, TDTCE = xxx] [, TDTO = xxx] [, TEMFS = xxx ] [, TSERA = xx ] [,TP5S = xxxx ] [,TA5S = xxxx ] [, TFCALL = xxxx ] [, TOFFHK = xxxx ] [, TONHK = xxxx ] [,V5TMP1 = xxx ] [,V5TMP2 = xxx ] [,V5TMP3 = xxx ] [,V5TMP4 = xxx ] [,V5TMP5 = xxx ] [,V5TMP6 = xxx ] [,V5TMP7 = xxx ] [,V5TMP8 = xxxx ] [,V5TMP9 = xx ] [,V5TMP10 = xx ] [, ISUP1 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP2 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP3 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP4 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP5 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP6 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP7 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP8 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP9 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP10 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP11 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP12 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP13 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP14 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP15 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP16 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP17 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP18 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP19 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP20 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP21 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP22 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP23 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP24 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP25 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP26 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP27 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP28 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP29 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP30 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP31 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP32 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP33 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP34 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP35 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP36 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP37 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP38 = xxxxx ] [, ISUP39 = xxxxx ] [, TSP1 = x ] [, TSP2 = x ] [, TSP3 = xx ] [, TSP4 = xxx ] [, TSP5 = xx ] [, TSP6 = x ] [, TSP7 = x ] [, TSP8 = x ] [, TSP9 = x ] [, TSP10 = x ] [, TSP11 = x ] [, TSP12 = x ] [, TSP13 = x ] [, TSP14 = x ] [, TSP15 = x ] [, TSP16 = x ] [, TSP17 = x ] [, TSP18 = x ] [, TSP19 = x ] [, TSP20 = xx ] [, TANI = xxxx ] | [ INI ] };

Parameters

TEBL
Timing for detecting external trunk blocking, in seconds (1..300) This parameter is not valid for exchanges with LPN109232249 or LNP109256842 Control Program.

TSCH
Timing for beginning billing at trunks, in seconds (0..90) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-157

MD-EXCTME: Modify Exchange Timing

On-line Commands

TIAC
Timing for the interval between alarm calls, in (1..60)

LDCT
Timing for splitting long duration calls, in hours (1..24) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

TCLD
Timing for long duration calls, in minutes (60..1440) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

TWDTS
Maximum waiting for dial tone for supervision purposes, in milliseconds (100..20000)

STEATD
Maximum waiting to answer (off hooking) the phone, in milliseconds (100..20000). It is for supervision purposes Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 F1 E1 001 001 001 001

WDCN
Timing for first digit before busy tone signal, in seconds (5..90) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 001

This parameter was redefined to: Timing for first digit before inaccessible network tone signal, in seconds (5..90). Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 F1 E1 001 001 001 001

INTP
Timing inter-digital for reception of dialed numbers, in seconds (5..90) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 001

WRAS
Timing of wait for the reply sign: control tone or busy subscriber, express in seconds (5180)

3-158

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-EXCTME: Modify Exchange Timing

On-line Commands

DTCT
Timing for congestion tone, express in seconds (5,,180). Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 001

DTBT
Timing for busy tone signal duration, in seconds (5..180) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 001

DTIT
Timing for inaccessible number, in seconds (5..180) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 001

CACK
Timing for reception of disconnection signal, in seconds (5..180) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 001

TELD
Timing for holding the first digit on executive line, in seconds (1..30) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 001 001 001

TTNA
Timing for transferring when not answered. Timing for sending ring signal to subscriber B before the transfer is made, in seconds (5..90) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 001

MDMF
Timing during sending of MF signals forehead. It controls the time that a MF signal holds on line waiting the compiled signal, in seconds (5..90) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 001

WNMF
Timing for absence of MF signal forehead. It is the maximum time of sending MF signal forehead, in seconds (5..90) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 001

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-159

MD-EXCTME: Modify Exchange Timing

On-line Commands

TEDL
Timing for waiting for free DTMF receptor, in seconds (1..n)
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 30 90 D1 C1 001 001 001 001 001 001

TFSH
Timing maximum of flash. Allow time the flash period within the interval 140 ms < Flash < TFSH, in milliseconds (140..2000). Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 001

TATD
Timing for waiting for attending. It controls the time subscriber B will receive ring signal, in seconds (5..180) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 001

TRATD
Timing for off-hooking again in case of hanging up by subscriber B, in seconds (0..180) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 001

WDHL
Timing for reception of MF signals forehead, in seconds (5..180) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 001

TEMFE
Timing for waiting free input MF circuit, in seconds (5..90)

TDTOA
Timing for accepted operation tone duration, in seconds (5..180). Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 F1 E1 001 001 001 001

TDTCE
Timing for call waiting tone duration, in seconds (5..180) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 F1 E1 001 001 001 001

3-160

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-EXCTME: Modify Exchange Timing

On-line Commands

TDTOI
Timing for incorrect operation tone duration, in seconds (5..180) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 F1 E1 001 001 001 001

Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 001

TEMFS
Timing for waiting free output MF circuit, in seconds (5..90) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 001

TSERA
Timing maximum for making line test through external equipment SERA, in seconds (2..15). Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 001

TP5S
Timing for presence of multifrequency signal to 5S signaling, in milliseconds (1,,1000) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 F1 E1 001 001 001 001

TA5S
Timing for absence of multifrequency signal to 5S signaling, in milliseconds (1,,1000) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 F1 E1 001 001 001 001

V5TMP1
Timing to hold the V5 interface startup process after an exchange reset, a startup fail or a interface activation via command MD-V5INT, in seconds (5..300) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 F4 E4 001 001 001 001

V5TMP2
reserved for future use

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-161

MD-EXCTME: Modify Exchange Timing

On-line Commands

V5TMP3
Timing to wait from interface activation to subscriber port unblocking when OPP APA is disable, in seconds (5..300) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 F4 E4 001 001 001 001

V5TMP4
reserved for future use

V5TMP5
reserved for future use

V5TMP6
reserved for future use

V5TMP7
reserved for future use

V5TMP8
Timing to wait for a second reading of bit Sa7, to confirm link identification procedure error, in milliseconds (100..1000) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 F4 E4 001 001 001 001

V5TMP9
Persistent fault timer. Timing to wait for effectively recognizing a fault, after its detection, in seconds (1..25) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 F4 E4 001 001 001 001

V5TMP10
E1 recovery timer. Timing to wait for effectively recognizing an E1 recovery, after its detection, in seconds (1..25) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 F4 E4 001 001 001 001

ISUP1
ISUP timing (see T1, table A.1, standard Q.764), in seconds (4..60) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

3-162

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-EXCTME: Modify Exchange Timing

On-line Commands

ISUP2
ISUP timing (see T2, table A.1, standard Q.764), in minutes (1..5) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP3
ISUP timing (see T3, table A.1, standard Q.764), in minutes (1..4) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP4
ISUP timing (see T4, table A.1, standard Q.764), in minutes (5..15) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP5
ISUP timing (see T5, table A.1, standard Q.764), in minutes (1..15) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP6
ISUP timing (see T6, table A.1, standard Q.764), in seconds (90..180) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP7
ISUP timing (see T7, table A.1, standard Q.764), in seconds (20..30) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP8
ISUP timing (see T8, table A.1, standard Q.764), in seconds (10..15) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP9
ISUP timing (see T9, table A.1, standard Q.764), in seconds (90..180) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-163

MD-EXCTME: Modify Exchange Timing

On-line Commands

ISUP10
ISUP timing (see T10, table A.1, standard Q.764), in seconds (4..6) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP11
ISUP timing (see T11, table A.1, standard Q.764), in seconds (15..20) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP12
ISUP timing (see T12, table A.1, standard Q.764), in seconds (4..60) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP13
ISUP timing (see T13, table A.1, standard Q.764), in minutes (1..15) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP14
ISUP timing (see T14, table A.1, standard Q.764), in seconds (4..60) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP15
ISUP timing (see T15, table A.1, standard Q.764), in minutes (1..15) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP16
ISUP timing (see T16, table A.1, standard Q.764), in seconds (4..60) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

3-164

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-EXCTME: Modify Exchange Timing

On-line Commands

ISUP17
ISUP timing (see T17, table A.1, standard Q.764), in minutes (1..15) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP18
ISUP timing (see T18, table A.1, standard Q.764), in seconds (4..60) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP19
ISUP timing (see T19, table A.1, standard Q.764), in minutes (1..15) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP20
ISUP timing (see T20, table A.1, standard Q.764), in seconds (4..60) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP21
ISUP timing (see T21, table A.1, standard Q.764), in minutes (1..15) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP22
ISUP timing (see T22, table A.1, standard Q.764), in seconds (4..60) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP23
ISUP timing (see T23, table A.1, standard Q.764), in minutes (1..15) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP24
ISUP timing (see T24, table A.1, standard Q.764), in seconds (0..2) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-165

MD-EXCTME: Modify Exchange Timing

On-line Commands

ISUP25
ISUP timing (see T25, table A.1, standard Q.764), in seconds (1..10) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP26
ISUP timing (see T26, table A.1, standard Q.764), in minutes (1..3) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP27
ISUP timing (see T27, table A.1, standard Q.764), in minutes (1..8) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP28
ISUP timing (see T28, table A.1, standard Q.764), in seconds (1..20) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP29
ISUP timing (see T29, table A.1, standard Q.764), in milliseconds (300..600) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP30
ISUP timing (see T30, table A.1, standard Q.764), in seconds (5..10) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP31
ISUP timing (see T31, table A.1, standard Q.764), in minutes (6..10) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP32
ISUP timing (see T32, table A.1, standard Q.764), in seconds (3..5) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

3-166

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-EXCTME: Modify Exchange Timing

On-line Commands

ISUP33
ISUP timing (see T33, table A.1, standard Q.764), in seconds (12..15) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP34
ISUP timing (see T34, table A.1, standard Q.764), in seconds (2..4) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP35
ISUP timing (see T35, table A.1, standard Q.764), in seconds (15..20) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP36
ISUP timing (see T36, table A.1, standard Q.764), in seconds (10..15) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP37
ISUP timing (see T37, table A.1, standard Q.764), in seconds (2..4) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP38
ISUP timing (see T38, table A.1, standard Q.764), in seconds (90..180) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ISUP39
ISUP timing (see T39, table A.1, standard Q.764), in seconds (4..15) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-167

MD-EXCTME: Modify Exchange Timing

On-line Commands

TSP1
When greater then zero is a timing for acceptable maximum interval between CSR and exchange clocks, in seconds. While CSR is connected to exchange, it sends a message carrying its hour and date. Hence the exchange compares its hour/date to the CSR hour/date. If the time difference is greater than TSP1 then an out of date calendar semi urgent alarm is displayed. The default value is zero. Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 001 001 -

TSP2
Reserved for future use. Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 001 001 -

TSP3
When greater then zero is a timing for maximum period on which the exchange waits for an automatic database updating (made periodically by the AGBD agent), in hours. If this timer expires an out of date database alarm is displayed. The default value is 72. Valid only for application BZRS, Not applicable for BZ5000 and BZSP.

TSP4
Maximum number of retransmission. This applies to LAPB frames. The default value is 100. Valid only for application BZRS, Not applicable for BZ5000 and BZSP.

TSP5
Minimum Timing to initiate ESA Mode, in seconds. After take over a RAIU, the exchange shall initiate the RAIU application packs. During this initialization time the exchange is not able to handle any call of this RAIU. The default value is 15. Valid only for application BZRS, Not applicable for BZ5000 and BZSP.

TSP6
When greater then zero is a parameter to indicate that the exchange will remain controlling RAIU during ESA Mode exit and will not interrupt calls while LSS or EME calls are running. When there is no more LSS or EME calls the exchange transfers the RAIU control to the 5ESS and clears the remaining calls. If TSP6 equals to zero the exchange transfers the control to the 5ESS immediately after signaling between RAIU and 5ESS reestablishes, clearing any running call. The default values is zero. Valid only for application BZRS, Not applicable for BZ5000 and BZSP.

TSP7
Reserved for future use. Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 001 001 -

3-168

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-EXCTME: Modify Exchange Timing

On-line Commands

TSP8
Waiting Timing to free MF digits sender after sending last digit of a sequence, in milliseconds. The default value is 100. Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 001 001 -

TSP9
Reserved for future use. Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 001 001 -

TSP10
Reserved for future use. Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 001 001 -

TSP11
Reserved for future use. Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 001 001 -

TSP12
Reserved for future use. Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 001 001 -

TSP13
Reserved for future use. Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 001 001 -

TSP14
Reserved for future use. Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 001 001 -

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-169

MD-EXCTME: Modify Exchange Timing

On-line Commands

TSP15
Reserved for future use. Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 001 001 -

TSP16
Reserved for future use. Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 001 001 -

TSP17
Reserved for future use. Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 001 001 -

TSP18
Duration of 16kHz frequency pulse, in milliseconds (50 to 1000). Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 006 006 005 004 003 003

TSP19
Reserved for future use. Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 001 001 -

TSP20
TSP20 (0 ... 10): Timing to send answer signal to incoming trunk when outgoing trunk receives the answer signal before incoming trunking has been completed the address signaling (MFC) Compatibility:
SOF 95055 SOF 97049 SOF 98119 SOF 97098 SGP 98092 SOF 98158 SOF 00092 LPN109253856 004 LPN109253864 005 LPN109232249 004 LPN109256842 003 LPN109256826 002 LPN109256834 002

3-170

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-EXCTME: Modify Exchange Timing

On-line Commands

TANI
Timing used for sending ANI signaling. The timer is started when the outgoing trunk receives ANI-REQUEST signal. Compatibility:
SOF 95055 SOF 97049 SOF 98119 SOF 97098 SGP 98092 SOF 98158 SOF 00092 -

LPN109253856 005

LPN109253864 005

LPN109232249 004

LPN109256842 003

LPN109256826 002

LPN109256834 002

TOFFHK
Timing of Off Hook confirmation, in milliseconds (20 to 1000). Default value: 50ms Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249 LPN109256842 LPN109256826 LPN109256834 006 006 005 004 003 003

TONHK
Timing of On Hook confirmation, in milliseconds (140 to 1000). Default value: 200ms Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249 LPN109256842 LPN109256826 LPN109256834 006 006 005 004 003 003

INI
Put the time-outs parameters in their default values.

Remarks

1. 2.

At least one of the optional parameters should be specified. Only specified parameters will be altered. The initial timing values are:
TEBL = 6 s TSCH = 0 s TIAC = 15 s LDCT = 0 s, indicating that it will not have temporization TCLD = 0 s, indicating that it will not have temporization TTNA = 30 s TWDTS = 3000 ms WDCN = 10 s or 20 s (SOF 98119F1, SOF 98158E1 or higher) TIDP = 10 s ISUP8 = 10 s ISUP9 = 90 s ISUP10 = 4 s ISUP11 = 15 s ISUP12 = 15 s ISUP13 = 1 min ISUP14 = 15 s ISUP15 = 1 min ISUP16 = 15 s

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-171

MD-EXCTME: Modify Exchange Timing

On-line Commands

WRAS = 90 s DTCT = 60 s DTBT = 60 s TSERA = 3 min CACK = 90 s TELD = 7 s MDMF = 20 s WNMF = 20 s TEDL = 20 s TFSH = 700 ms TATD = 90 s TRATD = 90 s WDHL = 20 s TEMFE = 60 s TEMFS = 60 s DTIT = 60 s ISUP1 = 15 s ISUP2 = 3 min ISUP3 = 2 min ISUP4 = 5 min ISUP5 = 1 min ISUP6 = 90 s ISUP7 = 20 s TDTOA = 15 s TDTCE = 30 s TDTOI = 15 s V5TMP1 = 90 s V5TMP8 = 500 ms V5TMP10 = 4s (AN); 6s (LE) TSP3 = 72 hours TSP5 = 15s TSP8 = 100ms TANI = 600ms TOFFHK = 50ms TONHK = 200ms

ISUP17 = 1 min ISUP18 = 15 s ISUP19 = 1 min ISUP20 = 15 s ISUP21 = 1 min ISUP22 = 15 s ISUP23 = 1 min ISUP24 = 2 s ISUP25 = 1 s ISUP26 = 1 min ISUP27 = 4 min ISUP28 = 10 s ISUP29 = 400 ms ISUP30 = 5 s ISUP31 = 6 min ISUP32 = 3 s ISUP33 = 12 s ISUP34 = 2 s ISUP35 = 15 s ISUP36 = 10 s ISUP37 = 4 s ISUP38 = 90 s ISUP39 = 12 s STEATD = 10 s TP5S = 100 ms TA5S = 100 ms V5TMP3 = 60 s V5TMP9 = 8 s (AN); 6 s (LE) TSP1 = 0 TSP4 = 100 TSP6 = 0 TSP20 = 0 TSP18 = 150ms TFCALL = 1440ms

3. 4. 5.

Altering the external blockage detection timing applies to analog or digital trunks that use R2D signaling. The WDCN parameter has priority over TELD parameter. During the MFC changing, the WNMF has priority over TIDP parameter.

3-172

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-EXCTME: Modify Exchange Timing

On-line Commands

6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

The timer V5TMP1 should be enough to assure that the remote side will note the interface fault and get startup process. According to 300347 standard, the timer V5TMP9 for AN should be greater than for LE. The timers V5TMP2, V5TMP4, V5TMP5, V5TMP6 and V5TMP7 are reserved for future use. The parameters TEBL, TSCH and TSERA are not valid to exchanges running the software LPN109232249 and LPN109256842. When TSP20 = 0, BZ sends the answer signal immediately the address signaling is completed. But, some other switching do not understand this signal as an answer signal and abort the call. The default value of the V5TMP4 parameter is 1500ms. In case of Indonesia (CTRY = INA ) the V5TMP4 parameter should be set to 500ms. The TFCALL, TOFFHK and TONHK parameters are valid for exchanges with the Control Programs LPN109253856.006, LPN109253864.006, LPN109232249.005, LPN109256842.004, LPN109256826.003, LPN109256834.003 or higher.

11. 12.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-173

CR-EXTALARM: Create External Alarm Detection Point

On-line Commands

CR-EXTALARM: Create External Alarm Detection Point


This command is used to set up an external alarm detection point.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
CR-EXTALARM : PDT = xx-xx-xx, ASE = xx [, TME = xxxxx ] ;

Parameters

PDT
External alarm detection point in uni-brd-cir format uni number of the terminal unit (1..16)
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 2 16 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

brd
01..05 21..22 20..22 20..21 A1 B1 D1

number of the board at the point of external alarm detection


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir (1..8) (1..6) (1..16)

number of the circuit on the board: for BZSP system (with Control Program LPN109232249) for MTL 93081A board (BZ5000 switch) for MTL 97086A board (BZ5000 switch)

ASE
Alarm severity: UR urgent SU semi-urgent NU non-urgent OC event

TME
Time in seconds (1..86400)

3-174

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-EXTALARM: Create External Alarm Detection Point

On-line Commands

Remarks

1.

TME Parameter gives the time in seconds to elapse before the exchange registers the detection of an alarm at the external alarm point. If TME parameter is not specified, a time of 1 second will apply.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-175

IP-EXTALARM: Query External Alarm Message Programming

On-line Commands

IP-EXTALARM: Query External Alarm Message Programming


This command is used to display the messages associated to external alarm detection points in an exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IP-EXTALARM [ : [ LOC = xxxxxxxx [, ENV = xxxx ] , ] PDT = xx-xx-xx ] ;

Parameters

LOC
Exchange installation site code (up to 8 alphanumeric characters in quotes)

ENV
Operating Environment of the Exchange: CS Central Stage PS1 Peripheral Stage 1 PS2 Peripheral Stage 2 PS3 Peripheral Stage 3 PS4 Peripheral Stage 4 PS5 Peripheral Stage 5 PS6 Peripheral Stage 6 . . . . PS31 Peripheral Stage 31 PS32 Peripheral Stage 32 The number of Peripheral Stages, which can be programmed on the exchange, varies from 1 to n:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109256826LPN109256834 32 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

3-176

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IP-EXTALARM: Query External Alarm Message Programming

On-line Commands

PDT
External alarm detection point in uni-brd-cir format uni number of the terminal unit (1..16)
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 2 16 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

brd
01..05 21..22 20..22 20..21 A1 B1 D1

number of the board at the point of external alarm detection


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir (1..8) (1..6) (1..16)

number of the circuit on the board: for BZSP system (with Control Program LPN109232249) for MTL 93081A board (BZ5000 switch) for MTL 97086A board (BZ5000 switch)

Output Format

If the PDT parameter is specified, the message associated to the selected external alarm detection point will be displayed in the following format:
PDT = xx-xx-xx ALA = xxx...xxx

If the PDT parameter is not specified, the messages associated to the selected external alarm detection points programmed in the exchange will be displayed in the following format:
PDT = xx-xx-xx . . . PDT = xx-xx-xx ALA = xxx...xxx . . . ALA = xxx...xxx

Remarks

1. 2.

LOC Parameter can be omitted when the CSR is connected to an exchange. ENV Parameter should be used for CS type exchanges, i. e., with created EPs. It is specified when displaying external alarms for an existing PS operating environment is required. It can be omitted if the required environment is connected. ENV Parameter is not valid for LPN109232249 and LPN109256842 Control Programs.

3.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-177

IT-EXTALARM: Query External Alarm Detection Point

On-line Commands

IT-EXTALARM: Query External Alarm Detection Point


This command is used to display the external alarm detection points set up in the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-EXTALARM [ : PDT = xx-xx-xx ] ;

Parameter

PDT
External alarm detection point in uni-brd-cir format uni
2 16 64 A1 -

number of the terminal unit (1..16)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd
01..05 21..22 20..22 20..21 A1 B1 D1

number of the board at the point of external alarm detection


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir (1..8) (1..6) (1..16)

number of the circuit on the board: for BZSP system (with Control Program LPN109232249) for MTL 93081A board (BZ5000 switch) for MTL 97086A board (BZ5000 switch)

Output Format

If PDT parameter is specified, the selected external alarm detection point will be displayed in the following format:
PDT = xx-xx-xx ASE = xx TME [ ALA = xxx...xxx ]

3-178

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-EXTALARM: Query External Alarm Detection Point

On-line Commands

If PDT parameter is not specified, all external alarm detection points set up in the exchange will be displayed in the following format:
PDT = xx-xx-xx . . PDT = xx-xx-xx ASE = xx . . ASE = xx TME [ ALA = xxx...xxx ] TME [ ALA = xxx...xxx ]

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-179

RP-EXTALARM: Remove External Alarm Message Programming

On-line Commands

RP-EXTALARM: Remove External Alarm Message Programming


This command is used to delete the associated message programming to an external alarm detection point.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
RP-EXTALARM : [ LOC = xxxxxxxx [, ENV = xxxx ] , ] PDT = xx-xx-xx;

Parameters

LOC
Exchange installation site code (up to 8 alphanumeric characters in quotes)

ENV
Operating Environment of the Exchange: CS PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4 PS5 PS6 . . PS31 PS32 Central Stage Peripheral Stage 1 Peripheral Stage 2 Peripheral Stage 3 Peripheral Stage 4 Peripheral Stage 5 Peripheral Stage 6 . . Peripheral Stage 31 Peripheral Stage 32

The number of Peripheral Stages, which can be programmed on the exchange, varies from 1 to n:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109256826LPN109256834 32 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

3-180

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

RP-EXTALARM: Remove External Alarm Message Programming

On-line Commands

PDT
External alarm detection point in uni-brd-cir format uni
2 16 64 A1 -

number of the terminal unit (1..16)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

brd
01..05 21..22 20..22 20..21 A1 B1 D1

number of the board at the point of external alarm detection


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir (1..8) (1..6) (1..16)

number of the circuit on the board: for BZSP system (with Control Program LPN109232249) for MTL 93081A board (BZ5000 switch) for MTL 97086A board (BZ5000 switch)

Remarks

1. 2.

LOC Parameter may be omitted if the CSR is connected to the exchange. ENV Parameter should be used for CS type exchanges, i. e., with created EPs, specified when erasing programming external alarms according to the operating environment of the existing EPs. It can be omitted when the connected environment is the required one. ENV Parameter is not valid for LPN109232249 and LPN109256842Control Programs.

3.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-181

SU-EXTALARM: Suppress External Alarm Detection Point

On-line Commands

SU-EXTALARM: Suppress External Alarm Detection Point


This command is used to suppress an external alarm detection point.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
SU-EXTALARM : PDT = xx-xx-xx ;

Parameter

PDT
External alarm detection point in uni-brd-cir format uni
2 16 64 A1 -

number of the terminal unit (1..16)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd
01..05 21..22 20..22 20..21 A1 B1 D1

number of the board at the point of external alarm detection


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir (1..8) (1..6) (1..16)

number of the circuit on the board: for BZSP system (with Control Program LPN109232249) for MTL 93081A board (BZ5000 switch) for MTL 97086A board (BZ5000 switch)

3-182

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

AT-EXTEM: Activate External Alarm Output Point

On-line Commands

AT-EXTEM: Activate External Alarm Output Point


This command is used to activate an external alarm output point in the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
AT-EXTEM : EMP = xx-xx-xx ;

Parameter

EMP
External alarm output point in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

number of the terminal unit (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

brd
01..05 21..22 20..22 20..21 A1 B1 D1

number of the board at the point of external alarm detection


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir (1..7) (1..4) (1..16)

number of the circuit on the board: for BZSP system (with Control Program LPN109232249) for MTL 93081A board (BZ5000 switch) for MTL 97086A board (BZ5000 switch)

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-183

DS-EXTEM: Deactivate External Alarm Output Point

On-line Commands

DS-EXTEM: Deactivate External Alarm Output Point


This command is used to deactivate an external alarm output point in the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
DS-EXTEM : EMP = xx-xx-xx ;

Parameter

EMP
External alarm output point in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

number of the terminal unit (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd
01..05 21..22 20..22 20..21 A1 B1 D1

number of the board at the point of external alarm detection


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir (1..7) (1..4) (1..16)

number of the circuit on the board: for BZSP system (with Control Program LPN109232249) for MTL 93081A board (BZ5000 switch) for MTL 97086A board (BZ5000 switch)

3-184

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-EXTEM: Query External Alarm Output Point

On-line Commands

IT-EXTEM: Query External Alarm Output Point


This command is used to display external alarm output points active in the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-EXTEM ;

Output Format

External alarm output points active in the exchange are displayed in the following format:
EMP = xx-xx-xx . . . . . . EMP = xx-xx-xx

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-185

AT-FAISUP: Activate Fault Supervision

On-line Commands

AT-FAISUP: Activate Fault Supervision


This command is used to activate the supervision of failures in trunks and MFC senders/receivers and DTMF receivers in the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
AT-FAISUP ;

Remarks

1.

Fault supervision is automatically activated on the exchange start.

3-186

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

DS-FAISUP: Deactivating Fault Supervision

On-line Commands

DS-FAISUP: Deactivating Fault Supervision


This command is used to deactivate the fault supervision in exchange trunks, MFC senders/receivers, and DTMF receivers.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
DS-FAISUP ;

Remarks

1.

Deactivating fault supervision generates a non-urgent alarm, recorded in the exchange Operating Log.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-187

IP-FAISUP: Query Fault Supervision Programming

On-line Commands

IP-FAISUP: Query Fault Supervision Programming


This command is used to display the parameters programmed for fault supervision in trunks, MFC senders/receivers and DTMF receivers.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IP-FAISUP [ : { ORG = TRK [, ROUT = xxxxx ] | ORG = MFC | ORG = DTMF } ] ;

Parameters

ORG
Device type: TRK trunk MFC MFC sender/receiver DTMF DTMF receiver

ROUT
Route ID: E1..En incoming routes B1..Bn two-way routes S1..Sn outgoing routes
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 32 1024 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Output Format

The exchange programmed fault supervision parameters are displayed in the following format:
ORG = TRK ROUT = xxxxx . . . ORG = TRK ROUT = xxxxx ORG = MFC NCEO = xxx NCEO = xxx . . . NCEO = xxx MPEO = xxx% MPEO = xxx% . . . MPEO = xxx% PMOS = xxx% PTOS = xxx% . . . PTOS = xxx% PTOSUA = xxx% . . . PTOSUA = xxx% PTOSSA = xxx%

PTOSSA = xxx% NMFA4

PMOSUA = xxx%

PMOSSA = xxx%

ORG = DTMF PDOSUA = xxx%

PDOSSA = xxx%

3-188

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IP-FAISUP: Query Fault Supervision Programming

On-line Commands

Remarks

1.

The fault supervision parameters are: NCEO Maximum number of consecutive unsuccessful seizures of a trunk or MFC sender/receiver, above which the device must be considered as faulty (1..250); Minimum percentage of effective seizures of a trunk or MFC sender/receiver, below which the device must be considered as faulty (1..100); Maximum percentage of out-of-service trunks on a route, above which an urgent alarm must be generated (1..100); Maximum percentage of out-of-service trunks on a route, above which a semi-urgent alarm must be generated (1..100); Maximum percentage of out-of-service trunks on a route, above which no automatic trunk blocking on the route should be applied when they are faulty (1..100). Maximum percentage of out-of-service MFC senders/receivers in the exchange, above which an urgent alarm must be generated (1..100); Maximum percentage of out-of-service MFC senders/receivers in the exchange, above which a semi-urgent alarm must be generated (1..100); Maximum percentage of out-of-service MFC senders/receivers in the exchange, above which no automatic trunk blocking on the route should be applied when they are faulty (1..100); Maximum percentage of out-of-service DTMF receivers in the exchange, above which an urgent alarm must be generated (1..100); Maximum percentage of out-of-service DTMF receivers in the exchange, above which a semi-urgent alarm must be generated (1..100).

MPEO

PTOSUA PTOSSA

PTOS

PMOSUA PMOSSA PMOS

PDOSUA PDOSSA

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-189

PR-FAISUP: Program Fault Supervision

On-line Commands

PR-FAISUP: Program Fault Supervision


This command is used to program parameters for supervising failures in trunks, MFC senders/receivers and DTMF receivers.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
PR-FAISUP : { ORG = TRK, ROUT = xxxxx [, NCEO = xxx ] [, MPEO = xxx ] [, PTOS = xxx ] [, PTOSUA = xxx , PTOSSA= xxx ] | ORG = MFC [, NCEO = xxx ] [, MPEO = xxx ] [, PMOS = xxx ] [, PMOSUA = xxx , PMOSSA = xxx ] [, NMFA4 ] | ORG = DTMF, PDOSUA = xxx, PDOSSA = xxx };

Parameters

ORG
Device type: TRK trunk MFC MFC sender/receiver DTMF DTMF receiver

ROUT
Outgoing and two-way routes: B1..Bn two-way routes S1..Sn outgoing routes E1..En incoming routes
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 32 1024 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

NCEO
Maximum number of consecutive unsuccessful seizures of a trunk or MFC sender/receiver, above which the device must be considered as faulty (1..250);

MPEO
Minimum percentage of effective seizures of a trunk or MFC sender/receiver, below which the device must be considered as faulty (1..100);

PTOS
Maximum percentage of out-of-service trunks on a route, above which no automatic trunk blocking on the route should be applied when they are faulty (1..100).

3-190

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

PR-FAISUP: Program Fault Supervision

On-line Commands

PTOSUA
Maximum percentage of out-of-service trunks on a route, above which an urgent alarm must be generated (1..100);

PTOSSA
Maximum percentage of out-of-service trunks on a route, above which a semi-urgent alarm must be generated (1..100);

PMOS
Maximum percentage of out-of-service MFC senders/receivers in the exchange, above which no automatic trunk blocking on the route should be applied when they are faulty (1..100);

PMOSUA
Maximum percentage of out-of-service MFC senders/receivers in the exchange, above which an urgent alarm must be generated (1..100);

PMOSSA
Maximum percentage of out-of-service MFC senders/receivers in the exchange, above which a semi-urgent alarm must be generated (1..100);

NMFA4
Informs the control program to not consider receiving MFC A4 signal as a fault

PDOSUA
Maximum percentage of out-of-service DTMF receivers in the exchange, above which an urgent alarm must be generated (1..100);

PDOSSA
Maximum percentage of out-of-service DTMF receivers in the exchange, above which a semi-urgent alarm must be generated (1..100).

Remarks

1.

A trunk is considered successfully seized when: the ongoing call is answered; MFC signaling exchange terminates with end-of-selection signal B2, B3, B4, B7, or B8; the calling party disconnects during MFC signaling exchange; the calling party disconnects before answering timeout. MFC signaling exchange terminates with valid end-of-selection signal the calling party disconnects during MFC signaling exchange.

2.

A MFC sender/receiver is considered successfully seized when:

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-191

PR-FAISUP: Program Fault Supervision

On-line Commands

3.

When a route trunk fault supervision parameters are not specified, they will default to the following values: NCEO = 20 MPEO = 15% PTOSUA = 60% PTOSSA = 40% PTOS = 75%

4.

When MFC sender/receiver fault supervision parameters are not specified, they will default to the following values: NCEO = 20 MPEO = 50% PMOSUA = 60% PMOSSA = 40% PMOS = 75%

5.

When DTMF receiver fault supervision parameters are not specified, they will default to the following values: PDOSUA = 60% PDOSSA = 40%

6.

If parameter NMFA4 was not specified, the exchange will consider the reception of A4 signal as a fault.

3-192

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-FUNC: Modify information on the Hardware Key of the exchange features

On-line Commands

MD-FUNC: Modify information on the Hardware Key of the exchange features

This command modifies the number of subscribers, number of trunks and the survival period of the BZ5000 and BZSP features recorded on the hardware key.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 003 002 001 -

Input Format
MD-FUNC: [ PRPAID=xx ] [, DEBS=xxx ] [, EXCTYP=xx ] [, NTRUNK=xxx ] [, VAL=NN ]

Parameters

PRPAID
Number of subscribers of the pre-paid service [1..17]: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Hardware Key - PPLC PPLC1 PPLC2 PPLC3 PPLC4 PPLC5 PPLC6 PPLC7 PPLC8 PPLC9 PPLC10 PPLC11 PPLC12 PPLC13 PPLC14 PPLC15 PPLC16 PPLC17 Number of pre-paid subscribers 256 560 1200 2400 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000 12000 14000 16000 18000 20000

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-193

MD-FUNC: Modify information on the Hardware Key of the exchange features

On-line Commands

DEBS
Number of subscribers of the DEBS service [1..17] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Hardware Key - DEBS DEBS1 DEBS2 DEBS3 DEBS4 DEBS5 DEBS6 DEBS7 DEBS8 DEBS9 DEBS10 DEBS11 DEBS12 DEBS13 DEBS14 DEBS15 DEBS16 DEBS17 Number of DEBS subscribers 256 560 1200 2400 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000 12000 14000 16000 18000 20000

EXCTYP
Exchange operation mode: 0 normal exchange 1 PRI/ISUP protocol converter

NTRUNK
Number of trunks [1..8] For EXCTYP=0 Hardware Key - HTT 1 HTT1 2 HTT2 3 HTT3 4 HTT4 5 HTT5 6 HTT6 7 HTT7 8 HTT8 For EXCTYP=1 Hardware Key - PCPRIS 1 PCPRIS1 2 PCPRIS2 3 PCPRIS3 4 PCPRIS4 5 PCPRIS5 6 PCPRIS6 7 PCPRIS7 8 PCPRIS8 HOST V5.2, TOLL, TANDEM 16 E1 / T1 32 E1 / T1 48 E1 / T1 64 E1 / T1 80 E1 / T1 96 E1 / T1 112 E1 / T1 128 E1 / T1 Protocol Converter PRI/ISUP (Avaya) 16 E1 / T1 32 E1 / T1 48 E1 / T1 64 E1 / T1 80 E1 / T1 96 E1 / T1 112 E1 / T1 128 E1 / T1

VAL
Survival period in days [1..45]

3-194

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-FUNC: Modify information on the Hardware Key of the exchange features

On-line Commands

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4.

This command is exclusive for TSS team, valid only on CSR controlled by a special Hardware Key. This command shall be executed separated for each parameter, except for the parameters EXCTYP and NTRUNK. The parameters Exchange Type and Number of Trunks are related to BZSP systems. This command is valid for exchanges with LPN109253856.003 and LPN109232249.002 or higher.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-195

IT-GRPTRK: Query the state of circuit group

On-line Commands

IT-GRPTRK: Query the state of circuit group


This command is used to query the state of circuit group from adjacent exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 004 001 -

Input Format
IT-GRPTRK: CIC = xxxx, NUM = xx ; DPC = xxxx ;

Parameters

CIC
Trunk circuit ID code number (1..4096) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

NUM
Number of trunks besides the specified CIC [1..30] Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 004 001 -

DPC
Number of the adjacent signaling point code (0..16777216)

Output Format:
Circuits States CIC State 12 SRV RET 14 SRV Report DPC = 23 CIC State 13 SRV 15 SRV

Remarks

1.

The example above was using as values CIC = 12, NUM = 3 e DPC = 23
Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page 109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

3-196

IT-GRPTRK: Query the state of circuit group

On-line Commands

2.

The trunk states can be: SRV RET : TRANSIENT STATE SRV ENT : INCOMING BUSY STATE SRV OCP : OUTGOING BUSY STATE SRV : IDLE STATE FAL BLS : HARDWARE LOCALLY BLOCKED FAL BLE : HARDWARE REMOTELY BLOCKED FAL : BLS : BLT : HARDWARE LOCALLY AND REMOTELY BLOCKED MAINTANCE LOCALLY BLOCKED MAINTANCE LOCALLY AND REMOTELY BLOCKED

SRV BLE : MAINTANCE REMOTELY BLOCKED BLT RET : MAINTANCE TRANSIENT BLOCKED BLT NCR : MAINTANCE UNEQUIPPED BLOCKED

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-197

CR-GRT: Create Route Group

On-line Commands

CR-GRT: Create Route Group


This command is used to create a Route Group. A route group contains up to five routes and for each one a call percentage, that will use this route, is specified. A group of routes replaces one or more routes on the routing plan of the exchange (command MD-ORP).
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 E6 E6 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
CR-GRT: GRT = xxx, NAM = xxxxxxxx; ROU1 = xx-xx , ROU2 = xx-xx , ROU3 = xx-xx-xx , ROU4 = xx-xx , ROU5 = xx-xx

Parameters

GRT
Route Group ( G1..G128 )

NAM
Route Group Identification (up to 8 characters, between inverted commas)

ROU1
First selected route Identification, on the rot-per format: rot route number: E1..E1024 incoming routes S1..S1024 outgoing routes B1..B1024 two-way routes I1 .. I1024 intra-exchange routes per call percentage to be allocated on the selected route (0..100)

ROU2
Second selected route Identification, on the rot-per format: rot route number: E1..E1024 incoming routes S1..S1024 outgoing routes B1..B1024 two-way routes I1 .. I1024 intra-exchange routes per call percentage to be allocated on the selected route (0..100)

3-198

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-GRT: Create Route Group

On-line Commands

ROU3
Third selected route Identification, on the rot-per format: rot route number: E1..E1024 incoming routes S1..S1024 outgoing routes B1..B1024 two-way routes I1 .. I1024 intra-exchange routes per call percentage to be allocated on the selected route (0..100)

ROU4
Fourth selected route Identification, on the rot-per format: rot route number: E1..E1024 incoming routes S1..S1024 outgoing routes B1..B1024 two-way routes I1 .. I1024 intra-exchange routes per call percentage to be allocated on the selected route (0..100)

ROU5
Fifth selected route Identification, on the rot-per format: rot route number: E1..E1024 incoming routes S1..S1024 outgoing routes B1..B1024 two-way routes I1 .. I1024 intra-exchange routes per call percentage to be allocated on the selected route (0..100)

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

When a route group is defined, replacing only one route on the MD-ORP command, the ROU2, ROU3, ROU4 and ROU5 parameters will not be accepted. Routes with 5SS signaling cannot be together with routes that use other types of signaling. The sum of the percentages of the routes shall be always equal to100.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-199

IT-GRT: Query Route Group

On-line Commands

IT-GRT: Query Route Group


This command is used to query a route group.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-GRT:GRT = xxx

Parameter

GRT
Route Group ( G1..G128 )

3-200

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-GRT: Modify Route Group

On-line Commands

MD-GRT: Modify Route Group


This command is used to modify a route group.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-GRT:GRT = xxx, NAM = xxxxxxxx; ROU1 = xx-xx , [ROU2 = xx-xx , ROU3 = xx-xx-xx , ROU4 = xx-xx , ROU5 = xx-xx]

Parameters

GRT
Route Group ( G1..G128 )

NAM
Route Group Identification (up to 8 characters, between inverted commas)

ROU1
First selected route Identification, on the rot-per format: rot route number: E1..E1024 incoming routes S1..S1024 outgoing routes B1..B1024 two-way routes I1 .. I1024 intra-exchange routes per call percentage to be allocated on the selected route (0..100)

ROU2
Second selected route Identification, on the rot-per format: rot route number: E1..E1024 incoming routes S1..S1024 outgoing routes B1..B1024 two-way routes I1 .. I1024 intra-exchange routes per call percentage to be allocated on the selected route (0..100)

ROU3
Third selected route Identification, on the rot-per format: rot route number: E1..E1024 incoming routes S1..S1024 outgoing routes B1..B1024 two-way routes I1 .. I1024 intra-exchange routes

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-201

MD-GRT: Modify Route Group

On-line Commands

per

call percentage to be allocated on the selected route (0..100)

ROU4
Fourth selected route Identification, on the rot-per format: rot route number: E1..E1024 incoming routes S1..S1024 outgoing routes B1..B1024 two-way routes I1 .. I1024 intra-exchange routes per call percentage to be allocated on the selected route (0..100)

ROU5
Fifth selected route Identification, on the rot-per format: rot route number: E1..E1024 incoming routes S1..S1024 outgoing routes B1..B1024 two-way routes I1 .. I1024 intra-exchange routes per call percentage to be allocated on the selected route (0..100)

3-202

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

SU-GRT: Suppress Route Group

On-line Commands

SU-GRT: Suppress Route Group


This command is used to suppress a route group.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
SU-GRT:GRT = xxx

Parameter

GRT
Route Group ( G1..G128 )

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-203

IT-HARDKEY: Query information of Hardware Keys connected to switch

On-line Commands

IT-HARDKEY: Query information of Hardware Keys connected to switch


This command query information of Hardware Keys connected to switch.
Compatibility
SOF 95055 LPN109253856 005 SOF 97049 LPN109253864 005 SOF 98119 SOF 97098 LPN109232249 004 SGP 98092 LPN109256842 003 SOF 98158 LPN109256826 002 SOF 00092 LPN109256834 002

Input Format
IT-HARDKEY ;

Output Format

The answer for this command displays the following information related to the Hardware Keys (valid for LPN 109253856.003 and LPN109232249.002 or higher) :
- Number of pre-paid subscribers = <xxx> / <yyy> <status> - Number of DEBS subscribers = <xxx> / <yyy> <status> - Exchange type: <T> <status> - Number of trunks = <xxx> / <yyy> <status> - Billing service <status> - Survival of <d> days - Hardware Key Demo/Universal Credits = <cr> days BZ-VIEW - Maximum number of graphical clients = <cg> / <cgh> <status> - Maximum number of telnet clients = <ct> / <cth> <status> - Maximum number of registered exchanges = <cc> / <cp> <status>

Where: <xxx> is the number of subscribers or trunks created on the exchange; <yyy> is the number of subscribers or trunks enabled by hardware key; <T> displays Host/Tandem/Gateway, PRI/ISUP Protocol Converter;

<status> will be displayed when the exchange is operating without the hardware key of the functionality; on this case, it will be displayed as survival (when the functionality is operating on the survival period) or blocked (when the survival period has expired or the Demo-Universal hardware key credit number is over); <d> represents the number of survival days of a functionality. This information will be

3-204

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-HARDKEY: Query information of Hardware Keys connected to switch

On-line Commands

only displayed when the functionality is on the survival period. The default value is 7 days. <cr> indicates the number of credit days of a functionality, provided by the DemoUniversal Hardware Key installation. This information will be only displayed when the Hardware Key is connected. The default value is 45 days.

<cg> represents the number of active BZ-VIEW graphical clients. <cgh> represents the maximum number of CSP-IP graphical clients enabled by the Hardware Key BZ-VIEW. <ct> indicates the number of enabled telnet clients.

<cc> represents the number of registered exchanges on the BZ-VIEW. <cp> indicates the maximum number of exchanges allowed on the BZ-VIEW register through the BZ-VIEW Hardware Key.
Remarks

1. 2.

Only the information of the configured features will be displayed on the Output Format. The Exchange Type and Number of Trunks information are related to BZSP systems.

3. The information related to CSP-IP will be displayed only as an answer for the ITHARDKEY command of the CSR Client Interface. 4. The survival and Demo-Universal Hardware Key information are mutually exclusive.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-205

CR-HOL: Create Holiday

On-line Commands

CR-HOL: Create Holiday


This command is used to insert a date in the exchange table of holidays.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
CR-HOL : DAT = xx-xx-xx ;

Parameter

DAT
Date in the yy-mm-dd format: yy year (00..99) mm month (01..12) dd day (01..31)

Remarks

1.

The exchange table of holidays can contain up to 50 dates.

3-206

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-HOL: Query Holidays

On-line Commands

IT-HOL: Query Holidays


This command is used to display the exchange table of holidays.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-HOL ;

Output Format:
DAT = xx-xx-xx . . . . . . DAT = xx-xx-xx

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-207

SU-HOL: Suppress Holiday

On-line Commands

SU-HOL: Suppress Holiday


This command is used to erase a date from the exchange table of holidays.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
SU-HOL [ : DAT = xx-xx-xx ] ;

Parameter

DAT
Date in the yy-mm-dd format: yy year (00..99) mm month (01..12) dd day (01..31)

Remarks

1.

If the DAT parameter is not specified, all holidays programmed in the exchange will be suppressed.

3-208

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-INT: Query Engaged Subscriber or Trunk

On-line Commands

IT-INT: Query Engaged Subscriber or Trunk


This command is used to query the subscriber/trunk engaged in conversation with a specified subscriber/trunk
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-INT : { SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx | TRK = xx-xx-xx } ;

Parameters

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

TRK
Trunk number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

brd
13..20 01..20 01..19 01..05 A1 B1 D1 -

trunk board number


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-209

IT-INT: Query Engaged Subscriber or Trunk

On-line Commands

cir
31 512 A1 -

board circuit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

Output Format

If the SUB parameter is specified, the subscriber/trunk engaged in conversation will be displayed as follows:
SUB = xxxx-xxxx SUB = xxxx-xxxx SUB = xxxx-xxxx TRK = xx-xx-xx (intra-exchange call) (external call) or

If the TRK parameter is specified, the subscriber/trunk engaged in conversation will be displayed as follows:
TRK = xx-xx-xx TRK = xx-xx-xx SUB = xxxx-xxxx TRK = xx-xx-xx (external call) (tandem call) or

Remarks

1.

The output format of the SUB parameter can be changed through the Option Menu, Output Format submenu, on the CSR main window.

3-210

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

AT-INTTST: Activate Subscriber Interface Test

On-line Commands

AT-INTTST: Activate Subscriber Interface Test


This command is used to carry out an immediate subscriber interface test.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 B1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
AT-INTTST : {SUB = [xxxx]-xxxx&..&xxxx | TER = xx-xx-xx&..&xx-xx-xx } [, TYP = xxxx ] [, VAL];

Parameters

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

TER
Terminal number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni number of the terminal unit (1..n)
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 16 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

brd cir

terminal board number (1..21) board circuit number (1..32)

Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

TYP
Allows choosing the type of interface test to be carried out: aud subscriber interface audio tests ring subscriber interface ring tests loop subscriber interface loop tests chg subscriber interface charging tests csu subscriber interface current supply tests

VAL
Provides the result of all tests executed.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-211

AT-INTTST: Activate Subscriber Interface Test

On-line Commands

Output Format

If no parameter was specified (apart from SUB or TER, compulsory), the interface test result is displayed in the following format:
SUB = xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx RTS = xxx..xxx

If parameter VAL was specified, the results of the tests carried out are displayed in the following format:
SUB = xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx TYP = RING . . TYP = LOOP . . TYP = AUD . . TYP = CHG . . TYP = CSU . . RTS = xxxxxxxxx . . . . . . . . . .

If parameter TYP was specified, the robot will apply the selected type of test to the subscriber interface, displaying the result in the following format:
SUB = xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx RTS = xxx..xxx

If parameters TYP and VAL were specified, the robot will apply the selected type of test to the subscriber interface, displaying the result in the following format:
SUB = xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx TYP = xxxx TYP = xxxx . . RTS = xxx..xxx . .

Remarks

1. 2.

This command is not compatible with board MTL 93081A. Therefore, if it is specified on a command line for this type of board, the test will not be carried out. The overall results (RTS) expected for subscriber line testes are: Lines Tested: Normal line Abnormal line Incomplete testing Lines Untested: Absent robot

3-212

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

AT-INTTST: Activate Subscriber Interface Test

On-line Commands

Faulty robot Busy line Unfitted line Inactive line Active test robot 3. When parameter VAL is specified, the CSR provides the following results: TYP = RING Ring Signal Amplitude = xx in Vrms Frequency = xx in Hz Duration = xx in ms Silence = xx in ms Answer detector circuit No answer detecting circuit TYP = LOOP Power supply voltage = xx in Vdc Answer detector circuit No answer detecting circuit Decadic pulse acknowledgement TYP = AUD Robot PCM channel Digital analog insertion loss = xx in dBm Analog digital insertion loss = xx in dBm Return loss = xx in dBm Pads Loss with ZBT pad = xx in dBm Loss with ZBC pad = xx in dBm Loss with ZBP pad = xx in dBm Longitudinal balance = xx in dBm Pulsed noise = xx pulse(s) Psophometric noise = xx in dBmp TYP = CHG Charging signal Ok / Not ok Ok / Not ok Ok / Not ok Ok / Not ok Ok / Not ok Ok / Not ok Ok / Not ok Ok / Not ok Ok / Not ok Ok / Not ok Ok / Not ok Ok / Not ok Ok / Not ok Ok / Not ok Ok / Not ok Ok / Not ok

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-213

AT-INTTST: Activate Subscriber Interface Test

On-line Commands

Amplitude = xx in Vrms Frequency = xx in kHz TYP = CSU Current supply Ok / Not ok 2k2-resistance current = xx in mA 1k-resistance current = xx in mA 2k2//1k-resistance current = xx in mA 4. 5. The output format of the SUB parameter can be changed through the Options menu, Output Format submenu, on the CSR main window. The TER parameter is not used for LPN109232249 and LPN109256842 Control Programs.

3-214

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

DS-INTTST: Deactivate Interface Test

On-line Commands

DS-INTTST: Deactivate Interface Test


This command is used to deactivate a running periodic interface test.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 B1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
DS-INTTST;

Remarks

1.

Command DS-INTTST does not erase the periodic subscriber interface testing programming, neither results in loss of results obtained up to test deactivation.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-215

IP-INTTST: Query Interface Test Programming

On-line Commands

IP-INTTST: Query Interface Test Programming


This command is used to inquire the time, type and periodicity programmed for periodic subscriber interface testing.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 B1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IP-INTTST;

Output Format
HOU = xx:xx:xx [, STP = x] [, TYP = xxxx];

Remarks

1.

Message "In course" will be displayed on the right of STP if the periodic interface test is being run at the time of inquiring.

3-216

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-INTTST: Query Interface Test Result

On-line Commands

IT-INTTST: Query Interface Test Result


This command is used to inquire the result of the last subscriber interface periodic test.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 B1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-INTTST [:{ SUB = [xxxx]-xxxx&..&xxxx | TER = xx-xx-xx&..&xx-xx-xx | RTS = xxxx } [, TYP = xxxx] [, VAL]];

Parameters

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

TER
Terminal number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni number of the terminal unit (1..n)
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 16 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

brd terminal board number (1..21) cir board circuit number (1..32) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

RTS
Subscriber line test results: NTST Untested line TST Tested line NOL Normal line LAN Abnormal line

TYP
Allows choosing the type of interface test to be carried out: aud subscriber interface audio tests ring subscriber interface ring tests

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-217

IT-INTTST: Query Interface Test Result

On-line Commands

loop chg csu

subscriber interface loop tests subscriber interface charging tests subscriber interface current supply tests

VAL
Provides the result of all tests executed.

Output Format

If no parameter was specified, the interface test results are displayed in the following format:
SUB = xxxx SUB = xxxx SUB = xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx TER = xx-xx-xx . . TER = xx-xx-xx RTS = xxx..xxx RTS = xxx..xxx . . RTS = xxx..xxx

If parameter SUB or TER were specified, the results of the tests run on the selected subscriber interface are displayed in the following format:
SUB = xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx RTS = xxx..xxx

If parameter VAL was specified, by itself or with another parameter, the results of the all tests carried out or those relative to the parameter specified jointly with VAL are displayed in the following format:
SUB = xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx TYP = RING . . TYP = LOOP . . TYP = AUD . . TYP = CHG . . TYP = CSU . . SUB = xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx RTS = xxx..xxx . . . . . . . . . . RTS = xxx..xxx

If parameter RTS was specified, the results of all tests run on subscriber interfaces with the result specified in parameter RTS are displayed in the following format:
SUB = xxxx SUB = xxxx SUB = xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx TER = xx-xx-xx . . TER = xx-xx-xx RTS = xxx..xxx RTS = xxx..xxx . . RTS = xxx..xxx

If parameter TYP was specified, the results of all subscriber interfaces for which the type of test specified in this parameter was run will be displayed in the following format:
SUB = xxxx SUB = xxxx SUB = xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx TER = xx-xx-xx . . TER = xx-xx-xx RTS = xxx..xxx RTS = xxx..xxx . . RTS = xxx..xxx

3-218

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-INTTST: Query Interface Test Result

On-line Commands

Remarks

1. 2.

This command is not compatible with board MTL 93081A. Therefore, if it is specified on a command line for this type of board, the test will not be run. The overall results (RTS) expected for subscriber line testes are: Lines Tested: Normal line Abnormal line Incomplete testing Lines Untested: Absent robot Faulty robot Busy line Unfitted line Inactive line Active test robot

3.

When parameter VAL is specified, the CSR provides the following results: TYP = RING Ring Signal Amplitude = xx in Vrms Frequency = xx in Hz Duration = xx in ms Silence = xx in ms Answer detector circuit No answer detecting circuit TYP = LOOP Power supply voltage = xx in Vdc Answer detector circuit No answer detecting circuit Decadic pulse acknowledgement TYP = AUD Robot PCM channel Digital analog insertion loss = xx in dBm Analog digital insertion loss = xx in dBm Ok / Not ok Ok / Not ok Ok / Not ok Ok / Not ok Ok / Not ok Ok / Not ok Ok / Not ok Ok / Not ok Ok / Not ok Ok / Not ok

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-219

IT-INTTST: Query Interface Test Result

On-line Commands

Return loss = xx in dBm Pads Loss with ZBT pad = xx in dBm Loss with ZBC pad = xx in dBm Loss with ZBP pad = xx in dBm Longitudinal balance = xx in dBm Pulsed noise = xx pulse(s) Psophometric noise = xx in dBmp TYP = CHG Charging signal Amplitude = xx in Vrms Frequency = xx in kHz TYP = CSU Current supply Ok / Not ok 2k2-resistance current = xx in mA 1k-resistance current = xx in mA 2k2//1k-resistance current = xx in mA 4. 5.

Ok / Not ok Ok / Not ok

Ok / Not ok Ok / Not ok Ok / Not ok Ok / Not ok

The output format of the SUB parameter can be changed through the Options menu, Output Format submenu, on the CSR main window. The TER parameter is not used for LPN109232249 and LPN109256842 Control Programs.

3-220

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

PR-INTTST: Program Line Test

On-line Commands

PR-INTTST: Program Line Test


This command is used to program periodic subscriber interface tests.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 B1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
PR-INTTST : HOU = xx[-xx[-xx]] [, TYP = xxxx ] [, STP = x ] ;

Parameters

HOU
Supervision starting time in format ho[-mi[-se]]: ho hour (00..23) mi minute (00..59) (optional) se second (00.59) (optional)

TYP
Allows choosing the type of interface test to be carried out: aud subscriber interface audio tests ring subscriber interface ring tests loop subscriber interface loop tests chg subscriber interface charging tests csu subscriber interface current supply tests

TSP
Periodicity of subscriber line testing (1...7 days)

Remarks

1. 2.

Omitting minutes or seconds in parameter HOU corresponds to specifying value valor 00. If the periodicity of line testing was not specified, the test will be run daily (STP = 1).

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-221

RP-INTTST: Remove Interface Test Programming

On-line Commands

RP-INTTST: Remove Interface Test Programming


This command is used to remove a current periodic subscriber interface test programming.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 B1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
RP-INTTST;

Remarks

1.

The removal of periodic subscriber interface test programming results in the loss of the results of the last test.

3-222

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-JMA: Create Announcement Machine Junction

On-line Commands

CR-JMA: Create Announcement Machine Junction


This command is used to associate an announcement machine junction to a message.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
CR-JMA : JMA = xx-xx-xx, MSG = xxx ;

Parameters

JMA
Junction number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

brd
01..05 21..22 20..22 20..21 A1 B1 D1

junction board number


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir
16 28 A1

board circuit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-223

CR-JMA: Create Announcement Machine Junction

On-line Commands

MSG
Type of message: ADN BLO BLK CCO CCT CGT MBX CXPD ALC SCL MCC MOA MOI NDF CHN DND VCL PPB ORF TRF ABS DN INVDN PAS INVPAS SRVCOD INVSC SRVREST BLKSRV access denied blocked for origination blocked originating collect call terminating collect call congestion voice mail special voice mail alarm call service Subscriber credit limit collect call music accepted operation-message incorrect-operation message defective number change number do not disturb vacant level Prepaid blocking faulty outgoing route forwarding absent subscriber DN request invalid DN password request invalid password service code request invalid service code service restriction service blocked

PPB is valid for exchanges with SOF 98158B3 Control Program version or higher. SCL is valid for exchanges with SOF 98158C1 Control Program version or higher. BLO is valid for exchanges with SOF 98119E6 and SOF 98158D6 Control Program versions or higher. CXPD is valid for exchanges with SOF 98119F1 and SOF 98158E1 Control Program versions or higher. ABS is valid for exchanges with LPN109253856.003, LPN109253864.003, LPN109232249.002 or higher. All the mnemonics are valid for exchanges with LPN109232249 Control Program. DN, INVDN, PAS, INVPAS, SRVCOD, INVSC, SRVREST and BLKSRV is valid for exchanges with LPN109253856.004 or higher.

Remarks

1.

Considering BZ5000 exchanges: - For external announcement machines, use MTL board junction circuits. - For internal announcement machines, use MPS board junction channels.

3. 4.

An announcement machine junction is created in blocked operating status (BLK) and should be unblocked by command MD-JMASTE. The message recorded for mnemonic MBX is used when the subscriber has a Voice Mail supplementary service.

3-224

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-JMA: Query Announcement Machine Junctions

On-line Commands

IT-JMA: Query Announcement Machine Junctions


This command is used to display announcement machine junctions with their assigned messages.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-JMA [ : { JMA = xx-xx-xx | STE = xxx } ] ;

Parameters

JMA
Junction number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

brd
01..05 21..22 20..22 20..21 A1 B1 D1

junction board number


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir
16 28 A1

board circuit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

STE
Announcement machine junction operating status: BLK operator blocking SRV in service NBD no board

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-225

IT-JMA: Query Announcement Machine Junctions

On-line Commands

Output Format

If the STE parameter is specified, the announcement machine junctions with the selected operating status will be displayed in the following format:
STE = xxx JMA = xx-xx-xx . . . xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx . . . xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx . . . xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx . . . xx-xx-xx

If the JMA parameter is specified, the message assigned to the selected junction will be displayed in the following format:
JMA = xx-xx-xx MSG = xxx STE = xxx

If the JMA parameter is not specified, the messages assigned to all junctions will be displayed in the following format:
JMA = xx-xx-xx . . . JMA = xx-xx-xx MSG = xxx . . . MSG = xxx STE = xxx

STE = xxx

Remarks

1. 2.

An announcement machine junction will have the BLK operating status (operator blocking) when undergoing blocking by command MD-JMASTE. An announcement machine junction will have the NBD operating status (no board) when the corresponding board has not been fitted.

3-226

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

SU-JMA: Suppress Announcement Machine Junction

On-line Commands

SU-JMA: Suppress Announcement Machine Junction


This command is used to suppress the association between an announcement machine junction and a message.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
SU-JMA : JMA = xx-xx-xx ;

Parameter

JMA
Junction number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

brd
01..05 21..22 20..22 20..21 A1 B1 D1

junction board number


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir
16 28 A1

board circuit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

Remarks

1.

An announcement machine junction is only suppressed when in BLK (operator blocking) operating status. The suppressed junction assumes NCR (not created) operating status.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-227

AT-JMAREC: Activate Announcement Machine Message Recording

On-line Commands

AT-JMAREC: Activate Announcement Machine Message Recording


This command is used to activate message recording on the specified announcement machine junction.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Input Format
AT-JMAREC : JMA = xx-xx-xx ;

Parameter

JMA
Junction number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd
01..05 21..22 20..22 20..21 A1 B1 D1

junction board number


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir
16 28 A1

board circuit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

Remarks

1. 2.

The specified announcement machine junction should have been duly created. A window will open to indicate message recording deactivation.

3-228

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

AT-JMAREC: Activate Announcement Machine Message Recording

On-line Commands

3.

This command should only be used for message recording on an internal announcement machine.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-229

END-JMAREC: End Announcement Machine Message Recording

On-line Commands

END-JMAREC: End Announcement Machine Message Recording


This command is used to conclude message recording on the announcement machine junctions of the specified board.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Input Format
END-JMAREC : BOARD = xx-xx ;

Parameter

BOARD
Board number in the uni-pos format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd
21..22 20..22 01..19 01..05 A1 B1 D1 -

junction board number


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

Remarks

1.

This command should only be used for message recording on an internal announcement machine.

3-230

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

INI-JMAREC: Begin Announcement Machine Message Recording

On-line Commands

INI-JMAREC: Begin Announcement Machine Message Recording


This command is used to begin recording messages on the announcement machine junctions of the specified board.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Input Format
INI-JMAREC : BOARD = xx-xx [, DUR = xx ] ;

Parameters

BOARD
Board number in the uni-pos format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

brd
21..22 20..22 01..19 01..05 A1 B1 D1 -

junction board number


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

DUR
Length of each message in seconds (5..16)

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

Running this command erases all prior recorded messages. If the DUR parameter is not specified, each message will be 16 seconds long. This command should only be used for recording messages on an internal announcement machine.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-231

MD-JMASTE: Modify Junction Operating Status

On-line Commands

MD-JMASTE: Modify Junction Operating Status


This command is used to block or unblock announcement machine junctions, changing their operating status.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-JMASTE : JMA = xx-xx-xx&..&xx-xx-xx, STE = xxx ;

Parameters

JMA
Junction number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd
01..05 21..22 20..22 20..21 A1 B1 D1

junction board number


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir
16 28 A1

board circuit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

STE
Junction operating status: BLK operator blocking SRV in service

Remarks

1.

Operator blocking (BLK) a junction applies to junctions in service (SRV) operating status.
Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page 109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

3-232

MD-JMASTE: Modify Junction Operating Status

On-line Commands

2.

Unblocking or placing a junction in service (SRV) operating status applies to junctions with operator blocking (BLK) operating status.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-233

INI-LANSUP: Initiate Local Network Supervision

On-line Commands

INI-LANSUP: Initiate Local Network Supervision


This command is used to initiate local data network performance supervision..
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
INI-LANSUP [ : UNI = xx ] [, LAN = x ] ;

Parameters

UNI
unit number (1..n):
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 2 16 76 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

LAN
Exchange local network (1..2)

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4.

If parameters UNI and LAN were specified, the selected unit local data network information will be initialized. If only parameter UNI was specified, the information of all local data networks of the selected unit will be initialized If only parameter LAN was specified, the information of all units created in the exchange for the selected local data network will be initialized If no parameter was specified the information of all local data networks of all units created in the exchange will be initialized.

3-234

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-LANSUP: Query Local Network Supervision

On-line Commands

IT-LANSUP: Query Local Network Supervision


This command is used to display local data network supervision information.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-LANSUP [ : UNI = xx ] ;

Parameter

UNI
terminal unit number (1..n):
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 2 16 78 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Output Format

If parameter UNI was specified, the selected unit local data network supervision information will be displayed in the following format:
UNI = xx LAN = x MOD = xxx...xxx Total of interruptions : xxxxxx Ints of transmission : xxxxxx Ints of reception : xxxxxx Ints of error : xxxxxx Tx block too long : xxxxxx Collision Error : xxxxxx No buffer for rec : xxxxxx No buffer for trans : xxxxxx Memory error : xxxxxx Ints with tx error : xxxxxx Underflow error : xxxxxx Collision too late : xxxxxx Loss of carrier : xxxxxx Sampling time : xxxxxx Blocks with + than 1 retry Blocks with 1 retry Blocks with tx delayed Ints with rec error Incomplete rec block Insuf buffer for rec CRC error Blocks transmitted Blocks received Bytes transmitted Bytes received Turn off transmitter Turn off receiver Failure after 16 retries : : : : : : : : : : : : : : xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx

If parameter UNI was not specified, the supervision information of the local data network of all exchange active units will be displayed.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-235

IT-LANSUP: Query Local Network Supervision

On-line Commands

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

This information is technical, used to support debugging eventual inter-unit data communication network trouble. Parameter LAN establishes the local network under supervision. Parameter MOD informs the model of local network card used in the unit, which can be: Ethernet NE2100 ISA 10 Mbps Ethernet NE2100 PCI 10 Mbps Fast Ethernet 3COM PCI 100 Mbps Ethernet NS8390 ( MXTS )

4.

The field "Total of Interruptions" when shown for the Ethernet NS8390 (MXTS) board informs the gathered of all the MXTS interruptions in the unit.

3-236

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

AT-LINTST: Activate Subscriber Line Test

On-line Commands

AT-LINTST: Activate Subscriber Line Test


This command is used to run an immediate subscriber line test.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Input Format
AT-LINTST : { SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx&..&xxxx | TER = xx-xx-xx&..&xx-xx-xx } [, TYP = xxxx] [, VAL] ] ;

Parameters

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

TER
Terminal number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
16 64 A1 -

number of the terminal unit (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

brd cir

terminal board number (1..21) board circuit number (1..32)

Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

TYP
Allows choosing the type of interface test to be carried out: aud subscriber interface audio tests eve subscriber line parametric test res loop resistance test

VAL
Provides the result of all tests executed.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-237

AT-LINTST: Activate Subscriber Line Test

On-line Commands

Output Format

If the test was run by a MTL 93081A board, the result displays as:
SUB = xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx RTS = xxx..xxx

If the test was run by a MTL 97086A, board, the results display as: If no parameter was specified (besides SUB or TER, compulsory), the line test is displayed in the following format:
SUB = xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx RTS = xxx..xxx

If parameter VAL was specified, the results of the tests run are displayed in the following format:
SUB = xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx TYP = AUD . . TYP = EVE . . RTS = xxx..xxx . . . .

If parameter TYP was specified, the robot will run the selected type of test on the subscriber line, displaying the result as:
SUB = xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx RTS = xxx..xxx

If parameters TYP e VAL were specified, the robot will run the selected type of test on the subscriber line, displaying the result as:
SUB = xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx TYP = xxx RTS = xxx..xxx . . . .

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4.

Parameter TYP is not compatible with board MTL 93081A. Therefore, if it is specified on a command line for this type of board, the test will not be run If parameter VAL was specified in a command for board MTL 93081A, the test will be run but the test values will not be displayed. Only RTS will be displayed. The results of the loop resistance test is only displayed if the parameter TYP = RES. The measuring range for the insulation test is 0 to 10,000 kohms. Measured values exceeding this range will be displayed as the uppermost value (10,000 kohms).

3-238

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

AT-LINTST: Activate Subscriber Line Test

On-line Commands

5.

The overall results (RTS) expected for the subscriber line tests are: Lines tested: Normal line Abnormal line * Spurious AC voltage Spurious DC voltage Low insulation Medium insulation Open line Incomplete testing * * Results expected only for tests run by board MTL 97086A. Lines Untested: Absent robot Faulty robot Busy line Unfitted line Inactive line Active test robot

When parameter VAL is specified, the CSR provides the results of the parametric and audio tests (if the parameter TIP was not specified): TYP = EVE Spurious DC voltage, a-b = xx in Vdc Spurious DC voltage, a-gnd = xx in Vdc Spurious DC voltage, b-gnd = xx in Vdc Spurious AC voltage, a-b = xx in Vrms Spurious AC voltage, a-gnd = xx in Vrms Spurious AC voltage, b-gnd = xx in Vrms Insulation, a-b = xx in Kohms Insulation, a-gnd = xx in Kohms Insulation, b-gnd = xx in Kohms Capacitance, a-b = xx in nF TYP = AUD Pulsed noise = xx in dBm Psophometric noise = xx in dBmp Ok / Not ok Ok / Not ok

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-239

AT-LINTST: Activate Subscriber Line Test

On-line Commands

When TIP=RES, the result of the loop resistance test is displayed: TYP = RES Ok / Not ok Loop resistance = xx in ohms 6. The output format of the SUB parameter can be changed through the Options menu, Output Format submenu, on the CSR main window.

3-240

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

DS-LINTST: Deactivate Subscriber Line Test

On-line Commands

DS-LINTST: Deactivate Subscriber Line Test


This command is used to deactivate current periodic subscriber line testing.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Input Format
DS-LINTST;

Remarks

1.

Command DS-LINTST does not erase the periodic subscriber interface testing programming, neither cause loss of results obtained up to test deactivation.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-241

IP-LINTST: Query Line Test Programming

On-line Commands

IP-LINTST: Query Line Test Programming


This command is used to inquire the time, type and periodicity programmed for periodic subscriber line testing.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IP-LINTST;

Output Format
HOU = xx:xx:xx [, STP = x] [, TYP = xxxx];

Remarks

1.

Message "In course" will be displayed on the right of STP if the periodic interface test is being run at the time of inquiring.

3-242

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-LINTST: Query Line Test Result

On-line Commands

IT-LINTST: Query Line Test Result


This command is used for inquiring the result of the last periodic subscriber line test.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-LINTST [ : { SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx&..&xxxx | TER = xx-xx-xx&..&xx-xx-xx | RTS = xxxx } [, TYP = xxxx] [, VAL] ];

Parameters

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

TER
Terminal number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
16 64 A1 -

number of the terminal unit (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

brd cir

terminal board number (1..21) board circuit number (1..32)

Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

RTS
Subscriber line test results: NTST Untested line TST Tested line NOL Normal line OPL Open line SCV Spurious DC voltage SAV Spurious AC voltage I30 Insulation under 30 kohms I300 Insulation between 30 kohms and 300 kohms

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-243

IT-LINTST: Query Line Test Result

On-line Commands

TYP
Allows choosing the type of interface test to be carried out: aud subscriber interface audio tests eve subscriber line parametric test res loop resistance test

VAL
Provides the result of all tests executed.

Output Format

If no parameter was specified, the results of all tested lines are displayed in the following format:
SUB = xxxx SUB = xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx . . TER = xx-xx-xx RTS = xxx..xxx . . RTS = xxx...xxx

If parameters SUB or TER were specified, the selected subscriber line or terminal test results are displayed in the following format:
SUB = xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx RTS = xxx..xxx

If parameter VAL was specified, by itself or with another parameter, the results of the all tests carried out or those relative to the parameter specified jointly with VAL, are displayed in the following format:
SUB = xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx TYP = AUD . . TYP = EVE . . SUB = xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx RTS = xxx..xxx . . . . RTS = xxx..xxx

If parameter RTS was specified, the results of all subscriber line tests interfaces with the result specified in parameter RTS are displayed in the following format:
SUB = xxxx SUB = xxxx SUB = xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx TER = xx-xx-xx . . TER = xx-xx-xx RTS = xxx..xxx RTS = xxx..xxx . . RTS = xxx..xxx

3-244

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-LINTST: Query Line Test Result

On-line Commands

If parameter TYP was specified, the results of all subscriber lines on which the type of test specified in this parameter was run will be displayed in the following format:
SUB = xxxx SUB = xxxx SUB = xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx TER = xx-xx-xx . . TER = xx-xx-xx RTS = xxx..xxx RTS = xxx..xxx . . RTS = xxx..xxx

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Parameter TYP is not compatible with board MTL 93081A. Therefore, if it is specified on a command line for this type of board, the test will not be run If parameter VAL was specified in a command for board MTL 93081A, the test will be run but the test values will not be displayed. Only the RTS will be displayed The results of the loop resistance test is only displayed if the parameter TYP = RES. The measuring range for the insulation test is 0 to 10,000 kohms. Measured values exceeding this range will be displayed as the uppermost value (10,000 kohms). The overall results (RTS) expected for the subscriber line tests are: Lines tested: Normal line Abnormal line * Spurious AC voltage Spurious DC voltage Low insulation Medium insulation Open line Incomplete testing * * * Results expected only for tests run by board MTL 97086A. Lines Untested: Absent robot Faulty robot Busy line Unfitted line Inactive line Active test robot

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-245

IT-LINTST: Query Line Test Result

On-line Commands

When parameter VAL is specified, the CSR provides the results of the parametric and audio tests (if the parameter TIP was not specified): TYP = EVE Spurious DC voltage, a-b = xx in Vdc Spurious DC voltage, a-gnd = xx in Vdc Spurious DC voltage, b-gnd = xx in Vdc Spurious AC voltage, a-b = xx in Vrms Spurious AC voltage, a-gnd = xx in Vrms Spurious AC voltage, b-gnd = xx in Vrms Insulation, a-b = xx in Kohms Insulation, a-gnd = xx in Kohms Insulation, b-gnd = xx in Kohms Capacitance, a-b = xx in nF TYP = AUD Pulsed noise = xx in dBm Psophometric noise = xx in dBmp When TIP=RES, the result of the loop resistance test is displayed: TYP = RES Loop resistance = xx in ohms 6. The output format of the SUB parameter can be changed through the Options menu, Output Format submenu, on the CSR main window. Ok / Not ok Ok / Not ok Ok / Not ok

3-246

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

PR-LINTST: Program Line Test

On-line Commands

PR-LINTST: Program Line Test


This command is used to program periodic testing subscriber lines.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Input Format
PR-LINTST : HOU = xx[-xx[-xx]] [, TSP = xx ] [, TYP = xxxx];

Parameters

HOU
Periodic subscriber line interface test starring time in format: ho[-mi[-se]], where: ho hour (00..23) mi minutes (00..59) (optional) se second (00..59) (optional)

TSP
Periodicity of subscriber line testing (1...7 days)

TYP
Allows choosing the type of interface test to be carried out: aud subscriber interface audio tests eve subscriber line parametric test res loop resistance test

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4.

Omitting minutes or seconds in parameter HOU corresponds to specifying value 00. If the periodicity of line testing was not specified, the test will be run daily (STP = 1). If parameter TYP was not specified, the subscriber interface audio tests and the subscriber line parametric tests will be run. Parameter TYP is not compatible with the functions of board MTL 93081A. If it is specified in commands for this type of board, the test will not be run.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-247

RP-LINTST: Remove Line Test Programming

On-line Commands

RP-LINTST: Remove Line Test Programming


This command is used to remove periodic subscriber line test programming.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Input Format
RP-LINTST ;

Remarks

1.

The removal of periodic subscriber line test programming does not cause loss of the results of the last test.

3-248

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-LNK: Create Link (1)

On-line Commands

CR-LNK: Create Link (1)


This command is used to associate an intra-modular matrix link and an inter-modular matrix link.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Input Format
CR-LNK : ILNK = xx-xx, ELNK = xx-xx ;

Parameters

ILNK
Intra-modular matrix link in the uni-lnk format: uni switching unit number (1..n)
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 16 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

lnk

link number (13..24)

ELNK
Inter-modular matrix link in the uni-lnk format uni matrix unit number:
n 1,2,5 or 6 65..76 SOF 98119 A1 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249 LPN109256842 LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 001 001 001 001

lnk
16 64 A1 -

inter-modular link number


A1 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

Remarks

1. 2.

This program should be executed according to the installation cabling to be used. The ELNK parameter can only be assigned to units with inter-modular planes. Refer to command CR-PLAN (Create Switching Plan).
Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

3-249

CR-LNK: Create Link (1)

On-line Commands

3.

This command is not valid for exchanges with LPN109232249 and LPN109256842 Control Program.

3-250

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-LNK: Create Link (2)

On-line Commands

CR-LNK: Create Link (2)


This command is used to interconnect the units of the BZSP system.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 001 001 -

Input Format
CR-LNK : ELNK1=xx-xx-xx, ELNK2=xx-xx-xx ;

Parameters

ELNK1
Link used to configure exchanges with LPN109232249 or LPN109256842, on the format uni-brd-tt. uni brd tt Unit number (1..2) Board number (1..5) Trunk indicating the unit link (1..16)

ELNK2
Link used to configure exchanges with LPN109232249 or LPN109256842, on the format uni-brd-tt. uni brd tt Unit number (1..2) Board number (1..5) Trunk indicating the unit link (1..16)

Remarks

1.

This command is only valid for exchanges with LPN109232249 and LPN109256842 Control Program.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-251

IT-LNK: Query Link (1)

On-line Commands

IT-LNK: Query Link (1)


This command is used to query the intra-modular links to inter-modular matrix links association on the BZ5000 exchanges
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-LNK [ : ILNK = xx-xx ] ;

Parameter

ILNK
Intra-modular matrix link in the uni-lnk format: uni
16 64 A1 -

switching unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

lnk

link number (13..24)

Output Format

If parameter ILNK is specified, the specified link association will be displayed in the following format:
ILNK = xx-xx ELNK = xx-xx STE = xxx

If no parameter is specified, the link associations will be displayed in the following format:
ILNK = xx-xx . . . ILNK = xx-xx ELNK = xx-xx . . . ELNK = xx-xx STE = xxx

STE = xxx

Remarks

1.

This command is not valid for exchanges with LPN109232249 and LPN109256842 Control Program.

3-252

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-LNK: Query Link (2)

On-line Commands

IT-LNK: Query Link (2)


This command is used to query the interconnection of the units of the BZSP system.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 001 001 -

Input Format
IT-LNK [ : ELNK1 = xx-xx-xx ] ;

Parameter

ELNK1
Link used to configure exchanges with LPN109232249 or LPN109256842, on the format uni-brd-tt. uni brd tt Unit number (1..2) Board number (1..5) Trunk indicating the unit link (1..16)

Output Format

If the parameter ELNK1 is specified, the association of the specified link is displayed, on the following format::
ELNK1 = xx-xx-xx ELNK2 = xx-xx-xx STE = xxx

If none parameter is specified, the link associations are displayed, on the following format:
ELNK1 = xx-xx-xx . . . ELNK1 = xx-xx-xx ELNK2 = xx-xx-xx . . . ELNK2 = xx-xx-xx STE = xxx

STE = xxx

Remarks

1.

This command is valid only for exchanges with LPN109232249 and LPN109256842 Control Program.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-253

SU-LNK: Suppress Link (1)

On-line Commands

SU-LNK: Suppress Link (1)


This command is used to suppress the association of an intra-modular matrix link to an intermodular matrix link.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Input Format
SU-LNK : ILNK = xx-xx ;

Parameter

ILNK
Intra-modular matrix link in the uni-lnk format: uni
16 64 A1 -

switching unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

lnk

link number (13..24)

Remarks

1.

This command is not valid for exchanges with LPN109232249 and LPN109256842 Control Program.

3-254

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

SU-LNK: Suppress Link (2)

On-line Commands

SU-LNK: Suppress Link (2)


This command is used to suppress the association between the units of the BZSP system.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 001 001 -

Input Format
SU-LNK : ELNK1 = xx-xx-xx ;

Parameter

ELNK1
Link used to configure exchanges with LPN109232249 or LPN109256842, on the format uni-brd-tt. uni brd tt Unit number (1..2) Board number (1..5) Trunk indicating the unit link (1..16)

Remarks

1.

This command is valid only for exchanges with LPN109232249 and LPN109256842 Control Program.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-255

MD-LNKSTE: Modify Link Status (1)

On-line Commands

MD-LNKSTE: Modify Link Status (1)


This command is used to change the link status, from blocked to service, or vice versa.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 001 001 -

Input Format
MD-LNKSTE: ELNK1 = xx-xx-xx, STE = xxx;

Parameters

ELNK1
Link used to configure exchanges with LPN109232249 or LPN109256842, on the format uni-brd-tt. uni brd tt Unit number (1..2) Board number (1..5) Trunk indicating the unit link (1..16)

STE
Link operating status: BLK operator blocking SRV in service

Remarks

1.

This command is valid only for exchanges with LPN109232249 and LPN109256842 Control Program.

3-256

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-LNKSTE: Modify Link Status (2)

On-line Commands

MD-LNKSTE: Modify Link Status (2)


This command is used to change the link status, from blocked for service, or vice versa.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-LNKSTE: ELNK = xx-xx&..&xx-xx , STE = xxx;

Parameters

ELNK
Inter-modular matrix link in the uni-lnk format uni matrix unit number:
n 1,2,5 or 6 65..76 SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842 LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

lnk
16 64 A1 -

inter-modular link number


A1 001 001 001 -001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

STE
Link operating status: BLK operator blocking SRV in service

Remarks

1. 2.

The ELNK parameter can only be assigned to units with inter-modular plans. Refer to command CR-PLAN (Create Switching Plan). This command is not valid for exchanges with LPN109232249 and LPN109256842 Control Programs.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-257

AT-LNKTST: Activate Exchange Link Test

On-line Commands

AT-LNKTST: Activate Exchange Link Test


This command is used to activate the automatic testing of exchange links, informing on the conditions of the intra-modular matrix audio channels
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
AT-LNKTST [ : ILNK = xx-xx] [, ELNK1 = xx-xx-xx ] [, ELNK2 = xx-xx-xx ];

Parameters

ILNK
Intra-modular matrix link in the uni-lnk format: uni
16 64 A1 -

switching unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

lnk

link number (13..24)

ELNK1
Link used to configure exchanges with LPN109232249 or LPN109256842, on the format uni-brd-tt. uni brd tt Unit number (1..2) Board number (1..5) Trunk indicating the unit link (1..16)

ELNK2
Link used to configure exchanges with LPN109232249 or LPN109256842, on the format uni-brd-tt. uni brd tt Unit number (1..2) Board number (1..5) Trunk indicating the unit link (1..16)

Output Format

The selected line test result is displayed in the following format:


ILNK = xx-xx . . . ILNK = xx-xx Fail Ok

3-258

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

AT-LNKTST: Activate Exchange Link Test

On-line Commands

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

In the event of fault, the link is identified as transmitting or receiving (Tx or Rx); Tx and Rx refer to an intra-modular matrix. The parameters ELNK1 and ELNK2 are only valid for LPN109232249 and LPN109256842 Control Programs.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-259

IT-LOGEXC: Query Exchange Command Log

On-line Commands

IT-LOGEXC: Query Exchange Command Log


This command is used to display the exchange Command Log, a record of all commands affecting the exchange configuration.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-LOGEXC [ : [ DAT = xx-xx-xx ] [, PORT = xx-xxxx ] [, CMD = xxx-xxxxxxx ] ] ;

Parameters

DAT
Date in the yy-mm-dd format: yy year (00..99) mm month (01..12) dd day (01..31)

PORT
Exchange unit serial communication port in the uni-port format: uni
16 76 A1 -

unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

port COM1 COM2 COM3

serial communication port COM1 serial communication port COM2 serial communication port COM3 serial communication port

CMD
Command code

Output Format

Alarms and events recorded in the exchange are displayed in the following format:
DAT = xx-xx-xx HOU = xx:xx:xx CMD = xxx...xxx . . . . . . xx-xx-xx HOU = xx:xx:xx CMD = xxx...xxx PORT = xx-xxxx . . PORT = xx-xxxx CONTYP = xxx

DAT =

CONTYP = xxx

3-260

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-LOGEXC: Query Exchange Command Log

On-line Commands

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

If the DAT parameter is specified, only the commands run from the chosen date onward will be displayed. If the PORT parameter is specified, only the commands run from the selected serial port will be displayed. The Log provides capacity for storing the last 1000 successfully run configuration commands.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-261

RV-LOGEXC: Remove Exchange Command Log

On-line Commands

RV-LOGEXC: Remove Exchange Command Log


This command is used to remove the exchange Command Log.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
RV-LOGEXC ;

3-262

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

AT-LOOPSUP: Activate Subscriber Loop Supervision

On-line Commands

AT-LOOPSUP: Activate Subscriber Loop Supervision


This command is used to activate subscriber loop supervision in exchange units.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Input Format
AT-LOOPSUP : UNI = xx ;

Parameter

UNI
terminal unit number (1..n):
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 2 16 78 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4.

Subscriber Loop supervision can be activated simultaneously for all exchange units. The information displayed in the Subscriber Loop supervision window is described in the Exchange Operating Manual. The console button at the left corner of the toolbar allows alternating between the Subscriber Loop supervision window and the main window (console). Subscriber Loop supervision windows are independent from the CSR window, allowing running other CSR commands separately. The windows can be alternated via keys <ALT>+<TAB> and moved by the mouse.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-263

DS-LOOPSUP: Deactivate Subscriber Loop Supervision

On-line Commands

DS-LOOPSUP: Deactivate Subscriber Loop Supervision


This command is used to deactivate subscriber loop supervision in exchange units.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Input Format
DS-LOOPSUP : UNI = xx ;

Parameter

UNI
terminal unit number (1..n):
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 2 16 78 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1.

The Subscriber Loop supervision window can be deactivated via the System Menu.

3-264

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-LSS: Create Special Local Service

On-line Commands

CR-LSS: Create Special Local Service


This command is used to create special local services in the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
CR-LSS : SEQ = xxxxxxxxxx, { SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx | SEQ2= xx..xx ] } [, PMO = xx | RCL= xxx ];

Parameters

SEQ
Special local services sequence (up to 10 digits)

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

SEQ2
Sequence of digits to be dialed by the exchange. Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 001 001

PMO
Origin marking point (1..40). It defines a set of subscribers pertaining to one same billing area. Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 001 001 001

RCL
List of route classes (1..48) to which all specified routing parameters apply

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-265

CR-LSS: Create Special Local Service

On-line Commands

Remarks

1.

To program a local special service, the corresponding sequence must be included in the exchange originated routing plan and a terminal or group of terminals must be assigned to the required service. The sequence is included in the originated routing plan via command MD-ORP, specifying the sequence, the type of LSS (special local service), the charging class to be applied for charging call and the terminals classes that can access the service. On the SEQ parameter, the characters * and # can be used on the first position. (On this case, the command MD-ORP is not used to include the sequence of the originating routing plan). Consider that the use of these characters can affect the configuration of other services, such as message record and programming of special services. The sequence is associated to the number of the terminal or group of terminals that will receive calls made to the special service, specifying, for each special service sequence, the corresponding subscriber number. If more than a single terminal is required for answering calls addressed to a given special service, a PABX group should be set up for all call-answering terminals and the group number should be associated to the required special service. In these cases, the exchange forwards calls to the PABX group so as to distribute the traffic among terminals. When the PMO parameter is not specified, it takes the value 1 (PMO = 1). The RCL parameter is available from the following versions: SOF98119E4, SOF98158D4, LPN109232249.001 and LPN109256842.001.

2.

3.

4.

5. 6.

3-266

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-LSS: Query Special Local Service

On-line Commands

IT-LSS: Query Special Local Service


This command is used to display special local services set up in the exchange
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-LSS [ : SEQ = xxxxxxxxxx ] ;

Parameter

SEQ
Special local services sequence (up to 10 digits)

Output Format

If parameter SEQ was specified, the subscriber with the selected sequence is displayed in the following format:
SEQ = xxxxxxxxxx SUB(or SEQ2) = xxxx PMO = xx RCL = xxx

If parameter SEQ was not specified, all sequences set up in the exchange will be displayed with their respective subscribers in the following format:
SEQ = xxxxxxxxxx . . . SEQ = xxxxxxxxxx SUB (or SEQ2) . . . SUB (or SEQ2) = xxxx . . . = xxxx PMO = xx RCL = xxx

PMO = xx

RCL = xxx

Remarks

1. 2.

The output format of the SUB parameter can be changed through the Option Menu, Output Format submenu, on the CSR main window. The RCL parameter is available from the following versions: SOF98119E4, SOF98158D4, LPN109232249.001 and LPN109256842.001.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-267

SU-LSS: Suppress Special Local Service

On-line Commands

SU-LSS: Suppress Special Local Service


This command is used to suppress special local services in the exchange
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
SU-LSS : SEQ = xxxxxxxxxx [, PMO = xx | RCL=xxx ];

Parameters

SEQ
Special local services sequence (up to 10 digits)

PMO
Origin marking point (1..40). It defines a set of subscribers pertaining to one same billing area. Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 001 001 001

RCL
List of route classes (1..48) to which all specified routing parameters apply

Remarks

1.

The RCL parameter is available from the following versions: SOF98119E4, SOF98158D4, LPN109232249.001 and LPN109256842.001.

3-268

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-MBX: Query Voice Mail Type

On-line Commands

IT-MBX: Query Voice Mail Type


This command is used to display the number type of the Voice Mail (fixed or combined)
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 F1 E1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-MBX;

Output Format

For Fixed Voice Mail Number: SEQ = xx TYP = NCXPF For Combined Voice Mail Number: SEQ = xx TYP = NCXPC SCXP = x
Remarks

1.

Meaning of the parameters: SEQ = Voice Mail Number TYP = Voice Mail Type (CXPF = Fixed Number; NCXPC = Combined Number) SCXP = Suffix Size of the Voice Mail

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-269

MD-MBX: Modify Voice Mail Type

On-line Commands

MD-MBX: Modify Voice Mail Type


This command is used to configure the number type of the voice mail (fixed or combined)
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-MBX: SEQ = xxxx, TYP = xxxx [,SCXP = x ] ;

Parameters

SEQ
Voice Mail Number (sequence of up to 30 digits))

TYP
Voice Mail Type: NCXPF Fix voice mail number NCXPC combined voice mail number (SEQ+SCXP)

SCXP
Voice Mail Suffix Size (1..8).

Remarks

1.

SCXP parameter can only be used when TYP is equal to NCXPC.

3-270

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-MCB: Query B Code Matrix

On-line Commands

IT-MCB: Query B Code Matrix


This command is used to show B subscriber code matrix.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT- MCB [: MCB = xx]

Parameter

MCB
B code matrix (1..30) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Output Format
If no parameter is specified, all programmed B code matrixes and their respective routes and associated sequences will be displayed.
MCB = xx ROUT = xxxxx NOA = xxx SEQ = xxx..xxx

. . .
ROUT = xxxxx NOA = xxx SEQ = xxx..xxx

. . .

MCB = xx

ROUT = xxxxx

NOA = xxx

SEQ = xxx..xxx

. . .
ROUT = xxxxx NOA = xxx SEQ = xxx..xxx

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-271

IT-MCB: Query B Code Matrix

On-line Commands

If the MCB parameter is specified, their respective routes and associated sequences will be displayed.
MCB = xx ROUT = xxxxx NOA = xxx SEQ = xxx..xxx

. . .
ROUT = xxxxx NOA = xxx SEQ = xxx..xxx

Remarks

1. NOA parameter valid only for the following products LPN109253856.006.002 LPN109232249.004 LPN109256826.003 or later.

3-272

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-MCB: Modify B Code Matrix

On-line Commands

MD-MCB: Modify B Code Matrix


This command is used to modify the B code matrix, which is used to allow you to change the digits forwarded to the next exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-MCB: MCB = xx, ROUT = xxxxx, SEQ = {xx..xx | NSEQ} [,NOA = xxx];

Parameters

MCB
B code matrix (1..30)

Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ROUT
Outgoing and two-way routes: B1..Bn two-way routes S1..Sn outgoing routes E1..En incoming routes
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 32 1024 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

SEQ
Sequence to be added to forwarded digits (1..20)

NOA
Nature of address: LOC Local NAT National INT International
SOF 95055 SOF 97049 SOF 98119 SOF 97098 SGP 98092 SOF 98158 SOF 00092 -

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-273

MD-MCB: Modify B Code Matrix

On-line Commands

LPN109253856 006.002

LPN109253864 -

LPN109232249 004

LPN109256842 -

LPN109256826 003

LPN109256834 -

Remarks

1.

To cancel the sequence programming for a given route, specify the SEQ = NSEQ parameter.

3-274

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-MCT: Query Malicious Call Trace

On-line Commands

IT-MCT: Query Malicious Call Trace


This command is used to query Malicious Call Trace
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 004 001 -

Input Format
IT-MCT [ :[LOC=XXXX [,ENV=XXX] ] [,IDAT = yy-mm-dd] [,EDAT = yy-mm-dd] [,CDPN =XXXX] ] ;

Parameters

LOC
Exchange installation site code (up to 8 alphanumeric characters in quotes)

ENV
Operating Environment of the Exchange: CS Central Stage PS1 Peripheral Stage 1 PS2 Peripheral Stage 2 PS3 Peripheral Stage 3 PS4 Peripheral Stage 4 PS5 Peripheral Stage 5 PS6 Peripheral Stage 6 . . . . PS31 Peripheral Stage 31 PS32 Peripheral Stage 32 The number of Peripheral Stages, which can be programmed on the exchange, varies from 1 to n:
n 32 64 SOF 98119 A1 SOF 98158 A1 LPN109253856 001 LPN109253864 001 LPN109256826 001 LPN109256834 001

Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

IDAT Initial date


Compatibility:

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-275

IT-MCT: Query Malicious Call Trace

On-line Commands

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 004 001 -

EDAT End date


Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 004 001 -

CDPN Called party number


Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 004 001 -

Output Format
When the subscriber number A are available, the format is: DAT = 02-08-29 HOU = 21:38:20 CGPN = 5324001 CDPN = 5324000 When the subscriber number A aren't available, the format is: DAT = 02-08-29 HOR = 21:38:48 CGPN = OPC = 0 ROUT = 1 CIC = 10 CDPN = 5324001

Remarks

1.

The parameters above represent: DAT : HOU : CGPN : CDPN : OPC : ROUT : Call date (year, month, day) Call hour (hour, min, sec) Calling party number Called party number Originate point code Incoming or bi-directional route

CIC : Circuit ID code

3-276

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

REP-MCT: Malicious Call Trace Report

On-line Commands

REP-MCT: Malicious Call Trace Report


This command is used to write on the exchange directory the malicious call data stored by the exchange.
Input Format
REP-MCT ;

Output Format

The trace field format is shown below: 0208201145003133735546 020820 : 114500 : 3132634032 1240 S18 39

call date (year, month, day) call hour (hour, min, sec)

3133735546 : calling party number 3132634032 : called party number 1240 S18 : 39 : : originate point code* incoming or bi-directional route* CIC number used*

* These fields are shown only if the called party number aren't available
Remarks

1.

The CAD data are recorded in the file MMDDHOMI.MCT, where: MMDD = month and day which the file was created HOMI = hour (0..23) and minute which the file was created

2. 3.

The CAD file is stored in the exchange directory, indicated by PATH parameter of CREXC command. Only data referred to malicious call trace service will be collected and recorded on a file with MCT extension.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-277

RV-MCT: Remove Malicious Call Trace

On-line Commands

RV-MCT: Remove Malicious Call Trace


This command is used to remove Malicious Call Trace
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 004 001 -

Input Format
RV-MCT [ :[LOC=XXXX ] [,IDAT = yy-mm-dd] [,EDAT = yy-mm-dd] [,CDPN =XXXX] ] ;

Parameters

LOC
Exchange installation site code (up to 8 alphanumeric characters in quotes)

IDAT Initial date


Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 004 001 -

EDAT End Data


Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 004 001 -

3-278

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

RV-MCT: Remove Malicious Call Trace

On-line Commands

CDPN Called party number


Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 004 001 -

Output Format
When the subscriber number A are available, the format is: DAT = 02-08-29 HOU = 21:38:20 CGPN = 5324001 CDPN = 5324000 When the subscriber number A aren't available, the format is: DAT = 02-08-29 HOR = 21:38:48 CGPN = OPC = 0 ROUT = 1 CIC = 10 CDPN = 5324001

Remarks

1.

The parameters above represent: DAT : HOU : CGPN : CDPN : OPC : ROUT : Call date (year, month, day) Call hour (hour, min, sec) Calling party number Called party number Originate point code Incoming or bi-directional route

CIC : Circuit ID code

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-279

DUMP-MEM: List Memory Dump

On-line Commands

DUMP-MEM: List Memory Dump


This command is used to list the contents of an exchange unit processor memory.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
DUMP-MEM : UNI = xx [, INI = xxxxxxxx ] [, END = xxxxxxxx ] [, FIL = "xxx..xxx" ];

Parameters

UNI
Terminal unit number (1..n) Compatibility:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 2 16 68 F1 A1 E1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

INI
Hexadecimal number corresponding to the dump initial address (00000..0FFFFF)

END
Hexadecimal number corresponding to the dump final address (00000..0FFFFF)

FIL
File name in the [drive:] [directory] filename format drive drive (A, B or C) containing the disk where the file is stored in (if omitted, the current drive will be accessed) directory name of the directory containing the file (up to 63 alphanumeric characters; if omitted, the current directory will be accessed) filename name of the file (up to 8 alphanumeric characters)

Output Format
00000000: 00000010: 00000020: 00000030:
. . .

00 FF FF F0

00 07 FF 40

00 28 00 18

00 00 00 00

00 00 00 00

00 92 93 8F

00 00 CF 0D

00 00 00 00

27 FF F0 F0

00 FF 40 40

00 00 18 18

00 00 00 00

00 00 00 00

92 9B 8F 8F

00 CF 0D 0D

00 00 00 00

............... ..(............. .........@...... .@.......@......

0FFFFFF:

F0 40 18 00 00 8F 0D 00

F0 40 18 00 00 8F 0D 00

................

3-280

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

DUMP-MEM: List Memory Dump

On-line Commands

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4.

This command lists the contents of memory addresses between the selected initial and final addresses . If the INI parameter is not specified, the initial address will be 00000. If the END parameter is not specified, the final address will be 0FFFFF. If the FIL parameter is not specified, the memory dump will displayed on screen. If it was, it will be written to the selected file. The memory dump file will use extension DMP. The INI and END parameters should always begin with 0, for hexadecimal addressing definition.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-281

IT-MEX: Query Business Hours Modality

On-line Commands

IT-MEX: Query Business Hours Modality


This command is used to consult the business hours programmed for weekdays and holiday.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-MEX [ : DAY = xxx ] ;

Parameter

DAY
Weekday or holiday, where: SUN Sunday MON Monday TUE Tuesday WED Wednesday THU Thursday FRI Friday SAT Saturday HOL Holiday

Output Format

If the DAY parameter is specified, all business hour modalities programmed for each hour of the selected day will be displayed in the following format:
DAY = xxx HOU = xx&..&xx
. . .

MEX = x
. . .

HOU = xx&..&xx

MEX = x

If the DAY parameter is not specified, all business hours modalities programmed for every hour of all weekdays and holidays will be displayed in the following format:
DAY = SUN HOU = xx&..&xx
. . .

MEX = x
. . .

. .

HOU = xx&..&xx HOU = xx&..&xx


. . .

MEX = x MEX = x
. . .

DAY = SAT

HOU = xx&..&xx DAY = HOL HOU = xx&..&xx


. .

MEX = x MEX = x
. .

HOU = xx&..&xx

MEX = x

3-282

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-MEX: Modify Business Hours Modality

On-line Commands

MD-MEX: Modify Business Hours Modality


This command is used to change the business hour modalities programmed for a weekday or holiday.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-MEX : DAY = xxx, HOU = xx&..&xx, MEX = x ;

Parameters

DAY
Weekday or holiday, where: SUN Sunday MON Monday TUE Tuesday WED Wednesday THU Thursday FRI Friday SAT Saturday HOL Holiday

HOU
Time list (00..23)

MEX
Business hours modality (1..2)

Remarks

1. 2.

The business hour modality allows you to vary the CSR call number according to and the day of the week and the hour of the day. The initial business hour modality value for weekdays and holidays is 1.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-283

CR-MFC: Create MFC Sender/Receiver

On-line Commands

CR-MFC: Create MFC Sender/Receiver


This command is used to create MFC senders/receivers.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
CR-MFC : MFC = xx-xx-xx&..&xx-xx-xx [, DIR = xxx ] ;

Parameters

MFC
MFC sender/receiver ID in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd
21..22 20..22 20..21 01..05 A1 B1 D1 -

MFC sender/receiver board number


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir

board circuit number (1..n). (Considering those n MFC sender/receiver, n-x can be configured as DTMF detectors)
A1 E1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

n (x) SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 12 (2) 24 (4) 60 A1 F1 -

DIR
Traffic direction : OUT outgoing traffic IN incoming traffic BID two-way traffic

3-284

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-MFC: Create MFC Sender/Receiver

On-line Commands

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

The MFC sender/receiver is created in blocked (BLK) operating status and should be unblocked by the MD-MFCSTE command. If DIR parameter is not specified, the assigned traffic direction of the created MFC sender/receiver will be two-way. When using MPSC board with two links, the number of circuits reaches to 24.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-285

IT-MFC: Query MFC Sender/Receiver Status

On-line Commands

IT-MFC: Query MFC Sender/Receiver Status


This command is used to display the operating status of MFC senders/receivers.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-MFC [ : { MFC = xx-xx-xx | STE = xxx } ] ;

Parameters

MFC
MFC sender/receiver ID in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd
21..22 20..22 20..21 01..05 A1 B1 D1 -

MFC sender/receiver board number


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir

board circuit number (1..n). (Considering those n MFC sender/receiver, n-x can be configured as DTMF detectors)
A1 E1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

n (x) SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 12 (2) 24 (4) 60 A1 F1 -

STE
MFC BLK BLF SRV FAL NBD sender/receiver operating status: operator blocking failure blocking in service failed no board

3-286

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-MFC: Query MFC Sender/Receiver Status

On-line Commands

Output Format

If the STE parameter is specified, the MFC senders/receivers with the selected operating status will be displayed in the following format
STE = xxx MFC = xx-xx-xx . . . xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx . . . xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx . . . xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx . . . xx-xx-xx

If the MFC parameter is specified, the operating status of the selected MFC sender/receiver will be displayed in the following format:
MFC = xx-xx-xx DIR = xxx NCEO = xxx STE = xxx

If no parameter is selected, the operating status of all MFC senders/receivers in the exchange will be displayed in the following format:
MFC = xx-xx-xx . . . MFC = xx-xx-xx DIR = xxx . . . DIR = xxx NCEO = xxx STE = xxx

NCEO = xxx

STE = xxx

Remarks

1. 2.

A MFC sender/receiver will have the BLK (operator blocking) status when blocked by command MD-MFCSTE. A MFC sender/receiver will have the FAL (failed) status when the number of consecutive unsuccessful seizures (NCEO) or the percentage of unsuccessful seizures (MPEO) reaches or exceeds the respective threshold programmed for MFC sender/receiver failure supervision. The motive for considering the element failed will be displayed on the right of parameter STE, by mnemonics NCEO or MPEO. A MFC sender/receiver will have the BLF (failure blocking) status when automatically blocked by the exchange failure supervision mechanism. A MFC sender/receiver will have the NBD (no board) status when the corresponding board is missing. 10 of the 12 MFC sender/receiver circuits may be configured as DTMF detectors.. When using MPSC board with two links, the number of circuits reaches to 24.

3. 4. 5. 6.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-287

SU-MFC: Suppress MFC Sender/Receiver

On-line Commands

SU-MFC: Suppress MFC Sender/Receiver


This command is used to suppress MFC senders/receivers
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
SU-MFC : MFC = xx-xx-xx ;

Parameter

MFC
MFC sender/receiver ID in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd
21..22 20..22 20..21 01..05 A1 B1 D1 -

MFC sender/receiver board number


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir

board circuit number (1..n). (Considering those n MFC sender/receiver, n-x can be configured as DTMF detectors)
A1 E1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

n (x) SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 12 (2) 24 (4) 60 A1 F1 -

Remarks

1. 2.

A MFC sender/receiver can only be blocked if it has BLK (fully blocked) operating status. When using MPSC board with two links, the number of circuits reaches to 24.

3-288

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-MFCSTE: Modify MFC Sender/Receiver Status

On-line Commands

MD-MFCSTE: Modify MFC Sender/Receiver Status


This command is used to block or unblock a MFC sender/receiver.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-MFCSTE : MFC = xx-xx-xx&..&xx-xx-xx, STE = xxx ;

Parameters

MFC
MFC sender/receiver ID in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

brd
21..22 20..22 20..21 01..05 A1 B1 D1 -

MFC sender/receiver board number


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir

board circuit number (1..n). (Considering those n MFC sender/receiver, n-x can be configured as DTMF detectors)
A1 E1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

n (x) SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 12 (2) 24 (4) 60 A1 F1 -

STE
MFC sender/receiver operating status: BLK operator blocking SRV in service

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-289

MD-MFCSTE: Modify MFC Sender/Receiver Status

On-line Commands

Remarks

1. 2.

Operator blocking (BLK) a MFC sender/receiver only applies to MFC senders/receivers with SRV (in service), FAL (failure blocking) and NBD (no board) operating status. Unblocking or placing a MFC sender/receiver SRV (in service) operating status only applies to MFC senders/receivers with BLK (operator blocking) and BLF (failure blocking) operating status. When using MPSC board with two links, the number of circuits reaches to 24.

3.

3-290

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-MFT: Query MFC Sender/Receive Value

On-line Commands

IT-MFT: Query MFC Sender/Receive Value


This command is used to exhibit the values of the available voltages, generated by MFT module.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-MFT : [ UNI = xx ] ;

Parameter

UNI
unit number (1..n):
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 2 16 76 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Output Format

If the parameter UNI is specified, the information about available voltages on the selected unit, will be exhibited, in the following format:
UNI = xx VOLTAGES = [xx.xx] [x.xx] [-x.xx] [-xx.xx] [-xx.xx]

If the parameter UNI is specified, the information about available voltages on all activated units of the exchange:
UNI = xx . . . UNI = xx VOLTAGES = [xx.xx] [x.xx] [-x.xx] [-xx.xx] [-xx.xx] . . . . . . . . . . . . VOLTAGES = [xx.xx] [x.xx] [-x.xx] [-xx.xx] [-xx.xx]

Remarks:

1.

The ideal values of the available voltages are: [12.00] [5.00] [-5.00] [-12.00] [-48.00] It is acceptable small variations around these values.

2.

This command only works in exchanges equipped with MPS-C board.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-291

COP-MSGDSP: Copy Existing Messages from File

On-line Commands

COP-MSGDSP: Copy Existing Messages from File


This command is used to copy a existing message from a binary file to the DSP chip of the pack responsible for the announcement machine.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 E6 E6 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
COP-MSGDSP : BOARD = xx-xx, FIL = xxx.bin

Parameters

BOARD
Board number in the uni-pos format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd
21..22 20..22 01..19 01..05 A1 B1 D1 -

junction board number


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

FIL
File name in the [drive:] [directory] filename format drive drive (A, B or C) containing the disk where the file is stored in (if omitted, the current drive will be accessed) directory name of the directory containing the file (up to 63 alphanumeric characters; if omitted, the current directory will be accessed) filename name of the file (up to 8 alphanumeric characters)

3-292

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

RE-MSGDSP: Record Messages to File

On-line Commands

RE-MSGDSP: Record Messages to File


This command is used to record all the messages stored on the DSP chip of the pack responsible for the announcement machine to a file with BIN extension.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 E6 E6 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
RE-MSGDSP : BOARD = xx-xx, FIL = xxx.bin

Parameters

BOARD
Board number in the uni-pos format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

brd
21..22 20..22 01..19 01..05 A1 B1 D1 -

junction board number


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

FIL
File name in the [drive:] [directory] filename format drive drive (A, B or C) containing the disk where the file is stored in (if omitted, the current drive will be accessed) directory name of the directory containing the file (up to 63 alphanumeric characters; if omitted, the current directory will be accessed) filename name of the file (up to 8 alphanumeric characters)

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-293

INI-MTP2SUP: Initiate MTP Level 2 Supervision

On-line Commands

INI-MTP2SUP: Initiate MTP Level 2 Supervision


This command allows initializing level 2 supervision for the Common Channel Signaling System Message Transference Part.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
INI-MTP2SUP [ : LNK = xx ] ;

Parameter

LNK
Signaling link number (1..n) Compatibility:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 8 16 A1 E4 A1 D4 001 001 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1.

Running this command resets the signaling message counters.

3-294

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-MTP2SUP: Query MTP Level 2 Supervision Result

On-line Commands

IT-MTP2SUP: Query MTP Level 2 Supervision Result


This command allows level 2 supervision of the Common Channel Signaling System Message Transference Part. The command displays the current status of signaling links, as well as sent and received messages.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-MTP2SUP [ : LNK = xx ] ;

Parameter

LNK
Signaling link number (1..n) Compatibility:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 8 16 A1 E4 A1 D4 001 001 001 001 001 001

Output Format
LNK = xx MSU sent Abnormal FSN/BNS SUERM excessive T6 depleted T7 depleted Excessive AERM Alignment failure due to T2/T3 SIB received Retrans. window in bytes xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx MSU received Retransmission of L1 Retransmission of L2 MSU retransmitted Bytes MSU retransmitted Negative confirmation Errors in SU SIB transmitted xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx

Remarks

1. 2.

If the link number was not specified, the above listed parameters are displayed for all existing signaling links. In the event of an outage of an unit with a signaling link, message "Unit not active will be displayed.
Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

3-295

IT-MTP2SUP: Query MTP Level 2 Supervision Result

On-line Commands

3.

Message "Signaling terminal board absent or in failure" will display when the signaling terminal board is not properly installed or incapable of providing statistics.

3-296

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-NDPRE: Query Number of Digits of the Exchange Prefix

On-line Commands

IT-NDPRE: Query Number of Digits of the Exchange Prefix


This command is used to query the number of digits that specify the exchange prefix of the subscriber directory number.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 001 001 -

Input Format
IT-NDPRE : NDPRE = xxxx ;

Parameter

NDPRE
Number of Digits (1..8) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 001 001 -

Output Format
NDPRE = x

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-297

MD-NDPRE: Modify Number of Digits of the Exchange Prefix

On-line Commands

MD-NDPRE: Modify Number of Digits of the Exchange Prefix


This command is used to modify the number of digits that specify the exchange prefix of the subscriber directory number.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 001 001 -

Input Format
MD-NDPRE : NDPRE = xxxx ;

Parameter

NDPRE
Number of Digits (1..8) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 001 001 -

Remarks

1.

The number of digits is used during the processing of the COP-RAIUDAT command. The BZ-RS interprets the directory numbers transmitted during the execution of the COPRAIUDAT command considering the current number of digits. The default (factory set) value is 3. If the command "MD EXCOPP OPP=ESA NOAC" is used in Configuration Mode (COPRAIUDAT), the SW wont use the parameter NDPRE and the format of prefix will be EXCPRE=XXXXXX without "-".

2. 3.

3-298

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-OCE: Create Operator Position

On-line Commands

CR-OCE: Create Operator Position


This command is used to assign a Virtual PABX Group subscriber to an Operator Position facility.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 C1 B1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
CR-OCE: OCE = x , SUB = [xxxx-] xxxx;

Parameters

OCE
Operator Position (1..8)

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

Remarks

1. 2.

Up to 8 Operator Positions can be programmed per Virtual PABX Group. The CSR-created Operator Positions connection is established by a LAN computer network.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-299

IT-OCE: Query Operator Position

On-line Commands

IT-OCE: Query Operator Position


This command is used to display Operator Position data.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-OCE : [, OCE = x ];

Parameter

OCE
Operator Position (1..8)

Output Data

If parameter OCE is not specified, all Operator Positions set up in the Virtual PABX Group and their associated numbers lists will be displayed.
OCE = x . . . OCE = x SUB = xxxx-xxxx

SUB = xxxx-xxxx

If the OCE parameter is specified, the specified Operator Position and its associated number list will be displayed.
OCE = x SUB = xxxx-xxxx

Remarks

1.

The output format of the SUB parameter can be changed through the "Option" Menu, "Output Format submenu, on the CSR main window.

3-300

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

SU-OCE: Suppress Operator Position

On-line Commands

SU-OCE: Suppress Operator Position


This command is used to suppress an Operator Position..
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 C1 B1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
SU-OCE : OCE = x;

Parameter

OCE
Operator Position (1..8)

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-301

IT-OPC: Query Originating Signaling Point Code

On-line Commands

IT-OPC: Query Originating Signaling Point Code


This command allows you to query the exchange originating signaling point code for the Common Channel Signaling System.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-OPC ;

Output Format
OPC = xxxxx NIC = x [ ALTOPC = xxxxx ] [ NICOPC = x ]

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

Each Common Channel signaling point included in the signaling network has an OPC (Originating Point Code). The network indicator, NIC, is a field of SIO parameter and can be programmed through MD-OPC command. The parameters ALTOPC and ALTNIC are used for Interconnection Gateway Functionality.

3-302

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-OPC: Modify Originating Signaling Point Code

On-line Commands

MD-OPC: Modify Originating Signaling Point Code


This command permits changing the ID of the exchange originating signaling point. The OPC is altered immediately following the command.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-OPC : OPC = xxxxx , NIC = x [, ALTOPC = xxxxx ] [, ALTNIC = x ];

Parameters

OPC
Originating signaling point code number (0..16777216)

NIC
Network Indicator Code (03)

ALTOPC
Optional parameter to assign which OPC can carry traffic from another SS7 adjacent network. All others OPCs are restricted (0..16777216 or NALTOPC). NALTOPC is used to to clear the ALTOPC assigned value. Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249 LPN109256842 LPN109256826 LPN109256834 007 007 006 004 004

ALTNIC
Optional parameter to assign the NIC (Network Indicator Code) of the SS7 adjacent network (Gateway). All others NIC are restricted (03 or NALTNIC). NALTNIC is used to to clear the ALTNIC assigned value. Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249 LPN109256842 LPN109256826 LPN109256834 007 007 006 004 004

Remarks

1. The Exchange Operating Manual describes the procedure for creating the switch OPC.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-303

MD-OPC: Modify Originating Signaling Point Code

On-line Commands

2. The default value for NIC parameter is 2. 3. The parameters ALTOPC and ALTNIC are used for "Interconnection Gateway Functionality". 4. Any parameter such as OPC, NIC, ALTOPC or ALTNIC cant be changed if there is at least one SS7 link set created. 5. When both parameters ALTOPC and ALTNIC are not defined in switch, the command syntax does not accept changes that covers just one of them. Case both parameters have been already defined and there isnt any SS7 link set created, it is possible change them independently. 6. In order to clear the ALTOPC and ALTNIC assigned values, it is enough that one of them is defined as NALTOPC or NALTNIC (eg: MD-OPC ALTOPC=NALTOPC). In this case both alternative parameters are cleared simultaneously.

3-304

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-OPPSYNC: Query Exchange Synchronization Parameters

On-line Commands

IT-OPPSYNC: Query Exchange Synchronization Parameters


This command is used to query the exchange synchronization parameters.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-OPPSYNC ;

Output Format

The exchange synchronization parameters are displayed in the following format:


CLKTYP = xx IGEL = xx IGIL = xx IGAL = xx PGEL = xx PGLF = xxx PGAL = xx PGLS = xx

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-305

MD-OPPSYNC: Modify Exchange Synchronization Parameters

On-line Commands

MD-OPPSYNC: Modify Exchange Synchronization Parameters


This command is used to modify the exchange synchrony parameters..
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-OPPSYNC : {[ CLKTYP = xx ] [, IGEL = xx ] [, PGEL = xx ] [, IGIL = xx ] [, PGLF = xxx ] [, PGLS = xx ] [, IGAL = xx ] [, PGAL = xx ] } ;

Parameters

CLKTYP
Type of synchronization clock (R1 | R2), fitted on the switching matrix board (MCC)

IGEL
Full external feedback gain (1..16)

PGEL
Direct external feedback gain (1..20)

IGIL
Full internal feedback gain (1..16)

PGLF
Direct internal feedback gain (1..100)

PGLS
Direct internal feedback gain - fine adjustment (1..10)

IGAL
Full gain adjustment loop (1..16)

PGAL
Direct gain adjustment loop (1..50)

3-306

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-OPPSYNC: Modify Exchange Synchronization Parameters

On-line Commands

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

Clock type 1 should be programmed for applications in which the exchange operates as a transit or tandem switch, with a traffic flow above 480 Erl. Clock type 2 should be programmed for applications in which the exchange operates as a transit or tandem switch, with a traffic flow below 480 Erl. The other synchronization parameters are defined by the clock inner control loops. These parameters are preprogrammed and should never be changed without prior notice from LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-307

AT-ORP: Activate Originating Routing Plan

On-line Commands

AT-ORP: Activate Originating Routing Plan


This command is used to activate a new Originating Traffic Routing Plan in the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 001 001 001 001 -

Input Format
AT-ORP [: ORP = x ];

Parameter

ORP
Routing Plan (1..2) Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4.

In order to apply one of the plans to routing call, it should be activated in the exchange. Activating a new originating routing plan interrupts all calls being set up. Test calls are forwarded according to the auxiliary routing plan. The exchange has a single active Plan.

3-308

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

COP-ORP: Copy Originating Routing Plan

On-line Commands

COP-ORP: Copy Originating Routing Plan


This command is used to copy the contents of the auxiliary routing plan to the specified routing plan.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 001 001 001 001 -

Input Format
COP-ORP : ORP = x ;

Parameter

ORP
Routing Plan (1..2) Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1. 2.

After making the changes to the auxiliary routing plan, it will be copied to inactive exchange routing plan, for future activation. Copy the auxiliary plan directly to the active plan isnt allowed, because the possibility to occur a brief inconsistence of active plan during the Switch's operation.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-309

END-ORP: Conclude Changing Originating Routing Plan

On-line Commands

END-ORP: Conclude Changing Originating Routing Plan


This command is used to end an changing Originating Traffic Routing Plan session, thus allowing changes by other CSR.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 001 001 001 001 -

Input Format
END-ORP ;

Remark

1.

This command releases the auxiliary plan for further modification initializations.

3-310

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

INI-ORP: Begin Changing Originating Routing Plan

On-line Commands

INI-ORP: Begin Changing Originating Routing Plan


This command is used to begin an Originating Traffic Routing Plan changing session, blocking changes by other CSR and copying data from the specified routing plan to the auxiliary routing plan.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 001 001 001 001 -

Input Format
INI-ORP : {ORP = xx | INI };

Parameters

ORP
Routing Plan (1..2) Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

INI
Option for initializing Auxiliary Originating Routing Plan data.

Remarks

1. 2.

If parameter ORP is specified, the copy will be from this plan to the auxiliary routing plan. If parameter INI is specified, the auxiliary routing plan will be initialized with all sequences blocked.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-311

IT-ORP: Query Originating Routing Plan

On-line Commands

IT-ORP: Query Originating Routing Plan


This command is used to display Originating Routing Plan data.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 001 001 001 001 -

Input Format
IT-ORP [: [ORP = x, | AUX, ] SEQ = xxxxxxxxxx,];

Parameters

ORP
Routing Plan (1..2) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

AUX
Option for consulting Auxiliary Routing Plan data

SEQ
Call digits sequence (up to 10 digits). Domain: 0..9, B, C, D, E

Output Format

If no parameter is specified, the exchange informs the active routing plan in the following format:
ORP = x ORP = x TabCtrf = x % TabCtrf = x % TabInd = x % TabInd = x % TabClaChm = x % (ativo) TabClaChm = x %

3-312

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-ORP: Query Originating Routing Plan

On-line Commands

If the SEQ parameter is specified, parameters of the selected digit sequence routing plan for the terminal classes and routes classes not blocked for the call will be displayed in the following format:
SEQ = [ CLA [ RCL TYP = [ROTL . . . SEQ = [ CLA [ RCL TYP = [ROTL xxxxxxxxxx = xxx&..&xxx ] = xx&..&xx ] [OCT = xx&..&xx] xxxxx CHCL = xx [ BILSYS ] [MCB = xx] = xx-xx-xx [-xx]] ... [SROU = xx-xx-xx [-xx]] [SECROU = xx-xx-xx [-xx]]

xxxxxxxxxx = xxx&..&xxx ] = xx&..&xx ] [OCT = xx&..&xx] xxxxx CHCL = xx [ BILSYS ] [MCB = xx] = xx-xx-xx [-xx]] ... [SROU = xx-xx-xx [-xx]] [SECROU = xx-xx-xx [-xx]]

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4.

Fields TabCtf, TabInd, and TabClaChm indicate the percentage of the memory space reserved for originating routing programming (ORP) currently in use. Field TabCtf relates the quantity of charging classes programmed for the specified ORP . Field TabClaChm relates the quantity of call of the specified ORP. Field TabInd Ctf reports the quantity of program lines included in the specified ORP.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-313

MD-ORP: Modify Originating Routing Plan

On-line Commands

MD-ORP: Modify Originating Routing Plan


This command is used to change the Originating Traffic Routing Plan. Changes are processed in the Auxiliary Plan.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 001 001 001 001 -

Input Format
MD-ORP : SEQ = xxxxxxxxxx [, CLA = xx&..&xx ] [, PMO = xx&..&xx ] [, RCL = x&..&x [, OCT = xx&..&xx ] ] TYP = xxxxx [, ROU1 = xx-xx-xx[-xx] [, ROU2 = xx-xx-xx[-xx] ] [, ROU3 = xx-xx-xx[-xx] ] [, ROU4 = xx-xx-xx[-xx] ] [, ROU5 = xx-xx-xx[-xx] ] [, SECROU = xx-xx-xx[-xx] ] ] [, CHCL = xx [, CHE = x] [, CHP = x] ] [, BILSYS ] [, MCB = xx]

Parameters

SEQ
Called subscriber digit sequence (the sequence can be specified by up to 16 digits, the last replaceable by a set of up to 16 digits in parenthesis). The following letter characters can be defined: B C D E corresponds to signal I-11 corresponds to signal I-12 corresponds to signal I-13 corresponds to signal I-14

CLA
Terminal class (1..n), where n can be:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 32 128 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

PMO
Origin marking point (1..40). It defines a set of subscribers pertaining to one same billing area. Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 001 001 001

RCL
List of route classes (1..48) to which all specified routing parameters apply

OCT
Originating category (1..15) to which the specified routing parameter applies

3-314

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-ORP: Modify Originating Routing Plan

On-line Commands

TYP
Type of call: BLC CDC DDD FRP IDD HD SPE1..SPE8 RSTPP INTRA LOC REG ISS LSS RINGT blocked collect call direct dialing national free direct dialing international dial test carrier-selected special classes reset public telephone coin counter intra-exchange local regional long distance special service local special service ringing test

ROU1
Route of first choice in format rot-ip-ii[-id] where: rot for incoming routes for outgoing routes for two-way routes for intra-exchange route route groups (GRT) (note that this value excludes the use of the parameters ROU2, ROU3, ROU4 and ROU5) start index (1..16), i. e., the digit order number upon which a trunk should be seized in outgoing and tandem calls, or the order number of the units digit in intra-exchange calls (ip >= ii) sending index (1..16), i. e., the order number of the first digit to be sent in register signaling in outgoing calls, or the order number of the digit upon which the backwards exchange should restart exchanging registry signaling with the forward exchange in tandem calls, or the order number of the thousands digit in intra-exchange calls ID index (1..16), i.e., the order number of the digit upon which the calling party ID should be sent in output calls routed through 5S signaling trunks (id ii). Pulsed signaling trunks handle this index as End Index and it refers to the last digit to be sent by the trunk in the call (id ip). In case of terminated calls over primary access (from number 7 signaling routes), this index indicates that the calling identification is sent in overlap mode and it must be equal or bigger than the starting index (id >= ip). route number: E1..E1024 S1..S1024 B1..B1024 I1 G1..G128

ip ii id

ROU2
Second choice route in format rot-ip-ii[-id] rot route number: E1..E1024 for incoming routes S1..S1024 for outgoing routes B1..B1024 for two-way routes I1 for intra-exchange route start index (1..16), i. e., the digit order number upon which a trunk should be seized in outgoing and tandem calls, or the order number of the units digit in intra-exchange calls (ip >= ii) sending index (1..16), i. e., the order number of the first digit to be sent in register signaling in outgoing calls, or the order number of the digit upon which the backwards exchange should restart exchanging registry signaling with the forward exchange in tandem calls, or the order number of the thousands digit in intra-exchange calls ID index (1..16), i.e., the order number of the digit upon which the calling party ID should be sent in output calls routed through 5S signaling trunks (id ii). Pulsed signaling trunks handle this index as End Index and it refers to the last digit to be sent by the trunk in the call (id ip).

ip ii id

ROU3
Third choice route in format rot-ip-ii[-id] rot route number: E1..E1024 for incoming routes S1..S1024 for outgoing routes

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-315

MD-ORP: Modify Originating Routing Plan

On-line Commands

ip ii id

B1..B1024 for two-way routes I1 for intra-exchange route start index (1..16), i. e., the digit order number upon which a trunk should be seized in outgoing and tandem calls, or the order number of the units digit in intra-exchange calls (ip >= ii) sending index (1..16), i. e., the order number of the first digit to be sent in register signaling in outgoing calls, or the order number of the digit upon which the backwards exchange should restart exchanging registry signaling with the forward exchange in tandem calls, or the order number of the thousands digit in intra-exchange calls ID index (1..16), i.e., the order number of the digit upon which the calling party ID should be sent in output calls routed through 5S signaling trunks (id ii). Pulsed signaling trunks handle this index as End Index and it refers to the last digit to be sent by the trunk in the call (id ip).

ROU4
Fourth choice route in format rot-ip-ii[-id] rot route number: E1..E1024 for incoming routes S1..S1024 for outgoing routes B1..B1024 for two-way routes I1 for intra-exchange route ip start index (1..16), i. e., the digit order number upon which a trunk should be seized in outgoing and tandem calls, or the order number of the units digit in intra-exchange calls (ip >= ii) ii sending index (1..16), i. e., the order number of the first digit to be sent in register signaling in outgoing calls, or the order number of the digit upon which the backwards exchange should restart exchanging registry signaling with the forward exchange in tandem calls, or the order number of the thousands digit in intra-exchange calls id ID index (1..16), i.e., the order number of the digit upon which the calling party ID should be sent in output calls routed through 5S signaling trunks (id ii). Pulsed signaling trunks handle this index as End Index and it refers to the last digit to be sent by the trunk in the call (id ip).

ROU5
Fifth choice route in format rot-ip-ii[-id] rot route number: E1..E1024 for incoming routes S1..S1024 for outgoing routes B1..B1024 for two-way routes I1 for intra-exchange route ip start index (1..16), i. e., the digit order number upon which a trunk should be seized in outgoing and tandem calls, or the order number of the units digit in intra-exchange calls (ip >= ii) ii sending index (1..16), i. e., the order number of the first digit to be sent in register signaling in outgoing calls, or the order number of the digit upon which the backwards exchange should restart exchanging registry signaling with the forward exchange in tandem calls, or the order number of the thousands digit in intra-exchange calls id ID index (1..16), i.e., the order number of the digit upon which the calling party ID should be sent in output calls routed through 5S signaling trunks (id ii). Pulsed signaling trunks handle this index as End Index and it refers to the last digit to be sent by the trunk in the call (id ip).

SECROU
Safety route in format rot-ip-ii[-id] rot route number: E1..32 for incoming routes S1..S32 for outgoing routes B1..B32 for two-way routes I1 for intra-exchange routes ip start index (1..16), i. e., the digit order number upon which a trunk should be seized in outgoing and tandem calls, or the order number of the units digit in intra-exchange calls (ip >= ii) ii sending index (1..16), i. e., the order number of the first digit to be sent in register signaling in outgoing calls, or the order number of the digit upon which the backwards exchange should restart exchanging registry signaling with the forward exchange in tandem calls, or the order number of the thousands digit in intra-exchange calls id ID index (1..16), i.e., the order number of the digit upon which the calling party ID should be sent in output calls routed through 5S signaling trunks (id ii). Pulsed signaling trunks handle this index as End Index and it refers to the last digit to be sent by the trunk in the call (id ip).

3-316

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-ORP: Modify Originating Routing Plan

On-line Commands

CHCL
Charging class (1..32), NCH, EXMM or BILTR, where: NCH indicates a non-billed EXMM indicates an external multimetered call BILTR indicates an externally billed call

CHE
Charging Environment(1..8) .

CHP
Charging Plan (1..8)

BILSYS
Exchange call billing option

MCB
B code matrix (1..30) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

The procedure for changing an Originating Traffic Routing Plan is described in the exchange Operating Manual. If the CLA parameter was omitted, the parameters specified for the call will apply to all terminal classes (1..128). The RCL Parameter should only be specified for intra-exchange and Tandem calls. If the call is type BLC, parameters ROU1, ROU2, ROU3, ROU4, ROU5, SECROU, CHCL, and BILSYS should not be specified. If the call is type RINGT, HD, LSS, RSTPP, parameters ROU1 and ROU2, ROU3, ROU4, ROU5, SECROU should not be specified, but parameter CHCL must be. For all other types of call, parameters PROU and CHCL are compulsory and parameters ROU2, ROU3, ROU4, ROU5, SECROU, and BILSYS optional. A RSTPP type call should be specified in the sequence to be dialed from a public telephone, to initialize its collected-coin counter. A TRCALL type call increases the call answering timing to 180 sec, used for operator assisted calls (ex.: SEQ = 100 | 16x | 107). The start and end indexes on tandem call outgoing routes should be specified to take in consideration that exchanging MFC signaling with the backward exchange begun upon receiving the called subscriber prefix.

10. In tandem calls over incoming routes on which parameter DGE has been specified, the exchange prefix will be added to the received digits to define the sequence to be consulted in the Originating Routing Plan, in order to carry on with the call. 11. BILTR billing class should be specified for outgoing, externally billed calls routed through
109250571 Issue 009, May/2004 Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-317

MD-ORP: Modify Originating Routing Plan

On-line Commands

5S signaling trunks, for the exchange sending the calling party ID 12. If the BILSYS parameter is specified, the call will be billed in the exchange. 13. The End Index is also considered for applying TSCH timing. If programmed, TSCH timing will only be considered when the End Index is reached (refer to command MD-EXCTME). 14. For intra-exchange calls, primary route I1 must be defined to program the start and end indexes. Route I1 is fictitious and cannot be created 15. If the CHE and CHP parameters were not specified, they will display the default to value 1 (CHE=1 and CHP =1) 16. When a route group is defined (G1..G128) instead of a single route, as a value of the ROU1 parameter, the ROU2, ROU3, ROU4 and ROU5 parameters will not be accepted.

3-318

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IP-PEMALA: Query Alarm Settings to External Alarm Output Points

On-line Commands

IP-PEMALA: Query Alarm Settings to External Alarm Output Points


This command is used for displaying the configuration set up between exchange alarms and external alarm output points.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IP-PEMALA [ : ASE = xx ] ;

Parameter

ASE
Alarm severity: UR urgent SU semi-urgent NU non-urgent

Output Format

If the ASE parameter is specified, the external alarm output point is displayed jointly with the selected alarm severity in the following format:
ASE = xx EMP = xx-xx-xx

If the ASE parameter is not specified, all alarm levels are displayed with the programmed external alarm output points in the following format:
ASE = xx . . . ASE = xx EMP = xx-xx-xx . . . EMP = xx-xx-xx

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-319

PR-PEMALA: Program Alarms to External Alarm Output Points

On-line Commands

PR-PEMALA: Program Alarms to External Alarm Output Points


This command is used to set up a relationship between alarms generated in the exchange and the external alarm output points
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
PR-PEMALA : ASE = xx, EMP = xx-xx-xx ;

Parameters

ASE
Alarm severity: UR urgent SU semi-urgent NU non-urgent

EMP
External alarm output point in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

number of the terminal unit (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd
01..05 21..22 20..22 20..21 A1 B1 D1

number of the board at the point of external alarm detection


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir (1..7) (1..4) (1..16)

number of the circuit on the board: for BZSP system (with Control Program LPN109232249) for MTL 93081A board (BZ5000 switch) for MTL 97086A board (BZ5000 switch)

3-320

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

PR-PEMALA: Program Alarms to External Alarm Output Points

On-line Commands

Remarks

1.

Each external alarm output point may be associated to a single level of alarm severity.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-321

DS-PERSUP: Deactivate Performance Supervision

On-line Commands

DS-PERSUP: Deactivate Performance Supervision


This command is used to deactivate ongoing performance supervision in the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
DS-PERSUP ;

Remarks

1. 2.

Results gathered up to the time of performance supervision deactivation are lost. The deactivated supervision is automatically taken out of the programmed performance supervision.

3-322

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IP-PERSUP: Query Performance Supervision Programming

On-line Commands

IP-PERSUP: Query Performance Supervision Programming


This command is used to deactivate programmed performance supervision.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IP-PERSUP ;

Output Format

The date and starting time, duration (in minutes) and supervision status are displayed in the following format:
NSUP = x . . . NSUP = x DAT = xx-xx-xx . . . DAT = xx-xx-xx HOU = xx:xx:xx . . . HOU = xx:xx:xx DUR = xxxx . . . DUR = xxxx In Course . . . Finished

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-323

IT-PERSUP: Query Performance Supervision Result

On-line Commands

IT-PERSUP: Query Performance Supervision Result


This command is used for displaying performance supervision results.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-PERSUP : NSUP = x, { ORG = TRK [, { UNI = xx | TRK = xx-xx-xx } ] | ORG = MFC [, { UNI = xx | MFC = xx-xx-xx } ] | ORG = MTA [, { UNI = xx | MTA = xx-xx } ] | ORG = SUB [, { UNI = xx | SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx } ] | ORG = CPCT [, KEY = [xxxx-]xxxx ] | ORG = ROUT [, ROUT = xxxxx ] | ORG = CHCL [ [, CHP = x ], CHCL = xx ] | ORG = SS7LNK ORG = E1 ORG = UCP|}; Parameters

NSUP
Number of supervisions (1..n) n=9 for ORG supervisions n=3 for BUH, CLT or CGR supervisions Compatibility:
nSOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 3 4 A1 E6 A1 D6 001 001 001 001 001 001

ORG
Device type: TRK trunk MFC MFC sender/receiver MTA subscriber terminal module SUB subscriber CPCT PABX group terminal ROUT route CHP charging plan CHCL charging class

3-324

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-PERSUP: Query Performance Supervision Result

On-line Commands

UNI
terminal unit number (1..n):
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 2 16 78 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

TRK
Trunk number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni terminal unit number (1..n)
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 2 16 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

brd
13..20 01..20 01..19 01..05 A1 B1 D1 -

trunk board number


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir
31 512 A1 -

board circuit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

MFC
MFC sender/receiver ID in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

brd
21..22 20..22 20..21 01..05 A1 B1 D1 -

MFC sender/receiver board number


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-325

IT-PERSUP: Query Performance Supervision Result

On-line Commands

cir

board circuit number (1..n). (Considering those n MFC sender/receiver, n-x can be configured as DTMF detectors)
A1 E1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n (x) SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 12 (2) 24 (4) 60 A1 F1 -

MTA
Subscriber terminal module number in format uni-brd: uni
16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd
1..21 1..17 A1 D1

board number
A1 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

KEY
THTU digits of the PABX group key subscriber directory number (0000...9999)

ROUT
Route ID: E1..En incoming routes B1..Bn two-way routes S1..Sn outgoing routes
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 32 1024 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

CHP
Charging Plan (1..8)

CHCL
Charging class (1..32)

3-326

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-PERSUP: Query Performance Supervision Result

On-line Commands

Output Format

Trunk Performance Supervision When supervising performance, the following measurements are taken on each exchange trunk:
Busy Atd DesSnl Number of seizures; Number of answered calls; Number of calls with forced MFC signaling disconnection (trunks with MFC signaling) or TUP/ISUP signaling disconnection before sending or receiving ACM messages, due to calling party disconnection (outgoing) or trunk disconnection (incoming); Number of calls with calling party disconnection or incoming trunk disconnection after receiving ring back tone; Number of outgoing calls with answering timeout; Number of calls with first message reception timeout (first MFC exchange signal or first TUP/ISUP message); Number of calls with timeout during MFC exchange, after the first signal, or need to reallocation of an outgoing trunk due to collision in TUP/ISUP signaling. Number of calls in which invalid signals were received in MFC exchange or fault messages were received (CFL for TUP or REL numbers 21, 29, 31, 44, 111, and 127 for ISUP) or reset in TUP/ISUP signaling; Number of calls in signaling exchange was interrupted due to the receipt of unexpected messages (MFC signals or TUP/ISUP messages). Number of calls in signaling exchange was interrupted due to receiving/sending congestion messages in the forward network or congestion in the destination exchange (A4 signal for MFC signaling, CRF or CCD for TUP signaling and REL 34 or 42 for ISUP signaling).

DesAtd TmpAtd TmpSnl1 TmpCol SnlInv SnlNEsp SnlCgt

If ORG = TRK was specified, the results obtained for all the exchange created trunks are listed in the following format:
NSUP = x DAT = xx-xx-xx HOU = xx:xx:xx DUR = xxxx TRK = xx-xx-xx DesAtd TmpAtd SnlInv . . . TRK = xx-xx-xx DesAtd TmpAtd SnlInv TOTAL Busy = DesAtd TmpAtd SnlInv Busy = xxxx Atd = xxxx = xxxx DesSnl = xxxx = xxxx TmpSnl1 = xxxx = xxxx MFCNEsp = xxxx . . . . . . Busy = xxxx Atd = xxxx = xxxx DesSnl = xxxx = xxxx TmpSnl1 = xxxx = xxxx MFCNEsp = xxxx xxxx Atd = xxxx = xxxx DesSnl = xxxx = xxxx TmpSnl1 = xxxx = xxxx MFCNEsp = xxxx

TmpCol = xxxx SnlCgt = xxxx . . .

TmpCol = xxxx SnlCgt = xxxx

TmpCol = xxxx SnlCgt = xxxx

If parameter TRK was specified, only the selected trunk performance results are displayed. If parameter UNI was specified, only the performance results for trunks controlled by the selected unit are displayed.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-327

IT-PERSUP: Query Performance Supervision Result

On-line Commands

MFC Sender/Receiver Performance Supervision The following measurements are taken for each of the exchange MFC senders/receivers for performance supervision:
Busy BusyEf DesMFC TmpMFC1 TmpMFC2 MFCInv MFCNEsp MFCA4 Number of seizures; Number of seizures for which MFC signaling exchange terminated with a valid end-of-selection signal; Number of calls in which forced MFC signaling disconnection due to calling party disconnection or incoming trunk disconnection; Number of calls in which timeout has occurred for the first signal in MFC signaling exchange Number of calls in which timeout has occurred during MFC signaling exchange after the first signal; Number of calls in which MFC signaling exchange was interrupted due to reception of an invalid signal; Number of calls in which MFC signaling exchange was interrupted due to reception of an unexpected signal; Number of calls in which MFC signaling exchange was interrupted due to reception of an A4 signal

The following values are totaled for each exchange unit:


TentMFS InsMFS TentMFE InsMFE Number of seizure attempts of outgoing MFC sender/receiver; Number of unsuccessful seizure attempts of outgoing MFC sender/receiver; Number of seizure attempts of incoming MFC sender/receiver; Number of unsuccessful seizure attempts of incoming MFC sender/receiver.

If ORG = MFC was specified, the results obtained for all exchange MFC senders/receivers are displayed in the following format:
NSUP = x UNI = xx DAT = xx-xx-xx TentMFS = xxxx HOU = xx:xx:xx InsMFS = xxxx DUR = xxxx InsMFE = xxxx TentMFE = xxxx

MFC = xx-xx-xx DesMFC MFCInv . . . MFC = xx-xx-xx DesMFC MFCInv

Busy = xxxx BusyEf = xxxx = xxxx TmpMFC1 = xxxx TmpMFC2 = xxxx = xxxx MFCNEsp = xxxx MFCA4 = xxxx . . . . . . . . . Busy = xxxx BusyEf = xxxx = xxxx TmpMFC1 = xxxx TmpMFC2 = xxxx = xxxx MFCNEsp = xxxx MFCA4 = xxxx

If parameter MFC was specified, only the performance results of the specified MFC sender/receiver are displayed. If parameter UNI was specified, only the performance results of the selected unit MFC senders/receivers are displayed.

3-328

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-PERSUP: Query Performance Supervision Result

On-line Commands

MTA Performance Supervision The following measurements are taken for supervising the performance of each exchange subscriber terminal module: DigInv Number of originating calls from subscriber module terminal in which a invalid digit was received during dialing; If ORG = MTA was specified, the performance results obtained for each exchange subscriber terminal module are displayed in the following format
NSUP = x DAT = xx-xx-xx HOU = xx:xx:xx MTA = xx-xx DigInv = xxxx . . . . . . MTA = xx-xx DigInv = xxxx DUR = xxxx

If parameter MTA was specified, only performance results obtained for the selected subscriber terminal module are displayed. Subscriber Performance Supervision The following measurements are taken for supervising the performance of each exchange terminal:
ChmO ChmOAtd ChmONDis ChmT ChmTAtd NR LO PAB Number of times the subscriber received dial tone; Number of originating calls answered Number of times the subscriber received dial tone and did not proceed to dial; Number of calls received; Number of received calls answered; Number of received calls unanswered Number of received calls with busy subscriber; Calling party to called party loss: PAB = [ (NR + LO) x 100 ] / (NR + LO + ChmTAtd) %

If ORG = SUB was specified, the results obtained for each exchange subscriber are listed in the following format:
NSUP = x DAT = xx-xx-xx SUB = = xxxx = xxxx xxxx HOU = xx:xx:xx xxxx xxxx . . . xxxx xxxx DUR = xxxx ChmONDis = xxxx PAB = xx,xx% . . . ChmONDis = xxxx PAB = xx,xx% TER = xx-xx-xx ChmO ChmT NR = . . . TER = xx-xx-xx ChmO ChmT NR = xxxx ChmOAtd = ChmTAtd = LO = xxxx . . . SUB = xxxx = xxxx ChmOAtd = = xxxx ChmTAtd = xxxx LO = xxxx

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-329

IT-PERSUP: Query Performance Supervision Result

On-line Commands

If parameter SUB was specified, only the performance results of the selected subscriber are displayed. PABX Group Performance Supervision If ORG = CPCT, was specified, the results obtained for all exchange PABX groups are listed in the following format:
NSUP = x KEY = xxxx . . . KEY = xxxx DAT = xx-xx-xx ChmO = xxxx ChmT = xxxx NR = xxxx HOU = xx:xx:xx ChmOAtd = xxxx ChmTAtd = xxxx LO = xxxx DUR = xxxx ChmONDis = xxxx PAB = xx,xx%

ChmO = xxxx ChmT = xxxx NR = xxxx

ChmOAtd = xxxx ChmTAtd = xxxx LO = xxxx

ChmONDis = xxxx PAB = xx,xx%

If parameter KEY was specified, only the performance results of the selected PABX group are displayed. Route Performance Supervision The following measurements are taken for supervising the performance of each exchange route:
Bltjun TentJun BusyTrk AtdJun TentJunT BusyTrkT AtdJunT Number of blocked trunks of the route. Total of seizure attempts of trunks on the originating and/or terminating call route; Total of trunk seizures on the originating and/or terminating call route; Total of trunk seizures on the originating and/or terminating call route with answering; Total of seizure attempts of trunks on tandem call routes; Total of trunk seizures on tandem call routes; Total of trunk seizures on the tandem call routes with answering.

If ORG = ROUT was specified, the results obtained for each exchange route are listed in the following format:
NSUP = x DAT = xx-xx-xx TentJun TentJunT . . . TentJun TentJunT HOU = xx:xx:xx = xxxxx BusyTrk = xxxxx BusyTrkT . . . = xxxxx BusyTrk = xxxxx BusyTrkT DUR = xxxx = xxxxx AtdJun = xxxxx AtdJunT . . . . . . = xxxxx AtdJun = xxxxx AtdJunT = xxxxx = xxxxx ROUT = xxxxx . . . ROUT = xxxxx

= xxxxx = xxxxx

If parameter ROUT was specified, only the performance results of the selected route are displayed.

3-330

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-PERSUP: Query Performance Supervision Result

On-line Commands

Charging Supervision The following measurements are taken for supervising the performance of each charging class and modality of the exchange:
TChm Tpulsos Total Calls - informs the total number of completed calls for the charging modality/ class; Total Pulses - informs the total number of multi-metering pulses accumulated for the charging modality/class.

If ORG = CHCL was specified, the results obtained for each exchange charging class are listed in the following format:
NSUP = x CHCL = xx CHM = xx CHM = xx . . . CHM = xx CHCL = xx CHM = xx . . . CHM = xx TChm = xxxxx . . . TChm = xxxxx Tpulsos = xxxxx . . . Tpulsos = xxxxx TChm = xxxxx TChm = xxxxx . . . TChm = xxxxx Tpulsos = xxxxx Tpulsos = xxxxx . Tpulsos = xxxxx DAT = xx-xx-xx HOU = xx:xx:xx DUR = xxxx

. .

If parameter CHCL was specified, only the performance results of the selected route are displayed. SS7 link Supervision During a performance supervision, the following measures are effected for each SS7 link:
FSD Out of Service time time (in seconds) that the link was out of service, from the supervision beginning.

If ORG = SS7LNK is specified, the results for each link are displayed, on the following format:
NSUP = x SLS = xx DAT = xx-xx-xx LNK = xx HOU = xx:xx:xx FSD = xxxxx DUR = xxxx

E1 link Supervision During a performance supervision, the following measures are effected for each E1 link:
FSD Out of Service time time (in seconds) that the link was out of service, from the supervision beginning.

If ORG = E1 is specified, the results for each link are displayed, on the following format:
NSUP = x DAT = xx-xx-xx HOU = xx:xx:xx E1 = xx-xx TRKINT = xx FSD = xxxxx DUR = xxxx

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-331

IT-PERSUP: Query Performance Supervision Result

On-line Commands

CPU load Supervision During a performance supervision, the following measures are effected for each CPU of the exchange:
CARGA Processor load processor load (%) for each CPU.

If ORG = UCP is specified, the results for each CPU are displayed, on the following format:
NSUP = x UNI UNI UNI . . . UNI = xx = xx = xx DAT = xx-xx-xx CARGA CARGA CARGA . . . CARGA = xxx = xxx = xxx HOU = xx:xx:xx DUR = xxxx

= xx

= xxx

Remarks

1.

Outage of an exchange unit during the time interval between the beginning of performance supervision and inquiring the result obtained will void the results obtained for the entities under the unit control. The voided results are not displayed during inquiring. When querying a periodic supervision, it will be indicated through the message (Periodic) beside the supervision duration.

2.

3-332

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

PR-PERSUP: Program Performance Supervision

On-line Commands

PR-PERSUP: Program Performance Supervision


This command is used to program performance supervision.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
PR-PERSUP : NSUP = x [, DAT= xx-xx-xx, HOU = xx[-xx[-xx]] ] [, DUR = xxxx ] [PER];

Parameters

NSUP
Number of supervisions (1..n) n=9 for ORG supervisions n=3 for BUH, CLT or CGR supervisions Compatibility:
nSOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 3 4 A1 E6 A1 D6 001 001 001 001 001 001

DAT
Date in the yy-mm-dd format: yy year (00..99) mm month (01..12) dd day (01..31)

HOU
Supervision starting time in format ho[-mi[-se]]: ho hour (00..23) mi minute (00..59) (optional) se second (00.59) (optional)

DUR
Duration of supervision in minutes (1..1440)

PER
Periodic Supervision Used for traffic and performance supervision configuration. PER mnemonic is valid for exchanges with SOF 98119E6, SOF 98158D6, LPN109253856.001, LPN109253864.001, LPN109232249.001, LPN109256842.001 Control Program Versions and higher.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-333

PR-PERSUP: Program Performance Supervision

On-line Commands

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

If parameters DAT and HOU were not specified, supervision will start immediately. If parameter DUR was not specified, supervision will last for an hour. If PER parameter is specified, four subsequent supervisions will be programmed, with a period of 15 min each one, during all the period that the supervision is programmed.

3-334

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

REP-PERSUP: Performance Supervision Report

On-line Commands

REP-PERSUP: Performance Supervision Report


This command is used to write on disk the performance supervision result.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
REP-PERSUP : NSUP = x ;

Parameter

NSUP
Number of supervisions (1..n) n=9 for ORG supervisions n=3 for BUH, CLT or CGR supervisions Compatibility:
nSOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 3 4 A1 E6 A1 D6 001 001 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1. 2.

The performance supervision data file format is described in the Exchange Operating Manual. The performance supervision data are written in file MMDDHOMI.DES, where: MMDD month and day of start of supervision; HOMI hour and minute of start of supervision.

3.

The performance supervision data files are written in the connected exchange directory, as indicated by parameter PATH of command CR-EXC.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-335

RP-PERSUP: Remove Performance Supervision Programming

On-line Commands

RP-PERSUP: Remove Performance Supervision Programming


This command is used to remove performance supervision programming.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
RP-PERSUP : NSUP = x&..&x ;

Parameter

NSUP
Number of supervisions (1..n) n=9 for ORG supervisions n=3 for BUH, CLT or CGR supervisions Compatibility:
nSOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 3 4 A1 E6 A1 D6 001 001 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1. 2.

When performance supervision programming is erased, its results are lost. For removing the programming of the periodic supervision, omit the parameter NSUP.

3-336

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-PLAN: Create Switching Plan

On-line Commands

CR-PLAN: Create Switching Plan


This command is used to configure the exchange unit, which will house an inter-modular switching matrix.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Input Format
CR-PLAN : UNI = xx ;

Parameter

UNI
Unit number (1, 2, 5 or 6)

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4.

Up to four units can be configured with switching planes. We highly recommend creating switching planes. Only units configured with MMCII, MMCIIR, or MCC boards can be assigned the UNI parameter. Exchanges with LPN109232249 and LPN109256842 Control Programs dont use switching plan.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-337

IT-PLAN: Query Switching Plan

On-line Commands

IT-PLAN: Query Switching Plan


This command is used to query exchange units, which house inter-modular switching matrixes.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-PLAN ;

Output Format

Units housing a inter-modular switching matrix are displayed in the following format:
UNI = xx . . . UNI = xx

Remarks

1. 2.

Up to four units can be configured with switching planes. Exchanges with Control Program LPN109232249 and LPN109256842 dont use switching plan.

3-338

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

SU-PLAN: Suppress Switching Plan

On-line Commands

SU-PLAN: Suppress Switching Plan


This command is used to suppress the configuration of an inter-modular switching matrix in an exchange unit.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Input Format
SU-PLAN : UNI = xx ;

Parameter

UNI
Unit number (1, 2, 5 or 6)

Remark

1. 2.

Only units configured with MMCII or MMCIIR boards can be assigned the UNI parameter. Exchanges with Control Program LPN109232249 and LPN109256842 dont use switching plan.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-339

COP-PRG: Copy Control Program

On-line Commands

COP-PRG: Copy Control Program


This command is used to load the Control Program into the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
COP-PRG : FIL = xxx..xxx ;

Parameter

FIL
File name in the [drive:] [directory] filename format drive drive (A, B or C) containing the disk where the file is stored in (if omitted, the current drive will be accessed) directory name of the directory containing the file (up to 63 alphanumeric characters; if omitted, the current directory will be accessed) filename name of the file (up to 8 alphanumeric characters)

Remarks

1. 2.

This command is used to upgrade the version of exchange Control Program. The command may be run in two forms: - When running with the exchange in load mode, the Control Program is copied to the primary area of the flash memory, replacing the current Control Program. This type of copy is made by local connection and does not require running the ET-PRG command; - Connected in operating mode, the program being copied to a temporary memory position.

3. 4. 5. 6.

The command copies the Control Program (*.bin file) to the flash memory secondary area. The current Control Program is running in the primary area. The ET-PRG Command must be run to replace the current Control Program by the version stored in secondary memory. The operation mode is only valid for exchanges with LPN109232249.001 or LPN109256842.001 Control Program versions or higher, also allowing remote access. Only load mode and local access apply to earlier versions.

3-340

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

ET-PRG: Replace Control Program

On-line Commands

ET-PRG: Replace Control Program


This command is used to replace the current control program by the version stored in secondary memory.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
ET-PRG;

Remarks

1. 2.

This command should only be run after the COP-PRG command and with the exchange in load mode. When this command is run, the exchange Boot Program will check the consistency of the contents of the secondary memory. If it is accepted, the contents will be transferred to the primary memory area.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-341

INI-PRISUP: Initiate PRI Interface Supervision

On-line Commands

INI-PRISUP: Initiate PRI Interface Supervision


This command is used to initiate supervising ISDN terminal PRI interfaces.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 C1 B1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
INI-PRISUP [ : TER = xx-xx-xx ];

Parameter

TER
Terminal number in format uni-brd-cir: uni
16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd cir

terminal board number (1..16 odd positions and 18..19) MAP board circuit number (1...16)

Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1. 2.

A terminal list cannot be defined for initializing the PRI interface supervision. Only one PRI interface supervision is allowed simultaneously.

3-342

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-PRISUP: Query PRI Interface Supervision Result

On-line Commands

IT-PRISUP: Query PRI Interface Supervision Result


This command is used to query the result of supervising ISDN terminal PRI interfaces.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 C1 B1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-PRISUP [ : TER = xx-xx-xx ] [ LVL = xx&..&xx ];

Parameters

TER
Terminal number in format uni-brd-cir: uni
16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

brd cir

terminal board number (1..16 odd positions and 18..19) MAP board circuit number (1...16)

Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

LVL
Level (L1..L4)

Output Format

If parameter TER was not specified, all terminals with PRI interface and respective supervision results will be displayed.
TER = xx-xx-xx OPSL1 = xx OPSL2 = xxx OPSB1 = xxx NEBE = xxx FEBE = xxx RPF = ITV|ATV|Curto DUR = xxxxx TEI=xx..xx..xx..xx OPSB1 = xxx

. . .

TER = xx-xx-xx OPSL1 = xx OPSL2 = xxx OPSB1 = xxx NEBE = xxx FEBE = xxx RPF = ITV|ATV|Curto DUR = xxxxx TEI=xx..xx..xx..xx

OPSB1 = xxx

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-343

IT-PRISUP: Query PRI Interface Supervision Result

On-line Commands

Remarks

1.

The parameters listed in the command response are: OPSL1 interface level 1 operating status: ITV Inactive ATV Active OPSL2 interface level 2 operating status: NCON Unconnected CON Connected OPSB1 interface first B channel operating status: NCON Unconnected CON Connected OPSB2 interface second B channel operating status: NCON Unconnected CON NEBE FEBE DUR TEI Connected Number of blocks received with error at the interface Number of blocks transmitted with error by the interface Duration of Supervision Terminal level 2 addressing

2. 3.

The value of terminal level 2 addressing (TEI) is automatically assigned by the exchange at the start of level 2 message exchange. The specified terminal (TER) should be the same prior defined by command INI-PRISUP.

3-344

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-PS: Create Peripheral Stage

On-line Commands

CR-PS: Create Peripheral Stage


This command is used to create Peripheral Stages (PS) in the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 001 001 001 -

Input Format
CR-PS : PS = xx, NAM = "xxxxxxxx" [, PORT1 = xx-xxxx] [, PORT2 = xx-xxxx ] [, ROUT = xxxxx ] [, PRO = V51 | V52 | BAT ] ;

Parameters

PS
Peripheral Stage number (1..64) or (1..16) for the control software SOF 98119, LPN109253856 and LPN109232249.

NAM
PS designation (up to 8 alphanumeric characters in apostrophes)

PORT1
Communication with the PS in the uni-port format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

number of unit (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 -

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

port COM1 COM2 COM3

serial communication port : COM1 serial port COM2 serial port COM3 serial port

PORT2
Communication with the PS in the uni-port format: uni number of unit (1..n)

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 2 16 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 -

port

serial communication port :

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-345

CR-PS: Create Peripheral Stage

On-line Commands

COM1 COM2 COM3

COM1 serial port COM2 serial port COM3 serial port

ROUT
Outgoing and two-way routes: B1..Bn two-way routes S1..Sn outgoing routes E1..En incoming routes
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 32 1024 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

PRO
Communication protocol: V52 when a V5.2 interface is used BAT when LUCENT communication protocol is used (default)

Remarks

1.

The PORT1 parameter specifies the modem used for communicating between the Central Stage and PS. The modem is specified by two arguments, the first indicating the unit in which the modem is installed, the second the serial port to be used by the modem. BZ5000 Exchanges allow you to use two modems for CS-PS communications, in order to enhance system reliability. To this end, the second communication modem must be specified by an optional parameter PORT2. Parameter PORT2 also requires specifying the unit containing the modem and the communication port it will use. Created EPs are displayed on the CSR by a window with a list of created EPs, on the left of the command line. The PRO parameter will be only configured if the Control Program used on CS side is SOF 98119B1. If the created EPs do not use a V5 interface, parameter PRO will not have to be configured. As default, command CR-PS uses PRO = BAT.

2.

3. 4. 5.

3-346

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-PS: Query Peripheral Stages

On-line Commands

IT-PS: Query Peripheral Stages


This command is used to display the Peripheral Stages created in the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 001 001 001 -

Input Format
IT-PS [ : PS = xx ] ;

Parameter

PS
Peripheral Stage number (1..64) or (1..16) for the control software SOF98119, LPN109253856 and LPN109232249.

Output Format

If parameter PS is specified, the PS designation, the CS-PS communication ports and the limits of subscribers created in the PS are displayed in the following format:
PS = xx NAM = xxxxxxxx PORT1 = xx-xxxx [ PORT2 = xx-xxxx ] [ROUT = xxxxx] [INT = xxx] PRO = xxx

If parameter PS is not specified, the PS designations, the CS-PS communication ports and the limits of subscribers created in the EPs of all EPS created in the exchange are displayed in the following format:
PS = xx NAM = xxxxxxxx PORT1 = xx-xxxx [ PORT2 = xx-xxxx ] [ROUT = xxxxx] [INT = xxx] PRO = xxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PS = xx NAM = xxxxxxxx PORT1 = xx-xxxx [ PORT2 = xx-xxxx ] [ROUT = xxxxx] [INT = xxx] PRO = xxx

Remarks

1.

To identify which EPs have been created in the connected exchange, just refer to the operating environment field at the lower part of the CSR Program screen, beside the command editing field. The prefixes created in all EPs and the CS should be identical, i. e., EXCPRE = x should use the same definition in all EPs and the CS.

2.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-347

SU-PS: Suppress Peripheral Stage

On-line Commands

SU-PS: Suppress Peripheral Stage


This command is used to suppress a Peripheral Stage in the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
SU-PS : PS = xx ;

Parameter

PS
Peripheral Stage number (1..64) or (1..16) for the control software SOF98119, LPN109253856 and LPN109232249.

Remarks

1.

When an PS is suppressed its name is removed from the operating environment field in the CSR for Windows screen.

3-348

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-RECAL: Query Call Rerouting Data

On-line Commands

IT-RECAL: Query Call Rerouting Data


This command is used to display call rerouting data.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 001 001 001 001 -

Input Format
IT-RECAL [ : TCT = xx ] ;

Parameter

TCT
Terminating category (2, 3, 4, 7 and 8)

Output Format

If parameter TCT was specified, call rerouting data on the selected terminating category are displayed in the following format:
TCT = xx ROU1 = xxx [ ROU2 = xxx ] [ CHCL = xx ] [ SSR = xx ] [ SEQ = xx..xx ]

If parameter TCT was not specified, call rerouting data on all terminating categories programmed in the exchange are displayed in the following format:
TCT = xx ROU1 = xxx . . . . . . ROU1 = xxx [ ROU2 = xxx ] [ CHCL = xx ] [ SSR = xx ] [ SEQ = xx..xx ] . . . . . . . . . [ ROU2 = xxx ] [ CHCL = xx ] [ SSR = xx ] [ SEQ = xx..xx ]

TCT = xx

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-349

MD-RECAL: Modify Call Rerouting Data

On-line Commands

MD-RECAL: Modify Call Rerouting Data


This command is used to assign to the end-of-selection code a new first choice (and/or second choice) routing scheme, charging class, special routing signal and a special sequence to be sent in the new call. The command also enables generating calls to prior programmed numbers when a outgoing or fully blocked terminal goes off-hook.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 001 001 001 001 -

Input Format
MD-RECAL : TCT = x, ROU1 = xxx [, ROU2 = xxx ] [, CHCL = xx [, CHE = x ] [, CHP = x ] ] [, SSR = xx ] [, SEQ = xx..xx ] ;

Parameters

TCT
Terminating category (2, 3, 4, 7 and 8)

ROU1
Identification of the route of first choice: B1..Bn for two-way routes; S1..Sn for outgoing routes.
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 32 1024 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

ROU2
Identification of the route of second choice: B1..Bn for two-way routes; S1..Sn for outgoing routes.
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 32 1024 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

CHCL
Charging class (1..32)

CHE
Charging Environment(1..8) .

CHP
Charging Plan (1..8)

3-350

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-RECAL: Modify Call Rerouting Data

On-line Commands

SSR
Special routing signal (11, 13 and 14)

SEQ
Sequence of digits to be dialed by the exchange (up to 18 digits)

Remarks

1. The terminating category indicates the end-of-selection signal that, when received in a MFC signaling exchange, should provide new call rerouting. In the case of internal calls, it 2. indicates that calls destined to subscribers with this category should be rerouted by the exchange. 2. 3. 4. Parameter CHCL indicates the charging class to be applied to charge the generated call . The special routing signal indicates the first multifrequency signal to be sent in the generated call, and may assume values I11, I13 and I14 Parameter SEQ allows routing calls when a outgoing or fully blocked subscriber takes his phone off hook. In this case, the exchange generates a call and sends the number assigned to the parameter routing these calls. If the parameter is not programmed, the exchange will send busy tone to blocked subscribers To erase call rerouting programming, specify terminating category as ROU1 = NRER. The CHP parameter indicates the charging plan that will be used to charge the generated call. Normally, a charging plan is programmed for each call type (DDD, IDD, etc) or on special situations of call rerouting.

5. 6.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-351

CR-REGDN: Create Register Direct Number

On-line Commands

CR-REGDN: Create Register Direct Number


This command is used for associate the directory number (DN) for remote programming service
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 004 001 -

Input Format
CR-REGDN : SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx, CLA = xxx ;

Parameter

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

CLA
Terminal class (1..n), where n can be:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 32 128 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1.

Register DN does not have a terminal assigned because it is a Virtual DN.:

3-352

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-REGDN: Query Register Direct Number

On-line Commands

IT-REGDN: Query Register Direct Number


This command is used to display the directory number (DN) data.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 004 001 -

Input Format
IT-REGDN ;

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-353

MD-REGDN: Modify Register Direct Number

On-line Commands

MD-REGDN: Modify Register Direct Number


This command is used for change the directory number (DN) to other subscriber.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 004 001 -

Input Format
MD-REGDN : SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx, CLA = xxx ;

Parameter

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

CLA
Terminal class (1..n), where n can be:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 32 128 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1.

Register DN does not have a terminal assigned because it is a Virtual DN.:

3-354

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

SU-REGDN: Suppress Register Direct Number

On-line Commands

SU-REGDN: Suppress Register Direct Number


This command is used to suppress the directory number (DN).
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 004 001 -

Input Format
SU-REGDN ;

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-355

IT-REGSUP: Query Processor Register

On-line Commands

IT-REGSUP: Query Processor Register


This command is used to verify the allocated memory percent and the instantaneous processing load of the processor of each unit.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 E4 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-REGSUP : [ UNI = xx ] ;

Parameter

UNI
unit number (1..n):
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 2 16 E4 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Output Format

If the UNI parameter is not specified, the allocated memory percent and the instantaneous processing load of the processor of each unit will be displayed:
UNI = xx MRD = xxxxxxx MBA = xxx NBA = x PBA = x CARGA = xxx [Intra-modular channels busy :] [LNK = xx] [CANAIS = xx] [CCO busy : xxx] [CCE busy : xxx] [Inter-modular channels busy :] [LNK = xx] [CANAIS = xx]

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

UNI = xx MRD = xxxxxxx MBA = xxx NBA = x PBA = x CARGA = xxx [Intra-modular channels busy :] [LNK = xx] [CANAIS = xx] [CCO busy : xxx] [CCE busy : xxx] [Inter-modular channels busy :] [LNK = xx] [CANAIS = xx]

3-356

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-REGSUP: Query Processor Register

On-line Commands

If the UNI parameter is specified, the allocated memory percent and the instantaneous processing load of the processor of the specified unit will be displayed:
UNI = xx MRD = xxxxxxx MBA = [Intra-modular channels busy [LNK = xx] [CANAIS = xx] [CCO busy : xxx] [CCE busy : xxx] [Inter-modular channels busy [LNK = xx] [CANAIS = xx] [Inter-modular channels busy [LNK = xx] [CANAIS = xx] xxx NBA = x PBA = x CARGA = xxx :]

:] :]

Remarks

1.

Value of the LNK and CANAIS parameters: Intramodular channels:


Parameter LNK CANAIS BZ5000 1..16 1..32 BZSP -

Intermodular channels:
Parameter LNK CANAIS BZ5000 1..24 1..32 BZSP 1..80 1..32

2.

Values of the other parameters: - MRD: Available RAM Memory (bytes); - MBA: Allocated memory block (bytes); - NBA: kernel allocated memory block (bytes); - PBA: Protocol allocated memory (bytes); - CARGA: Processor instantaneous load percent (0 - 100); - CCO: Originating Calls Controller (1 - 128); - CCE: Incoming Calls Controller (1 - 128).

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-357

EX-RESET: Reset Unit Processor

On-line Commands

EX-RESET: Reset Unit Processor


This command is used to reset an exchange unit processor.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
EX-RESET : { UNI = xx | BOARD = xx-xx } ;

Parameters

UNI
unit number (1..n):
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 2 16 76 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

BOARD
Board number on the uni-pos format: uni
2 16 76 A1 -

Unit number (1..n), where n is:


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

pos
5 23 A1

Unit position number (1..n), where n is:


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 E4 D4 001 001 001 001

3-358

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-ROBO: Create Line Tester Robot

On-line Commands

CR-ROBO: Create Line Tester Robot


This command is used to create a line tester robot in an exchange unit.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Input Format
CR-ROBO : BOARD= xx-xx [, UNI = xx&..&xx ] ;

Parameters

BOARD
Board number in the uni-pos format: uni terminal unit number (1..n)
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 16 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

brd

junction board number (21..22)

UNI
unit list switched with the line test robot (1..n)
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 16 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1. 2.

If parameter UNI was not specified, the line tester robot will be connected to all units created in the exchange. The above options for parameter UNI apply to board MTL 93081A. Board MTL 97086A can run tests on 08 (eight) units.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-359

IT-ROBO: Query Line Tester Robot

On-line Commands

IT-ROBO: Query Line Tester Robot


This command is used to query line tester robots created in the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-ROBO ;

Output Format

Board = xx-xx Board = xx-xx

Uni = x&x&x& Uni = x&x&x&

3-360

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

SU-ROBO: Suppress Line Tester Robot

On-line Commands

SU-ROBO: Suppress Line Tester Robot


This command is used to suppress a Line Tester Robot in the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Input Format
SU-ROBO : BOARD = xx-xx ;

Parameter

BOARD
Board number in the uni-pos format: uni
16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

brd

junction board number (21..22)

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-361

CR-ROUT: Create Route

On-line Commands

CR-ROUT: Create Route


This command is used to create a route.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
CR-ROUT : ROUT = xxxxx [, DPC = xxxxx , ] NAM = "xxxxxxxx" [, EXCPRE = xx] [, SSO = xxxxxx ,] [, TYP = PSPN | DID | IDID | SS7V5 ] [, KEY = [xxxx-]xxxx, CHT = xxxxxx ] [, RCL = x ] [, DGE = x] [, ANI = xx] [, OPP = xxxx&..&xxxx ] [,TAM = x] [, NAC = xxxx | NONC ] [,RSV = xxx] [, FRNM = x ] [, CSO = xxxxx ]; [, FDS = x ];

Parameters

ROUT
Route ID: E1..En incoming routes B1..Bn two-way routes S1..Sn outgoing routes
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 32 1024 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

DPC
Number of the adjacent signaling point code (0..16777216)

NAM
Route ID (up to 8 alphanumeric characters in quotes)

EXCPRE
Index of the prefix in the exchange table of prefixes (1..6). This table correlates this index with the exchange prefix number that should be used to complete the called subscriber number. This parameter can assume values from 1 to n, where n changes according to software version as the table below:
n SOF98119 SOF98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 2 50 A1 E1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SSO
Service requested for the route: VOI voice AUDIO data and voice communication U64K unrestricted 64 kbit/s

3-362

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-ROUT: Create Route

On-line Commands

TYP
Type of traffic on the route, where: DID IDID PSPN DID PABX ISDN DID PABX PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network)

For the versions of the control program SOF 98119F1, SOF 98158E1, LPN109253856.001, LPN109253864.001 or later, they have been also included the options: RTR RTL or SL ZSL SLM Signaling Type 1 (Ukraine and Russia) Signaling Type 2 (Ukraine and Russia) Signaling Type 3 (Ukraine and Russia) Rural to Rural (Ukraine and Russia) Rural to Local (Ukraine and Russia)

For SOF 98158A1, LPN109253864.001, LPN109256842.001 Control Program versions or higher, the option below was included: SS7V5 V5-ISUP Protocol Converter (ISUP route)

KEY
PABX group key subscriber directory number in the pre-sub format: pre exchange prefix ( 3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

CHT
Billing type identification: CHASUB charging by subscriber CHAKEY charging by key number

RCL
Route class (1..n) Compatibility:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 48 16 A1 D1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

DGE
Number of input digits (4..8)

ANI
A-Number Identification indicates the moment that A_number was sent. . ANI undefined: Not applicable parameter identification . ANI = 0: ANI after trunk allocation . ANI > 0 during dialing. The value informed indicates the number of digits should be received before of ANI REQUEST Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 F7 E7 001 001 001 001

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-363

CR-ROUT: Create Route

On-line Commands

OPP
Route operating parameters: TATE Indicates that the exchange should consider the answering pulse as first charging pulse in externally multi-metered calls. RAPU Indicates that the exchange should skip the first random charging pulse in externally multi-metered calls originating from payphones. REAN Indicates that timing should be applied by the exchange on answering and re-answering intraexchange calls with non-charged called subscribers and in outgoing calls on detecting end-of selection signal B5. FORD Indicates that the exchange should make a forced release of trunk for incoming calls when timeout has occurred during MF signaling exchange. MF5B Indicates that the exchange should convert MFC 5B to 5C register signaling in incoming calls over the route. NIDENT Indicates that the exchange should not send calling party ID when requested by the forward exchange. POUT Indicates that the exchange should give preference to outgoing calls when a trunk seizure collision occurs in two-way routes. STL To be specified for satellite routes using number 7 common channel signaling. SUPE To be specified for satellite routes requiring the insertion of echo semi-suppressors using number 7 common channel signaling CKP Indicates that the exchange should request the calling party ID and exchange register signaling with the forward exchange. NONC Indicates that the exchange should not send national originating code when applicable CNAC Indicates that the exchange must send a National Area Code, together with the origin subscriber identification, when queried by the forehead exchange. RCNAC Indicates that the switch sends the originating national code, together with the identity of the subscriber that transferred the call. (valid only for Argentine from software version LPN109253856.009 or higher and for all other countries from software version LPN109253856.011 or higher) VLENTA Indicates that the line signaling will be codified in the bit "A" of TS 16 in a rate of 500 kbit/s (SOF 98119D1, SGP 98092D1 or SOF 98158C1, LPN109253856.001, LPN109253864.001 or later). SEGTOM Second dial tone (valid only to incoming/bi-directional route, software version SOF98119F7, SOF98158E7, LPN109253856.001, LPN109253864.001 or higher) ANIREQ The a number identification is required on tandem calls. If OPP is defined, the call without ANI shall be finished (software version SOF98119F7, SOF98158E7, LPN109253856.001, LPN109253864.001 or higher). HCD Disable HOP COUNTER to specific route. On default configuration, the route has the HOP COUNTER parameter enabled (software version LPN 109253856.003 or higher). PSD Disable the Pass on of ISUP messages and parameters (Compatibility Procedure). On default configuration, the route has the Pass on procedure enabled. (software version LPN 109253856.003 or higher) DTMFANS Indicates that for incoming calls over the route, BZ5000 should send DTMF C tone back to originating exchange when called subscriber answers the call (only when the route is using number 7 common channel signaling). (software version LPN 109253856.004 or higher) SMFC SEMI-COMPELLED MULTI-FREQUENCY CODE SYGNALING. Indicates that the backward signals appear as pulses of 150ms duration. (software version LPN 109253856.004, LPN 109253864.004, LPN 109232249.003 or higher).

TAM
Trunk assignment method (1..4) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

NAC
National code (0000 to 9999) or NONC (no national code)

NONC

3-364

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-ROUT: Create Route

On-line Commands

Indicates that the exchange should not send national originating code when applicable.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-365

CR-ROUT: Create Route

On-line Commands

RSV
Percentage of reserved input trunks (0 ..100)

FRNM
MF signaling exchange noise rejection figure (0..7) 0 maximum noise rejection (Default) 7 minimum noise rejection

CSO
Carrier selection code (0..65534) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001

FDS
End of Selection Indication: Allow select the B5 signal conversion to another B group signal (B1 to B9) for DID routes

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4.

A route is created without trunks, which are included in the route by means of command CR-TRK. Parameter DGE only applies to incoming or two-way routes. If parameter DGE was omitted, the MFC signaling exchange will be considered beginning on receiving the called party prefix. If parameter DGE was specified, exchange EXCPRE =1 prefix will be added to the received digits to define the sequence to be consulted in the Outgoing Routing Plan in order to proceed with the call. Parameter RCL is compulsory for incoming or two-way routes. If parameter OPP was omitted, no operating parameter will apply to the route. Operating parameters RAPU, TATE, REAN and NIDENT only apply to outgoing or twoway routes. Operating parameters FORD and MF5B only apply to incoming or two-way routes. Parameters STL and SUPE only apply when the exchange is operating with common channel signaling. Programming parameter POUT for a two-way route is intended to set up a priority rule for trunk seizure, in order to avoid holding by simultaneous seizure. Operating parameter POUT only applies to two-way routes.

5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

3-366

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-ROUT: Create Route

On-line Commands

12.

Parameter TAM defines the trunk assignment procedure and can assume the following values: 1) 2) 3) 4) cyclical assignment trunk assignment in order of increasing CIC numbers trunk assignment in order of decreasing CIC numbers in this type of trunk assignment, exchanges maintaining the signaling relationship create two trunk groups: priority and non priority. The highest DPC numbered exchange control trunks with even CIC. The remaining trunks (odd) are controlled by the exchange with lowest DPC. The trunk group controlled by each exchange is the call priority group and the trunks not controlled are the non-priority group.

13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.

Within a priority group, assignment is based on increasing CIC. In a non-priority group, assignment is on a decreasing CIC basis. If parameter SSO is omitted, the programmed route trunks will be considered as SSO=VOI. To delete the national code, set NAC = NONC. Parameters CHT and KEY only apply to two-way or incoming routes. Command MD-ROUT cannot be applied for altering parameter TYP. Regarding the values of the TYP parameter, the value RTR (rural to rural) will be used to define the routes interfacing with the hierarchically lower side of the network; the value RTL (rural to local) will be used to define the routes interfacing with the hierarchically higher side of the network.

19.

The parameter TYP will have also three new values to indicate the supervision signaling types to be used (SL, ZSL, SLM):

20.

For V5-ISUP Protocol Converter, related to the ISUP route Creation, the TYP parameter shall be configured as SS7V5 and route shall be two-way.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-367

IT-ROUT: Query Route

On-line Commands

IT-ROUT: Query Route


This command is used to display exchange route parameters and trunks.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-ROUT [ : { ROUT = xxxxx | NTRK } ] ;

Parameters

ROUT
Route ID: E1..En incoming routes B1..Bn two-way routes S1..Sn outgoing routes
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 32 1024 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

NTRK
Indicates that route trunks will not display

Output Format

If parameter ROUT was specified, the selected route data are displayed in the following format:
ROUT = xxxxx [DPC=xxxxxxx]NAM=xxxxxxx [DGE=x][RCL=xx][TAM=x][RSV=xxx%][NAC=xxxx] TYP = xxxxxx OPP = xxxxx&..&xxxxx [FRNM = x ] [CSO = xxxxx] TRK = xx-xx-xx [CIC = xxxxx] SNL = xxx ACS = xxx STE = xxx . . . . . . . . . TRK = xx-xx-xx [CIC = xxxxx] SNL = xxx ACS = xxx STE = xxx

3-368

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-ROUT: Query Route

On-line Commands

If parameter ROUT was not displayed, the data of all routes created in the exchange are displayed in the following format:
ROUT = xxxxx [DPC=xxxxxxx]NAM =xxxxxxx [DGE=x][RCL=xx][TAM=x][RSV=xxx%][NAC=xxxx] TYP = xxxxxx OPP = xxxxx&..&xxxxx [FRNM = x ] [CSO = xxxxx] TRK = xx-xx-xx [CIC = xxxxx] SNL = xxx ACS = xxx STE = xxx . . . . . . . . . TRK = xx-xx-xx [CIC = xxxxx] SNL = xxx ACS = xxx STE = xxx ROUT = xxxxx [DPC=xxxxxxx]NAM =xxxxxxx [DGE=x][RCL=xx][TAM=x][RSV=xxx%][NAC=xxxx] TYP = xxxxxx OPP = xxxxx&..&xxxxx [FRNM = x ] [CSO = xxxxx] TRK = xx-xx-xx [CIC = xxxxx] SNL = xxx ACS = xxx STE = xxx . . . . . . . . . TRK = xx-xx-xx [CIC = xxxxx] SNL = xxx ACS = xxx STE = xxx

Remarks

1.

Trunk operating status: NCR BLK BLF BLE SRV BSY FAL RET NBD BPM BKD not created operator blocking failure blocking blocked by an external signal in service busy faulty retained no board blocked by MTP pause blocked for outgoing

2. 3.

A trunk will have operator blocking (BLK) operating status when blocked via command MD-TRKSTE. A trunk will have failed (FAL) operating status when the number of consecutive unsuccessful seizures (NCEO) or the percentage of unsuccessful seizures (MPEO) of the trunk exceeds the respective fault supervision threshold for the trunk route. The reason for the trunks being considered failed is displayed on the right of parameter STE, via mnemonics NCEO or MPEO. A trunk will have fault blocking (BLF) operating status when automatically blocked by the exchange supervision mechanism. A trunk will have external signal blocking (BLE) operating status when it receives an external blocking signal.

4. 5.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-369

IT-ROUT: Query Route

On-line Commands

6. 7.

A retained (RET) operating status applies when the trunk assigned to the link is waiting for a disconnection confirmation signal. Parameter DPC is only displayed for routes with TUP or ISUP signaling trunks.

3-370

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-ROUT: Modify Route

On-line Commands

MD-ROUT: Modify Route


This command is used for altering a route parameters.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-ROUT : ROUT = xxxxx [, NAM = "xxxxxxxx" ] [, SSO = xxxxxx ] [, RCL = x ] [, DGE = x ] [, ANI = xx] [, OPP = xxxxx&..&xxxxx ] [, TAM = x] [,NAC = xxxx | NONC] [, RSV = xxx] [, KEY = [xxxx-]xxxx] [, CHT = xxxxxx ] [, FRNM = x ] [, CSO = xxxxx ] ; [, FDS = x ] ;

Parameters

ROUT
Route ID: E1..En incoming routes B1..Bn two-way routes S1..Sn outgoing routes
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 32 1024 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

NAM
Route ID (up to 8 alphanumeric characters in quotes)

SSO
Service requested for the route: VOI voice AUDIO data and voice communication NRESTR unrestricted 64 kbit/s

RCL
Route class (1..n) Compatibility:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 48 16 A1 D1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

DGE
Number of input digits (4..8)

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-371

MD-ROUT: Modify Route

On-line Commands

ANI
A-Number Identification indicates the moment that A_number was sent. . ANI undefined: not applicable parameter identification . ANI = 0: ANI after trunk allocation . ANI > 0 during dialing. The value informed indicates the number of digits should be received before of ANI REQUEST Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 F7 E7 001 001 001 001

OPP
Route operating parameters: TATE Indicates that the exchange should consider the answering pulse as first charging pulse in externally multi-metered calls. RAPU Indicates that the exchange should skip the first random charging pulse in externally multi-metered calls originating from payphones. REAN Indicates that timing should be applied by the exchange on answering and re-answering intraexchange calls with non-charged called subscribers and in outgoing calls on detecting end-of selection signal B5. FORD Indicates that the exchange should make a forced release of trunk for incoming calls when timeout has occurred during MF signaling exchange. MF5B Indicates that the exchange should convert MFC 5B to 5C register signaling in incoming calls over the route. NIDENT Indicates that the exchange should not send calling party ID when requested by the forward exchange. POUT Indicates that the exchange should give preference to outgoing calls when a trunk seizure collision occurs in two-way routes. STL To be specified for satellite routes using number 7 common channel signaling. SUPE To be specified for satellite routes requiring the insertion of echo semi-suppressors using number 7 common channel signaling CKP Indicates that the exchange should request the calling party ID and exchange register signaling with the forward exchange. NONC Indicates that the exchange should not send national originating code when applicable CNAC Indicates that the exchange must send a National Area Code, together with the origin subscriber identification, when queried by the forehead exchange. RCNAC Indicates that the switch sends the originating national code, together with the identity of the subscriber that transferred the call. (valid only for Argentine from software version LPN109253856.009 or higher and for all other countries from software version LPN109253856.011 or higher) VLENTA Indicates that the line signaling will be codified in the bit "A" of TS 16 in a rate of 500 kbit/s (SOF 98119D1, SGP 98092D1 or SOF 98158C1, LPN109253856.001, LPN109253864.001 or later). SEGTOM Second dial tone (valid only to incoming/bi-directional route, software version SOF98119F7, SOF98158E7, LPN109253856.001, LPN109253864.001 or higher) ANIREQ The a number identification is required on tandem calls. If OPP is defined, the call without ANI shall be finished (software version SOF98119F7, SOF98158E7, LPN109253856.001, LPN109253864.001 or higher). HCD Disable HOP COUNTER to specific route. On default configuration, the route has the HOP COUNTER parameter enabled (software version LPN 109253856.003 or higher). PSD Disable the Pass on of ISUP messages and parameters (Compatibility Procedure). On default configuration, the route has the Pass on procedure enabled. (software version LPN 109253856.003 or higher) DTMFANS Indicates that for incoming calls over the route, BZ5000 should send DTMF C tone back to originating exchange when called subscriber answers the call (only when the route is using number 7 common channel signaling). (software version LPN 109253856.004 or higher) SMFC SEMI-COMPELLED MULTI-FREQUENCY CODE SYGNALING. Indicates that the backward signals appear as pulses of 150ms duration. (software version LPN 109253856.004, LPN 109253864.004, LPN 109232249.003 or higher).

3-372

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-ROUT: Modify Route

On-line Commands

TAM
Trunk assignment method (1..4) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

NAC
National code (0000 to 9999) or NONC (no national code)

NONC
Indicates that the exchange should not send national originating code when applicable.

RSV
Percentage of reserved input trunks (0 ..100)

KEY
PABX group key subscriber directory number in the pre-sub format: pre exchange prefix ( 3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

CHT
Billing type identification: CHASUB charging by subscriber CHAKEY charging by key number

FRNM
MF signaling exchange noise rejection figure (0..7) 0 maximum noise rejection (Default) 7 minimum noise rejection

CSO
Carrier selection code (0..65534) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001

FDS
End of Selection Indication: Allow select the B5 signal conversion to another B group signal (B1 to B9) for DID routes

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-373

MD-ROUT: Modify Route

On-line Commands

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

At least one optional parameter should be specified. Non-specified parameters are not altered. Parameters DGE and RCL are only valid for incoming or two-way routes. If parameter DGE was specified, exchange EXCPRE =1 prefix will be added to the received digits to define the sequence to be consulted in the Originating Routing Plan in order to proceed with the call. To suppress operating parameters programmed for a route, specify OPP = NOPP. Operating parameters RAPU, TATE, REAN and NIDENT only apply to outgoing or twoway routes. Operating parameters FORD e MF5B only apply to incoming or two-way routes. Programming parameter POUT for a two-way route is intended to set up a priority rule for trunk seizure, in order to avoid holding by simultaneous seizures. Operating parameter PSP only applies to two-way routes. Parameter TAM defines the trunk assignment procedure and can assume the following values: 1) cyclical assignment 2) trunk assignment according to increasing CIC numbers 3) trunk assignment according to decreasing CIC numbers 4) in this type of trunk assignment, exchanges maintaining the signaling relationship create two trunk groups: priority and non priority. The highest DPC numbered exchange control trunks with even CIC. The remaining trunks (odd) are controlled by the exchange with lowest DPC. The trunk group controlled by each exchange is the call priority group and the trunks not controlled are the non-priority group. In a priority group, the allocation is done on CIC ascending order. On a non priority group, the allocation is done on the descending order.

4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

10. 11.

Within a priority group, assignment is based on increasing CIC. In a non priority group, assignment is on a decreasing CIC basis To delete the national code, set NAC = NONC.

3-374

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

SU-ROUT: Suppress Route

On-line Commands

SU-ROUT: Suppress Route


This command is used to suppress a route.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
SU-ROUT : ROUT = xxxxx ;

Parameter

ROUT
Route ID: E1..En incoming routes B1..Bn two-way routes S1..Sn outgoing routes
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 32 1024 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1.

A route can only be suppressed when it does not have any created trunk.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-375

EX-RSTCTF: Clean Charging Counters

On-line Commands

EX-RSTCTF: Clean Charging Counters


This command is used to clean the charging counters that are not associated to a subscriber.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
EX-RSTCTF ;

Remarks

1.

The execution of this command will have to be confirmed by the user, through a message box.

3-376

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-RTOSUB: Query Subscriber Originating Restriction

On-line Commands

IT-RTOSUB: Query Subscriber Originating Restriction


This command is used to query the originating restriction of the subscribers that contain the Originating Call Controlled Restriction supplementary service.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-RTOSUB [ : SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx ];

Parameter

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

Output Format

If the parameter SUB is specified, the outgoing restriction of the selected subscriber will be displayed, on the following format:
SUB = xxxx-xxxx&..&xxxx-xxxx RTO = xx

If no parameters are specified, all the outgoing restrictions of the subscribers that contain the originating call controlled restriction will be displayed, on the following format::
SUB = xxxx-xxxx&..&xxxx-xxxx . . . . . . SUB = xxxx-xxxx&..&xxxx-xxxx RTO = xx

RTO = xx

Remarks

1.

The output format of the SUB parameter can be changed through the Options menu, Output Format submenu, on the CSR program main window.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-377

MD-RTOSUB: Modify Subscriber Originating Restriction

On-line Commands

MD-RTOSUB: Modify Subscriber Originating Restriction


This command is used to modify the originating restriction of the subscribers that contain the Originating Call Controlled Restriction supplementary service.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-RTOSUB : SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx, RTO = xx ;

Parameters

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

RTO
Originating restriction (1..16), where:
12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 16 unrestricted IDD IDD, DDD IDD, DDD, SPE1 IDD, DDD, SPE1, SPE2 IDD, DDD, SPE1, SPE2, SPE3 IDD, DDD, SPE1, SPE2, SPE3, SPE4 IDD, DDD, SPE1, SPE2, SPE3, SPE4, SPE5 IDD, DDD, SPE1, SPE2, SPE3, SPE4, SPE5, SPE6 IDD, DDD, SPE1, SPE2, SPE3, SPE4, SPE5, SPE6, SPE7 IDD, DDD, SPE1, SPE2, SPE3, SPE4, SPE5, SPE6, SPE7, SPE8, IDD, DDD, SPE1, SPE2, SPE3, SPE4, SPE5, SPE6, SPE7, SPE8, REG, IDD, DDD, SPE1, SPE2, SPE3, SPE4, SPE5, SPE6, SPE7, SPE8, REG, LOC, IDD, DDD, SPE1, SPE2, SPE3, SPE4, SPE5, SPE6, SPE7, SPE8, REG, LOC, INTRA IDD, DDD, SPE1, SPE2, SPE3, SPE4, SPE5, SPE6, SPE7, SPE8, REG, LOC, INTRA, ISS IDD, DDD, SPE1, SPE2, SPE3, SPE4, SPE5, SPE6,SPE7, SPE8, REG, LOC, INTRA, ISS, LSS

Remarks

1.

The specified subscriber shall be programmed with the Originating Call Controlled Restriction (BLCALL) supplementary service.

3-378

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-SCC: Query Subscriber Charging Counter

On-line Commands

IT-SCC: Query Subscriber Charging Counter


This command is used to display the value in the exchange subscriber charging counters. If a counter control unit is inactive, the value in the counter may be outdated. In this case, the date and time of the counter control unit outage are also displayed.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-SCC[ : { SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx | TER = xx-xx-xx | RMT = xx-xxxx | ROUT = xxxxx | KEY = [xxxx-]xxxx | EXCPRE = x } ] ;

Parameters

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

TER
Terminal number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni number of the terminal unit (1..n)
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 16 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

brd cir

terminal board number (1..21) board circuit number (1..32)

Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

RMT
Remote terminal number in the ps-pos format: ps number of Peripheral Stage (1..n)
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-379

IT-SCC: Query Subscriber Charging Counter

On-line Commands

16 64

A1 -

A1

001 -

001 -

001 -

pos subscriber position at AN (Access None) side via V5.1 or V5.2 interface

ROUT
Route ID: E1..En B1..Bn S1..Sn incoming routes two-way routes outgoing routes

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 32 1024 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

KEY
PABX group key subscriber directory number in the pre-sub format: pre exchange prefix ( 3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

EXCPRE
Index of the prefix in the exchange table of prefixes (1..6). This table correlates this index with the exchange prefix number that should be used to complete the called subscriber number. This parameter can assume values from 1 to n, where n changes according to software version as the table below:
n SOF98119 SOF98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 2 50 A1 E1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

Output Format

If the SUB parameter is specified, the value in the selected subscriber charging counter is displayed in the following format:
SUB = xxxx-xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx SCC = xxxxxxxx

If the subscriber consists of a DID extension connected to the exchange, its directory number, route number and charging counter will be displayed as follows:
SUB = xxxx-xxxx ROUT = xxxxx SCC = xxxxxxxx

If the TER parameter is specified, the value in the charging counter assigned to the selected terminal will be displayed, even if there is no subscriber number assigned to the terminal, in the following format:
SUB = xxxx-xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx SCC = xxxxxxxx

If the KEY parameter is specified, the values in the charging counters of all selected PABX group subscribers will be displayed in the following format:
KEY = xxxx SUB = xxxx-xxxx . . TER = xx-xx-xx SCC = xxxxxxxx . . . .

3-380

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-SCC: Query Subscriber Charging Counter

On-line Commands

. SUB = xxxx-xxxx

. . TER = xx-xx-xx SCC = xxxxxxxx

If the KEY parameter matches a key DID route number, the values in the charging counters of all DID extensions will be displayed in the following format:
KEY = xxxx SUB = xxxx-xxxx . . . SUB = xxxx-xxxx ROUT = xxxxx . . . ROUT = xxxxx SCC = xxxxxxxx . . . SCC = xxxxxxxx

If no parameter is specified, the values in the charging counters of all subscribers created in the exchange will be displayed in the following format:
SUB = xxxx-xxxx . . . SUB = xxxx-xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx . . . TER = xx-xx-xx SCC = xxxxxx . . . SCC = xxxxxx

The date and time of a control unit outage are displayed on the right of the counter value in the following format:
DAT = xx-xx-xx HOU = xx:xx:xx

Remarks

1. 2.

The output format of the SUB parameter can be changed through the Options menu, Output Format submenu, on the CSR program main window. The TER parameter is not valid for exchanges with LPN109232249 and LPN109256842 Control Program.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-381

REP-SCC: Store Subscriber Charging Counters

On-line Commands

REP-SCC: Store Subscriber Charging Counters


This command is used to write files containing the exchange subscriber charging counter.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
REP-SCC ;

Output Format
ENV = CS ENV = PS1 . . ENV = PS16 xxxx xx...xx xx...xx

The format of the charging counter file is described in the Operating Manual of the exchange.
Remarks

1.

Charging counters are written to file MMDDHOMI.SCC, where: MMDD month and day of writing the file; HOMI hour and minute of writing the file.

2. 3. 4. 5.

The charging file is stored in the exchange directory, specified by parameter PATH of command CR-EXC (Create Exchange in the Exchange Registry) The charging counter report file is prepared by means of program REP-SCC, described in the Operating Manual of the exchange. The Operating Manual of the exchange provides charging counter report of a hypothetical BZ5000 exchange. The output format shows the collected environment an respective response. In the event of any error in the CS-to-PS communication the file will be stored without collected data from the faulty PS.

3-382

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

AT-SEQSCR: Activate the CLI Screening

On-line Commands

AT-SEQSCR: Activate the CLI Screening


This command is used to activate the CLI Screening in the BZ5000.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 002 001 -

Input Format
AT-SEQSCR ;

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-383

DS-SEQSCR: Deactivate the CLI Screening

On-line Commands

DS-SEQSCR: Deactivate the CLI Screening


This command is used to deactivate the CLI Screening in the BZ5000.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 002 001 -

Input Format
DS-SEQSCR ;

3-384

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IP-SEQSCR: Display the Programmed Sequences in the CLI Screening

On-line Commands

IP-SEQSCR: Display the Programmed Sequences in the CLI Screening


This command is used to display the programmed sequences in the CLI Screening in the BZ5000.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 002 001 -

Input Format
IP-SEQSCR : [ SEQ = xxxxxxxxxx ];

Parameter

SEQ
This sequence is the CLI number and allows up to 10 digits. Partial sequences can also be programmed .

Output Format
SEQ = xxxxxxxxxx . . . xxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx . . . xxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx . . . xxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx . . . xxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx . . . xxxxxxxxxx

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-385

IT-SEQSCR: Display the CLI Screening Attributes

On-line Commands

IT-SEQSCR: Display the CLI Screening Attributes


This command is used to display the CLI Screening attributes in the BZ5000.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 002 001 -

Input Format
IT-SEQSCR ;

Output Format
TYP = xxxx NumOccup = xxxx ROUT = xxx&..&xxx NumAvail = xxxx Filter active|Filter inactive

3-386

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-SEQSCR: Modify the CLI Screening Attributes

On-line Commands

MD-SEQSCR: Modify the CLI Screening Attributes


This command is used to modify the CLI Screening attributes in the BZ5000.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 002 001 -

Input Format
MD-SEQSCR : { INI | TYP = xxxx | ROUT = xxx&..&xxx | TYP = xxxx, ROUT = xxx&..&xxx } ;

Parameters

INI
The INI parameter is used to initialize all CLI Screening attributes default value.

TYP
REST PERM restrict list permission list

The default value is the REST type. Note.: The type list can be changed only if the CLI Screening wouldn't have any programmed sequence.

ROUT
This parameter configures the routes that will be allowed for the CLI Screening. The default values are all enabled outgoing and bi-directional routes in the switch: S1&..&S1024 B1&..&B1024.

Remarks

1. 2.

The default value of the parameter TYP is REST. The INI parameter is used to initialize all CLI Screening attributes default value.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-387

PR-SEQSCR: Program the CLI Screening Sequences

On-line Commands

PR-SEQSCR: Program the CLI Screening Sequences


This command is used to program the CLI Screening sequences in the BZ5000.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 002 001 -

Input Format
PR-SEQSCR : SEQ = xxxxxxxxxx

Parameter

SEQ
This sequence is the CLI number and allows up to 10 digits. Partial sequences can also be programmed .

Remarks

1.

The CLI Screening doesn't allow sequences with the same analysis of digits.

3-388

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

RP-SEQSCR: Remove the Programmed Sequences from the CLI Screening

On-line Commands

RP-SEQSCR: Remove the Programmed Sequences from the CLI Screening


This command is used to Remove the Programmed Sequences from the CLI Screening in the BZ5000.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 002 001 -

Input Format
RP-SEQSCR : SEQ = xxxxxxxxxx

Parameter

SEQ
This sequence is the CLI number and allows up to 10 digits. Partial sequences can also be programmed .

Remarks

1.

The SEQ parameter typed must match the exact sequence, otherwise the requested sequence wont be removed from CLI Screening database.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-389

IT-SLIDTR: Query Digital Trunk Slippage Rate

On-line Commands

IT-SLIDTR: Query Digital Trunk Slippage Rate


This command is used to query the slippage rate during the current hour, the last hour and over the last 24 hours.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-SLIDTR [ : BOARD = xx-xx [, TRUNK = xx ] ] ;

Parameter

BOARD
Board number in the uni-brd format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..16)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd
n 01..05 17..20 01..20 01..19 A1 B1 D1

trunk board number


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

TRUNK
Trunk number (1 n), where n can be:
n SOF98119 SOF98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 16 20 F1 E1 001 001 001 001 001 001

3-390

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-SLIDTR: Query Digital Trunk Slippage Rate

On-line Commands

Output Format
If the BOARD and TRKINT parameters are specified, the slippage data of the selected digital trunk board, considering the trunk specified, will be displayed in the following format:
Board = xx-xx Trunk = x Current hour = xxxxxx Last hour = xxxxxx Last 24 hours = xxxxxx

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-391

IT-SLIDTR: Query Digital Trunk Slippage Rate

On-line Commands

If the BOARD parameter is specified, only the slippage data of the specified digital trunk boards will be displayed, considering all trunks, in the following format:
Board = xx-xx Trunk = . . . Board = xx-xx Trunk = x Current hour . . . x Current hour = xxxxxx . . . = xxxxxx Last hour = xxxxxx Last 24 hours = xxxxxx . . . . . . Last hour = xxxxxx Last 24 hours = xxxxxx

If the BOARD parameter is not specified, slippage data of all digital trunk boards created in the exchange will be displayed in the following format:
Board = xx-xx Trunk = x Current hour = xxxxxx

. . .

. . .

. . .

Last hour = xxxxxx

. . .

. . .

Last 24 hours = xxxxxx

Board = xx-xx Trunk = x Current hour = xxxxxx

Last hour = xxxxxx

Last 24 hours = xxxxxx

Remarks

1. 2.

If any parameter is specified, the command shows all trunks of the exchange. If the parameter TRUNK is specified, the parameter BOARD becomes mandatory.

3-392

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-SNLISUP: Query ISUP Signaling

On-line Commands

IT-SNLISUP: Query ISUP Signaling


This command is used to display the parameters configured to the messages used in the ISUP signaling.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-SNLISUP : [ MSG = xxxx ] ;

Parameter

MSG Type of message used in the ISUP signaling:


ACM ANM BLA BLO CCR CFN BGC BGC CGU CGUA CON COT CPG CRG CQM CQR DRS FAA FAC FAR FOT FRJ Address complete Answer Blocking acknowledgement Blocking Continuity check request Confusion Circuit group blocking Circuit group blocking acknowledgement Circuit group unblocking Circuit group unblocking acknowledgement Connect Continuity Call progress Charge information Circuit group query Circuit group query response Delayed release Facility accepted Facility Facility request Forward transfer Facility reject GRS IAM IDR IRS INF INR LPA NRM OLM PAM REL RES RLC RSC SAM SGM SUS UBL UBA UCIC UPA UPT Circuit group reset Initial address Identification request Identification response Information Information request Loop back acknowledgment Network resource management Overload Pass along Release Resume Release complete Reset circuit Subsequent address Segmentation Suspend Unblocking Unblocking acknowledgement Unequipped circuit identification code User part available User part test

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-393

IT-SNLISUP: Query ISUP Signaling

On-line Commands

GRA

Circuit group reset acknowledgement

USR

User-to-user information

From SOF98119G1 or LPN109253856.001: CCL Clear Calling Line RNG Ringing Message

3-394

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-SNLISUP: Query ISUP Signaling

On-line Commands

Output Format

If parameter MSG was specified, all the parameters configured to the selected message are displayed in the following format:
MSG = xxxx PARAM = xx&..&xx&..&xx

If parameter MSG was not specified, all the messages and your respective configured parameters are displayed in the following format:
MSG = xxxx
. . . .

. .

PARAM = xx&..&xx&..&xx
. . . .

MSG = xxxx

PARAM = xx&..&xx&..&xx

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-395

MD-SNLISUP: Modify ISUP Signaling

On-line Commands

MD-SNLISUP: Modify ISUP Signaling


This command is used to configure the parameters of the messages used in the ISUP signaling.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-SNLISUP : { MSG = xxxx, PARAM = xx&..&xx&..&xx | INI } ;

Parameters

MSG Type of message used in the ISUP signaling:


ACM ANM BLA BLO CCR CFN BGC BGC CGU CGUA CON COT CPG CRG CQM CQR DRS FAA FAC FAR FOT Address complete Answer Blocking acknowledgement Blocking Continuity check request Confusion Circuit group blocking Circuit group blocking acknowledgement Circuit group unblocking Circuit group unblocking acknowledgement Connect Continuity Call progress Charge information Circuit group query Circuit group query response Delayed release Facility accepted Facility Facility request Forward transfer GRS IAM IDR IRS INF INR LPA NRM OLM PAM REL RES RLC RSC SAM SGM SUS UBL UBA UCIC UPA Circuit group reset Initial address Identification request Identification response Information Information request Loop back acknowledgment Network resource management Overload Pass along Release Resume Release complete Reset circuit Subsequent address Segmentation Suspend Unblocking Unblocking acknowledgement Unequipped circuit identification code User part available

3-396

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-SNLISUP: Modify ISUP Signaling

On-line Commands

FRJ GRA

Facility reject Circuit group reset acknowledgement

UPT USR

User part test User-to-user information

From SOF98119G1 or LPN109253856.001: CCL Clear Calling Line RNG Ringing Message

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-397

MD-SNLISUP: Modify ISUP Signaling

On-line Commands

PARAM
Parameters of the messages used in the ISUP signaling:
NPARAM ADINFO AT ACL BCI CDI CHI CALLREF CDPNUM CGPNUM CGPCAT CSI CI CGSMTI CUGIC CN CR CONTI ECI OPS EI FI FCI FPI GD GNOTE GN RE HC II No parameter defined Access delivery information Access transport Automatic congestion level Backward call indicators Call diversion information Call history information Call reference Called party number Calling party number Calling party's category Circuit state indicator Cause indicators Circuit group supervision message type indicator Closed user group interlock code Connected number Connection request Continuity indicators Echo control information End of optional parameters Event information Facility indicator Forward call indicators Free phone indicators (reserved) Generic digits Generic notification Generic number Generic reference (reserved) Hop counter Information indicators IRI LN MCDIRQI MCDIRPI MCI MLPPP NCI NSF OBCI OFCI OCN OISCPC PCI PDC RS RN RI REDIRN RNR RO SA SPC SN SRI TNS TMR TMRP USI UUI UUINFO Information request indicators Location number MCID request indicator MCID response indicator Message compatibility information MLPP precedence Nature of connection indicators Network specific facilities Optional backward call indicators Optional forward call indicators Original called number Origination ISC point code Parameter compatibility information Propagation delay counter Range and status Redirecting number Redirection information Redirection number Redirection number restriction Remote operations Service activation Signaling point code Subsequent number Suspend/Resume indicators Transit network selection Transmission medium requirement Transmission medium requirement prime User Service Information User-to-user Indicators User-to-user Information

From LPN109253856.005 and LPN109232249.004 or higher: NFCI National Forward Call Indicator

INI
Put the ISUP signaling parameters in their default values.

3-398

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-SNLR2: Query R2 Signaling

On-line Commands

IT-SNLR2: Query R2 Signaling


This command is used to display the meaning of multifrequency signals used for inter-register signaling.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-SNLR2;

Output Format
Group A: SND = xx SA1 = xx AIS = xx SE1 = xx SIT = xx LOC = xx LWC = xx SA1C = xx BGR SAC SE2 SIR LNC FRC GRC = = = = = = = xx xx xx xx xx xx xx AGC = xx SE0 = xx SE3 = xx ESS = xx BGC = xx LVC = xx SAIC = xx

ISC = xx LOS = xx

Group B: Group C:

ISL = xx SCGD = xx

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-399

MD-SNLR2: Modify R2 Signaling

On-line Commands

MD-SNLR2: Modify R2 Signaling


This command is used to change the meaning of multifrequency signals used for inter-register signaling
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-SNLR2 : { [, SND = xx, ] [ SA1 = xx, ] [ BGR = xx, ] [ AGC = xx, ] [ AIS = xx, ] [ SAC = xx, ] [ SE0 = xx, ] [ SE1 = xx, ] [ SE2 = xx, ] [ SE3 = xx, ] [ SIT = xx, ] [ SIR = xx, ] [ ESS = xx, ] [ ISC = xx, ] [ ISL = xx, ] [ SBL = xx, ] [ LNC = xx, ] [ BGC = xx, ] [ LWC = xx, ] [ FRC = xx, ] [ LVC = xx, ] [ LOS = xx, ] [ SCGD = xx, ] [ SA1C = xx, ] [ SAIC = xx, ] [ CGC = xx ] | [ INI ] } ;

Parameters

SND
Request sending next digit

SA1
Request sending first digit or informing need for echo suppressor at destination

BGR
Transfer to B-group signals

AGC
A-group signal informing congestion

AIS
Request sending calling party ID

SAC
Request sending category subscriber A Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 001 001 001

3-400

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-SNLR2: Modify R2 Signaling

On-line Commands

SE0
Request sending digit n-0 (1..15) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 F7 E7 001 001 001 001

SE1
Request sending digit n-1

SE2
Request sending digit n-2

SE3
Request sending digit n-3

SIT
Request sending international transit exchange indication

SIR
Request sending originating international register indication

ESS
Request information on need for inserting echo semi-suppressor at destination

ISC
Congestion at international exchange

ISL
Idle subscriber line, with charging

SLB
Subscriber line busy

LNC
Changed number subscriber line

BGC
B-group signal informing congestion

LWC
Idle subscriber line, no charging

FRC
Idle subscriber, with charging, under called subscriber holding control

LVC
Vacant level or number

LOS
Out of service line

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-401

MD-SNLR2: Modify R2 Signaling

On-line Commands

SCGD
Request sending next digit for group C Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

SA1C
Request sending first digit or informing need for echo suppressor at destination of group C Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001

SAIC
Request sending group C ID Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

CGC
C-group signal informing congestion

INI
Put the R2 signaling parameters in their default values.

3-402

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-SPEDIG: Interrogate Special Digits of the Virtual PBX

On-line Commands

IT-SPEDIG: Interrogate Special Digits of the Virtual PBX


This command is used to exhibit the digits that will be dialed by the subscriber using the Virtual PBX features.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-SPEDIG ;

Output Format
CHEX = x TEL = x CONF = x TRF = x VVEM = x VLIB = x RSV INT = x = x

Remarks

1.

Meaning of the parameters:


CHEX CONF VVEM RSV TEL TRF VLIB INT External call feature digit Conference feature digit Toggle feature digit (vai-vem) Reserve feature digit Attendant feature digit Transference feature digit Toggle-Release feature digit Intercall feature digit

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-403

MD-SPEDIG: Modify Special Digits of the Virtual PABX

On-line Commands

MD-SPEDIG: Modify Special Digits of the Virtual PABX


This command is used to configure the digits that will be dialed by the subscriber using the features of the Virtual PBX.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-SPEDIG : { [ CHEX = x ] [, TEL = x ] [, VVEM = x ] [, VLIB = x ] [, CONF = x ] [, TRF = x ] [, RSV = x ] [, INT = x ] } ;

Parameters

CHEX
External call feature digit (0..9) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 001 001 001

TEL
Attendant feature digit (0..9) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 -

VVEM
Toggle feature digit (0..9) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 -

VLIB
Toggle-Release feature digit (0..9) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 -

CONF
Conference feature digit (0..n) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

3-404

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-SPEDIG: Modify Special Digits of the Virtual PABX

On-line Commands

D1

C1

001

001

001

001

001

001

TRF
Transference feature digit (0..9) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 -

RSV
Reserve feature digit (0..9)
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 001 001 001

INT
Intercall feature digit (0..9) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1.

The initial values of the parameters are: CHEX = 0 TEL = 9 VVEM = 2 VLIB = 1 CONF = 3 TRF = 4 RSV = 1 INT = 2

2.

For the versions of the control program SOF 98119F1, SOF 98158E1, LPN109253856.001, LPN109253864.001 or later, in order to make a long distance call in Ukraine, the set of commands required are: MD-CTRY CTRY = UA MD-SPEDIG CHEX = 8; MD-EXCOPP OPP = SEGTOM;

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-405

IP-SPS: Query Semi-Permanent Switching Programming

On-line Commands

IP-SPS: Query Semi-Permanent Switching Programming


This command is used to display semi-permanent switching programmed in the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IP-SPS [ : SPS = xx ] ;

Parameter

SPS
Semi-permanent switching number (1..250)

Output Format

If the SPS parameter is specified, all parties of the selected semi-permanent switching will be displayed in the following format:
SPS = xx TER = xx-xx-xx TER = xx-xx-xx

or
SPS = xx TER = xx-xx-xx TRK = xx-xx-xx

or
SPS = xx TRK = xx-xx-xx TRK = xx-xx-xx

or
SPS = xx TRK = xx-xx-xx IBT = xx-xx TYP = xxx

or
SPS = xx TRK = xx-xx-xx MPSB

If the SPS parameter is not specified, all semi-permanent switching programmed in the exchange will be displayed in the following format:
SPS = xx TER = xx-xx-xx TER = xx-xx-xx

. . .
SPS = xx SPS = xx

. . .
TRK = xx-xx-xx TRK = xx-xx-xx

. . .
TRK = xx-xx-xx IBT = xx-xx TYP = xxx

3-406

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

PR-SPS: Program Semi-Permanent Switching

On-line Commands

PR-SPS: Program Semi-Permanent Switching


This command is used to program semi permanent switching between two terminals, a terminal and a trunk, two trunks a trunk and a common channel signaling data link terminal and a trunk and the MPSB board modem channel.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
PR-SPS : SPS = xx, {TER1 = xx-xx-xx, TER2 = xx-xx-xx | TER1 = xx-xx-xx, TRK1 = xx-xx-xx | TER1 = xx-xx-xx, RMT1 = xx-xxxx | TER1 = xx-xx-xx, IBT = xx-xx | TRK1 = xx-xx-xx, TRK2 = xx-xx-xx | TRK1 = xx-xx-xx, RMT1 = xx-xxxx | TRK1 = xx-xx-xx, IBT = xx-xx | TRK1= xx-xx-xx, MPSB | RMT1 = xx-xxxx, RMT2 = xx-xxxx } ;

Parameters

SPS
Semi-permanent switching number (1..250)

TER
Terminal number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
16 64 A1 -

number of the terminal unit (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

brd cir

terminal board number (1..21) board circuit number (1..32)

Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-407

PR-SPS: Program Semi-Permanent Switching

On-line Commands

TRK
Trunk number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni terminal unit number (1..n)
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 2 16 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

brd
13..20 01..20 01..19 01..05 A1 B1 D1 -

trunk board number


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir
31 512 A1 -

board circuit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

RMT
Remote terminal number in the ps-pos format: ps number of Peripheral Stage (1..n)
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 16 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 -

pos

subscriber position at AN (Access None) side via V5.1 or V5.2 interface

IBT
Identification of the interface between the data link terminal and the trunk in uni-brd: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd
01 .. 05 17 .. 20 01 .. 20 01 .. 19 A1 B1 D1

board number
A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

3-408

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

PR-SPS: Program Semi-Permanent Switching

On-line Commands

MPSB
Specifies the use of the modem channel on board MPSB. This parameter is not valid for exchanges with LPN109232249 and LPN109256842 Control Programs.

Remarks

1.

The TER1, TER2, IBT and MPSB parameters are not valid for exchanges with the LPN109232249 and LPN109256842 Control Program.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-409

RP-SPS: Erase Semi-Permanent Switching Programming

On-line Commands

RP-SPS: Erase Semi-Permanent Switching Programming


This command is used to erase semi-permanent switching programming from the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
RP-SPS : SPS = xx ;

Parameter

SPS
Semi-permanent switching number (1..250)

3-410

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-SRV: Query Supplementary Services Access Code

On-line Commands

IT-SRV: Query Supplementary Services Access Code

This command is used to query the access code through the keyboard to the supplementary services.

Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-SRV : [ SRV = xxxxx ] ;

Parameter

SRV
Supplementary services:
MODPAS CAPCHM CAWAIT REGCAL DESCHM ALARCLK ABDIAL ESCMSG FIMMSG GRAMSG INIMSG EXELIN DNDIS RTRFFNR RTRFOCP RTRFTMP SENBLQ MODPAS modify password call capture call waiting recorded call park call alarm call service abbreviated dialing listen message end message changing session message recording start message changing session timed hotline do not disturb remove call diversion on no reply remove call diversion on busy remove call diversion immediate originating call barring password Modify password (it substitutes argument "SENBLQ" valid for exchanges with LPN109253856.004, LPN109253864.004, LPN109232249.003 or higher.) SRVNOT TRFNA TRFBSY TMPTRF nocturne service call diversion on no reply call diversion on busy call diversion immediate

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-411

IT-SRV: Query Supplementary Services Access Code

On-line Commands

ABSENT

Absent subscriber (valid for exchanges with LPN109253856.003, LPN109253864.003, LPN109232249.002 or higher.).

Output Format

If parameter SRV was specified, the code used by the requested supplementary service is displayed in the following format:
SRV = xxxxx COD = xxxx

If parameter SRV was not specified, all the supplementary services and your respective codes are displayed in the following format:
SRV = xxxxx COD = xxxx . . . . . . SRV = xxxxx COD = xxxx

3-412

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-SRV: Modify Supplementary Services Access Code

On-line Commands

MD-SRV: Modify Supplementary Services Access Code

This command is used to modify the access code through the keyboard to the supplementary services.

Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-SRV : SRV = xxxxx, COD = xxxx ;

Parameters

SRV
Supplementary services:
BLCALLS CAPCHM CAWAIT REGCAL DESCHM ALARCLK ABDIAL ESCMSG FIMMSG GRAMSG INIMSG EXELIN DNDIS RTRFFNR RTRFOCP RTRFTMP SENBLQ MODPAS originating call barring call capture call waiting recorded call park call alarm call service abbreviated dialing listen message end message changing session message recording start message changing session timed hotline do not disturb remove call diversion on no reply remove call diversion on busy remove call diversion immediate originating call barring password Modify password (it substitutes argument "SENBLQ" valid for exchanges with LPN109253856.004, LPN109253864.004, LPN109232249.003 or higher.) SRVNOT TRFNA TRFBSY nocturne service call diversion on no reply call diversion on busy

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-413

MD-SRV: Modify Supplementary Services Access Code

On-line Commands

TMPTRF ABSENT

call diversion immediate Absent subscriber (valid for exchanges with LPN109253856.003, LPN109253864.003, LPN109232249.002 or higher.).

COD
Programmable Code to the supplementary services (10..99)

3-414

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-SS7LNK: Create Common Channel Signaling Link

On-line Commands

CR-SS7LNK: Create Common Channel Signaling Link


This command allows logical creating Common Channel Signaling links.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
CR-SS7LNK : LNK = xx, [ BOARD = xx-xx ], IBT = xx-xx, TRK = xx-xx-xx, SLS = x, SLC = xx ;

Parameters

LNK
Signaling link number (1..n) Compatibility:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 8 16 A1 E4 A1 D4 001 001 001 001 001 001

BOARD
Signaling data link number terminal ID in format uni-brd: uni
16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

brd

board number (1..3)

IBT
Identification of the interface between the data link terminal and the trunk in uni-brd: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

brd

board number

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-415

CR-SS7LNK: Create Common Channel Signaling Link

On-line Commands

01 .. 05 17 .. 20 01 .. 20 01 .. 19

A1 B1 D1

A1 -

001 -

001 -

001

001 -

001

001 -

TRK
Trunk number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni terminal unit number (1..n)
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 2 16 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

brd
13..20 01..20 01..19 01..05 A1 B1 D1 -

trunk board number


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir
31 512 A1 -

board circuit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

SLS
Signaling link set number (1..8) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

SLC
Signaling link ID number (0..15)

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

The signaling link set should be created beforehand and held in the deactivated status. Parameter IBT defines the interface between the signaling data terminal and the JDL board. This interface is on JDL board. A trunk position on JDL board should be specified for parameter TRK. The unit defined in parameter BOARD should be reset after running the command. Parameter BOARD should only be defined when the exchange is not fitted with a JTS board. In this case, the signaling terminal is allocated from the CPU signaling terminal board.
Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page 109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

3-416

IT-SS7LNK: Query Common Channel Signaling Link

On-line Commands

IT-SS7LNK: Query Common Channel Signaling Link


This command allows querying the status and operating parameters of Common Channel Signaling links.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-SS7LNK [ : [ LNK = xx ] | [, OPP ] ];

Parameters

LNK
Signaling link number (1..n) Compatibility:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 8 16 A1 E4 A1 D4 001 001 001 001 001 001

OPP
Signaling link set operating parameter UNII Inactive Unit

Output Format

If optional operating parameter OPP was specified, the signaling link operating parameter will be displayed.
LNK = xx BOARD STA= xxx MCE = xxx T1 = xxxxx T4E = xxxxx ERMAL = xxx . . . LNK = xx BOARD STA= xxx MCE = xxx T1 = xxxxx T4E = xxxxx ERMAL = xxx = xx-xx LIC = xxx LPV = xxx T2 = xxxxx T5 = xxxxx ERNAL = xxx IBT = xx-xx CIR = xxx MSPK = xxx T3 = xxxxx T6 = xxxxx SUERMT = xxx TRK = xx-xx OPS= xxxx SLS = x [BPR] SLC = xx

T4N = xxxxx T7 = xxxxx SUERME = xxxxx

= xx-xx IBT = LIC = xxx LPV = xxx T2 = xxxxx T5 = xxxxx ERNAL = xxx

xx-xx TRK = CIR = xxx MSPK = xxx T3 = xxxxx T6 = xxxxx SUERMT = xxx

xx-xx SLS = x SLC = xx OPS= xxxx [BPR] T4N = xxxxx T7 = xxxxx SUERME = xxxxx

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-417

IT-SS7LNK: Query Common Channel Signaling Link

On-line Commands

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Parameter MCE selects the error correcting method: basic or preventive cyclic. The initial setting is basic. Parameter LPV selects the number of errors accepted during signaling link testing. The initial setting is 5. Parameter SUERMT defines the maximum value for counter SUERM before triggering a signaling link fault indication.. The initial setting is 64. Parameter SUERME defines the minimum number of packets between errors. It should be given as a negative value. The initial setting is -256. Parameter ERMAL defines the maximum number of errors during emergency alignment. The initial setting is 1. Parameter ERNAL defines the maximum number of errors during emergency alignment. The initial setting is 4. MSPK defines the maximum packet length before stabilizing octets. The initial setting is 280. Parameter CIR defines the signaling link remote inhibition condition (NIN/INH). If parameter BPR is displayed, the remote processor is blocked, i.e., in an inaccessible remote processor condition. Operating Status (OPS) parameter indicates the status of the V5 signaling link on running command IT-SS7LNK; OPS may assume the following status: ITV inactive ATV active IATV running activation FAI failed UNII inactive unit STB standby

3-418

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-SS7LNK: Modify Common Channel Signaling Link Status

On-line Commands

MD-SS7LNK: Modify Common Channel Signaling Link Status


This command allows modifying the activation status or operating parameters of Common Channel Signaling links.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-SS7LNK : LNK= xx { { STA = xxx | , LIC = xxx } | [ [, MCE = xxx ] [, T1 = xxxxx ] [, T2 = xxxxx ] [, T3 = xxxxx ] [,T4N = xxxxx ] [,T4E = xxxxx ] [,T5 = xxxxx ] [,T6 = xxxxx ] [,T7 = xxxxx ] [,LPV = xxx ] [, EMA = x] [, SUERMT = xxx ] [, SUERME = xxxxx ] [, ERMAL = xxx ] [, ERNAL = xxx ][, MSPK = xxx ] ] } ;

Parameters

LNK
Signaling link number (1..n) Compatibility:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 8 16 A1 E4 A1 D4 001 001 001 001 001 001

STA
Signaling Link operating Status ATV Active ITV Inactive

LIC
Local inhibition condition NIN Uninhibited INH Inhibited Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

MCE
Error correction method, where: BEC basic error correction method

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-419

MD-SS7LNK: Modify Common Channel Signaling Link Status

On-line Commands

PCR

preventive cyclic retransmission method

T1
Ready link alignment time-outs (40..50 s).

T2
Unaligned link time-outs (5..50 s).

T3
Aligned link time-outs (1..2 s)

T4N
Normal testing time-outs (7,5..9,5 s)

T4E
Emergency testing time-outs (400..600 ms)

T5
Busy sender time-outs (80..120 ms)

T6
Excessive seizure time-outs (3..6 s)

T7
Excessive acknowledgement waiting time-outs (0,5..2 s)

LPV
Number of acceptable errors during testing (1..255)

EMA
Signaling link emergency alignment: 0 inactive 1 active

SUERMT
SUERM threshold (1..255)

SUERME
SUERM error rate(1..65535)

ERMAL
Emergency alignment error rate (AERM) (1..255)

ERNAL
Normal alignment error rate (AERM) (1..255)

MSPK
Maximum packet length (1..510)

3-420

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-SS7LNK: Modify Common Channel Signaling Link Status

On-line Commands

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Parameter MCE selects the error correction method: basic or preventive cyclic. The initial setting is basic. Parameter LPV selects the number of errors accepted during signaling link testing. The initial setting is 5. Parameter SUERMT defines the maximum value for counter SUERM before triggering signaling link fault indication.. The initial setting is 64. Parameter SUERME defines the minimum number of packets between errors. It should be a negative value. The initial setting is -256. Parameter ERMAL defines the maximum number of errors during emergency alignment. The initial setting is 1. Parameter ERNAL defines the maximum number of errors during emergency alignment. The initial setting is 4. MSPK defines the maximum packet length before stabilizing octets. The initial setting is 280. The initial timing settings are: T1 = 9000 (45s) T2 = 9000 (45s) T3 = 250 (1.25s) T4N = 1640 (8.2s) T4E = 100 (500 ms) T5 = 20 (100 ms) T6 = 900 (4.5s) T7 = 400 (2s)

9. 10.

The adopted timing unit is 5 ms. Alterations made via this command will only apply after resetting the signaling link.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-421

SU-SS7LNK: Suppress Common Channel Signaling Link

On-line Commands

SU-SS7LNK: Suppress Common Channel Signaling Link


This command allows suppressing a Common Channel Signaling link.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
SU-SS7LNK : LNK = xx, SLS = x ;

Parameters

LNK
Signaling link number (1..n) Compatibility:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 8 16 A1 E4 A1 D4 001 001 001 001 001 001

SLS
Signaling link set number (1..8) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4.

A signaling link can only be suppressed in ITV operating status. If the signaling link set contains an active link, this link cannot be suppressed. The signaling link set assigned to the signaling link should be deactivated (ITV operating status). If the last signaling link of a signaling set is suppressed, this set cannot be assigned to a signaling route

3-422

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-SS7ROUT: Query Common Channel Signaling System Route

On-line Commands

IT-SS7ROUT: Query Common Channel Signaling System Route


This command allows querying Common Channel Signaling route data.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-SS7ROUT [ : DPC = xxxxx ] ;

Parameter

DPC
Number of the adjacent signaling point code (0..16777216)

Output Format
DPC = x SLS = {x,..,x} [Accessible|Inaccessible]

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-423

MD-SS7ROUT: Modify Number 7 Signaling System Route

On-line Commands

MD-SS7ROUT: Modify Number 7 Signaling System Route


This command allows altering Common Channel Signaling route data.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-SS7ROUT : DPC = xxxxx, { SLS = { x, x & x, x } | PORT1 = xx-xxxx [, PORT2 = xx-xxxx] } ;

Parameters

DPC
Number of the adjacent signaling point code (0..16777216)

SLS
Signaling link set number (1..8). The SLS values shall be inserted between braces. Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

PORT
Serial Communication Port of a exchange unit, on the uni-port format: uni
2 16 76 A1 -

unit number (1..n):


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

COM1 COM2 COM3

COM1 Serial Communication Port COM2 Serial Communication Port COM3 Serial Communication Port

Remarks

1.

The order of signaling link set access priority is defined according to the command input order. Each set is separated by commas; the character & indicates that load sharing is in use between two sets. Each defined link set should have at least one created signaling link. The SLS values must be inserted between braces.

2. 3.

3-424

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-SS7SLS: Create Common Channel Signaling Link Set

On-line Commands

CR-SS7SLS: Create Common Channel Signaling Link Set


This command allows creating a Common Channel signaling link set, assigning it a number ID and an adjacent DPC.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
CR-SS7SLS : SLS= x, NAM = "xxxxxxxx", DPC = xxxxx ;

Parameters

SLS
Signaling link set number (1..8) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

NAM
Signaling link set alphanumeric ID (up to 8 characters in quotes)

DPC
Number of the adjacent signaling point code (0..16777216)

Remarks

1.

The DPC code number is defined by the carrier on implanting the signaling point.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-425

IT-SS7SLS: Query Common Channel Signaling Link Set

On-line Commands

IT-SS7SLS: Query Common Channel Signaling Link Set


This command allows querying a Common Channel Signaling Link set where Common Channel Signaling Links are associated.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-SS7SLS [ : [ SLS = x ] [, OPP ] ] ;

Parameters

SLS
Signaling link set number (1..8) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

OPP
Signaling link set operating parameter UNII Inactive Unit

Output Format

If parameter OPP was specified, all link sets, their operating parameters, and associated signaling links will be displayed in the following format:
SLS = x NAM = xxxxxxxx DPC = xxxxxx STA = xxx T1 = xxxxx T2 = xxxxx T3 = xxxxx T4 = xxxxx T5 T7 = xxxxx T8 = xxxxx T9 = xxxxx T10 = xxxxx T11 T13 = xxxxx T14 = xxxxx T15 = xxxxx T16 = xxxxx T17 T19 = xxxxx T20 = xxxxx T21 = xxxxx T22 = xxxxx T23 SLTC = xxxxx LNK = xx BOARD = xx-xx IBT = xx-xx TRK = xx-xx SLS = x SLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLS = x NAM = xxxxxxxx DPC = xxxxxx STA = xxx T1 = xxxxx T2 = xxxxx T3 = xxxxx T4 = xxxxx T5 T7 = xxxxx T8 = xxxxx T9 = xxxxx T10 = xxxxx T11 T13 = xxxxx T14 = xxxxx T15 = xxxxx T16 = xxxxx T17 T19 = xxxxx T20 = xxxxx T21 = xxxxx T22 = xxxxx T23 SLTC = xxxxx LNK = xx BOARD = xx-xx IBT = xx-xx TRK = xx-xx SLS = x SLC = xxxxx =xxxxx = xxxxx = xxxxx = xx T6 = xxxxx T12 = xxxxx T18 = xxxxx T24 = xxxxx

= xxxxx =xxxxx = xxxxx = xxxxx = xx

T6 = xxxxx T12 = xxxxx T18 = xxxxx T24 = xxxxx

3-426

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-SS7SLS: Query Common Channel Signaling Link Set

On-line Commands

If parameter SLS was specified, the link sets will be displayed with their operating states and associated DPC:
SLS = x LNK = xx . . . SLS = x LNK = xx . . NAM = xxxxxxxx DPC = BOARD = xx-xx IBT = xx-xx . . . . . . . . . . . . NAM = xxxxxxxx DPC = BOARD = xx-xx IBT = xx-xx . . . . . . . . xxxxxx STA = xxx TRK = xx-xx SLS = x SLC = xx

xxxxxx STA = xxx TRK = xx-xx SLS = x

SLC = xx

If only parameter SLS was specified, the data of the selected link set will be displayed without operating parameters.
SLS = x LNK = xx NAM = xxxxxxxx DPC = xxxxxx STA = xxx BOARD = xx-xx IBT = xx-xx TRK = xx-xx SLS = x SLC = xx

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.

T1 is the delay used for avoiding out of sequence messages in changeover (500..1200 ms). T2 is the waiting time for acknowledging changeover (700..2000 ms). T3 is the time-controlled delay for avoiding out of sequence messages in change back (500..1200 ms). T4 is the waiting time for change back acknowledgement (first attempt) (500..1200 ms). T5 is the waiting time for change back acknowledgement (second attempt) (500..1200 ms). T6 is the delay for avoiding out of sequence messages in controlled rerouting (500..1200 ms). T7 is the waiting time for signaling data link connection acknowledgement (1..2 s). T8 is the inhibiting delay for denied changeover (800..1200 ms). T9 (not used) T10 is the waiting time for repeating a route set test message (30..60 s). T11 is the restricted changeover timing (30..90 s) T12 is the waiting time for forced unblocking acknowledgement (800..1500 ms). T13 is the waiting time for forced unblocking (800..1500 ms). T14 is the waiting time for blocking acknowledgement (2..3 s) T15 is the waiting time for starting route set congestion testing (2..3 s). T16 is the waiting time for updating route set congestion status (1,4..2 s). T17 is the delay for avoiding initial alignment oscillation fault and link restart (800..1500 ms). T18 is the waiting time for signaling link availability applied to STP restart (18 s).

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-427

IT-SS7SLS: Query Common Channel Signaling Link Set

On-line Commands

19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25.

T19 is the waiting time for reception of all allowed traffic starting messages applied to STP restart (67..69 s). T20 is the waiting time for spreading allowed traffic starting messages and restart the remaining traffic applied to STP restart (59..61s) T21 is the total time of the MTP restart at the signaling point adjacent to the restart point (63..65 s). T22 is the local blocking test timing (3..6 min). T23 is the remote blocking test timing (3..6 min). T24 is the stabilization time after removing local processor interruption (500 ms). SLTC is the waiting time for signaling link test message (4..12 s).

3-428

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-SS7SLS: Modify Common Channel Signaling Link Set

On-line Commands

MD-SS7SLS: Modify Common Channel Signaling Link Set


This command allows modifying the status and timing of a Signaling Link set.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-SS7SLS : SLS= x { [, STA = xxx | [, T1 = xxxxx ] [, T2 = xxxxx ] [, T3 [, T4 = xxxxx ] [, T5 = xxxxx ] [, T6 [, T7 = xxxxx ] [, T8 = xxxxx ] [, T9 = xxxxx ] = xxxxx ] = xxxxx ]

[, T10 = xxxxx ] [, T11 = xxxxx ] [, T12 = xxxxx ] [, T13 = xxxxx ] [, T14 = xxxxx ] [, T15 = xxxxx ] [, T16 = xxxxx ] [, T17 = xxxxx ] [, T18 = xxxxx ] [, T19 = xxxxx ] [, T20 = xxxxx ] [, T21 = xxxxx ] [, T22 = xxxxx ] [, T23 = xxxxx ] [, T24 = xxxxx ] [, SLTC = xxxxx ] ] } ;

Parameters

SLS
Signaling link set number (1..8) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

STA
Signaling link set operating status: ATV Active ITV Inactive

T1
Delay used for avoiding out of sequence messages in changeover (500..1200 ms).

T2
Waiting time for acknowledging changeover (700..2000 ms).

T3
Time-controlled delay for avoiding out of sequence messages in change back (500..1200 ms).

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-429

MD-SS7SLS: Modify Common Channel Signaling Link Set

On-line Commands

T4
Waiting time for change back acknowledgement (first attempt) (500..1200 ms).

T5
Waiting time for change back acknowledgement (second attempt) (500..1200 ms).

T6
Delay for avoiding out of sequence messages in controlled rerouting (500..1200 ms).

T7
Waiting time for signaling data link connection acknowledgement (1..2 s).

T8
Inhibiting delay for denied changeover (800..1200 ms).

T9
(not used)

T10
Waiting time for repeating a route set test message (30..60 s).

T11
Restricted changeover timing (30..90 s)

T12
Waiting time for forced unblocking acknowledgement (800..1500 ms).

T13
Waiting time for forced unblocking (800..1500 ms).

T14
Waiting time for blocking acknowledgement (2..3 s)

T15
Waiting time for starting route set congestion testing (2..3 s).

T16
Waiting time for updating route set congestion status (1,4..2 s).

T17
Delay for avoiding initial alignment oscillation fault and link restart (800..1500 ms).

T18
Waiting time for signaling link availability applied to STP restart (18 s).

T19
Waiting time for reception of all allowed traffic starting messages applied to STP restart (67..69 s).

T20
Waiting time for spreading allowed traffic starting messages and restart the remaining traffic applied to STP restart (59..61s)

3-430

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-SS7SLS: Modify Common Channel Signaling Link Set

On-line Commands

T21
Total time of the MTP restart at the signaling point adjacent to the restart point (63..65 s).

T22
Local blocking test timing (3..6 min).

T23
Remote blocking test timing (3..6 min).

T24
Stabilization time after removing local processor interruption (500 ms).

SLTC
Waiting time for signaling link test message acknowledgement (4..12 s)

Remarks

1. 2.

The timing values are defined in 50-ms. The initial timing values are:
T1 = 15(750ms) T2 = 25(1,25s) T3 = 15(750ms) T4 = 15(750ms) T5 = 15(750ms) T6 = 15(750ms) T7 = 27(1,35s) T8 T9 = 18(900ms) = 0(0) T15 = 45(2,25s) T16 = 31(1,55s) T17 = 21(1,05s) T18 = 360(18s) T19 = 1360(68s) T20 = 1200(60s) T21 = 1280(64s) T22 = 4860(4min3s) T23 = 4860(4min3s) T24 = 9(450ms) SLTC = 108(5,4s)

T10 = 820(41s) T11 = 1090(54,5s) T12 = 21(1,05s) T13 = 21(1,05s) T14 = 45(2,25s)

3.

An vacant link set status cannot be altered.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-431

SU-SS7SLS: Suppress Common Channel Signaling Link Set

On-line Commands

SU-SS7SLS: Suppress Common Channel Signaling Link Set


This command allows suppressing a signaling link set, deleting the existing association with an adjacent DPC.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
SU-SS7SLS : SLS = x ;

Parameter

SLS
Signaling link set number (1..8) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

A link set with ATV operating status cannot be suppressed. If a link set is unique on a signaling route, it cannot be suppressed. Only empty link sets can be suppressed.

3-432

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

AT-SS7SUP: Activate Common Channel Signaling Supervision

On-line Commands

AT-SS7SUP: Activate Common Channel Signaling Supervision


This command I used to activate common channel signaling.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
AT-SS7SUP [ : [,NMSG = xx ] [,RECD ] ] ;

Parameters

NMSG
Maximum number of messages simultaneously displayed on screen (10..100).

RECD
Write supervised messages to file.

Remarks

1.

Before running this command, call supervision must be programmed and trunks useable for forwarding input calls must be defined; these trunks should use common channel signaling. The Common Channel Signaling Supervision Log is stored in an ASCII file named SS7SUP.DAT, located in the connected exchange directory, as indicated by parameter PATH of command CR-EXC. Parameter NMSG defines the number of messages displayed on the SS7 Message Supervision Display. The viable values of the parameter are in multiples of 10, with 100 as limiting value. If parameter NMSG, was not specified, it defaults to 50. Calls through the call supervision window will also be supervised by the common channels window. The call supervision window left toolbar corner provides a console button, which allows alternating to the console window. A Windows facility allows alternating windows via keys <ALT>+<TAB>. Messages displayed in the Common Channel Message Supervision window will, after reaching the amount specified by parameter NMSG, start to scroll, overwriting the oldest messages. If a call utilizes the signaling of Digital R2 register, the related messages are displayed too.
Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

2.

3.

4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

9.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

3-433

DS-SS7SUP: Common Channel Signaling Supervision

On-line Commands

DS-SS7SUP: Common Channel Signaling Supervision


This command is used to deactivate common channel signaling supervision
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
DS-SS7SUP;

Remarks

1.

The Common Channel Supervision window can also be deactivated from the System Menu.

3-434

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-SS7SUP: Query Channel Signaling Supervision Result

On-line Commands

IT-SS7SUP: Query Channel Signaling Supervision Result


This command is used to display Common Channel signaling messages.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-SS7SUP [ : LOC = "xxxxxxxx" [, ENV = xxxx ] ];

Parameters

LOC
Exchange installation site code (up to 8 alphanumeric characters in quotes)

ENV
Operating Environment of the Exchange: CS Central Stage PS1 Peripheral Stage 1 PS2 Peripheral Stage 2 PS3 Peripheral Stage 3 PS4 Peripheral Stage 4 PS5 Peripheral Stage 5 PS6 Peripheral Stage 6 . . . . PS31 Peripheral Stage 31 PS32 Peripheral Stage 32 The number of Peripheral Stages, which can be programmed on the exchange, varies from 1 to n:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109256826LPN109256834 32 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Output Format
-> CIC = x, MSG = IAI, SIO = xx, OPC = x, DPC = x Calling party category: xx Called party address nature indicator: x Circuit nature indicator: x Continuity test indicator: x Output echo suppressor indicator: x

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-435

IT-SS7SUP: Query Channel Signaling Supervision Result

On-line Commands

Forwarded call indicator: x CDC call indicator: x Called party address signals: xxxxxxxx Calling party ID indicator: x Calling party address signals: xxxxxxxx <- CIC = x, MSG = ACM, SIO = xx, OPC = x, DPC = x Complete address signal type indicator: x Idle subscriber indicator: x Forward call transference indicator: x Called party holding indicator: x <- CIC = x, MSG = ANC, SIO = xx, OPC = x, DPC = x <- CIC = x, MSG = CBK, SIO = xx, OPC = x, DPC = x <- CIC = x, MSG = RAN, SIO = xx, OPC = x, DPC = x -> CIC = x, MSG = CLF, SIO = xx, OPC = x, DPC = x <- CIC = x, MSG = RLG, SIO = xx, OPC = x, DPC = x -> CIC = x, MSG = IAI, SIO = xx, OPC = x, DPC = x Calling party category: xx Called party address nature indicator: x Circuit nature indicator: x Continuity test indicator: x Output echo suppressor indicator: x Forwarded call indicator: x CDC call indicator: x Called party address signals: xxxxxxxx Calling party ID indicator: x <- CIC = x, MSG = GRQ, SIO = xx, OPC = x, DPC = x Request for calling party category indicator: x Request for calling party ID indicator: x -> CIC = x, MSG = GSM, SIO = xx, OPC = x, DPC = x Calling party category indicator: x Calling party category: x Calling party ID indicator: x Original called address indicator: x Malicious call ID indicator: x Called party holding indicator: x Calling party address signals: xxxxxxxx <- CIC = x, MSG = ACM, SIO = xx, OPC = x, DPC = x Complete address signal type indicator: x Idle subscriber indicator: x Forward call transference indicator: x Called party holding indicator: x <- CIC = x, MSG = ANC, SIO = xx, OPC = x, DPC = x -> CIC = x, MSG = CLF, SIO = xx, OPC = x, DPC = x <- CIC = x, MSG = RLG, SIO = xx, OPC = x, DPC = x

Remarks

1. 2.

Example of TUP signaling messages. Parameter ENV should be applied to CS type exchanges, i.e., with created EPs, specified when displaying the common channel signaling supervision log of existing PS operating environments is required. It may be omitted when the required environment is already connected
Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page 109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

3-436

RV-SS7SUP: Remove Channel Signaling Supervision Log

On-line Commands

RV-SS7SUP: Remove Channel Signaling Supervision Log


This command is used for removing the Common Channel Signaling Supervision log.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
RV-SS7SUP [ : LOC = "xxxxxxxx" [, ENV = xxxx ] ];

Parameters

LOC
Exchange installation site code (up to 8 alphanumeric characters in quotes)

ENV
Operating Environment of the Exchange: CS Central Stage PS1 Peripheral Stage 1 PS2 Peripheral Stage 2 PS3 Peripheral Stage 3 PS4 Peripheral Stage 4 PS5 Peripheral Stage 5 PS6 Peripheral Stage 6 . . . . PS31 Peripheral Stage 31 PS32 Peripheral Stage 32 The number of Peripheral Stages, which can be programmed on the exchange, varies from 1 to n:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109256826LPN109256834 32 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1.

Parameter ENV must be used for CS type exchanges, i.e., with created EPs, specified when removing the common channel signaling supervision log of existing PS operating environments is required. It may be omitted when the required environment is already connected

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-437

IP-SSV: Query Supplementary Service Programming

On-line Commands

IP-SSV: Query Supplementary Service Programming


This command is used to display the subscriber supplementary services programmed in the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IP-SSV [ : SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx | SSV = xxxxxx ] ;

Parameters

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

3-438

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IP-SSV: Query Supplementary Service Programming

On-line Commands

SSV
Supplementary services: CAID calling line identification presentation BLCALL originating call barring CALINQ call consult CAWAIT call waiting REGCAL recorded call CLIP originated number id (isdn) CLIRC connected number id display restriction on a call basis CLIRP permanent restriction of connected number id display CLIRO calling line identification restriction overwrite COLP connected number id display COLRC connected number id display restriction on a call basis COLRP permanent restriction of connected number id display CUG closed user group INQTRF call transfer ITCONF three party service ALARCLK alarm call service ABDIAL abbreviated dialing DIRLIN hotline EXELIN timed hotline MSN multiple user number DNDIS do not disturb PRIORI priority CDR call detail record SBA sub addressing TCXPOCP diversion to voice mail on busy TCXPNR diversion to voice mail on no reply TPO terminal portability REVB reversed charging TRFNA call diversion on no reply TRFBSY call diversion on busy TMPTRF call diversion immediate UUS user-to-user signaling ABSENT absent subscriber REMPRG remote programming MCTP malicious call trace in permanent mode MCTD malicious call trace on demand
. The Supplementary Services CLIRP, COLP, COLRP, CUG, MSN, CLIRC, CLIRO, COLRC, SBA, TPO and UUS are valid only for Control Program SOF 98119 A1, SGP 98092 A1 and LPN109253856.001 or higher. . The Supplementary Services TCXPOCP and TCXPNR are valid only for Control Program SOF 98119F1, SGP 98092F1, SOF 98158E1, SOF 00092C1, LPN109253856.001, LPN109253864.001, LPN109232249.001 or higher. . ABSENT is valid for exchanges with LPN109253856.003, LPN109253864.003, LPN109232249.002 or higher. . REMPRG is valid for exchanges with LPN109253856.004 or higher. The Supplementary Services MCTP e MCTD are valid only for Control Program LPN 109253856.004 or higher. These services are available only for POTS subscribers and for Argentina Country.

Output Format

If parameter SUB was specified, the selected user programmed supplementary services are displayed in the following format:
SUB = xxxx-xxxx SSV = xxxxxx&..&xxxxxx [ CABN = xx ] [ ONOC = xx] TON = xxx

If parameter SSV was specified, all subscribers with the selected supplementary service are displayed in the following format:
SSV = xxxxxx SUB = xxxx-xxxx . . . xxxx-xxxx xxxx-xxxx . . . xxxx-xxxx xxxx-xxxx . . . xxxx-xxxx xxxx-xxxx

xxxx-xxxx

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-439

IP-SSV: Query Supplementary Service Programming

On-line Commands

If no parameter was specified, all subscribers programmed for supplementary services are displayed in the following format:
SUB = xxxx-xxxx . . . SUB = xxxx-xxxx SSV = xxxxxx&..&xxxxxx [ CABN = xx ] [ ONOC = xx] TON = xxx . . . . . . . . . . SSV = xxxxxx&..&xxxxxx [ CABN = xx ] [ ONOC = xx] TON = xxx

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

The abbreviated number capacity (CABN) per subscriber will be displayed jointly with supplementary service ABDIAL. The supplementary services CUG, TPO, CLIRP,CLIRC,COLRP,COLRC, SBA and UUS are specific for ISDN terminals. The output format of parameter SUB can de modified through Options Menu, Output Format submenu, on the CSR application main window.

3-440

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

PR-SSV: Program Supplementary Services

On-line Commands

PR-SSV: Program Supplementary Services


This command is used to program subscriber supplementary services in the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
PR-SSV : SUB = [xxxx]-xxxx&..&xxxx, SSV = xxxxxx&..&xxxxxx [, CABN= xxx ] [, ONOC= xx ] [, TON = xxx ] ;

Parameters

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-441

PR-SSV: Program Supplementary Services

On-line Commands

SSV
Supplementary services: CAID calling line identification presentation (AOH for ISDN telephones) FSKCAID calling line identification presentation for FSK CAID - ANSI standard. EFSKCAID calling line identification presentation for FSK CAID - ETSI standard BLCALL originating call barring CALINQ call consult CAWAIT call waiting REGCAL recorded call CLIP originated number id (isdn) CLIRC connected number id display restriction on a call basis CLIRP permanent restriction of connected number id display CLIRO calling line identification restriction overwrite COLP connected number id display COLRC connected number id display restriction on a call basis COLRP permanent restriction of connected number id display CUG closed user group INQTRF call transfer ITCONF three party service ALARCLK alarm call service ABDIAL abbreviated dialing DIRLIN hotline EXELIN timed hotline MSN multiple user number DNDIS do not disturb PRIORI priority CDR call detail record SBA sub addressing TCXPOCP diversion to voice mail on busy TCXPNR diversion to voice mail on no reply TPO terminal portability REVB reversed charging TRFNA call diversion on no reply TRFBSY call diversion on busy TMPTRF call diversion immediate UUS user-to-user signaling ABSENT absent subscriber REMPRG remote programming MCTP malicious call trace in permanent mode MCTD malicious call trace on demand
. The Supplementary Services CLIRP, COLP, COLRP, CUG, MSN, CLIRC, CLIRO, COLRC, SBA, TPO and UUS are valid only for Control Program SOF 98119 A1, SGP 98092 A1 and LPN109253856.001 or higher. . The Supplementary Services TCXPOCP and TCXPNR are valid only for Control Program SOF 98119F1, SGP 98092F1, SOF 98158E1, SOF 00092C1, LPN109253856.001, LPN109253864.001, LPN109232249.001 or higher. . ABSENT is valid for exchanges with LPN109253856.003, LPN109253864.003, LPN109232249.002 or higher. . REMPRG is valid for exchanges with LPN109253856.004 or higher. . The Supplementary Services MCTP e MCTD are valid only for Control Program LPN 109253856.004 or higher. These services are available only for POTS subscribers and for Argentina Country. . The Supplementary Services FSKCAID and EFSKCAID are valid only for control programs LPN109253856.008, LPN109253864.008, LPN109253826.005, LPN109253834.005, LPN109232249.006 or higher.

UUS
user-to-user signaling

CABN
Abbreviated number capacity (1..100), in multiples of 10

ONOC
Sending of originating number in originating calls: OB compulsory

3-442

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

PR-SSV: Program Supplementary Services

On-line Commands

NO IR ET

non compulsory don't care transparent

TON
This parameter allows to choose normal tone (NOR) or special tone (DIF) for the following supplementary services: DNDIS, TMPTRF,TFRNR, TRFBSY. Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 E1 D1 001 001 001 -

Remarks

1.

A subscriber programmed for supplementary service BLCALL will initially have originating blocking (RTO) value 1, i.e., unrestricted. This restriction class can be altered via command MD-RTOSUB (Modify Subscriber Originating Restriction). If parameter CABN was not specified for supplementary service ABDIAL, an abbreviated dialing capacity value of 10 will be adopted. Subscribers programmed for supplementary service DIRLIN should also be programmed for the number of digits automatically dialed by the exchange when the handset is picked up. The command used is MDSSUASS (Modify Supplementary Service Enabling Status); the initial condition being no programmed sequence. Refer to the Exchange Operation Manual for details on using supplementary services. Supplementary services CUG, TPO, CLIRP,CLIRC,COLRP,COLRC, SBA and UUS are ISDN-terminal specific. Parameters CABN, ONOC and TON cannot be used with the supplementary services (SSV) TCXPOCP and TCXPNR. The BINAFSK value for the SSV parameter works only with MPS-C with 2 links. In case the Absent Subscriber and Do Not Disturb supplementary services are simultaneously enabled to the same subscriber, the last has priority over the first one.

2. 3.

4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-443

RP-SSV: Remove Supplementary Service Programming

On-line Commands

RP-SSV: Remove Supplementary Service Programming


This command is used to erase subscriber supplementary services programming in the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
RP-SSV : SUB = [xxxx]-xxxx&..&xxxx, SSV = xxxxxx&..&xxxxxx ;

Parameters

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

SSV
Supplementary services: CAID calling line identification presentation BLCALL originating call barring CALINQ call consult CAWAIT call waiting REGCAL recorded call CLIP originated number id (isdn) CLIRC connected number id display restriction on a call basis CLIRP permanent restriction of connected number id display CLIRO calling line identification restriction overwrite COLP connected number id display COLRC connected number id display restriction on a call basis COLRP permanent restriction of connected number id display CUG closed user group INQTRF call transfer ITCONF three party service ALARCLK alarm call service ABDIAL abbreviated dialing DIRLIN hotline EXELIN timed hotline MSN multiple user number DNDIS do not disturb PRIORI priority CDR call detail record SBA sub addressing TCXPOCP diversion to voice mail on busy TCXPNR diversion to voice mail on no reply TPO terminal portability

3-444

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

RP-SSV: Remove Supplementary Service Programming

On-line Commands

REVB reversed charging TRFNA call diversion on no reply TRFBSY call diversion on busy TMPTRF call diversion immediate UUS user-to-user signaling ABSENT absent subscriber REMPRG remote programming MCTP malicious call trace in permanent mode MCTD malicious call trace on demand
. The Supplementary Services CLIRP, COLP, COLRP, CUG, MSN, CLIRC, CLIRO, COLRC, SBA, TPO and UUS are valid only for Control Program SOF 98119 A1, SGP 98092 A1 and LPN109253856.001 or higher. . The Supplementary Services TCXPOCP and TCXPNR are valid only for Control Program SOF 98119F1, SGP 98092F1, SOF 98158E1, SOF 00092C1, LPN109253856.001, LPN109253864.001, LPN109232249.001 or higher. . ABSENT is valid for exchanges with LPN109253856.003, LPN109253864.003, LPN109232249.002 or higher. . REMPRG is valid for exchanges with LPN109253856.004 or higher. The Supplementary Services MCTP e MCTD are valid only for Control Program LPN 109253856.004 or higher. These services are available only for POTS subscribers and for Argentina Country.

Remarks

1. 2.

To delete all supplementary services of a subscriber(s), specify SSV=WSSV. Supplementary services CUG, TPO, CLIRP,CLIRC,COLRP,COLRC, SBA and UUS are ISDN-terminal specific.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-445

IT-SSVSUB: Query Supplementary Service Enabling Status

On-line Commands

IT-SSVSUB: Query Supplementary Service Enabling Status


This command is used to display the status of supplementary services programmed for the subscriber.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-SSVSUB [: SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx [,SSV = ALARCLK | SSV= ABDIAL [, ABN = xxx ] ] ];

Parameters

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

SSV
Supplementary services: ALARCLK, ABDIAL

ABN
Abbreviated number (0..99)

3-446

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-SSVSUB: Query Supplementary Service Enabling Status

On-line Commands

Output Format

If parameter SUB was not specified, all subscribers with supplementary services programmed and their respective condition (enabled or disabled) will be displayed. Only parameters CAWAIT, ALARCLK, TMPTRF, DNDIS, BLCALL, DIRLIN, EXELIN, ABDIAL, TRFNA, and TRFBSY can be displayed in output format via command IT-SSVSUB.
SUB = xxxx-xxxx " SSV" " SSV" . . " SSV" " SSV" . . SUB = xxxx-xxxx " SSV" " SSV" . . " SSV" " SSV" DSB|ENA DSB|ENA DSB|ENA DSB|ENA

DSB|ENA DSB|ENA DSB|ENA DSB|ENA

If parameter SUB was specified, all supplementary services programmed for this subscriber and their enabling status (enabled or disabled) will be displayed.
SUB = xxxx-xxxx " SSV" " SSV" . . " SSV" DSB|ENA DSB|ENA DSB|ENA

If the subscriber has one of the TMPTRF, TRFNA, TRFBSY, DIRLIN, EXELIN, or BLCALL supplementary services enabled, the command output format will include the digit sequence assigned to the service.
SUB = xxxx-xxxx TRFBSY TMPTRF ENA TRFNA ENA DIRLIN EXELIN ENA BLCALL ENA . . " SSV" ENA SEQ SEQ ENA SEQ RTO SEQ = xxx...xxx = xxx...xxx = xxx...xxx SEQ = xxx...xxx = xxx...xxx = xx PAS = xxxx

DSB|ENA

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-447

IT-SSVSUB: Query Supplementary Service Enabling Status

On-line Commands

If the subscriber abbreviated dialing (ABDIAL) supplementary service is enabled, the command output format will include the programmed digit sequences and the enabled number of sequences, respectively.
SUB = xxxx-xxxx ABDIAL ENA "SSV" CABN = x . . DSB|ENA (x)

If the subscriber wake-up (ALARCLK) supplementary service is enabled, the command output format will include the programming assigned to the service.
SUB = xxxx-xxxx ALARCLK "SSV" ENA . . DSB|ENA

If parameter SSV=ALARCLK was specified for a subscriber with this supplementary service programmed and enabled, the timeframe programmed by the subscriber will be displayed.
SUB = xxxx-xxxx ho-mi ho-mi ho-mi ho-mi ho-mi ho-mi ho-mi ho-mi ho-mi ho-mi

If parameter SSV = ABDIAL was specified for a subscriber with this supplementary service programmed and enabled, the programmed abbreviated numbers and sequences will be displayed..
SUB = xxxx-xxxx ABN = xx ABN = xx . . ABN = xx ABN = xx SEQ = xx...xx SEQ = xx...xx . . SEQ = xx...xx SEQ = xx...xx

Remarks

1.

The output format of parameter SUB can de modified through Options Menu, "Output Format" submenu, on the CSR application main window.

3-448

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-SSVSUB: Modify Supplementary Service Enabling Status

On-line Commands

MD-SSVSUB: Modify Supplementary Service Enabling Status


This command is used to modify the status of supplementary services available to subscribers.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-SSVSUB : SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx , SSV = xxxxxxx, [ {ENA | DSB } ] {, RTO = xx | ,HOU = xx-xx | , SEQ= xxx..xxx [, ABN = xx ] };

Parameters

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

SSV
Supplementary services: BLCALL originating call barring CAWAIT call waiting ALARCLK alarm call service ABDIAL abbreviated dialing DIRLIN hotline EXELIN timed hotline DNDIS do not disturb TRFNA call diversion on no reply TRFBSY call diversion on busy TMPTRF call diversion immediate (ISDN) ABSENT absent subscriber ABSENT is valid for exchanges with LPN109253856.003, LPN109253864.003, LPN109232249.002 or higher.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-449

MD-SSVSUB: Modify Supplementary Service Enabling Status

On-line Commands

RTO
Originating restriction (1..16), where:
12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 16 unrestricted IDD IDD, DDD IDD, DDD, SPE1 IDD, DDD, SPE1, SPE2 IDD, DDD, SPE1, SPE2, SPE3 IDD, DDD, SPE1, SPE2, SPE3, SPE4 IDD, DDD, SPE1, SPE2, SPE3, SPE4, SPE5 IDD, DDD, SPE1, SPE2, SPE3, SPE4, SPE5, SPE6 IDD, DDD, SPE1, SPE2, SPE3, SPE4, SPE5, SPE6, SPE7 IDD, DDD, SPE1, SPE2, SPE3, SPE4, SPE5, SPE6, SPE7, SPE8, IDD, DDD, SPE1, SPE2, SPE3, SPE4, SPE5, SPE6, SPE7, SPE8, REG, IDD, DDD, SPE1, SPE2, SPE3, SPE4, SPE5, SPE6, SPE7, SPE8, REG, LOC, IDD, DDD, SPE1, SPE2, SPE3, SPE4, SPE5, SPE6, SPE7, SPE8, REG, LOC, INTRA IDD, DDD, SPE1, SPE2, SPE3, SPE4, SPE5, SPE6, SPE7, SPE8, REG, LOC, INTRA, ISS IDD, DDD, SPE1, SPE2, SPE3, SPE4, SPE5, SPE6,SPE7, SPE8, REG, LOC, INTRA, ISS, LSS

HOU
Time in the ho[-mi] format: ho hour (00..23) mi minute (00..59) (optional)

SEQ
Sequence of digits to be dialed by the exchange when using supplementary services (up to 18 digits) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256826LPN109256834 -

ABN
Abbreviated number (0..99)

Remarks

1.

Use the following syntax to program supplementary service ALARCLK: MD-SSVSUB : SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx, SSV = ALARCLK, {HOU = xx-xx, {DSB | ENA }|DSB This syntax requires defining the time programmed for the Wake-Up service and its status (enabled or disabled, ENA - DSB). Specified wake-up times can also be disabled. To disable all wake-up service times, repeat the supplementary service disabling command for each programmed sequence.

2.

To modify the status of supplementary services Temporary forwarding, Executive Line, Forward on No Reply, and Forward on Busy, use the following syntax: MD-SSVSUB : SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx, SSV = TMPTRF |TRFOC P | TRFNA | EXELIN {SEQ = xxx..xxx, ENA | DSB } When one of these supplementary services is modified, the digit sequence to be dialed and its enabling status must be defined. (ENA | DSB).

3-450

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-SSVSUB: Modify Supplementary Service Enabling Status

On-line Commands

3.

To modify the status of supplementary services Don't Disturb, Call Waiting and Absent Subscriber, use the following syntax: MD-SSVSUB : SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx, SSV = DNDIS | CAWAIT | ABSENT, {ENA | DSB} To modify the status of supplementary service ABDIAL, use the following syntax: MD-SSVSUB : SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx, SSV = ABDIAL, { SEQ = xxx..xxx, ABN = xxx , ENA | ABN = xxx , DSB } For this command, to enable a digit sequence for a ABN, it must be defined and enabled status applied. To disable all Abbreviated Numbers (ABN), the supplementary service disabling command must be repeated for each programmed sequence.

4.

5.

To modify the status of supplementary service Originated Call Blocking, there are three options: a) Enable and disable this service, through the parameters ENA and DSB, using the following syntax: MD-SSVSUB : SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx, SSV = BLCALL, {ENA | DSB} b) Configure a originating restriction, through the parameter RTO, using the following syntax: MD-SSVSUB : SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx, SSV = BLCALL, RTO = xxx If the RTO parameter is not used, value 1 (not restrict) will be the default. c) Enable a access keyword to the subscriber, through the parameter PAS, using the following syntax: MD-SSVSUB : SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx, PAS = "xxxx"

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-451

CR-SUB: Create Subscriber (1)

On-line Commands

CR-SUB: Create Subscriber (1)


This command is used to create a subscriber.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 001 001 001

Input Format
CR-SUB : SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx&..&xxxx , TER = xx-xx-xx , POS = xxxx , CLA = xxx [, SNL = xxx ] [,ROUT = xxxxx] [,V5LNK = xx] [,V5INT= xxx];

Parameters

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

TER
Terminal number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
16 64 A1 -

number of the terminal unit (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd cir

terminal board number (1..21) board circuit number (1..32)

Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

POS
Subscriber position at the PS Compatibility
n SOF 95055 SOF 98119 SOF 97098 SGP 98092 SOF 98158SOF 00092 5000 1500 B1 B1 A1 A1

3-452

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-SUB: Create Subscriber (1)

On-line Commands

n LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 1500 5000 001 005 001 002 001 001

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-453

CR-SUB: Create Subscriber (1)

On-line Commands

CLA
Terminal class (1..n), where n can be:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 32 128 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

SNL
Telephone set dialing signaling: DEC decadic MF multifrequency (DTMF) PRI primary ISDN access BRI basic ISDN access

ROUT
Route ID: E1..En incoming routes B1..Bn two-way routes S1..Sn outgoing routes
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 32 1024 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

V5LNK
Signaling link associated to the V5 interface where the ISDN/ channel D (BRI) of the created subscriber transits. Values from 1 to 16. Valid for exchanges with LPN109253856.003, LPN109232249.002 or higher.

V5INT
V5 interface number (1..n) Compatibility:
n SOF 95055 SOF 97049 SOF 98119SOF 97098 SGP 98092SOF 98158SOF 00092 255 16 B1 D1 B1 D1 A1 C1 A1

n LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249 LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 16 8 001 001 005 001 001 002 001 001 001

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4.

A subscriber is created in the blocked operating status (BLK) and should be unblocked via command MD-SUBSTE. list of subscribers can be prepared in the configuring mode. In this case, the subscribers will be created in service conditions. If parameter SNL is not specified, the telephone set will be considered as using decadic dialing. Refer to the remarks on the CR-CLA command (Create Terminal Class)..
Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page 109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

3-454

CR-SUB: Create Subscriber (1)

On-line Commands

5. 6.

If the subscriber prefix is not specified, the subscriber will be considered as having prefix 1 in the table of prefixes.. A list of subscribers with the same class, signaling and prefix data can be prepared, the associated terminal matching the boards created in the exchange, sequentially ordered by circuit, board and unit.. For V5-ISUP Protocol Converter, SUB, CLA, ROUT, V5INT and POS parameters shall be specified. ROUT parameter shall be two-way. 8. For a ISDN subscriber creation is necessary to inform the type of signaling - SNL=BRI. 9. Parameter POS equivalent to layer 3 address plus 1 unit (L3address + 1)

7.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-455

CR-SUB: Create Subscriber (2)

On-line Commands

CR-SUB: Create Subscriber (2)


This command is used to create a subscriber.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 001 001 001 -

Input Format
CR-SUB : SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx&..&xxxx, { TER = xx-xx-xx | RMT = xx-xxxx ,| ROUT = xxxxx} CLA = xxx [, SNL = xxx ] [, PMO = xx ] [, V5LNK= xx];

Parameters

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

TER
Terminal number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
16 64 A1 -

number of the terminal unit (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd terminal board number (1..21) cir board circuit number (1..32) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

RMT
Remote terminal number in the ps-pos format: ps number of Peripheral Stage (1..n)
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 16 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 -

pos

subscriber position at AN (Access None) side via V5.1 or V5.2 interface

3-456

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-SUB: Create Subscriber (2)

On-line Commands

ROUT
Identification of the DID route: E1..En incoming routes B1..Bn two-way routes S1..Sn outgoing routes
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 32 1024 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

CLA
Terminal class (1..n), where n can be:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 32 128 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

SNL
Telephone set dialing signaling: DEC decadic MF multifrequency (DTMF) PRI primary ISDN access BRI basic ISDN access

PMO
Origin marking point (1..40). It defines a set of subscribers pertaining to one same billing area. Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 001 001 001

V5LNK
Signaling link associated to the V5 interface where the ISDN/ channel D (BRI) of the created subscriber transits. Values from 1 to 16. Valid for exchanges with LPN109253856.003, LPN109232249.002 or higher.

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

A subscriber is created in the blocked operating status (BLK) and should be unblocked via command MD-SUBSTE. A list of subscribers can be prepared in the configuring mode. In this case, the subscribers will be created in service conditions. If parameter SNL is not specified, the telephone set will be considered as using decadic dialing. Refer to the remarks on the CR-CLA command (Create Terminal Class). If the subscriber prefix is not specified, the subscriber will be considered as having prefix 1 in the table of prefixes. A list of subscribers with the same class, signaling and prefix data can be prepared, the associated terminal matching the boards created in the exchange, sequentially ordered by circuit, board and unit.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-457

CR-SUB: Create Subscriber (2)

On-line Commands

7. 8.

Parameter ROUT should be used when the created subscriber is a PABX DID extension connected to the BZ5000 exchange. For a ISDN subscriber creation is necessary to inform the type of signaling - SNL=BRI.

3-458

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-SUB: Query Subscriber

On-line Commands

IT-SUB: Query Subscriber


This command is used to display subscriber data.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-SUB [ : { SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx &..&xxxx | TER = xx-xx-xx&..&xx-xx-xx | STE = xxx | CLA = xxx | SNL = xxx | EXCPRE = x | RMT= xx-xxxx | ROUT = xxxxx | PS= xx | TYP = xxx| V5INT= xxx | POS= xx } ] ;

Parameters

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

TER
Terminal number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
16 64 A1 -

number of the terminal unit (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

brd terminal board number (1..21) cir board circuit number (1..32) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

STE
Subscriber operating status: NCR not created BLE external blocking BLK fully blocked BLO blocked for originating BV5 blocked for V5 BSY busy NBD no board SRV in service

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-459

IT-SUB: Query Subscriber

On-line Commands

CLA
Terminal class (1..n), VCL, CHN or NDF:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 32 128 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

VCL CHN NDF

(Vacant level) indicates that the exchange should send end-of-selection signal B7 when exchanging MFC signaling in incoming calls of the terminal; (changed number ) indicates that the exchange should send end-of-selection signal B3 when exchanging MFC signaling in incoming calls of the terminal; (defective number) indicates that the exchange should send end-of-selection signal B8 when exchanging MFC signaling in incoming calls of the terminal;

SNL
Telephone set dialing signaling: DEC decadic MF multifrequency (DTMF) PRI primary ISDN access BRI basic ISDN access

EXCPRE
Index of the prefix in the exchange table of prefixes (1..6). This table correlates this index with the exchange prefix number that should be used to complete the called subscriber number. This parameter can assume values from 1 to n, where n changes according to software version as the table below:
n SOF98119 SOF98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 2 50 A1 E1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

RMT
Remote terminal number in the ps-pos format: ps number of Peripheral Stage (1..n)
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 16 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 -

pos

subscriber position at AN (Access None) side via V5.1 or V5.2 interface

ROUT
Identification of the DID route: E1..E1024 incoming routes S1..S32 outgoing routes B1..B1024 two-way routes

PS
Peripheral Stage number (1..64) or (1..16) for the control software SOF98119, LPN109253856 and LPN109232249.

TYP
Type of exchange the subscriber is assigned to: loc local ps peripheral stage

3-460

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-SUB: Query Subscriber

On-line Commands

V5INT
V5 interface number (1..n) Compatibility:
n SOF 95055 SOF 97049SOF 98119 SOF 97098SGP 98092SOF 98158SOF 00092 255 16 B1 D1 B1 D1 A1 C1 A1

n LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 16 8 001 001 005 001 001 002 001 001

POS
Subscriber position at the PS Compatibility
n SOF 95055 SOF 98119 SOF 97098 SGP 98092SOF 98158SOF 00092 5000 1500 B1 B1 A1 A1

n LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 1500 5000 001 005 001 002 001 001

Output Format

If the SUB or TER parameters are specified, the operating status and terminal class of each selected subscriber will be displayed in the following format:
SUB = xxxx-xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx SNL = xxx [NCAA = xx ] [ PMO = xx [ RPF = xxx ] RSSS = xxxxxx CLA = xxx (xxxxxxxx) OCT = xx TCT = xx SVP = xxxxxx RTT = { NRESTR | TOREST | xx&..&xx [ MAXCOIN = xxxxx ] [KEY = xx] [ SSV = xxxxxxx&..&xxxxxxx ] . . . TER = xx-xx-xx SNL = xxx [NCAA = xx ] [ PMO = xx [ RPF = xxx ] RSSS = xxxxxx CLA = xxx (xxxxxxxx) OCT = xx TCT = xx SVP = xxxxxx RTT = { NRESTR | TOREST | xx&..&xx [ MAXCOIN = xxxxx ] [KEY = xx] [ SSV = xxxxxxx&..&xxxxxxx ] TON = xxx ] STE = xxx

} . . TON = xxx ] STE = xxx

SUB = xxxx-xxxx

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-461

IT-SUB: Query Subscriber

On-line Commands

If the STE parameter is specified, subscribers in the selected state will be specified in the following format:
STE = xxx SUB = xxxx-xxxx . . . xxxx-xxxx xxxx-xxxx . . . . . . xxxx-xxxx xxxx-xxxx . . . . . . xxxx-xxxx xxxx-xxxx

xxxx-xxxx

If the CLA parameter is specified, subscribers with terminals with the selected class will be displayed in the following format:
CLA = xxx SUB = xxxx-xxxx . . . xxxx-xxx xxxx-xxxx . . . . . . xxxx-xxxx xxxx-xxxx . . . . . . xxxx-xxxx xxxx-xxxx

xxxx-xxxx

If the EXCPRE parameter is specified, subscribers with terminals with the selected exchange prefix will be displayed in the following format:
SUB = xxxx-xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx SNL = xxx [NCAA = xx ] [ TON = xxx ] STE = xxx PMO = xx RPF = xxx RSSS = xxxxxx CLA = xxx (xxxxxxxx) OCT = xx TCT = xx SVP = xxxxxx RTT = { NRESTR | TOREST | xx&..&xx } [ MAXCOIN = xxxxx ] [KEY = xx] [ SSV = xxxxxxx&..&xxxxxxx ]

If the SNL parameter is specified, subscribers with telephone sets using the selected type of dialing signaling will be displayed in the following format:
SNL = xxx SUB = xxxx-xxxx . . . . . . xxxx-xxxx xxxx-xxxx . . . . . . xxxx-xxxx xxxx-xxxx . . . xxxx-xxxx xxxx-xxxx

xxxx-xxxx

If no parameter is specified, all exchange subscriber data will be displayed in the following format:
SUB = xxxx-xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx SNL = xxx [NCAA = xx ] [ TON = xxx ] STE = xxx PMO = xx [ RPF = xxx ] RSSS = xxxxxx CLA = xxx (xxxxxxxx) OCT = xx TCT = xx SVP = xxxxxx RTT = { NRESTR | TOREST | xx&..&xx } [ MAXCOIN = xxxxx ] [ KEY = xx ] [ SSV = xxxxxxx&..&xxxxxxx ] . . . . . . . . . . SUB = xxxx-xxxx TER = xx-xx-xx SNL = xxx [ NCAA = xx ] [ TON = xxx ] STE = xxx PMO = xx [ RPF = xxx ] RSSS = xxxxxx CLA = xxx (xxxxxxxx) OCT = xx TCT = xx SVP = xxxxxx RTT = { NRESTR | TOREST | xx&..&xx } [ MAXCOIN = xxxxx ] [ KEY = xx ] [ SSV = xxxxxxx&..&xxxxxxx ]

3-462

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-SUB: Query Subscriber

On-line Commands

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

If PRI signaling is used, the NCAA parameter will be displayed in the output format. TON Parameter will be displayed if it is prior programmed via command MD-SUB. RPF Parameter will only be displayed when equal to ATV, i. e., active remote power supply. ROUT Parameter will be displayed if the listed subscriber is a PABX DID extension connected to the exchange. Parameter will be displayed if the subscriber is interconnected to the access node (AN). KEY Parameter will only be displayed when the subscriber belongs to a PABX group. The output format of the SUB parameter can be changed through the Option Menu, Output Format submenu, on the CSR main window. Parameter POS equivalent to layer 3 address plus 1 unit (L3address + 1)

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-463

MD-SUB: Modify Subscriber

On-line Commands

MD-SUB: Modify Subscriber


This command is used to change the class of a terminal and the dialing signaling of a subscriber telephone set. In ISDN access, it is also used to change restrictions on the requested support service and the assignment of tones generated by the terminal or exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-SUB : SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx, { [, CLA = xxx ] [, SNL = xxx ] [, NCAA = xx] [, TON = xxx] [, RSSS = xxxx] [,RPF = xxx ] [, PMO = xx ] } ;

Parameters

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

CLA
Terminal class (1..n), VCL, CHN or NDF:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 32 128 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

VCL CHN NDF

(Vacant level) indicates that the exchange should send end-of-selection signal B7 when exchanging MFC signaling in incoming calls of the terminal; (changed number ) indicates that the exchange should send end-of-selection signal B3 when exchanging MFC signaling in incoming calls of the terminal; (defective number) indicates that the exchange should send end-of-selection signal B8 when exchanging MFC signaling in incoming calls of the terminal;

SNL
Telephone set dialing signaling: DEC decadic MF multifrequency (DTMF) PRI primary ISDN access BRI basic ISDN access

3-464

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-SUB: Modify Subscriber

On-line Commands

NCAA
Number of B channels available to the access (in the SOFs where the permissible values are from 2 to 30) or Number of the group (of B channels) attributed to the subscriber (in the SOFs where the permissible values are from 1 to 4). These groups are programmed using the command MD-TER, and the verification of the values attributed to each one of the groups is done through the command IT-TER Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 2..30 1..4 A1 E3 A1 D3 001 001 001 001

TON
Origin of tone generation for ISDN terminals EXC tones generated by the exchange TER tones generated by the terminal Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001

RSSS
Requested support service restriction U64K 64 kbps unrestricted VOI 64 kbps voice AUDIO 64 kbps audio 3.1 kHz WRSSS unrestricted for the requested support service Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

RPF
Remote power supply for the ISDN terminal ITV inactive ATV active Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001

PMO
Origin marking point (1..40). It defines a set of subscribers pertaining to one same billing area. Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 D1 C1 001 001 001 001 001 001

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-465

MD-SUB: Modify Subscriber

On-line Commands

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Terminal classes VCL, CHN, and NDF can only be specified for subscribers in uncreated operating status (NCR). At least one of the optional parameters should be specified. Only specified parameters will be altered. Parameters TON and RSSS only apply to ISDN terminals. If the TON parameter is not specified, the tone will be considerate generated by the exchange. NCAA Parameter is only valid for primary ISDN access. RPF Parameter is only valid for subscribers with basic ISDN access. If the RPF parameter is not specified, basic ISDN access terminals will be considered remotely powered. To eliminate the restriction programmed for the requested support service, specify RSSS = WRSSS.

3-466

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

SU-SUB: Suppress Subscriber

On-line Commands

SU-SUB: Suppress Subscriber


This command is used to suppress a subscriber.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
SU-SUB : SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx&..&xxxx ;

Parameter

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

Remarks

1. 2.

A subscriber may only be suppressed when in BLK status (fully blocked) A suppressed subscriber assumes NRC (uncreated) operating status and terminal class VCL (vacant level).

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-467

INC-SUBCRD: Increment Subscriber Credits

On-line Commands

INC-SUBCRD: Increment Subscriber Credits


This command is used to increment a prepaid service user subscriber credit.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 C3 B3 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
INC-SUBCRD: SUB = [ xxxx ] - xxxx , CRD = xxxxxx;

Parameters

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

CRD
Amount of subscriber credit

3-468

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

INI-SUBCRD: Initialize Subscriber Credit

On-line Commands

INI-SUBCRD: Initialize Subscriber Credit


This command is used to nullify the credit of a prepaid service user subscriber.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 C3 B3 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
INI-SUBCRD: SUB = [ xxxx ] - xxxx ;

Parameter

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-469

IT-SUBCRD: Query Subscriber Credit

On-line Commands

IT-SUBCRD: Query Subscriber Credit


This command is used to query the credit of a prepaid service user subscriber.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-SUBCRD: [ SUB = [ xxxx ] - xxxx ] ;

Parameter

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

Output Format

If the SUB parameter is specified, the respective subscriber number will be displayed with his credit in the following format:
SUB = [ xxxx] - xxxx CRD = xxxxxx

If the SUB parameter is not specified, all prepaid credit user subscribers numbers will be displayed with their respective credit in the following format:
SUB = [ xxxx] - xxxx . . . . . . SUB = [ xxxx] - xxxx CRD = xxxxxx . . . CRD = xxxxxx

3-470

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-SUBCRD: Query Subscriber Credit

On-line Commands

Remarks

1.

If no subscriber is programmed as a prepaid service user, the following command will be displayed in response to the IT-SUBCRD command: "Ther isnt subscriber with pre-paid service. To program a subscriber as a prepaid service user, first set up a class, using service parameter PRPAID (command CR-CLA), and then associate this class to the relevant subscriber (command MD-SUB). In this case, when the credits of a subscriber of this class is over, it becomes totally blocked and cant originate and receive calls. The output format of the SUB parameter can be changed through the Options menu, Output Format submenu, on the CSR program main window.

2.

3.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-471

MD-SUBSTE: Modify Subscriber Operating Status

On-line Commands

MD-SUBSTE: Modify Subscriber Operating Status


This command is used to change subscribers' operating status.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-SUBSTE : {SUB = [xxxx-]xxxx&..&xxxx | TER = xx-xx-xx&..&xx-xx-xx, STE = xxx [, IMME ] ;

Parameters

SUB
Subscriber directory number, provided in the following formats: - pre-sub; - presub; - sub. where: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

TER
Terminal number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
16 64 A1 -

number of the terminal unit (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd cir

terminal board number (1..21) board circuit number (1..32)

Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

STE
Subscriber operating status: BLK fully blocked BLO blocked for originating SRV in service

IMME
Trunk immediate blocking options

3-472

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-SUBSTE: Modify Subscriber Operating Status

On-line Commands

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

Blocking a subscriber for originating calls (BLO) is only valid if the subscriber has SRV (in service) operating status. Fully blocking a subscriber (BLK) is only valid if the subscriber has SRV (in service) and BLO (blocked for originating) status. Unblocking a subscriber or setting him to operating status SRV (in service) will only be possible for subscribers in the BLK (fully blocked) and BLO (blocked for originating) status. If the IMME parameter is specified, the exchange blocks the subscriber immediately, breaking the current call. If the IMME parameter is not specified, the exchange waits for the current call to end and blocks the subscriber in idle state only. In this case, the exchange sends messages confirming the CSR blocking at the moment it comes into effect. Command MD-SUBSTE does not extend to blocking or unblocking an entire PABX group by the key subscriber. Each PABX group subscriber must be individually blocked and unblocked. TER parameter is not valid LPN109256842Control Program. for exchanges with LPN109232249 and

4.

5.

6.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-473

INI-SYNCMCE: Initialize MCE Synchronism Parameter Supervision

On-line Commands

INI-SYNCMCE: Initialize MCE Synchronism Parameter Supervision


This command is used to initialize the synchronism error counters of the MCE board.
Compatibility
SOF 95055 A1 LPN109253856 SOF 97049 A1 SOF 98119 SOF 97098 A1 LPN109232249 SGP 98092 A1 LPN109256842 SOF 98158 SOF 00092 A1 LPN109256834 -

LPN109253864 -

LPN109256826 -

Input Format
INI-SYNCMCE [ : BOARD = xx-xx];

Parameter

BOARD
Board number in the uni-pos format uni unit number (1..n)
n 16 68 76 SOF 95055 A1 SOF 97049 A1 SOF 98119 SOF 97098 A1 SGP 98092 SOF 98158 SOF 00092 A1 B1 A1 -

pos Compatibility:
SOF 95055 A1 LPN109253856 -

unit position number (22..23)

SOF 97049 A1

SOF 98119 -

SOF 97098 A1

SGP 98092 SOF 98158 SOF 00092 A1 A1 LPN109256826 LPN109256834 -

LPN109253864 -

LPN109232249 -

LPN109256842 -

Remarks

1. 2.

If the BOARD parameter is not specified, all the error counters of all installed MCE boards of the exchange will be cleared. If the BOARD parameter is specified, only the error counters of the specified MCE will be cleared.

3-474

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-SYNCMCE: Query MCE Synchronism Parameter Supervision

On-line Commands

IT-SYNCMCE: Query MCE Synchronism Parameter Supervision


This command is used to verify the counter status and the existent error rate.
Compatibility
SOF 95055 A1 LPN109253856 SOF 97049 A1 SOF 98119 SOF 97098 A1 LPN109232249 SGP 98092 A1 LPN109256842 SOF 98158 SOF 00092 A1 LPN109256834 -

LPN109253864 -

LPN109256826 -

Input Format
IT-SYNCMCE [: BOARD = xx-xx];

Parameter

BOARD
Board number in the uni-pos format uni unit number (1..n)
n 16 68 76 SOF 95055 A1 SOF 97049 A1 SOF 98119 SOF 97098 A1 SGP 98092 SOF 98158 SOF 00092 A1 B1 A1 -

pos Compatibility:
SOF 95055 A1 LPN109253856 -

unit position number (22..23)

SOF 97049 A1

SOF 98119 -

SOF 97098 A1

SGP 98092 SOF 98158 SOF 00092 A1 A1 LPN109256826 LPN109256834 -

LPN109253864 -

LPN109232249 -

LPN109256842 -

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-475

IT-SYNCMCE: Query MCE Synchronism Parameter Supervision

On-line Commands

Output Format

If the BOARD parameter is not specified, all the installed MCE boards of the exchange and the monitored parameters will be displayed.
BOARD = xx-xx MUX = 1 SINCL = SINCR = MUX = 2 BOARD = xx-xx MUX = 1 SINCL = SINCL = SINCR = MUX = 2 SINCL = xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx DUR = xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx STE = MFT | WMI

ERROS = DUR DUR = =

TAXA = xxe-xx STE STE = MFT | WMI = MFT | WMI

ERROS = DUR =

TAXA = xxe-xx STE = MFT | WMI

If the BOARD parameter is specified, only the monitored parameters of the selected MCE will be displayed.
BOARD = xx-xx MUX = 1 SINCL = SINCR = MUX = 2 SINCL = xxx xxx xxx DUR = xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx STE = MFT | WMI

ERROS = DUR =

TAXA = xxe-xx STE = MFT | WMI

Remarks

1.

The parameters displayed by executing this command are: MUX STE MFT WMI Multiplexer of the MCE board (1..2) Operational status of the multiplexer: Failure Monitoring Waiting master initialization

SINCL Data error counter SINCR Synchronism error counter ERROS Number of transferred/received octets with error DUR Watching time of the MCE error counters (s) TAXA Existing error rate

3-476

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-SYNCREF: Create Synchronization Reference

On-line Commands

CR-SYNCREF: Create Synchronization Reference


This command is used to program digital trunking for use as the exchange synchronization reference.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
CR-SYNCREF : REF = x, BOARD = xx-xx [, TYP = DTR | CLK ] [, TRKINT = xx ] ;

Parameters

REF
Synchronization reference (1..n)
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 4 80 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

BOARD
Board number on the uni-pos format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

Unit number (1..n), where n is:


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

pos
n 01..05 17..20 A1

Unit position number (1..n), where n is:


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

TYP
Type of synchronization reference extracted: DTR digital trunk (PCM a 2 Mbit/s ) CLK external synchronization clock generator Note: Each board can have only one external reference of DTR type.

TRKINT
Trunk number (1 n), where n can be:

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-477

CR-SYNCREF: Create Synchronization Reference

On-line Commands

n SOF98119 SOF98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 16 20 F1 E1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Reference 1 has the highest priority and reference 4 the lowest When no synchronization reference is configured or none is active, the exchange assumes self-synchronized operating mode. On exchanges with LPN109232249 or LPN109256842 Control Program, each MXTS board shall only have one external reference with TYP = DTR. On exchanges with LPN109232249 or LPN109256842 Control Program, each SPU unit can have up to five external references created. On exchanges with LPN109232249 or LPN109256842 Control Program, the references pertaining the first unit are the number 1 to 5 and the ones of the second unit are the number 6 to 10 and so on and so forth.

3-478

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-SYNCREF: Query Synchronization Reference

On-line Commands

IT-SYNCREF: Query Synchronization Reference


This command is used to inquire synchronization references programmed for the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-SYNCREF [ : REF = x ] ;

Parameter

REF
Synchronization reference (1..n)
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 4 80 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Output Format

If parameter REF was specified, the board with the selected synchronization reference will be displayed in the following format:
REF = x BOARD = xx-xx AL = xxx LR = xxx LM = xxx

If parameter REF was not specified, all synchronization references created in the exchange will be displayed in the following format:
REF = x . . . REF = x BOARD = xx-xx . . . BOARD = xx-xx AL = xxx . . . AL = xxx LR = xxx . . . LR = xxx IS = xxx IS = xxx

Remarks

1.

The following messages may be displayed after parameter IS: (Failure) - the unit has synchronization trouble (No board) - the board is absent (Unit inactive) - the unit is inactive

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-479

MD-SYNCREF: Modify Synchronization References

On-line Commands

MD-SYNCREF: Modify Synchronization References


This command is used to modify a synchronization reference of the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-SYNCREF : REF = x [, AL = xxx ] [, LR = xxx ] [, IS = xxx ] ;

Parameters

REF
Synchronization reference (1..n)
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 4 80 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

AL
Dropout threshold (1..200) in 2048-Mbit/s bits

LR
Return threshold (1..50) in 2048-Mbit/s bits

IS
Sampling interval in seconds (1..100)

Remarks

1. 2.

The merit figure analysis parameters have been preset and should never be altered without prior consulting LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES. If no parameter was specified, the merit figure will not be included in the reference status analysis.

3-480

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

SU-SYNCREF: Suppress Synchronization Reference

On-line Commands

SU-SYNCREF: Suppress Synchronization Reference


This command is used to suppress a synchronization reference of the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
SU-SYNCREF : REF = x ;

Parameter

REF
Synchronization reference (1..n)
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 4 80 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

Remarks

1.

If the reference to be suppressed is the external reference currently in use by the synchronization system, the exchange will retrieve the highest hierarchy reference from its external reference table. If no other external references have been created or none is active, the exchange will assume self-synchronized operating mode.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-481

IT-SYNCSUP: Query Majority Vote Status

On-line Commands

IT-SYNCSUP: Query Majority Vote Status


This command is used to display the current status of units' majority voting.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-SYNCSUP [ : UNI = xx ] ;

Parameter

UNI
terminal unit number (1..n):
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 2 16 78 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Output Format

If parameter UNI was specified, the current status of majority voting in the selected unit will be displayed in the following format:
UNI = xx [ MASTER = x ] [ MAJORITY ]

For exchanges with LPN109232249 or LPN109256842 Control Program, if the parameter UNI is specified, the current status of the selected unit Majority Vote will be displayed, on the following format:
UNI=1 Board=1 Board=2 Board=3 Board=4 Board=5 UNI=2 Board=1 Board=2 Board=3 Board=4 Board=5 MESTRE SYNC SYNC SYNC FAILU MESTRE SYNC SYNC NPA BOARD NPA BOARD

To verify a clock specific for a unit, the operator shall specify the unit.

3-482

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-SYNCSUP: Query Majority Vote Status

On-line Commands

If parameter UNI was not specified, the current status of majority voting will be displayed for all active units in the exchange.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-483

IT-SYNCSUP: Query Majority Vote Status

On-line Commands

Remarks

1. 2.

Mnemonic MASTER indicates the clock considered master by the current clock. In exchanges equipped with three synchronization clocks, mnemonic MAJORITY indicates that the unit is adopting a majority criterion in selecting its synchronization reference.

3-484

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-TER: Create Terminal

On-line Commands

CR-TER: Create Terminal


This command is used to create all Central Stage terminals (CS side), connected to the Peripheral Stages (PS side) via V5.1 or V5.2 signaling protocol.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 001 001 001 -

Input Format
CR-TER : TER = xx-xx-xx&..&xx-xx-xx, { PS = xx | CIC = xxx };

Parameters

TER
Terminal number, on the uni-brd-cir format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n):


A1 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

brd
5 21 A1

terminal board number (1..n):


A1 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir
31 512 A1 -

board circuit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

PS
Peripheral Stage number (1..64) or (1..16) for the control software SOF 98119, LPN109253856 and LPN109232249.

CIC
Sequence number in a same 2048 kbps system. The rule for creating CICs is: First system: Second system: . . 1..31 33..63 . .

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-485

CR-TER: Create Terminal

On-line Commands

Remarks

1.

This command is valid for SOF 98119B1, LPN109253856.001, LPN109232249.001 Control Program versions or higher.

3-486

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-TER: Query Terminal

On-line Commands

IT-TER: Query Terminal


This command is used to display all exchange terminal, either with created or non-created operating status.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 001 001 001 -

Input Format
IT-TER [ : { TER = xx-xx-xx | STE = xxx | PS = xx } ] ;

Parameters

TER
Terminal number, on the uni-brd-cir format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n):


A1 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

brd
5 21 A1

terminal board number (1..n):


A1 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir
31 512 A1 -

board circuit number (1..n):


A1 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

STE
Terminal operating status: NCR non-created BLK blocked SRV in service

PS
Peripheral Stage number (1..64) or (1..16) for the control software SOF98119, LPN109253856 and LPN109232249.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-487

IT-TER: Query Terminal

On-line Commands

Output Format

If parameter TER was specified, the number of the subscriber created for the terminal will be displayed, as well as the operating status, in the following format:
TER = xx-xx-xx SCG = xx NCAA = xx-xx-xx-xx STE = xxx SUB = xxxx-xxxx

The SCG (circuit gain) and NCAA (B channels amount group available for access) parameters will only be listed if are applicable to terminal type. If parameter STE was specified, all terminal created in the exchange meeting the given operating status will be displayed in the following format:
STE = xxx TER = xx-xx-xx . . . xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx . . . xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx . . . xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx . . . xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx . . . xx-xx-xx

If parameter PS was specified, all terminal created in this PS will be displayed, as well as the assigned trunk circuit ID code and the terminal operating status, in the following format:
TER = xx-xx-xx . . . TER = xx-xx-xx PS . . . PS = x = x CIC = x . . . CIC = x STE = xxx . . . STE = xxx

If no parameter was specified, all terminals with the respective assigned created subscriber, as well as its circuit gain and operating status, will be displayed in the following format:
TER = xx-xx-xx . . . TER = xx-xx-xx SCG = x NCAA . . . NCAA = xx-xx-xx-xx STE = xxx SUB = xxxx-xxxx

SCG = x

= xx-xx-xx-xx STE = xxx

SUB = xxxx-xxxx

The SCG (circuit gain) and NCAA (B channels amount group available for access) parameters will only be listed if are applicable to terminal type.
Remarks

1. The output format of parameter SUB can de modified through Options Menu, "Output Format" submenu, on the CSR application main window.

3-488

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-TER: Modify Terminal

On-line Commands

MD-TER: Modify Terminal


This command is used to modify a subscriber terminal gain (parameter SCG), and/or the parameter NCAA. The IRC and PDG parameters are only utilized for subscribers with QSIG signaling.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 001 001 001 -

Input Format
MD-TER : TER = xx-xx-xx [, SCG = xx ] [, NCAA = xx-xx-xx-xx ] [, PDG = xxxx ] [, IRC = xxxx ];

Parameters

TER
Terminal number on the uni-brd-cir format: uni
16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n), where n can be:


A1 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

brd cir

terminal board number (1..21) board circuit number (1..32)

SCG
Subscriber circuit gain (see Remarks, item 4). Default value = 3.
n (1..15) (16..40) SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249 LPN109256842 LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 004 006 001 005 001 003 -

NCAA
Amount of B channels groups available for access on the format G1-G2-G3-G4, where: G1= number of B channels allocated for Group 1; G2= number of B channels allocated for Group 2; G3= number of B channels allocated for Group 3; G4= number of B channels allocated for Group 4; The sum of the values attributed to G1, G2, G3 and G4 shall be at most 30; G1 can never be equal to zero, and the group that follows a group with value 0 shall be mandatory 0, that is, if G2 =0, G3 and G4 shall be 0; if G3 = 0, G4 shall be 0.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-489

MD-TER: Modify Terminal

On-line Commands

Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 E3 D3 001 001 001 001

PDG
Pre-digit used to identify a virtual extension (1to 8 or WPDG) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 E6 D6 001 001 001 001 001 001

IRC
Corporative Network Identifier (1 to 40 or NIRC) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 E6 001 001 -

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4.

The SCG parameter is optional only for SOF98119E3 and 98158D3. The NCAA parameter is valid only for the versions, which the SCG parameter is optional (SOF98119E3 and SOF98158D3). Its default value is 30-0-0-0. This command is only valid for MTA with 32 terminals. The two impedances below are required to synthesize parameters for Z interface of BZ5000. Zo Exchange Impedance: Is the exchange impedance of a 2-wire equipment analog port. That is the impedance to be presented by the line circuit across tip/ring connection points of a MTA board port. Balance Impedance: Is the impedance of the balance test network presented at a 2wire interface. Impedance presented by the 2-wire line across the tip/ring of the line circuit, which should produce the required trans-hybrid balance.

Zt

The network circuits below are used to represent these impedances.

3-490

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-TER: Modify Terminal

On-line Commands

The table below presents the options for line parameters of BZ5000.
Gain (n) 1 Relative Levels (dBr) Input Output 0 -3 Exchange Impedance (Zo) Network Type A Rs = 900 ohms Network Type A Rs = 900 ohms Network Type A Rs = 900 ohms Network Type A Rs = 900 ohms Network Type A Rs = 900 ohms Network Type A Rs = 900 ohms Network Type A Rs = 900 ohms Network Type A Rs = 900 ohms Network Type A Rs = 900 ohms Network Type A Rs = 900 ohms Network Type A Rs = 900 ohms Network Type A Rs = 900 ohms Network Type A Rs = 900 ohms Network Type A Rs = 900 ohms Network Type A Rs = 900 ohms Network Type A Rs = 600 ohms Network Type A Rs = 600 ohms Network Type A Rs = 600 ohms Balance Impedance (Zt) Network Type C Rs = 0 ohms Rp = 800 ohms Cp = 50 nF Network Type C Rs = 0 ohms Rp = 800 ohms Cp = 50 nF Network Type C Rs = 0 ohms Rp = 800 ohms Cp = 50 nF Network Type C Rs = 0 ohms Rp = 800 ohms Cp = 50 nF Network Type C Rs = 0 ohms Rp = 800 ohms Cp = 50 nF Network Type C Rs = 0 ohms Rp = 1650 ohms Cp = 5 nF Network Type C Rs = 0 ohms Rp = 1650 ohms Cp = 5 nF Network Type C Rs = 0 ohms Rp = 1650 ohms Cp = 5 nF Network Type C Rs = 0 ohms Rp = 1650 ohms Cp = 5 nF Network Type C Rs = 0 ohms Rp = 1650 ohms Cp = 5 nF Network Type A Rs = 900 ohms Network Type A Rs = 900 ohms Network Type A Rs = 900 ohms Network Type A Rs = 900 ohms Network Type A Rs = 900 ohms Network Type A Rs = 600 ohms Network Type A Rs = 600 ohms Network Type A Rs = 600 ohms

-5

-7

-2

-5

+3

-7

-3

-5

-7

-2

-5

10

+3

-7

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

0 0 0 -2 +3 0 0 0

-3 -5 -7 -5 -7 -3 -5 -7

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-491

MD-TER: Modify Terminal

On-line Commands

Gain (n) 19 20 21

Relative Levels (dBr) Input Output -2 -5 +3 0 -7 -3

22

-5

23

-7

24

-2

-5

25

+3

-7

26

-3

27

-5

28

-7

29

-2

-5

30

+3

-7

31

-3

Exchange Impedance (Zo) Network Type A Rs = 600 ohms Network Type A Rs = 600 ohms Network Type C Rs = 220 ohms Rp = 820 ohms Cp = 115 nF Network Type C Rs = 220 ohms Rp = 820 ohms Cp = 115 nF Network Type C Rs = 220 ohms Rp = 820 ohms Cp = 115 nF Network Type C Rs = 220 ohms Rp = 820 ohms Cp = 115 nF Network Type C Rs = 220 ohms Rp = 820 ohms Cp = 115 nF Network Type C Rs = 300 ohms Rp = 1000 ohms Cp = 220 nF Network Type C Rs = 300 ohms Rp = 1000 ohms Cp = 220 nF Network Type C Rs = 300 ohms Rp = 1000 ohms Cp = 220 nF Network Type C Rs = 300 ohms Rp = 1000 ohms Cp = 220 nF Network Type C Rs = 300 ohms Rp = 1000 ohms Cp = 220 nF Network Type B Rs = 600 ohms Cs = 1 uF Network Type B Rs = 600 ohms Cs = 1 uF Network Type B Rs = 600 ohms Cs = 1 uF Network Type B Rs = 600 ohms Cs = 1 uF

32

-5

33

-7

34

-2

-5

Balance Impedance (Zt) Network Type A Rs = 600 ohms Network Type A Rs = 600 ohms Network Type C Rs = 220 ohms Rp = 820 ohms Cp = 115 nF Network Type C Rs = 220 ohms Rp = 820 ohms Cp = 115 nF Network Type C Rs = 220 ohms Rp = 820 ohms Cp = 115 nF Network Type C Rs = 220 ohms Rp = 820 ohms Cp = 115 nF Network Type C Rs = 220 ohms Rp = 820 ohms Cp = 115 nF Network Type C Rs = 370 ohms Rp = 620ohms Cp = 310 nF Network Type C Rs = 370 ohms Rp = 620ohms Cp = 310 nF Network Type C Rs = 370 ohms Rp = 620 ohms Cp = 310 nF Network Type C Rs = 370 ohms Rp = 620 ohms Cp = 310 nF Network Type C Rs = 370 ohms Rp = 620 ohms Cp = 310 nF Network Type C Rs = 150 ohms Rp = 830 ohms Cp = 72 nF Network Type C Rs = 150 ohms Rp = 830 ohms Cp = 72 nF Network Type C Rs = 150 ohms Rp = 830 ohms Cp = 72 nF Network Type C Rs = 150 ohms Rp = 830 ohms Cp = 72 nF

3-492

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-TER: Modify Terminal

On-line Commands

Gain (n) 35

Relative Levels (dBr) Input Output +3 -7

Exchange Impedance (Zo) Network Type B Rs = 600 ohms Cs = 1 uF Network Type C Rs = 270 ohms Rp = 750 ohms Cp = 150 nF Network Type C Rs = 270 ohms Rp = 750 ohms Cp = 150 nF Network Type C Rs = 270 ohms Rp = 750 ohms Cp = 150 nF Network Type C Rs = 270 ohms Rp = 750 ohms Cp = 150 nF Network Type C Rs = 270 ohms Rp = 750 ohms Cp = 150 nF

36

-3

37

-5

38

-7

39

-2

-5

40

+3

-7

Balance Impedance (Zt) Network Type C Rs = 150 ohms Rp = 830 ohms Cp = 72 nF Network Type C Rs = 270 ohms Rp = 750 ohms Cp = 150 nF Network Type C Rs = 270 ohms Rp = 750 ohms Cp = 150 nF Network Type C Rs = 270 ohms Rp = 750 ohms Cp = 150 nF Network Type C Rs = 270 ohms Rp = 750 ohms Cp = 150 nF Network Type C Rs = 270 ohms Rp = 750 ohms Cp = 150 nF

5.

The PDG parameter is valid for exchanges with SOF 98119E6 and SOF 98158D6 Control Program versions or higher.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-493

SU-TER: Suppress Terminal

On-line Commands

SU-TER: Suppress Terminal


This command is used to suppress a terminal in exchanges using V5.1 or V5.2 interfaces.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 001 001 001 -

Input Format
SU-TER : TER = xx-xx-xx&..&xx-xx-xx ;

Parameter

TER
Terminal number on the uni-brd-cir format: uni
16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n), where n can be:


A1 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd cir

terminal board number (1..21) board circuit number (1..32)

Remarks

1.

The command SU-TER is valid to suppress terminals created in exchanges that use SOF98119 Control Program, on CS side.

3-494

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-TERSTE: Modify Terminal Status

On-line Commands

MD-TERSTE: Modify Terminal Status


This command is used to alter a terminal operating status.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-TERSTE : TER = xx-xx-xx, STE = xxx ;

Parameters

TER
Terminal number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
16 64 A1 -

number of the terminal unit (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

brd cir

terminal board number (1..21) board circuit number (1..32)

Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001

STE
Terminal operating status: SRV in service BLK blocked

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-495

IT-TON: Query Exchange Control Tones

On-line Commands

IT-TON: Query Exchange Control Tones


This command is used to display the cadence values of the exchange control tones.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 C3 B3 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-TON ;

Output Format

All exchange control tones are displayed with their values of cadence.
RC = xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx BT = xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx SRC = xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx IOT = xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx DT = xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx UNT SDT CWW AOT = = = = xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx PPAT = xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx PST = xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx CCS = xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx CGTT = xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx

Remarks

1.

Each tone has the following meaning, with the indicated default cadence value:
RC DT CWW PST BT UNT AOT CCS SRC SDT PPAT CGTT IOT Ringing current { 1000, 4000, 1000, 4000 } Dial tone { 0, 0, 0, 0 } Call waiting warning tone { 50, 250, 50, 5000 } Programming warning tone { 100, 100, 100, 100 } Busy tone { 250, 250, 250, 250 } Inaccessible number tone { 250, 250, 750, 250 } Accepted operation tone (acknowledgement) { 250, 250, 250, 2000 } Ring back tone { 1000, 4000, 1000, 4000 } Special ringing current { 350, 300, 350, 4000 } Special dial tone { 950, 50, 950, 50 } Prepaid alert tone { 100, 100, 100, 100 } Congestion tone { 250, 250, 250, 250 } Incorrect operation tone { 250, 250, 250, 250 }

3-496

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-TON: Query Exchange Control Tones

On-line Commands

2.

The following tones were included (SOF 98119F1, SOF 98158E1, LPN109253856.001, LPN109253864.001, LPN109232249.001 and LPN109256842.001): CWT CTI Call Waiting Tone { 1000, 4000, 1000, 4000 } Initial Ringing Current {200,0,0,0} used to activate the CAID FSK.

3.

The following tone was included (LPN109253856.004): INTT Intrusion Tone { 50, 250, 50, 5000 }

4.

When the cadence is { 0, 0, 0, 0 }, the tone is continuous.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-497

MD-TON: Modify Exchange Control Tones

On-line Commands

MD-TON: Modify Exchange Control Tones


This command is used to modify the cadences of the exchange control tones.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 C3 B3 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-TON : {[ TON = xxxx, [CAD = xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx], [ FREQ = xxxxxxxxx] ] | [ INI ]};

Parameters

TON
Exchange control tones: Each tone has the following the meaning, with its respective value default of cadence: RC DT CWW PST BT UNT AOT CCS SRC SDT PPAT CGTT IOT Ringing current { 1000, 4000, 1000, 4000 } Dial tone { 0, 0, 0, 0 } Call waiting warning tone { 50, 250, 50, 5000 } Programming warning tone { 100, 100, 100, 100 } Busy tone { 250, 250, 250, 250 } Inaccessible number tone { 250, 250, 750, 250 } Accepted operation tone (confirmation) { 250, 250, 250, 2000 } Ring back tone { 1000, 4000, 1000, 4000 } Special ringing current { 350, 300, 350, 4000 } Special dial tone { 950, 50, 950, 50 } Prepaid alert tone { 100, 100, 100, 100 } Congestion tone { 250, 250, 250, 250 } Incorrect operation tone { 250, 250, 250, 250 }

Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 C3 B3 001 001 001 001 001 001

The following tones were incorporated: CWT Waiting call control tone { 1000, 4000, 1000, 4000 } CTI Initial Ringing Current { 200, 0, 0, 0 } To activate CAID FSK. Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 F1 E1 001 001 001 001 001 001

The following tone was included (LPN109253856.004): INTT Intrusion Tone { 50, 250, 50, 5000 }

3-498

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-TON: Modify Exchange Control Tones

On-line Commands

Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 004 001 -

CAD
Value of the cadence of control tones, in milliseconds (50..10000)

FREQ
Frequency of the exchange control tones: HZ425 (frequency of 425Hz); HZ25 (frequency of 25 Hz). HZ440 (frequency of 440Hz); HZ480 (frequency of 480Hz); HZ350e440 (frequencies of 350 and 440 Hz); HZ440e480 (frequencies of 440 and 480 Hz); HZ480e620 (frequencies of 480 and 620 Hz). For LPN109253856 e LPN109253864 Control Programs, the following option was included: HZ400 (frequency of 400Hz)

INI
Put the exchange control tones in their default values.

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

To obtain a continuous tone, specify cadence as { 0, 0, 0, 0 }; The parameter FREQ shall only be used if the BZ5000 is equipped with the MPSC boards with two links. If the parameter FREQ is not specified, the default values will be used - 25 Hz for RC (Ringing Current), SRC (Special Ringing Current) and CTI (Initial Ringing Current), and 425Hz for the other tones.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-499

DS-TRASUP: Deactivate Traffic Supervision

On-line Commands

DS-TRASUP: Deactivate Traffic Supervision


This command is used to deactivate the supervision of the exchange traffic flow.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
DS-TRASUP : SUP = xxx ;

Parameter

SUP
Type of traffic supervision: ORG traffic supervision per unit CLT traffic supervision per type of call CGR supervision of congestion per route BUH traffic supervision for finding the busy hour

Remarks

1. 2.

Results gathered up to deactivating traffic supervision are lost. Deactivated supervision is automatically erased from the traffic supervision programming.

3-500

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IP-TRASUP: Query Traffic Supervision Programming

On-line Commands

IP-TRASUP: Query Traffic Supervision Programming


This command is used to display traffic supervision programming.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IP-TRASUP [ : SUP = xxx ] ;

Parameter

SUP
Type of traffic supervision: ORG traffic supervision per unit CLT traffic supervision per type of call CGR supervision of congestion per route BUH traffic supervision for finding the busy hour

Output Format

For ORG and CLT type supervision, the starting date and time, duration and supervision status are displayed in the following format
SUP = xxx NSUP = x DAT = xx-xx-xx HOU = xx:xx:xx DUR = xxxx In Course . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SUP = xxx NSUP = x DAT = xx-xx-xx HOU = xx:xx:xx DUR = xxxx In Course

For BUH type traffic supervision, the routes programmed for supervision are displayed in the following format:
SUP = BUH ROT = xxx&..&xxx

If parameter SUP was not specified, the supervision programmed for all types of traffic supervision are displayed in the above described format.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-501

IT-TRASUP: Query Traffic Supervision Result

On-line Commands

IT-TRASUP: Query Traffic Supervision Result


This command is used for inquiring the traffic supervision results.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-TRASUP : { SUP = ORG, NSUP = x [, { ORG = TRK [, ROUT = xxxxx ] | ORG = MFC [, UNI = xx ] | ORG = REGS [, UNI = xx ] } ] | SUP = CGR [, ROUT = xxxxx] | SUP = CLT, NSUP = x [, TYP = xxxxxx ] | SUP = BUH [, ROUT = xxxxx ] [, DAY = xxx ] } ;

Parameters

SUP
Type of traffic supervision: ORG traffic supervision per unit CLT traffic supervision per type of call CGR supervision of congestion per route BUH traffic supervision for finding the busy hour

NSUP
Number of supervisions (1..n) n=9 for ORG supervisions n=3 for BUH, CLT or CGR supervisions Compatibility:
nSOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 3 4 A1 E6 A1 D6 001 001 001 001 001 001

ORG
Device type: TRK MFC DTMF trunk MFC sender/receiver DTMF receiver

3-502

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-TRASUP: Query Traffic Supervision Result

On-line Commands

ROUT
Route ID: E1..En incoming routes B1..Bn two-way routes S1..Sn outgoing routes
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 32 1024 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

UNI
Terminal unit number (1..n) Compatibility:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 2 16 68 F1 A1 E1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

TYP
Type of call: IND BLC RINGT HD INTRA LOC REG DDD IDD FRP CDC LSS ISS TANDEM RSTPP PSBC PSCW PSAC PSND PTTS PSP PSN PSAM PSVP SPE1..SPE8 INCAL TRCALL indeterminate blocked ringing test dial test intra-exchange local regional national international non-tolled direct dialing collect direct dialing local special service long distance special service tandem call reset payphone coin counting program Outgoing Call Controlled Blocking supplementary service program Call Waiting supplementary service program Automatic Wake-Up supplementary service program Don't Disturb supplementary service program Temporary Transference supplementary service program Subscriber Password program night answering service program automatic message service program Virtual PABX carrier-chosen special calls incoming calls 180s call answering timing

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-503

IT-TRASUP: Query Traffic Supervision Result

On-line Commands

DAY
Weekday: SUN Sunday MON Monday TUE Tuesday WED Wednesday THU Thursday FRI Friday SAT Saturday

Output Format

Traffic Supervision per Unit The following measurements are taken during traffic supervision on each trunk, each MFC sender/receiver and each DTMF receiver in every exchange unit:
Busy BusyEf Traf TrafEf TentDTMF Busy TMedEsp TMedBusy EspTom TentDEC TentTOTAL Number of seizures Number of effective seizures Total traffic (Erlang) Effective traffic (Erlang) Number of seizure attempts of DTMF receivers Number of DTMF receiver seizures Average DTMF receiver waiting time Average DTMF receiver seizure time Average dial tone waiting time. Number of seizure attempts of decadic pulse receivers Total number of seizure attempts of decadic and DTMF receivers

If ORG = TRK was specified, the results obtained for all exchange created trunks are displayed grouped by route, in the following format
SUP = xxx NSUP = x DAT = xx-xx-xx HOU = xx:xx:xx DUR = xxxx ROUT = xxxxx (xxxxxxxx) TRK = xx-xx-xx Busy = xxxxx BusyEf = xxxxx Traf = x,xxE TrafEf = x,xxE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRK = xx-xx-xx Busy = xxxxx BusyEf = xxxxx Traf = x,xxE TrafEf = x,xxE TOTAL Busy = xxxxx BusyEf = xxxxx Traf = x,xxE TrafEf = x,xxE [ TOTAL TANDEM Busy = xxxxx BusyEf = xxxxx Traf = x,xxE TrafEf = x,xxE ] . . . . . . ROUT = xxxxx (xxxxxxxx) TRK = xx-xx-xx Busy = xxxxx BusyEf = xxxxx Traf = x,xxE TrafEf = x,xxE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRK = xx-xx-xx Busy = xxxxx BusyEf = xxxxx Traf = x,xxE TrafEf = x,xxE TOTAL Busy = xxxxx BusyEf = xxxxx Traf = x,xxE TrafEf = x,xxE [ TOTAL TANDEM Busy = xxxxx BusyEf = xxxxx Traf = x,xxE TrafEf = x,xxE ]

3-504

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-TRASUP: Query Traffic Supervision Result

On-line Commands

If parameter ROUT was specified, only traffic results for the selected route are displayed. The total of tandem calls will only display when the supervised exchange has tandem calls. If ORG = MFC was specified, the results obtained for all MFC senders/receivers are displayed in the following format:
SUP = xxx NSUP = x DAT = xx-xx-xx HOU = xx:xx:xx DUR = xxxx MFC = xx-xx-xx E Busy = xxxxx BusyEf = xxxxx Traf = x,xxE TrafEf = x,xxE S Busy = xxxxx BusyEf = xxxxx Traf = x,xxE TrafEf = x,xxE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MFC = xx-xx-xx E Busy = xxxxx BusyEf = xxxxx Traf = x,xxE TrafEf = x,xxE S Busy = xxxxx BusyEf = xxxxx Traf = x,xxE TrafEf = x,xxE TOTAL Entrada Busy = xxxxx BusyEf = xxxxx Traf = x,xxE TrafEf = x,xxE TOTAL Sada Busy = xxxxx BusyEf = xxxxx Traf = x,xxE TrafEf = x,xxE

If parameter UNI was specified, only traffic results for the selected unit MFC senders/receivers are displayed. MFC sender/receiver supervision data are displayed separately for incoming and outgoing traffic. If ORG = REGS, was specified, the results obtained for all exchange DTMF receivers are displayed in the following format:
SUP = xxx NSUP = x DAT = xx-xx-xx HOU = xx:xx:xx DUR = xxxx UNI = xx TentDTMF = xxxxx Busy = xxxxx Traf = x,xxE TMedEsp = xxxxx TMedBusy = xxxxx EspTom = xxxxx TentDEC = xxxxx Busy = xxxxx Traf = x,xxE TMedEsp = xxxxx TMedBusy = xxxxx EspTom = xxxxx TentTOTAL = xxxxx Busy = xxxxx Traf = x,xxE TMedEsp = xxxxx TMedBusy = xxxxx EspTom = xxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UNI = xx TentDTMF = xxxxx Busy = xxxxx Traf = x,xxE TMedEsp = xxxxx TMedBusy = xxxxx EspTom = xxxxx TentDEC = xxxxx Busy = xxxxx Traf = x,xxE TMedEsp = xxxxx TMedBusy = xxxxx EspTom = xxxxx TentTOTAL = xxxxx Busy = xxxxx Traf = x,xxE TMedEsp = xxxxx TMedBusy = xxxxx EspTom = xxxxx

If parameter UNI was specified, only traffic results for the selected unit DTMF receivers are displayed. If parameter ORG was not displayed, the results obtained for all trunks, MFC senders/receivers and DTMF receivers are displayed in the format described above.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-505

IT-TRASUP: Query Traffic Supervision Result

On-line Commands

Traffic Supervision per Type of Call The following measurements are taken during traffic supervision per type of call, for each type of call:
Chm ChmEf Traf TrafEf TMedChmEf ChmNEF LO NR DOR DSC Co-0 Co-1 Co-2 Co-3 OU ChmEfTL Number of calls; Number of effective calls Offered traffic (in Erlang) Effective traffic (in Erlang); Average elapsed time for effective calls (in seconds); Average elapsed time for non-effective calls (in seconds); Number of calling party disconnection during the answering phase Number of unanswered calls Disconnection by the origin during the answering phase Number of calls incomplete due to calling party disconnection Number of faults by timeout in signaling exchange with the origin Number of lack of trunks or common units or other resources Number of incomplete calls due to reception of A4 or B4 signals. Number of faults or timeouts in signaling exchange with the destination (output) Number of incomplete calls due to reception of B3, B7, B8, B9, B10 to B15 signals Number of effective calls with answer superior the limit time (valid for SOF 98119F1 and SOF 98158E1 versions or higher)

If parameter TYP was specified, the results obtained for the selected type of call are displayed in the following format:
SUP = xxx NSUP = x DAT = xx-xx-xx HOU = xx:xx:xx DUR = xxxx TYP = xxxxx Chm = xxxxx ChmEf = xxxxx TMedChmEf = xxxx Traf = xxxxx TrafEf = xxxxx ChmNEF = xxxxx LO = xxxxx NR = xxxxx DOR = xxxxx Co-0 = xxxxx Co-1 = xxxxx Co-2 = xxxxx Co-3 = xxxxx DSC = xxxxx OU = xxxxx

If parameter TYP was not specified, the results obtained for all types of call are displayed in the following format:
SUP = xxx NSUP = x DAT = xx-xx-xx HOU = xx:xx:xx DUR = xxxx TYP = xxxxx Chm = xxxxx ChmEf = xxxxx TMedChmEf = xxxx Traf = xxxxx TrafEf = xxxxx . . . . . . . . . TYP = xxxxx Chm = xxxxx ChmEf = xxxxx TMedChmEf = xxxx Traf = xxxxx TrafEf = xxxxx TOTAL Chm = xxxxx ChmEf = xxxxx TMedChmEf = xxxx Traf = xxxxx TrafEf = xxxxx

3-506

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-TRASUP: Query Traffic Supervision Result

On-line Commands

Supervision of Congestion per Route The following measurements are taken during traffic supervision per route congestion, for each route of the exchange:
CgR TCgR PCgR ChmPer Number of congestion; Time of congestion (in seconds); Percentage of congested time; Number of calls lost to congestion.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-507

IT-TRASUP: Query Traffic Supervision Result

On-line Commands

If parameter ROUT was specified, the results obtained for the selected route are displayed in the following format:
SUP = xxx NSUP = x DAT = xx-xx-xx HOU = xx:xx:xx DUR = xxxx ROUT = xxxxx CgR = xxxx TCgR = xx:xx:xx PCgR = xx,xx% ChmPer = xxx

If parameter ROUT was not specified, the results obtained for all exchange routes are displayed in the following format:
SUP = xxx NSUP = x DAT = xx-xx-xx HOU = xx:xx:xx DUR = xxxx ROUT = xxxxx CgR = xxxx TCgR = xx:xx:xx PCgR = xx,xx% ChmPer = xxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ROUT = xxxxx CgR = xxxx TCgR = xx:xx:xx PCgR = xx,xx% ChmPer = xxx

Traffic Supervision for Finding the Busy Hour To find the Busy Hour (BUH) traffic measurements are carried out at 15-minute intervals over the last 7 exchange operating days. If parameter ROUT was specified, the BUH and traffic in the specified route BUH are displayed for each day of the week before the inquiring date. Results are displayed in the following format:
ROUT = xxxxx DAY = xxx BUH = xx:xx to xx:xx . . . . . . DAY = xxx BUH = xx:xx to xx:xx Traf = xxxxx . . . Traf = xxxxx

If no parameter was specified, the exchange BUH and BUH traffic are displayed for each day of the week before the inquiring date. Results are displayed in the following format:
DAY = xxx BUH = xx:xx to xx:xx . . . . . . BUH = xx:xx to xx:xx Traf = xxxxx . . . Traf = xxxxx

DAY = xxx

If parameter DAY was specified, the exchange BUH and traffic in the BUH on the selected day are displayed in the following format:
DAY = xxx BUH = xx:xx to xx:xx Traf = xxxxx

If parameters ROUT and DAY were specified, the BUH and traffic in the BUH on the selected route and weekday are displayed in the following format:
ROUT = xxxxx DAY = xxx BUH = xx:xx to xx:xx Traf = xxxxx

3-508

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-TRASUP: Query Traffic Supervision Result

On-line Commands

Remarks

1.

Outage of an exchange unit in the time elapsed from beginning traffic supervision to inquiring the results will void the results obtained for trunks and MFC senders/receivers controlled by the unit. The voided results are not displayed during inquiring. A trunk is considered successfully seized when: the ongoing call is answered; MFC signaling exchange terminates with end-of-selection signal B2, B3, B4, B7, or B8; the calling party disconnects during MFC signaling exchange; the calling party disconnects before elapsing the answering timing. MFC signaling exchange terminates with valid end-of-selection signal the calling party disconnects during MFC signaling exchange

2.

3.

A MFC sender/receiver is considered successfully seized when: -

4.

a call is considered effective when it is answered.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-509

PR-TRASUP: Program Traffic Supervision

On-line Commands

PR-TRASUP: Program Traffic Supervision


This command is used to program traffic supervision.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
PR-TRASUP : { SUP = { ORG | CLT | CGR }, NSUP = x [, DAT = xx-xx-xx, HOU = xx[-xx[-xx]] ] [, DUR = xxxx ] | SUP = BUH, ROUT = xxxxx [PER]} ;

Parameters

SUP
Type of traffic supervision: ORG traffic supervision per unit CLT traffic supervision per type of call CGR supervision of congestion per route BUH traffic supervision for finding the busy hour

NSUP
Number of supervisions (1..n) n=9 for ORG supervisions n=3 for BUH, CLT or CGR supervisions Compatibility:
nSOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 3 4 A1 E6 A1 D6 001 001 001 001 001 001

DAT
Date in the yy-mm-dd format: yy year (00..99) mm month (01..12) dd day (01..31)

HOU
Supervision starting time in format ho[-mi[-se]]: ho hour (00..23) mi minute (00..59) (optional) se second (00.59) (optional)

DUR
Duration of supervision in minutes (1..1440)

3-510

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

PR-TRASUP: Program Traffic Supervision

On-line Commands

ROUT
Route ID: E1..En incoming routes B1..Bn two-way routes S1..Sn outgoing routes
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 32 1024 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

PER
Periodic Supervision Used for traffic and performance supervision configuration. PER mnemonic is valid for exchanges with SOF 98119E6, SOF 98158D6, LPN109253856.001, LPN109253864.001, LPN109232249.001, LPN109256842.001 Control Program Versions and higher.

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Up to 9 traffic supervisions may be programmed per unit, 3 traffic supervisions per type of call and 3 congestion supervisions per route. BUH supervision may be programmed for up to 3 routes. The exchange BUH supervision is permanently active. If parameters DAT and HOU were not specified, supervision starts immediately. If parameter DUR was not specified, supervision will last for an hour. If PER parameter is specified, four subsequent and cyclic supervisions of each type will be programmed, each one with 15 minutes, during all the period that the supervision is programmed.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-511

REP-TRASUP: Traffic Supervision Report

On-line Commands

REP-TRASUP: Traffic Supervision Report


This command is used to write on disk the result of traffic supervision.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
REP-TRASUP : { SUP = { ORG | CLT | CGR }, NSUP = x | SUP = BUH [, ROUT = xxxxx ] [, DAY = xxx ] } ;

Parameters

SUP
Type of traffic supervision: ORG traffic supervision per unit CLT traffic supervision per type of call CGR supervision of congestion per route BUH traffic supervision for finding the busy hour

NSUP
Number of supervisions (1..n) n=9 for ORG supervisions n=3 for BUH, CLT or CGR supervisions Compatibility:
nSOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 3 4 A1 E6 A1 D6 001 001 001 001 001 001

ROUT
Route ID: E1..En incoming routes B1..Bn two-way routes S1..Sn outgoing routes
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 32 1024 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

3-512

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

REP-TRASUP: Traffic Supervision Report

On-line Commands

DAY
Weekday: SUN Sunday MON Monday TUE Tuesday WED Wednesday THU Thursday FRI Friday SAT Saturday

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

During traffic supervision for finding the busy hour, the exchange traffic data will be written if parameter ROUT was not specified. The traffic supervision data file formats are described in the Exchange Operating Manual.. Traffic supervision per unit data are written to file MMDDHOMI.ORG, where: MMDD supervision starting month and day HOMI supervision starting hour and minute

4.

Traffic supervision per type of call data are written to file MMDDHOMI.CLT, where: MMDD supervision starting month and day HOMI supervision starting hour and minute

5.

Route congestion supervision data are written to file MMDDHOMI.CGR, where: MMDD supervision starting month and day HOMI supervision starting hour and minute.

6.

Traffic supervision for finding the exchange BUH data are written to file CEMMDD.BUH, where: MMDD supervision starting month and day. Traffic supervision for finding a route BUH data are written to file RRRMMDD.BUH, where RRR number of route MMDD supervision starting month and day

7.

8.

Traffic supervision data files are written to the connected exchange directory, as indicated by parameter PATH of command CR-EXC.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-513

RP-TRASUP: Remove Traffic Supervision Programming

On-line Commands

RP-TRASUP: Remove Traffic Supervision Programming


This command is used to erase traffic supervision programming.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
RP-TRASUP : { SUP = { ORG | CLT | CGR }, NSUP = x&..&x | SUP = BUH, ROUT = xxxxx } ;

Parameters

SUP
Type of traffic supervision: ORG traffic supervision per unit CLT traffic supervision per type of call CGR supervision of congestion per route BUH traffic supervision for finding the busy hour

NSUP
Number of supervisions (1..n) n=9 for ORG supervisions n=3 for BUH, CLT or CGR supervisions Compatibility:
nSOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 3 4 A1 E6 A1 D6 001 001 001 001 001 001

ROUT
Route ID: E1..En incoming routes B1..Bn two-way routes S1..Sn outgoing routes
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 32 1024 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1.

When traffic supervision programming is erased, its data are lost.

3-514

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-TRK: Create Trunk

On-line Commands

CR-TRK: Create Trunk


This command is used to assign trunks to a route. The route should have been set up previously.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
CR-TRK : TRK = xx-xx-xx&..&xx-xx-xx, ROUT = xxxxx [, CIC = xxxx ] [, SNL = xxx ] [, GRX = xx ] [, GTX = xx ] [ ,ACS = xxx ] [, MCB = ATV ITV ] [,V5INT= xxx];

Parameters

TRK
Trunk number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni terminal unit number (1..n)
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 2 16 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

brd
13..20 01..20 01..19 01..05 A1 B1 D1 -

trunk board number


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir
31 512 A1 -

board circuit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-515

CR-TRK: Create Trunk

On-line Commands

ROUT
Route ID: E1..En incoming routes B1..Bn two-way routes S1..Sn outgoing routes
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 32 1024 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

3-516

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-TRK: Create Trunk

On-line Commands

CIC
Trunk circuit ID code number (1..4096) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

SNL
Trunk line signaling: For SOF 98119, LPN109253856, LPN109232249 Control Programs, the following options are valid: CC DEC PEM CEM 5SS R2D TUP ISUP direct current decadic pulsed E+M direct E+M 5S signaling digital R2 TUP signaling ISUP signaling

For SOF 98158, LPN109253864 and LPN109256842 Control Programs, the following options are valid: R2D ISUP V52 digital R2 ISUP signaling V5.2 Signaling

For the versions of the control program SOF 98119F1, SOF 98158E1, LPN109253856.001, LPN109253864.001, LPN109232249.001 or later, they have been also included the options: Two-way one-bit Rural Supervision/ Address Signaling (Ukraine and Russia) 2-bit Supervision/Address Signaling for CAS2-bit decadic pulse address signaling (Ukraine and Russia) MFSH 2-bit Supervision/Address Signaling for CAS2-bit MF-shuttle address signaling (Ukraine and Russia) R2DUA 2-bit Supervision/Address Signaling for CAS2-bit Ukrainian and Russian R2MFC address signaling. DP1 DP2

GRX
Gain applied to reception channel

GTX
Gain applied to transmission channel

ACS
Accessibility: NRL PRT Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

normal protected

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-517

CR-TRK: Create Trunk

On-line Commands

MCB
B code matrix (1..30) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

V5INT
V5 interface number (1..n) Compatibility:
n 255 16 SOF 95055 SOF 97049 SOF 98119 SOF 97098 SGP 98092 SOF 98158 SOF 00092 B1 D1 B1 D1 A1 C1 A1

n LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249 LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 16 8 001 001 005 001 001 002 001 001 001

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4.

A trunk is created in blocked operating status (BLK) and should be unblocked by the MD-TRKSTE command . A list of trunks may be created in Configuring Mode, in which case the trunks will be created with in service status. If parameter SNL is not specified, line signaling will be assumed as pulsed E+M (PEM). The initial gain values applied to digital trunks are: transmission: -1 dB reception: +1 dB

5.

The initial gain values applied to analog junctions are: transmission: 0 dB reception: 0 dB

6. 7. 8. 9.

The valid gain values applied to digital trunks range from -6 to +1 dB. JDL board trunks do not allow you to set them gain. The valid gain values applied to analog trunks are -5, -4, -3, -2, 0, 1, 2, and 6 dB. The CIC Parameter is compulsory when using TUP and ISUP signaling. The ACS Parameter is used to indicate whether the trunk is protected or not from seizure in alternative routes. When programmed as PROTECTED (PRATT), the trunk is only seized when its route is being used as route of first choice. When programmed as NORMAL (NIL), the trunk can be seized even when its route is being used as an alternative choice.

3-518

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-TRK: Query Trunk Data

On-line Commands

IT-TRK: Query Trunk Data


This command is used to display trunk data.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-TRK [ : { TRK = xx-xx-xx | STE = xxx | SNL = xxx | CIC = xxxx| V5INT = xxx } ] ;

Parameters

TRK
Trunk number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

brd
13..20 01..20 01..19 01..05 A1 B1 D1 -

trunk board number


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir
31 512 A1 -

board circuit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-519

IT-TRK: Query Trunk Data

On-line Commands

STE
Trunk operating status: NCR not created BLK operator blocking BLF failure blocking BLE blocked by an external signal SRV in service BSY busy FAL faulty RET retained NBD no board BPM blocked by MTP pause BKD blocked for outgoing

3-520

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-TRK: Query Trunk Data

On-line Commands

SNL
Trunk line signaling: For SOF 98119, LPN109253856, LPN109232249 Control Programs, the following options are valid: CC DEC PEM CEM 5SS R2D TUP ISUP direct current decadic pulsed E+M direct E+M 5S signaling digital R2 TUP signaling ISUP signaling

For SOF 98158, LPN109253864 and LPN109256842 Control Programs, the following options are valid: R2D ISUP V52 digital R2 ISUP signaling V5.2 Signaling

For the versions of the control program SOF 98119F1, SOF 98158E1, LPN109253856.001, LPN109253864.001, LPN109232249.001 or later, they have been also included the options: Two-way one-bit Rural Supervision/ Address Signaling (Ukraine and Russia) 2-bit Supervision/Address Signaling for CAS2-bit decadic pulse address signaling (Ukraine and Russia) MFSH 2-bit Supervision/Address Signaling for CAS2-bit MF-shuttle address signaling (Ukraine and Russia) R2DUA 2-bit Supervision/Address Signaling for CAS2-bit Ukrainian and Russian R2MFC address signaling. DP1 DP2

CIC
Trunk circuit ID code number (1..4096) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

V5INT
V5 interface number (1..n) Compatibility:
n SOF 95055 SOF 97049SOF 98119 SOF 97098SGP 98092SOF 98158SOF 00092 255 16 B1 D1 B1 D1 A1 C1 A1

n LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 16 8 001 001 005 001 001 002 001 001 001

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-521

IT-TRK: Query Trunk Data

On-line Commands

Output Format

If the TRK parameter is specified the selected trunk data will be displayed in the following format:
TRK = xx-xx-xx [CIC = xxxxx ] ROUT = xxxxx [ACS = xxx] SNL = xxx NCEO = xxx GRX = xx STE = xxx GTX = xx

If the STE parameter is specified, trunks with the selected operating status will be displayed in the following format:
STE = xxx TRK = xx-xx-xx . . . xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx . . . xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx . . . xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx . . . xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx

xx-xx-xx

If the SNL parameter is specified, the trunks operating with the selected line signaling will be displayed in the following format:
SNL = xxx TRK = xx-xx-xx . . . xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx . . . xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx . . . xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx . . . xx-xx-xx xx-xx-xx

xx-xx-xx

If the CIC parameter is specified, the trunks identified by this CIC will be displayed in the following format:
TRK = xx-xx-xx [CIC = xxxxx ] ROUT = [ACS = . . . . . . [CIC = xxxxx ] ROUT = [ACS = xxxxx SNL xxx] NCEO = . . . xxxxx SNL xxx] NCEO = = xxx GRX = xx xxx STE = xxx . . . = xxx GRX = xx xxx STE = xxx GTX = xx

TRK = xx-xx-xx

GTX = xx

If no parameter is specified, the data on all trunks setup in the exchange will be displayed in the following format:
TRK = xx-xx-xx [CIC = xxxxx ] ROUT = [ACS = . . . . [CIC = xxxxx ] ROUT = [ACS = xxxxx SNL xxx] NCEO = . . xxxxx SNL xxx] NCEO = = xxx GRX = xxx STE = xxx . . = xxx GRX = xxx STE = xxx xx . . xx GTX = xx

TRK = xx-xx-xx

GTX = xx

3-522

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-TRK: Query Trunk Data

On-line Commands

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

A trunk will have not created (NCR) operating status when an existing created board exists has not yet been assigned to a route by the CR-TRK command. A trunk will have operator blocking (BLK) operating status when blocked by the MD-TRKSTE command. A trunk will have faulty (FAL) operating status when the trunk number of consecutive unsuccessful seizures (NCEO) or percentage of unsuccessful seizures exceeds the respective failure supervision threshold for the route it belongs to. The reason for considering the trunk faulty is indicated by displaying mnemonics NCEO or MPEO. A trunk will have failure blocking (BLF) operating status when having been automatically blocked by the exchange failure supervision mechanism. A trunk will have blocked by an external signal (BLE) operating status when receiving an external blocking signal. A trunk will have retained (RET) operating status when waiting for a disconnect confirmation signal in the case of trunks with pulsed E+M (PEM) and digital R2 (R2D) signaling. The GRX and GTX parameters specify the gain values applied to the trunk transmission and reception. The NCEO parameter specifies the number of unsuccessful seizures of the trunk. A trunk will have BPM operating status when its assigned signaling route is unavailable. The ACS parameter will be displayed only when the trunk is programmed for protected access.

4. 5. 6.

7. 8. 9. 10.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-523

MD-TRK: Modify Trunk Data

On-line Commands

MD-TRK: Modify Trunk Data


This command is used to change gain values applied to trunks' transmission and reception.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-TRK : TRK = xx-xx-xx&..&xx-xx-xx { [, GRX = xx ] [, GTX = xx ] | VIB = { [xxxx-]xxxx | NVIB } } ;

Parameters

TRK
Trunk number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd
13..20 01..20 01..19 01..05 A1 B1 D1 -

trunk board number


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir
31 512 A1 -

board circuit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

GRX
Gain applied to reception channel

GTX
Gain applied to transmission channel

3-524

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-TRK: Modify Trunk Data

On-line Commands

VIB
Virtual extension number in the pre-sub format: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

Remarks

1.

The initial gain values applied to digital trunks are: - transmission: -1 dB - reception: +1 dB

2.

The initial gain values applied to analog junctions are: - transmission: 0 dB - reception: 0 dB

3. 4.

The valid gain values applied to digital trunks range from -6 to +1 dB. JDL board trunks do not allow you to set them again. The valid gain values applied to analog trunks are -5, -4, -3, -2, 0, 1, 2, and 6 dB

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-525

SU-TRK: Suppress Trunk

On-line Commands

SU-TRK: Suppress Trunk


This command is used to suppress a route trunks.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
SU-TRK : TRK = xx-xx-xx, ROUT = xxxxx ;

Parameters

TRK
Trunk number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd
13..20 01..20 01..19 01..05 A1 B1 D1 -

trunk board number


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir
31 512 A1 -

board circuit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

3-526

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

SU-TRK: Suppress Trunk

On-line Commands

ROUT
Route ID: E1..En incoming routes B1..Bn two-way routes S1..Sn outgoing routes
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 32 1024 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1.

A trunk is only suppressed when in BLK (operator blocking) operating status. A suppressed trunk assumes NCR (not created ) operating status.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-527

IT-TRKCHC: Query Trunk Charging Counter

On-line Commands

IT-TRKCHC: Query Trunk Charging Counter


This command is used to display the value of two-way and incoming trunk exchange charging counters.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-TRKCHC [ : { ROUT = xxxxx | TRK = xx-xx-xx } ] ;

Parameters

ROUT
Route ID: E1..En incoming routes B1..Bn two-way routes
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 32 1024 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

TRK
Trunk number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni terminal unit number (1..n)
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 2 16 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

brd
13..20 01..20 01..19 01..05 A1 B1 D1 -

trunk board number


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir
31 A1

board circuit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

3-528

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-TRKCHC: Query Trunk Charging Counter

On-line Commands

512

001

001

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-529

IT-TRKCHC: Query Trunk Charging Counter

On-line Commands

Output Format

If parameter ROUT is specified, the charging counter values of all trunks created on the selected route will be displayed in the following format:
ROUT = xxxxx TRK = xx-xx-xx . . TRK = xx-xx-xx SCC = xxxxxx . . SCC = xxxxxx

If parameter TRK is specified, the charging counter value of the selected trunk will be displayed in the following format:
TRK = xx-xx-xx ROUT = xxxxx SCC = xxxxxx

If no parameter is specified, the charging counter values of all two-way and incoming trunks of active exchange units will be displayed in the following format:
TRK = xx-xx-xx . . . TRK = xx-xx-xx ROUT = xxxxx . . . ROUT = xxxxx SCC = xxxxxx . . . SCC = xxxxxx

3-530

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-TRKINT: Query Operational State of the Link

On-line Commands

IT-TRKINT: Query Operational State of the Link


This command is used to display the operational state of the digital trunks links of the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 F1 E1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-TRKINT : [ BOARD = xx-xx [, TRKINT = xx ] ] ;

Parameters

BOARD
Board number in the uni-pos format uni unit number (1..n)
n SOF98119 SOF98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 2 64 F1 E1 001 001 001 001 001 001

pos
5 20 F1 -

unit position number (1..n)


001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF98119 SOF98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

E1

TRKINT
Trunk number (1 n), where n can be:
n SOF98119 SOF98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 16 20 F1 E1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Output Format
If the BOARD and TRKINT parameters are specified, the operational state of the selected digital trunk board, considering the trunk specified, will be displayed in the following format:

BOARD = xx-xx TRKINT = xx TYP = xx FRM = xxxx CAS = xxx STE = xxx

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-531

IT-TRKINT: Query Operational State of the Link

On-line Commands

If the BOARD parameter is specified, only the operational state of the specified digital trunk boards will be displayed, considering all trunks, in the following format:

BOARD = xx-xx TRKINT = xx TYP = xx FRM = xxxx CAS = xxx STE = xxx . . . . . .

BOARD = xx-xx TRKINT = xx TYP = xx FRM = xxxx CAS = xxx STE = xxx
If the BOARD parameter is not specified, operational state of all digital trunk boards created in the exchange will be displayed in the following format:

BOARD = xx-xx TRKINT = xx TYP = xx FRM = xxxx CAS = xxx STE = xxx . . . . . .

BOARD = xx-xx TRKINT = xx TYP = xx FRM = xxxx CAS = xxx STE = xxx
Remarks

1. 2. 3.

If any parameter is specified, the command shows all trunks of the exchange. If the parameter TRKINT is specified, the parameter BOARD becomes mandatory. The parameter STE reports the trunk status presenting the following values: BLK operator blocking BLE blocked by an external signal SRV in service FAI in failure BSY busy NBD without pack LID Link identification in progress DBLP unblocking in progress

4.

The parameter CAS reports the bit status of the signaling channel 16: NOR Bits in standard format INV Bits in inverted format

3-532

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-TRKINT: Modify the Operational State of the Link

On-line Commands

MD-TRKINT: Modify the Operational State of the Link


This command is used to modify the service state of the digital trunks link of the exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 F1 E1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-TRKINT : BOARD = xx-xx [, TYP = xx |, STE= xxx |, FRM = xxx] [, IMME] [, TRKINT = xx ] [, CAS = xxx ] ;

Parameters

BOARD
Board number in the uni-pos format uni
2 64 F1 E1

unit number (1..n)


001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF98119 SOF98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

pos
5 20 F1 -

unit position number (1..n)


001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF98119 SOF98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

E1

TYP
Type of link: E1: European standard (used in Brazil too) T1: American standard
SOF98119 SOF98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 T1 E1 F1 E1 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001

STE
Link operating status: BLK operator blocking SRV in service

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-533

MD-TRKINT: Modify the Operational State of the Link

On-line Commands

FRM
Frame format CRC4 enable CRC4 NCRC4 enable NCRC4 SF enable super frame ESF enable extended super frame

3-534

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-TRKINT: Modify the Operational State of the Link

On-line Commands

IMME
Immediate Trunk Blocking

TRKINT
Trunk number (1 n), where n can be:
n SOF98119 SOF98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 16 20 F1 E1 001 001 001 001 001 001

CAS
Channel Signaling number 16 bit status: NOR Bits in standard format INV Bits in inverted format

Remarks

1.

The programming of the parameter FRM is ONLY applicable for BZSP systems and it has the following restrictions: a) The values ESF and SF can be defined only to TYP = T1. b) The values CRC4 and NCR4 can be defined only to TYP = E1.

2.

The parameter STE should be used only to the following cases: i- Blocking of digital trunk links related to V5.2 interface. ii- Alarm inhibition related to digital trunks. This allows the exchange has created and installed packs, but disconnected from the network, without alarming. It is valid to any signaling (R2D, SS#7, V5.2, ) iii- The command MD-TRKINT cant be used to block trunks or group trunks of a R2D, SS#7, 5SS, CEM or PEM signaling link. In this case each trunk should be blocked individually, by the command MD-TRKSTE.

3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

The Control Program versions SOF 98119F1, SOF 98158E1, LPN109253856.001 and LPN109253864.001 only accept the value TYP = E1. The parameter IMME applies only to V5 interface blocking link situations The versions of the Control Program LPN109232249 or LPN109256842, accept both values to TYP parameter: T1 and E1. When the Control Program is LPN109232249 or LPN109256842, if the parameter FRM is used the TRKINT parameter must be used too. The parameter CAS should be programmed according to the standard previously agreed between the exchanges: NOR or INV. After modify the parameter CAS, the trunk must be reseted using the command EXRESET

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-535

MD-TRKSTE: Modify Trunk Operating Status

On-line Commands

MD-TRKSTE: Modify Trunk Operating Status


This command is used for blocking or unblocking trunks, changing their operating status.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-TRKSTE : TRK = xx-xx-xx&..&xx-xx-xx, STE = xxx [, IMME ] ;

Parameters

TRK
Trunk number in the uni-brd-cir format: uni
2 16 64 A1 -

terminal unit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

brd
13..20 01..20 01..19 01..05 A1 B1 D1 -

trunk board number


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834

cir
31 512 A1 -

board circuit number (1..n)


A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

STE
Trunk operating status: BLK operator blocking SRV in service BKD outgoing blocked

IMME
Trunk immediate blocking options

3-536

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-TRKSTE: Modify Trunk Operating Status

On-line Commands

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

Operator blocking (BLK) a trunk applied to trunks with in service operating status (SRV), failure blocking (BLF) and no board (NBD). Unblocking or placing a trunk in service (SRV) operating status applies to trunks in operator blocking (BLK) operating status. If the IMME parameter is not specified the exchange waits for the current call to end and only blocks the trunk when it is idle. At the moment the block comes into effect, the exchange dispatches a trunk blocking confirmation message to the CSR. If the IMME parameter is specified, the exchange immediately blocks the trunk interrupting the current call.

4.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-537

CR-UNIT: Create Exchange Unit

On-line Commands

CR-UNIT: Create Exchange Unit


This command is used to create an exchange unit.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
CR-UNIT : UNI = x, TYPUNI = xxx, [ RED ] ;

Parameters

UNI
unit number (1..n):
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 2 16 76 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

TYPUNI
Type of exchange unit:
TYP SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 TBU SWU SBU TRU SPU A1 E4 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

RED
It enables the redundancy facilities.
SOF 95055 SOF 97049 SOF 98119 SOF 97098 SGP 98092SOF 98158SOF 00092 -

LPN109253856 LPN109253864 LPN109232249 LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 001 001

3-538

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-UNIT: Create Exchange Unit

On-line Commands

Remarks

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Only units created by command CR-UNIT can enter operation. Boards (and, consequently, assemblies) can only be created in units previously created by command CR-UNIT. Only the units 1 to 64 can be defined as terminal basic units (TYPUNI = TBU). Only the units 65 to 68 can be defined as switching basic units (TYPUNI = SWU). Only exchanges equipped with LPN109232249 and LPN109256842 use TYPUNI=SPU.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-539

DS-UNIT: Deactivate Exchange Unit

On-line Commands

DS-UNIT: Deactivate Exchange Unit


This command is used to deactivate a exchange unit, interrupting all the call processing operations and blocking the access to this unit.
Input Format
DS-UNIT : UNI= xx ;

Parameter

UNI
switching unit number (n):
uni (65..76) (1..68) (1..2) SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 G1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001 -

3-540

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-UNIT: Query Exchange Installed Units n

On-line Commands

IT-UNIT: Query Exchange Installed Units n


This command is used to display the boards fitted in the exchange units.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-UNIT [ : UNI = xx] ;

Parameter

UNI
unit number (1..n):
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 2 16 76 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Output Format

If the UNI parameter is specified, the master system unit, the master interface unit, the selected type of unit, the model of CPU board (specifying the version of Setup program and RAM memory), models of ITC, UMM, network (1 and/or 2) boards and the Boot program version will be displayed as follows:
MSTSIS = xx UNI = xx CPU ITC UMM LAN1 LAN2 BOOT MSTINT = xx TYPUNI = xxx MOD = xxxxx MOD = xxxxxxxxx MOD = xxxxxxxxx MOD = xxxxxxxxx MOD = xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx SETUP = xxxxxxxxxx MEM = xxxxx

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-541

IT-UNIT: Query Exchange Installed Units n

On-line Commands

If the UNI parameter is not specified, the master system unit, the master interface unit and all units created in the exchange, with the respective types, CPU board models (specifying the version of Setup program and RAM memory), models of ITC, UMM and network boards and Boot program version will be displayed as follows:
MSTSIS = xx UNI = xx CPU ITC UMM LAN1 LAN2 BOOT . . UNI = xx CPU ITC UMM LAN1 LAN2 BOOT MSTINT = xx TYPUNI = xxx MOD = xxxxx MOD = xxxxxxxxx MOD = xxxxxxxxx MOD = xxxxxxxxx MOD = xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx . . TYPUNI = xxx MOD = xxxxx MOD = xxxxxxxxx MOD = xxxxxxxxx MOD = xxxxxxxxx MOD = xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx SETUP = xxxxxxxxxx MEM = xxxxx

SETUP = xxxxxxxxxx

MEM = xxxxx

Output Format for exchanges with LPN109232249 and LPN109256842

If the UNI parameter is specified, the following items will be displayed: system master unit, interface master unit, selected unit type, RAM memory and CPU board code, ITC board model and BOOT program version:
UNI = xx TYPUNI = SPU MSTSIS = xx MSTINT = xx CPU (board code = xxxx) MEM = xx ITC MOD = xxxxx BOOT xxxxxxxxxx MSTBIL = xx

3-542

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-UNIT: Query Exchange Installed Units n

On-line Commands

If the UNI parameter is not specified, the following items will be displayed: system master unit, interface master unit, all the created units of the exchange with its respective types, such as RAM memory and CPU board code, ITC board model and BOOT program version, for each unit:
UNI = xx TYPUNI = SPU MSTSIS = xx MSTINT = xx CPU (board code = xxxx) MEM = xx ITC MOD = xxxxx BOOT xxxxxxxxxx . . . . . . . . . TYPUNI = SPU MSTSIS = xx MSTINT = xx CPU (board code = xxxx) MEM = xx ITC MOD = xxxxx BOOT xxxxxxxxxx MSTBIL = xx

. . . MSTBIL = xx

UNI = xx

Output Format for exchanges with LPN 109256826.001 and LPN 109256834.001.
If the UNI parameter is specified will be displayed for unit: The RED mnemonic indicates that the redundancy functionality is configured in the exchange, the type unit selected, the physical position of CPU in unit, state of CPU ( Primary or Secondary ), the master system unit, the master interface unit, the CPU board model and RAM memory, models of the boards ITC, UMM, network and the Boot program version.
UNI = XX RED UNITYP = XXX CPU 1 XXXXXXXXXX MSTSIS = XX CPU XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX MEM = XXXXX ITC MOD = XXXXXXXXX UMM MOD = XXXXXXXXX LAN1 MOD = XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX LAN2 MOD = XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX BOOT XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX CPU 2 XXXXXXXXXX MSTSIS = XX MSTINT = XX CPU XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX MEM = XXXXX ITC MOD = XXXXXXXXX UMM MOD = XXXXXXXXX LAN1 MOD = XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX LAN2 MOD = XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX BOOT XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

If the UNI parameter is not specified will be displayed for each unit: The RED mnemonic indicates that the redundancy functionality is configured in the exchange, the type unit selected, the physical position of CPU in unit, state of CPU ( Primary or Secondary ), the master system unit, the master interface unit, the CPU board model and RAM memory, models of the boards ITC, UMM, network and the Boot program version.
UNI = XX RED UNITYP = XXX CPU 1 XXXXXXXXXX MSTSIS = XX CPU XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX MEM = XXXXX ITC MOD = XXXXXXXXX UMM MOD = XXXXXXXXX LAN1 MOD = XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX LAN2 MOD = XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX BOOT XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX CPU 2 XXXXXXXXXX MSTSIS = XX MSTINT = XX CPU XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX MEM = XXXXX ITC MOD = XXXXXXXXX

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-543

IT-UNIT: Query Exchange Installed Units n

On-line Commands

UNI = XX

MOD = XXXXXXXXX MOD = XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX MOD = XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX . . . . RED UNITYP = XXX CPU 1 XXXXXXXXXX MSTSIS = XX CPU XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX MEM = XXXXX ITC MOD = XXXXXXXXX UMM MOD = XXXXXXXXX LAN1 MOD = XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX LAN2 MOD = XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX BOOT XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX CPU 2 XXXXXXXXXX MSTSIS = XX MSTINT = XX CPU XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX MEM = XXXXX ITC MOD = XXXXXXXXX UMM MOD = XXXXXXXXX LAN1 MOD = XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX LAN2 MOD = XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX BOOT XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

UMM LAN1 LAN2 BOOT

Remarks

1. If the selected unit is a SWU (basic switching unit) type, fields UMM and BOOT will not be displayed in the output format;

3-544

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

SU-UNIT: Suppress Unit

On-line Commands

SU-UNIT: Suppress Unit


This command is used to suppress an exchange unit.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
SU-UNIT : UNI = xx ;

Parameter

UNI
unit number (1..n):
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 2 16 76 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1. 2.

A unit can only be suppressed when it has created no units. The exchange maintenance unit (unit 1) cannot be suppressed.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-545

CR-V5INT: Create V5 Interface

On-line Commands

CR-V5INT: Create V5 Interface


This command is used to create a V5 interface.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
CR-V5INT : INT = xxx , V5ID = xxxx [,PS = xx ] [, VAR = xxx ] [, OPP = xxxxx ];

Parameters

INT
V5 interface number (1..n) Compatibility:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 255 16 B1 D1 A1 C1 001 001 001 001 001 001

V5ID
V5 interface ID (0..1677721)

PS
Peripheral Stage number (1..64) or (1..16) for the control software SOF98119, LPN109253856 and LPN109232249.

VAR
V5 interface variant ID (1..255)

OPP
Operating parameter: APA accelerated port alignment IDE1 digital trunk ID NOPP no operating parameter PINVSTD inversion pulse Steady Signal.

Remarks

1. 2.

Parameters INT, V5ID, VAR and OPP should be programmed for the same values at both sides of the interface. This command is valid for SOF 98158A1, LPN109253864.001 and LPN109256842.001 versions or higher (PS side) and SOF 98119B1, LPN109253856.001, LPN109232249.001, LPN109256842.001 versions or higher (CS side).

3-546

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-V5INT: Query V5 Interface

On-line Commands

IT-V5INT: Query V5 Interface


This command is used to query V5 interfaces created in exchanges using V5.1 or V5.2 interfaces.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-V5INT: [, INT = xxx ] ;

Parameter

INT
V5 interface number (1..n) Compatibility:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 255 16 B1 D1 A1 C1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Output Format

If parameter INT was not specified, all V5 interface operating parameters are displayed in the following format:
INT = xxx PS = xx V5ID = xxxx VAR = xxx STA = xxx OPS = xxx OPP = xxx

. .
INT = xxx

. .
PS = xx

. .
V5ID = xxxx

. .
VAR = xxx

. .
STA = xxx

. .
OPS = xxx

. .
OPP = xxx

If parameter INT was specified, only operating parameters of the corresponding V5 interface are displayed.
Remarks

1.

This command is valid for SOF 98158A1, LPN109253864.001 and LPN109256842.001 versions or higher (PS side) and SOF 98119B1, LPN109253856.001, LPN109232249.001, LPN109256842.001 versions or higher (CS side).

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-547

MD-V5INT: Modify V5 Interface

On-line Commands

MD-V5INT: Modify V5 Interface


This command is used to modify interface operating parameters, operating status, and variant ID of a V5 interface.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-V5INT : INT = xxx [, VAR = xxx ] [, OPP = xxxxx ] [, STA = xxx ] ;

Parameters

INT
V5 interface number (1..n) Compatibility:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 255 16 B1 D1 A1 C1 001 001 001 001 001 001

VAR
V5 interface variant ID (1..255)

OPP
Operating parameter: APA IDE1 NOPP PINVSTD accelerated port alignment digital trunk ID no operating parameter inversion pulse Steady Signal.

STA
Signaling link set operating status: ATV ITV Active Inactive

Remarks

1.

Parameters INT, VAR and OPP should be programmed for the same values at both sides of the interface.

3-548

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-V5INT: Modify V5 Interface

On-line Commands

2.

This command is valid for SOF 98158A1, LPN109253864.001 and LPN109256842.001 versions or higher (PS side) and SOF 98119B1, LPN109253856.001, LPN109232249.001, LPN109256842.001 versions or higher (CS side).

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-549

SU-V5INT: Suppress V5 Interface

On-line Commands

SU-V5INT: Suppress V5 Interface


This command is used to suppress a V5 interface.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
SU-V5INT : INT = xxx ;

Parameter

INT
V5 interface number (1..n) Compatibility:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 255 16 B1 D1 A1 C1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1.

This command is valid for SOF 98158A1, LPN109253864.001 and LPN109256842.001 versions or higher (PS side) and SOF 98119B1, LPN109253856.001, LPN109232249.001, LPN109256842.001 versions or higher (CS side).

3-550

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-V5LNK: Create V5 Signaling Link

On-line Commands

CR-V5LNK: Create V5 Signaling Link


This command is used to assign a primary or secondary V5 signaling link to the signaling terminal of the respective MAP board.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
CR-V5LNK : LNK = xx, INT= xx, SNLT = xx-xx-xxx, PRO = { PRM | SEC | PRMRDSI | RDSI }, SLC = xx ;

Parameters

LNK
Link Number (01..n):
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 16 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

INT
V5 interface number (1..n) Compatibility:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 255 16 B1 D1 A1 C1 001 001 001 001 001 001

SNLT
V5 signaling terminal number, on the uni-brd-cir format: uni terminal unit number (1..n):

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 2 16 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-551

CR-V5LNK: Create V5 Signaling Link

On-line Commands

brd
5 15 A1

terminal board number (1..n) (consider only odd positions, in case of BZ5000 exchanges):
A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834

cir

signaling circuit number, mandatory circuit 16, in case of BZ5000 (SOF 98119, SOF 98158, LPN109253856 or LPN109253864).

3-552

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-V5LNK: Create V5 Signaling Link

On-line Commands

For BZSP systems with LPN109232249 or LPN109256842 Control Programs, the CIR mnemonic shall be configured on the following format:
Trunk cir 1 16 2 48 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

80 112 144 176 208 240 272 304 336 368 400 432 464 496

PRO
Signaling protocol Primary - includes Control, Link Control, BCC, Primary Protection and PSTN protocols; Secondary - includes the Secondary Protection Protocol. ISDN Primary it includes the control, link control, BCC, protection group I, PSTN and ISDN protocols. ISDN: it includes the ISDN protocol, not included on protection group I, in other words, not protected. PRMISDN and ISDN are valid for exchanges with LPN109253856.003, LPN109253864.003, LPN109232249.002, LPN109256842.002 or higher. PRM: SEC: PRMISDN :

SLC
Signaling link ID number in a V5 interface link set.

Remarks

1.

For BZ5000 exchanges, the primary, secondary, ISDN primary and ISDN secondary signaling links should be created on separate MAP boards, always associated to their circuit 16. BZSP exchanges, equipped with the LPN109232249 or LPN109256842 Control Program, provide 05 positions of MXTS boards per unit. Each board provides 16 configurable E1/T1. For BZSP exchanges, the signaling circuits shall be configured on the following way:
1 16 2 48 3 80 4 112 5 144 6 176 7 208 8 240 9 272 10 304 11 336 12 368 13 400 14 432 15 464 16 496

2.

3.
Trunk Circuit

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-553

IT-V5LNK: Query V5 Signaling Link

On-line Commands

IT-V5LNK: Query V5 Signaling Link


This command is used to query V5.1 or V5.2 interface signaling links.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-V5LNK [ : LNK = xx | INT = xx ] ;

Parameters

LNK
Link Number (01..n):
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 16 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

INT
V5 interface number (1..n) Compatibility:
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 255 16 B1 D1 A1 C1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Output Format

If no parameter was specified, all created V5 interface links are displayed in the following format:
LNK = Xx . . LNK = xx INT = Xxx . . INT = xxx SNLT = Xx-Xx-Xx SLC = Xx . . . . SNLT = xx-xx-xx SLC = xx PRO = Xxx . . PRO = xxx STA = Xxx . . STA = xxx Eop = Xxxx OPS = xxxx

If parameter LNK was specified, the corresponding V5 signaling links of each created V5 interface are displayed. The output format is as shown above. If parameter INT was specified, only the signaling link of the corresponding V5 interface are displayed. The output format is as shown above.

3-554

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-V5LNK: Query V5 Signaling Link

On-line Commands

Remarks

1.

This command is valid for SOF 98158A1, LPN109253864.001 and LPN109256842.001 versions or higher (PS side) and SOF 98119B1, LPN109253856.001, LPN109232249.001, LPN109256842.001 versions or higher (CS side). The Operating Status parameter (OPS), indicates the status of the V5 signaling link at the time of running command IT-V5LNK; OPS may assume the following states:
ITV ATV IATV FAI UNII STB inactive active under activation failed inactive unit Standby

2.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-555

MD-V5LNK: Modify V5 Signaling Link

On-line Commands

MD-V5LNK: Modify V5 Signaling Link


This command is used to modify the operating status of a V5 link.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-V5LNK : LNK = xx, STA = xxx ;

Parameters

LNK
Link Number (01..n):
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 16 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

STA
Signaling link set operating status: ATV Active ITV Inactive

Remarks

1.

This command is valid for SOF 98158A1, LPN109253864.001 and LPN109256842.001 versions or higher (PS side) and SOF 98119B1, LPN109253856.001, LPN109232249.001, LPN109256842.001 versions or higher (CS side).

3-556

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

SU-V5LNK: Suppress V5 Signaling Link

On-line Commands

SU-V5LNK: Suppress V5 Signaling Link


This command is used to suppress a V5 signaling link.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
SU-V5LNK : LNK = xx ;

Parameter

LNK
Link Number (01..n):
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 16 64 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1.

A signaling link can only be suppressed if its STA (Activity Status) parameter is ITV (inactive).

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-557

IT-VER: Query Version of CSR and Switching Unit Control Programs

On-line Commands

IT-VER: Query Version of CSR and Switching Unit Control Programs


This command is used to display the versions of sgp, csr, dll, communication language and control programs of the exchange units.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-VER [ : UNI = xx ] ;

Parameter

UNI
unit number (1..n):
n SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 2 16 76 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Output Format

If parameter UNI was specified, the version of CSR, DLL, Communication Language (LIN) and Control Program of the selected unit are listed in the following format:
SCS96007XX CSR xxxxxxxxxx DLL xxxxxxxxxx Customer: Location: Remarks: Date: xx-xx-xx Enabled Functionality: xxx..xxx..xxx..xxx..xxx . . xxx..xxx..xxx..xxx..xxx UNI = xx

3-558

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-VER: Query Version of CSR and Switching Unit Control Programs

On-line Commands

If parameter UNI was not specified, the version of SGP, CSR, DLL, Communication Language (LIN) and Control Program of the exchange active units are listed in the following format:
SCS96007XX CSR xxxxxxxxxx DLL xxxxxxxxxx Customer: Location: Remarks: Date: xx-xx-xx Enabled Functionality: xxx..xxx..xxx..xxx..xxx . . xxx..xxx..xxx..xxx..xxx UNI = xx SGP98092XX . . UNI = xx SGP98092XX

Remarks

1. 2.

If no exchange is connected, the versions of SOF, CSR, DLL are displayed. When the unit has the QNX software installed (unit 65 to 68), its version is showed after the version of the Control Program.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-559

CR-VIB: Create Virtual Extension

On-line Commands

CR-VIB: Create Virtual Extension


This command is used to create a Virtual Extension in a Virtual PABX Group.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
CR-VIB : { VIB = [xxxx-]xxxx&..&xxxx [, CVB = xxx ] | VBE = xxxx , SEQ = xx..xx}, VPG =xx ;

Parameters

VIB
Virtual extension number in the pre-sub format: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

CVB
Virtual extension class RTT fully restricted NRT unrestricted SRT semi-restricted NRR unrestricted for originating and restricted for forwarding calls

VBE
Number assigned to wide area virtual extension (xxxx)

SEQ
Digit sequence for accessing wide area virtual extension (up to 18 digits)

VPG
Virtual PABX Group number (1..64)

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

A virtual extension may be an internal exchange subscriber (VIB - Internal Virtual Extension) or another exchange subscriber (VBE - wide area Virtual Extension) The internal virtual extensions of a Virtual PABX Group should have the same prefix. Command CR-VIB (Create Virtual Extension) allows creating a list of virtual extension, i.e., more than a single VIB can be created at the same time, provided the characteristics are the same. A virtual extension classified as RTT can only originate intra-group calls and receive intragroup calls within the switch.
Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page 109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

4.

3-560

CR-VIB: Create Virtual Extension

On-line Commands

5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

A virtual extension classified as SRT can only originate intra-group calls but it can receive calls from inside and outside the group. A virtual extension classified as NRT can originate and receive calls from inside and/or outside the group, including forwarding calls to subscribers outside the group. A virtual extension classified as NRR can originate and receive calls from inside and/or outside the group, but can only forward calls to internal extensions of the group. Extensions created with no classification will be considered unrestricted (NRT). The identification scheme (parameters QDI and PDG) is the same both for internal and/or external exchange extensions. Parameter SEQ associated to a wide area virtual extension should not include digit "0" indicating a call from outside the PABX.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-561

IT-VIB: Query Virtual Extension

On-line Commands

IT-VIB: Query Virtual Extension


This command is used to query virtual extensions of a Virtual PABX Group.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-VIB : [ VIB = xxx&..&xxx | VPG= xx ];

Parameters

VIB
Virtual extension number in the pre-sub format: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

VPG
Virtual PABX Group number (1..64)

Output Format
VIB . . . VIB VBE . . . VBE = xxxx-xxxx VPG = xx CVB = . . . = xxxx-xxxx VPG = xx CVB = = xxxx VPG = xx SEQ = xx..xx . . . = xxxx VPG = xx SEQ = xx..xx xxxx . . . xxxx

If parameter VPG was specified, the internal and wide area virtual extensions of the corresponding virtual group PABX will be displayed.

3-562

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-VIB: Modify Virtual Extension

On-line Commands

MD-VIB: Modify Virtual Extension


This command is used to modify the restriction class of a virtual extension.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-VIB : VIB = [xxxx-]xxxx&..&xxxx , CVB = xxx ;

Parameters

VIB
Virtual extension number in the pre-sub format: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

CVB
Virtual extension class RTT fully restricted NRT unrestricted SRT semi-restricted NRR unrestricted for originating and restricted for forwarding calls

Remarks

1. 2. 3.

Only internal virtual extension are classified; Virtual extensions within a Virtual PABX Group should use the same prefix; Command MD-VIB (Modify Virtual Extension) allows altering the list of virtual extensions, i.e., parameter CVB (Virtual Extension Class) can be changed simultaneously for more than a single VIB, provided for the same value is kept; A virtual extension classified as RTT can only originate intra-group calls and receive intragroup calls; A virtual extension classified as SRT can only originate intra-group calls but it can receive calls from inside and outside the group; A virtual extension classified as NRT can originate and receive calls from inside and/or outside the group, including forwarding calls to subscribers outside the group. A virtual extension classified as NRR can originate and receive calls from inside and/or outside the group but can only forward calls to internal extensions of the group.

4. 5. 6. 7.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-563

SU-VIB: Suppress Virtual Extension

On-line Commands

SU-VIB: Suppress Virtual Extension


This command is used to suppress a virtual extension of a Virtual PABX Group.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
SU-VIB : { VIB = [xxxx-]xxxx&..&xxxx | VBE = xxxx }, VPG = xx ;

Parameters

VIB
Virtual extension number in the pre-sub format: pre exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) sub THTU digits (0000..9999)

VBE
Number assigned to wide area virtual extension (xxxx)

VPG
Virtual PABX Group number (1..64)

3-564

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-VPG: Create Virtual PABX Group

On-line Commands

CR-VPG: Create Virtual PABX Group


This command is used to create a Virtual PABX extension group. Up to 64 Virtual PABX groups can be created, with an unlimited number of extensions per group.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
CR-VPG: VPG = xx, NAM = "xxxxxxxx" [, QDI = x ] [, PDG = x ] ;

Parameters

VPG
Virtual PABX Group number (1..64)

NAM
PABX group ID (up to 8 alphanumeric characters in apostrophes))

QDI
Quantity of numbers used to identify the virtual extension (2..4) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

PDG
Pre-digit used for DEBS extension identification (1.. 8) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1. 2.

If the QDI parameter is not specified, the THTU digits will be used to identify the extension (QDI = 4); If the QDI parameter is specified the exchange will be identified as follows: QDI = 4 THTU QDI = 3 HTU QDI = 2 TU

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-565

CR-VPG: Create Virtual PABX Group

On-line Commands

3.

The pre-digit must be defined if extensions beginning with 0 (zero) are to be identified. Example: Extensions : 7000 ... 7099, where QDI = 2.

3-566

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

IT-VPG: Query Virtual PABX Group

On-line Commands

IT-VPG: Query Virtual PABX Group


This command is used to query Virtual PABX groups programmed in a BZ5000 exchange.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-VPG [: VPG = xx ];

Parameter

VPG
Virtual PABX Group number (1..64)

Output Format
VPG = xx NAM = xxxxxxxx CHCL = OPP = xxxxxxxx VIB = xxxx - xxxx . . . VBE = xxxx - xxxx . . . xx QDI = ANS = xxxx CVB = . . . CVB = . . . x xxxx xxx PDG = x ROU = xxx ATN = xxxx - xxxx

xxx

. . . VPG = xx

NAM = xxxxxxxx CHCL = OPP = xxxxxxxx VIB = xxxx - xxxx . . . VBE = xxxx - xxxx . . .

xx QDI = ANS = xxxx CVB = . . . CVB = . . .

x xxxx xxx

PDG = x ROU = xxx ATN = xxxx - xxxx

xxx

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-567

MD-VPG: Modify Virtual PABX Group Data

On-line Commands

MD-VPG: Modify Virtual PABX Group Data


This command is used to change operating parameters of a Virtual PABX Group (VPG).
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-VPG : VPG = xx { [, QDI = x ] [, PDG = x ] [, CHCL = xx [, CHE = x ] [, CHP = x ] ] [, ROU = xxx&..&xxx | NROU ] [, ANS = [xxxx-]xxxx | NDAT ] [, ATN = [xxxx-]xxxx | NNAT ] }

Parameters

VPG
Virtual PABX Group number (1..64)

QDI
Quantity of numbers used to identify the virtual extension (2..4) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

PDG
Pre-digit used to identify a virtual extension (1..8, WPDG) Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

CHCL
Charging class (1..32)

CHE
Charging Environment(1..8) .

CHP
Charging Plan (1..8)

3-568

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-VPG: Modify Virtual PABX Group Data

On-line Commands

ROU
Rerouting calls forwarded to an extension under NR; VCL; RTT conditions to the Virtual PABX Group answering extension or operator position: BSY NR VCL RTT NROU busy unanswered idle level incoming call restriction no call rerouting

ANS
Number of the Virtual Extension programmed as Day Answering facility, in the pre-sub format: pre sub Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) THTU digits (0000..9999)

ATN
Number of the Virtual Extension programmed as Night Answering facility, in the pre-sub format: pre sub Compatibility:
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

exchange prefix (3 or 4 digits) THTU digits (0000..9999)

Remarks

1.

If parameter QDI is specified the VPG extensions will be identified by digits:


QDI = 4 QDI = 3 QDI = 2 THTU (thousands, hundreds, tens, units) HTU (hundreds, tens, units) TU (tens, units)

2. 3. 4.

The pre-digit must be defined if extensions beginning with 0 (zero) are to be identified. Example: Extensions: 7000 ... 7099, where QDI = 2 The lack of pre-digit definition will be assumed as no pre-digit (WPDG). A Virtual PABX Group is created by the CHCL = NCH parameter (non billed). This parameter establishes the charging class of intra-group communication between extensions of the same exchange. The charging of intra-group communications of extensions of different exchanges (wide area) and extra-group communications is as set by the exchange normal charging plan and should be defined in the routing plan. Wide area virtual extensions cannot be defined as Day and/or Night Answering facilities. The same extension can be used as Day and/ Night Answering facility. If the CHP parameter is not specified, the charging plan change will be applied to the table of the first charging environment (CHP = 1).

5. 6. 7.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-569

MD-VPG: Modify Virtual PABX Group Data

On-line Commands

8. 9.

If the CHE parameter is not specified, the charging environment alteration will be applied to the table of the first charging environment (CHE = 1). If the ROU parameter is not specified, all calls directed to a Virtual PABX Group extension that presents one of the above conditions will not be rerouted to the answering facility.

3-570

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

SU-VPG: Suppress Virtual PABX Group

On-line Commands

SU-VPG: Suppress Virtual PABX Group


This command is used to suppress a Virtual PABX Group.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
SU-VPG: VPG = xxx

Parameter

VPG
Virtual PABX Group number (1..64)

Remarks

1.

A Virtual PABX Group can only be suppressed when no extensions are assigned to it.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-571

CR-WAN: Create configuration for external access to the billing unit.

On-line Commands

CR-WAN: Create configuration for external access to the billing unit.


This command is used to create the configuration for external access to the billing unit.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
CR-WAN : WAN = xx, TYP = xx, UNI = xx, NAM = "xxxxxxxx", WANIP = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, MIPWAN = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, GATEIP = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx;

Parameter

WAN Number of the external interface to be created. One for billing unit.
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

TYP Type of protocol to be used. For the billing units, it will be always IP.
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

UNI Number of billing unit.


SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

3-572

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

CR-WAN: Create configuration for external access to the billing unit.

On-line Commands

NAM Name of the WAN to be defined by the client. Maximum of eight characters.
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

WANIP It must have the same class of addressing IP of the corporative net (Ethernet).

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

IPMWAM Same mask of the corporative net (Ethernet).


SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

GATEIP For the billing unit it must the same be that WANIP.
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Remarks

1. 2.

the address of net WANIP and the address of the net Ethernet must belong the same subnet. the address of the mask of net MIPWAN must the same be of the net mask Ethernet.

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-573

IT-WAN: Query configuration for external access to the billing unit

On-line Commands

IT-WAN: Query configuration for external access to the billing unit


This command is used to query the configuration for external access to the billing unit.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
IT-WAN : [ WAN = xx, ]

Parameter

WAN Number of the external interface to be created. One for billing unit.
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Output Format
IT-WAN : WAN = xx, TYP = xx, UNI = xx, NAM = "xxxxxxxx", WANIP = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, MIPWAN = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, GATEIP = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx;

Remarks

TIP Type of protocol to be used. For the billing units, it will be always IP. UNI Number of billing unit. NOM Name of the WAN to be defined by the client. Maximum of eight characters. WANIP GATEIP It must have the same class of addressing IP of the corporative net (Ethernet). For the billing unit it must the same be that WANIP. MIPWAN Same mask of the corporative net (Ethernet).

3-574

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

MD-WAN: Modify configuration for external access to the billing unit

On-line Commands

MD-WAN: Modify configuration for external access to the billing unit


This command is used to modify the configuration for external access to the billing unit.
Compatibility
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Input Format
MD-WAN : WAN = xx,{[ TYP = xx,] [ UNI = xx,] [ NAM = "xxxxxxxx",] [ WANIP = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx,] [ MIPWAN = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx,] [ GATEIP = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx]};

Parameter

WAN Number of the external interface to be created. One for billing unit.
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

TYP Type of protocol to be used. For the billing units, it will be always IP.
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

UNI Number of billing unit.


SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856 LPN109253864LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826 LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

109250571 Issue 009, May/2004

Lucent Technologies Proprietary See notice on first page

3-575

MD-WAN: Modify configuration for external access to the billing unit

On-line Commands

NAM Name of the WAN to be defined by the client. Maximum of eight characters.
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

WANIP It must have the same class of addressing IP of the corporative net (Ethernet).

SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

IPMWAM Same mask of the corporative net (Ethernet).


SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

GATEIP For the billing unit it must the same be that WANIP.
SOF 98119 SOF 98158 LPN109253856LPN109253864 LPN109232249LPN109256842LPN109256826LPN109256834 A1 A1 001 001 001 001 001 001

Remarks